IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 S la iio 
 
 1.8 
 
 U il.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. M580 
 
 (716) 872-4.'S03 
 
 ''/. 
 
 /. 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 :/. 
 
 m. 
 
 u. 
 
 ^\^ 
 
 iV 
 
 >c^ 
 
 ^x 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 1, 
 
 V 
 
 <i 
 
 ^ 
 
o 
 
 Wm 
 
 ''/. 
 
 ^ 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter a^y of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 D 
 
 □ 
 □ 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endomrnagde 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurde et/ lU pelliculde 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes gdographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relid avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 Lareliure serr6e peut causer de I'ombie ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intdrieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the t?xt. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes 
 tors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas dt4 filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl^mentaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage 
 sont indiqu^s ci-dessou.^. 
 
 □ Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 □ 
 
 v/ 
 
 D 
 
 (/ 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagdes 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurdes et/ou pelliculdes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d6color6es, tachetdes ou piqudes 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tach^es 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 Quality in6gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel suppldmentaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6x& film^es & nouveau de fapon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 The copy 1 
 to the gen 
 
 The image 
 possible c 
 of the ori{ 
 filming co 
 
 Original c( 
 beginning 
 the last pi 
 sion, or th 
 other orig 
 first page 
 sion, and 
 or illustrat 
 
 The last r« 
 shall cont 
 TINUED") 
 whichevei 
 
 Maps, pla 
 different r 
 entirety in 
 beginning 
 right and 
 required. ' 
 method: 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film^ au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 
 SOX 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 Library of the Public 
 Archives of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grSce d la 
 g6n6rosit6 de: 
 
 La bibliothdque des Archives 
 publiques du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettex^ de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprim6o sont film6s en commenpant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmds en commen9ant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol ^^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED "), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — »• signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour ^tre 
 reproduit en un seul c!i<:hd, il jst filmd d partir 
 de Tangle supdrieur gaucr.i., de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'imagas nicessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 32X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 

 ii^®ai©M*^ 2r®w®w^i»< 
 
 I 
 
 .i^ 
 
« 
 
 
?■»•', 
 
 '^: 
 
M, ^'''i 
 
 I .1 
 
 I -■ 
 
 v; ' ■ I v^ 1 
 
 ''rr 
 
 4 
 
JOURNAL 
 
 or 
 
 VOYAGES AND TRAVELS 
 
 IN THE 
 
 INTERIOUR OF NORTH AMERICA, 
 
 WETVVERN THE 47tH AND 58tFI DEGREES OF NORTn LATITUDE, EXTEND- 
 ING FROM MONTREAL NEARLY TO THE PACIFIC OCEAN, A DISTANCE 
 OF ABOUT 5,000 RULES, INCLUDING AN ACCOUNT OF THE PRIN- 
 CIPAL OCCURRENCES, DURING A RESIDENCE OF NINETEEN 
 YEARS, IN DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE COUNTRY. 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 
 
 A CONCISE DESCRIPTION OF THE FACE OF THE COUNTRY, ITS INHABITANTS, 
 THEIR MANNERS, CUSTOMS, LAWS, RELIGION, ETC. AND CONSIDERA- 
 BLE SPECIMENS OF THE TWO LANGUAGES, MOST EXTENSIVELY 
 SPOKEN ; TOGETHER WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THE PRINCI- 
 PAL A.NIMALS, TO BE FOUND IN THE FORESTS AND 
 PRAIRIES OF THIS EXTENSIVE REGION. 
 
 ILLUSTRATED BY A MAP OF THE COUNTRY. 
 
 BY DANIEL WILLIAMS HARMON. 
 
 A I'ARTAEU IN THE MORTII WEST COMPANY. 
 
 ANDOVKR : 
 
 •RlM'El) UY FLAGG AND^GOULD. 
 
 1820. 
 
 M 
 
 4 
 
b 1 
 
 
 
 DISTRICT OF VERMONT, to wit : 
 
 Bb it remembered, that on the second day of August, in the forty fifth 
 year of the independence of the United States of America, Calvin Harmon 
 of the said district, hath deposited in this office the title of a book, the rignt 
 whereof he claims as proprietor, in the words following, to wit ; — A Journal 
 of Voyages and Travels in the interiour of North America, between the 47th 
 and 58th degrees of north latitude, extending from Montreal nearly to the 
 Pacific Ocean, a distance of about five thousand miles, including an account 
 of the principal occurrences, during a residence of nineteen years, in differ- 
 ent parts of the country. To which are added, a concise description of the 
 face of the country, its inhabitants, their manners, customs, laws, religion, 
 &c. and considerable specimens of the two ia'nguages, most extensively 
 spoken ; together with an account of the principal animals, to be found in 
 the forests and prairies of this extensive region. Illustrated by a Map of 
 the country. By Daniel Williams Harmon, a partner in the north-west 
 company. — In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
 entitled, "An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies 
 of maps, charts, and books, to the aulhours and proprietors of such copies, 
 during the times therein mentioned." 
 
 JESSE GOVE, 5 P'!;^"//'''^'*; 
 ' I trict of yermonl. 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 i 
 
 BY THE EDITOR. 
 
 Having prepared the following work for the 
 
 press, I have a few things to say respecting it, 
 and the part in regard to it, which I have per- 
 formed. 
 
 The authour of these Voyages and Travels, 
 had no thought, while in the N. W, Country, of 
 making publick his Journal. It was commenced 
 and continued, partly for his own amusement, and 
 partly to gratify his friends, who, he thought, 
 would be pleased to be informed, with some par- 
 ticularity, on his return, how his time had been 
 employed, during his absence. When he return- 
 ed to civilized society, he found that curiosity was 
 awake, in regard to the state of the country which 
 
w 
 
 VI 
 
 PIIEFACE. 
 
 lie had visited ; and the repeated questions, relat- 
 ing to this subject, which he was called upon to 
 answer, together with the suggestions of some 
 persons, in whose judgment he placed much confi- 
 dence, that sucii a publication might be useful, 
 first determined him to commit the following work 
 to the press. 
 
 Had he carried into the wilderness a greater 
 stock of general information, and expected, on his 
 retu'*n, to appear in this manner before the publick, 
 his inquiries would undoubtedly have been more 
 extensive, and the result of them Avould be more 
 satisfactory, to men of science. Had literary 
 men been in the habit of traversing the regions 
 which he has visited, he would have left it to 
 them, to give an account of them to the publick. 
 Havirrg remained nineteen years in the interiour of 
 North America, without visiting, during that time, 
 the civilized part of the world, and having, many 
 times, changed the place of his residence, while 
 there, he has had an opportunity for taking a 
 wide survey of the country, and of its inhabitants ; 
 and if the information which he has collected, he 
 
 ,1 
 
 ■I 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Vll 
 
 to 
 
 1- 
 •k 
 
 not equal to his opportunities, it is such as no other 
 existing pubhcation will fully afford. 
 
 M^^Kenzie's Voyages give some account of a con- 
 siderable part of the country which is here de- 
 scribed. His residence in it, however, was much 
 shorter than that of the authour of this work, and 
 his personal acquaintance with the different parts 
 of it, was much more limited. It is not intended, by 
 this remark, to detract from the reputation, which 
 that respectable traveller and his work, have de- 
 servedly gained. By his toilsome and dangerous 
 voyage to the North Sea, and by leading the way, 
 through the Rocky Mountain, to the Pacitic Ocean, 
 he has richly merited the commendation which he 
 has received. By comparing the following work 
 •with that of M^Kenzie, it will appear, that, though 
 the geographical details are less minute, the coun- 
 try surveyed, if we except the voyage to the 
 North Sea, which is wholly out of the sphere of 
 this publication, is considerably more extensive ; 
 and the information, in regard to the inhabitants, 
 is much more particular. Considerable additions 
 are here made, tc ' '^e existing stock of L,'eographi- 
 cal information, particularly as it respects the 
 
Vlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 .k 
 
 i^ 
 
 l^ 
 
 country beyond the Rocky Mountain. The ba- 
 sis of the map, here given to the pubhck, is that 
 of Sir Alexander M^Kenzie, drawn by Arrovvsmith. 
 That map has received many corrections, and to 
 it many important additions have been made, by 
 tlic authour of this work ; so that it is presumed 
 nqw to be the most correct map of the interiour of 
 North America, which has ever been pubhshcd. 
 
 Literary men have recently taken much inter- 
 est in comparing the different Indian languages, 
 spoken on tjiis conilnent, with each other, and 
 with other languages, particularly with those an- 
 ciently spoken on the other continent. A very con- 
 siderable vocabulary of the one w^hich is spoken, 
 with a little variation of dialect, through the long 
 tract of country, from a little back of Montreal to 
 the Rocky Mountain, and one less extensive of the 
 principal language spoken beyond it, are here giv- 
 en. Sii' Alexander M^Kenzie has given a voca- 
 bulary of the first, which will be found, on compari- 
 son, to be somewhat different from that, which is 
 contained in this work. Two reasons may be as- 
 signed for this. In the country about the Atha- 
 basca Lake, where M^'Kcnzie principally resided. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 tx 
 
 the Cree or Knisteneux language is, in some meas- 
 ure, a mixed dialect ; and it is far less pure, than 
 that winch is spoken by the inhabitants of the 
 plains. The words, also, arc spelled by McKen- 
 zie, much according to the French sound of the 
 letters, which is frequently calculated to mislead 
 an English reader. Thus, the name of God, or 
 the Good Spirit, which M^Kenzie spells Ki-jai- 
 Manitou, is here spelled Kitch-e-mon-e-too. The 
 above remark will account, in a great measure, for 
 this difference : and for that which will be found, 
 in the spelling of many other words. This is the 
 native language of the wife of Mr. Harmon, (for 
 so I may now call her, as they have been regular- 
 ly married) and great pains have been taken to 
 make this vocabulary correct, by maliing the nice 
 distinctions in the sound of the words, as derived 
 from her repeated pronunciation of them. With 
 this language he is, also, well acquainted, since it 
 has been daily spoken in his family, and by him- 
 self, for many years. 
 
 The education of the authour of this ^ork 
 was not classical ; and had it been more extensive 
 than it was, a residence for more than half of his 
 
 i 
 
PREFACL. 
 
 ^ 
 
 life, since he has arrived to years of understanding, 
 in Sf country where the EngHsh language is rarely 
 spoken, would have poorly qualified him to give 
 to this publication, a suitable English dress. 
 
 The editor undertook the business of prepar- 
 ing this work for the press, with some reluctance, 
 arising from the shortness of the time that could 
 be allowed him for the performance of it, and the 
 numerous avocations of the gospel ministry, which 
 would leave but a part of that time at his own com- 
 mand. For undertaking it at all, in such circum- 
 stances, his only apology is, that, in the opinion of 
 the authour, there was no other person, conve- 
 niently situated for personal intercourse with him, 
 who would be willing to undertake it, whose cir- 
 cumstances \?buld be more favourable. It is by 
 the particular request of the authour, and not be- 
 cause I suppose that I have performed the office 
 of an editor, in a manner creditable to myself, 
 that I have consented to connect my name with 
 this publication. '*♦ 
 
 The following work was furnished to my 
 hand, fully written out ; and though I have written 
 it wholly over, 
 
 should have been much better 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XI 
 
 rely 
 
 I 
 
 able to satisfy myself, with respect to its style, if 
 I could as fully have possessed the materials, in 
 the form of notes and sketches, or bv verbal re- 
 citals. Every man's own mind is the mould of 
 his language ; and he who has attempted to vary 
 that of another, if he be at all accustomed to 
 writing, must have found the task more difficult 
 than original composition. The style of this work 
 is not properly my own, nor that of Mr. Harmon, 
 but something between both. 
 
 There is one subject, on which I wish espe- 
 cially to address a few remarks, through the me- 
 dium of this preface, to the christian publick, and 
 to all who feel any regard for the welfare of the 
 Indian tribes, whose condition is unfolded in this 
 work. As Mr. Harmon has returned to the inte- 
 riour of North America, and, therefore, the obser- 
 vations which follow, will not be submitted to his 
 inspection, before they are made publick, the edi- 
 tor alone must be made accountable for them. 
 
 In surveying the widely extended trade of the 
 North West Company, we perceive evidence of 
 an energy and perseverance, highly creditable to 
 the members of it, as men of business. They 
 

 Wl 
 
 PHKFACE. 
 
 have explored the western wilds, and planted 
 their establishments over a tract of country, some 
 thousands of miles in extent. They have made 
 the savages of the wilderness tributary to the 
 comforts of civilized society ; and in many instan- 
 ces, they have exhibited a surprising fortitude, in 
 exposing themselves to hardship and to danger. 
 
 The souls of the Indians are of more value 
 than their furs ; and to raise this people in the 
 scale of intellectual existence, to surronnd them 
 with the comforts of civilization, to rescue them 
 from the gloom of superstition, to mould their 
 hearts to christian kindness, and to cheer their 
 dying hour with a well founded hope of immortal 
 glory and blessedness, constitutes an aggregate of 
 good sufficient to call forth exertion for their re- 
 lief. The time is rapidly coming, when christian 
 benevolence will emulate the activity and perse- 
 verance, which have long been displayed in com- 
 mercial enterprizes ; when no country will remain 
 unexplored by the heralds of the cross, where im- 
 mortal Bouls are shrouded in the darkness of hea^ 
 thenism, and are perishing for lack of vision. The 
 wandering and benighted sons of our own forests, 
 
 riball n( 
 abando 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XIU 
 
 ited 
 orae 
 ade 
 the 
 tan- 
 in 
 
 ■m 
 
 
 rfball not be overlooked. They are not a race 
 abandoned by God, to inevitable destruction ; 
 though the idea has, strangely, gotten possession of 
 some minds. In proportion to the efforts which 
 have been made, perhaps no missions to the hea- 
 then have been crowned with greater success, 
 than those to the American Aborigines. To this 
 fact, the fruit of the labours of Elliott, of the 
 Mayhews, of Brainerd, of the Moravians, and, es- 
 pecially, of the recent establishment among the 
 Cherokces, will bear abundant witness. 
 
 The Indian tribes, whose condition is unfolded 
 in this work, have claims upon christian compas- 
 sion; and some facts, which the authour has dis- 
 closed to me, have led me to suppose, that a mis- 
 sionary establishment might be made, with ref- 
 erence to their instruction, with a fair prospect 
 of success, and with less expense, than ordinarily 
 attends such operations. 
 
 In the numerous establishments of the North 
 West Company, there are from twelve to fifteen 
 hundred women and children, who are wholly, or 
 in part, of Indian extraction. Women have, from 
 time to time, been taken from ampng the Natives, 
 
! i 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 XIV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 to reside in the forts, by the men in the service 
 of the company ; and famihes have been reared, 
 which have generally been left in the country, 
 when these men have retired to the civilized parts 
 of the world. These women and children, with a 
 humanity which deserves commendation, are not 
 turned over to the savages ; but they are fed, if 
 not clothed, by the company. They have become 
 so numerous, as to be a burden to the concern ; 
 and a rule has been established, that no person, in 
 the service of the company, shall hereafter take a 
 woman from among the Natives to reside with 
 him, as a sufficient number, of a mixed blood, can 
 be found, who are already connected with the 
 company. There are, also, in the N. W. country, 
 many superannuated Canadians, who have spent 
 the flower of their days in the service of the com- 
 pany, who have families that they are unwilling to 
 leave ; and having nothing to attract them to the 
 civilized world, they continue under the protec- 
 tion of the company, and are supplied by them, 
 with the necessaries of life. 
 
 A plan has been in contemplation, to provide 
 for the future maintenance of these people, and 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XV 
 
 rvice 
 ared, 
 ntry, 
 )arts 
 ith a 
 
 e not 
 d, if 
 
 como 
 
 :ern ; 
 
 )n, in 
 
 ike a 
 
 with 
 
 • can 
 the 
 
 :i-? 
 
 for the relief of the Company from an increasing 
 burden, which is, to estabhsh a settlement on the 
 Rainy Lake River, where the soil is excellent, to 
 which the people, above mentioned, may resort. 
 To enable them to make a beginning, in the culti- 
 vation of the land^ and in the erection of mills, 
 &;c. the Company propose to give them fifteen 
 or twenty thousand dollars, and to appoint one of 
 the Partners to superintend the affairs of the set- 
 tlement, for three years, or for a longer time, if it 
 shall be necessary^ .. „ 
 
 It appears highly probable, tLat a settlement 
 might thus be formed, which, in a few years, would 
 secure to those who should belong to it, the com- 
 forts of life, as the fruit of their own industry ; and 
 should they prosper, so far as to raise a supply 
 beyond their own necessities, it might, with mutu- 
 al advantage, be disposed of to the Company, i 
 
 The Partners and Clerks of the North West 
 Company, who are in the Indian country, as well 
 as some of those who reside in Canada, and else- 
 where, have subscribed several thousand dollars, 
 towp.rd the establishment of a school, either at 
 the Rainy Lake, or at Fort William, for the in- 
 
 xt; 
 
 / . 
 
XVI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 t- 
 
 struction of the children, connected with their es- 
 tabhshments. Some of these children arc the off- 
 spring of parents, who survey their comparative 
 degradation, with the deep interest of a strong 
 natural affection, who are able to bear the ex- 
 pense of their education, and who would cheerful- 
 ly contribute, in this way, to raise them to increas- 
 ed respectability, comfort and usefulness. Should 
 this school be established, such persons would bo 
 required to support their children, who should be- 
 long to it ; while the children of the poor, would 
 be taught gratuitously. 
 
 These facts have opened to my mind a pros- 
 pect, to which I wish to direct the eye of chris- 
 tian benevolence. ! would ask, with deep inter- 
 est, some one of the institutions, whose object is 
 the diffusion of civilization and Christianity among 
 the Indian tribes, whether a missionary establish- 
 ment might not be formed, in concert with the 
 North West Company, which would, with much 
 less trouble and even expense to them, accomplish 
 the object which the Company have in view, than 
 any establishment which they could independently 
 make ; and which would, at the same time, have 
 
 ,^.1. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XVII 
 
 a most auspicious bearing upon the religious in- 
 terests of the tribes of the N. W. Country. 
 
 A school for the instruction of children in the 
 arts of life, and in the rudiments of science, as well 
 as in the principles of the christian religion, forms 
 the basis of the most efficient missionary exertions 
 among the Indians. The school among the Cher- 
 okees, is a most interesting object to christian be- 
 nevolence ; and as the fruit of it, the light of sci- 
 ence, and the still brighter light of the Sun of 
 Righteousness, is shedding a cheering radiance 
 over many minds, that would otherwise have been 
 shrouded in intellectual and moral darkness. The 
 school has received the unqualified approbation of 
 men of all descriptions who have visited it, among 
 whom are many persons of the most distinguished 
 character and rank in civil life. If such a school 
 were established, at a convenient place in the 
 N, W. Country, it would be as the day spring 
 from on high to a region, now overspread by an 
 intellectual and moral midnight. 
 
 Men, occupied as the gentlemen of the North 
 West Company are, in the overwhelminor cares 
 of a vast commercial concern, would find it diffi- 
 
 ■m 
 

 If §:■ 
 
 •J 
 
 
 V s 
 
 XVlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 cult to bestow all that attention on a school for 
 the instruction of the children and yout. ow in 
 their establishments, whom they might think it 
 proper to educate, which would be necessary to 
 secure its proper management. Could this care 
 be entirely taken off their hands, by men of known 
 and approved characters, acting under a responsi- 
 bility to some respectable society ; by men who 
 would feel all the interests which christian be- 
 nevolence can create in the welfare of the chil- 
 dren and youth committed to their care, it does 
 appear to me, that they would gladly cooperate 
 with them. 
 
 As the North West Company from motives of 
 interest, as well as from more noble considera- 
 tions, would contribute something to the support 
 of such an establishment, should it meet their ap- 
 probation, the expense of it would, of course, be 
 less to the society that should embark in the un- 
 dertaking, than is commonly incurred, in establish- 
 ments of this sort. 
 
 The children and youth above mentioned, 
 might be instructed in the arts of civilized life, irt 
 science and in Christianity, with much greater ease 
 
 :-■... I'-'l . n , 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XIX 
 
 
 'i 
 
 than the children of the Natives, even it' they 
 could as easily be obtained ; and when instructed, 
 they would be equally promising, as the instru- 
 ments of spreading civilization and the religion of 
 the gospel, among the Indian tribes. They have 
 always been habituated to a life, in a great meas- 
 ure settled ; and they would, therefore, endure 
 confinement, better than children who have lived 
 among the wandering savages. They are partial- 
 ly civilized, by an intercourse with those, who 
 have carried into the wilderness many of the feel- 
 ings and habits of civilized society. They would 
 not be liable to be withdrawn, at an improper 
 time, from the place of their education, by the 
 whims and caprice of unstable parents. At the 
 same time, being familiarly acquainted with the 
 manners and customs and feelings of the savages, 
 by a frequent intercourse with them, being able 
 to speak their languages, and having some of the 
 Indian blood circulating in their veins, they would, 
 when properly instructed, be as well qualified to 
 gain access to the Natives, and to have influence 
 over them, as if they had originally been taken, 
 directly from their families. 
 
 
 r 
 
4 
 
 XX 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 
 As this establishment could probably be made, 
 with the greatest convenience, within the British 
 dominions, it might, perhaps, be undertaken with 
 the surest prospect of success, bj some society in 
 Great Britain. The Society in Scotland for Pro- 
 pagating Christian Knowledge has, heretofore, 
 contributed to the support of missionaries among 
 the American Indians ; and might, perhaps, be 
 willing to engage in this undertaking. The Socie- 
 ty in Massachusetts for Propagating the Gospel 
 among the Indians of North America has, in some 
 instances, if I mistake not, acted in concert with 
 the Society in Scotland, above mentioned; and 
 might, perhaps, conveniently do it, in this instance. 
 Every association, however, who may become ac- 
 quainted with the facts here disclosed, will be able 
 themselves, to judge most correctly, of their own 
 resources, and of their own duty. — At Fort Wil- 
 liam, on Lake Superior, a very considerable num- 
 ber of the partners of the North West Company 
 assemble annually, about the middle of June, at 
 which meeting, many important arrangements are 
 made, respecting the business of the Company. 
 At such a meeting, an agent from some benevo- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XXI 
 
 ty m 
 Pro- 
 ore, 
 
 ipel 
 
 s 
 
 lent association, might ascertain their feelings, in 
 regard to such an establishment as I have proposed. 
 The Aborigines of America, are capable of be- 
 ing exalted in the scale of existence, and of arriv- 
 ing, even at eminence, in the arts and sciences. 
 The native oratory of some of them, is proverbial 
 in civilized countries, and has caused them to be 
 enrolled among the sons of genius. Many of them 
 afford proof, that they possess acute and compre- 
 hensive minds ; and as a people, their mental ca- 
 pacity is certainly respectable. Nor, perhaps, can 
 a people be found on the earth who are not rais- 
 ed above them by superior cultivation and means 
 of improvement, who possess greater elevation of 
 feeling, and who appear more majestick in ruins. 
 Their virtues and their vices too, are not those of 
 ignoble minds. Let their condition be improved 
 by the arts of civilized life, their minds be en- 
 lightened by science, and their hearts be softened 
 by the genial influence of Christianity, and they 
 will assume a respectable rank among the nations. 
 Could we hear some of their superior geniuses un- 
 fold to their countrymen the wonderful scheme of 
 
ii- " 
 
 
 .•i':^ 
 
 XXll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 redeeming merc}% with the briUiancy and pathos, 
 which have characterised some of their speeches, 
 on the interests of their tribes, — with a brilHancy, 
 rendered more splendid by cultivation, and a pa- 
 thos, made doubly tender by the softening influ- 
 ence of the gospel, who would not listen to them 
 with admiration and with pleasure ? Might we 
 not hope that, by the blessing of God, they would 
 be made the honoured and happy instruments, of 
 turning many of their countrymen, from the errour 
 of their ways to the wisdom of the just. Could 
 numbers of them be brought to concert plans for 
 the extension of the gospel, in the North Wes- 
 tern wilds, with the skill, and to execute them 
 with the fortitude and perseverance, which they 
 display in warring upon each other, the liippiest 
 "'esults might be expected. 
 
 Whether the suggestions here made deserve 
 consideration or not, I cheerfully submit to the 
 wisdom and benevolence of those, for whom they 
 were especially intended. Siich has been my 
 own view of the importance of the subject here 
 presented, that I should have charged myself with 
 
 -•;f 
 
 a cu 
 oppc 
 chri^ 
 
 Bil 
 
 ££jis*' ••, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 AAlIk 
 
 3 pathos, 
 pecches, 
 rilliancy, 
 tid a pa- 
 Jg influ- 
 to them 
 ight we 
 y would 
 lents, of 
 3 errour 
 Could 
 lans for 
 1 Wes- 
 ' them 
 h they 
 apples t 
 
 Qservc 
 io the 
 1 they 
 n my 
 here 
 r with 
 
 a culpable neglect, if I had failed to improve this 
 opportunity, to hold it up to the attention of the 
 christian publick. 
 
 DANIEL HASKEL. 
 
 Burlington, Vt. August 2, 1820. 
 
I M 
 
Jtiiiai*^:-- ■ ^ 
 
 .■.■■c*i>^,fcV-*-»>- • 
 
 ■fC-t; 
 
 'ii-if^ 
 
 i 
 
 *" 
 
 :h f ■*•/■■> 
 
 ^^A 
 
 r 
 
 f'feji 
 
 *4* 
 
■"^^'"i 
 
A 
 
 ■> 
 
 
 
 ^>f 
 
 /. 
 
 
 (•,.-- 
 
 r,*«Mf 
 
 JOURNAL 
 
 April, 1800. 
 Tuesday^ 29. La Chine. Yesterday, I left 
 Montreal, for this place, in company with several 
 other Clerks ; and am on my way to the interiour, 
 or Indian countries, there to remain, if my life 
 should be spared, for seven years, at least. For 
 this space of time I am under an engagement to 
 serve as a clerk to the North West Company, oth- 
 erwise denominated M^Tavish, Frobisher, & Co. 
 The goods intended for the interiour or upper 
 countries, are here put on board of canoes. These 
 canoes which are constructed of the bark of the 
 birch tree, will carry a burden of three and an 
 half or four tons each; and are severally manned 
 by eight or nine Canadians, who are said to man- 
 
 ? f 
 
 <\ 
 
1. . . 
 
.«?\<» 
 
 t J^A* jA 
 
 lOvie 
 
 "'^lioliTi-acliiui E. 
 
 >" 
 
 / 
 
 y 
 
 yoTtWine«i 
 
 P • 
 
 S^riihuin 
 
 iiio 
 
 Jtivf 
 
 rt«i^ 
 
 ,7, ^'.vt^ 
 
 
 '-r 
 
 P 
 
 >• 
 
 .///] 
 
 '.fh ypo,/.. 
 
 SU>n, 
 
 t^A 
 
 <7H"*'^ 
 
 cW» 
 
 '"■«'/ >%»^ 
 
 tc**^ 
 
 ..f ►" 
 
 Forf <li;j,..»,T,a„ C /y 
 
 
 ^ — ^ — . ^ - jji'" 
 
 \UtlniJ-i 
 
 
 1'' 
 
 (lirrvi 
 
 i;u' 
 
 Ar'<: 
 
 
 '■<v- i{. 
 
 i^.< 
 
 ■tlk-f 
 
 ,vif" 
 
 /afc 
 
 S.*'^ 
 
 ?,ir* /f'. 
 
 ir r A 3' 
 
 .^»' 
 
 /> 
 
 v/> 
 
 \ Ijltltit 
 
 p'f 
 
 ,fru 
 
 &*/'•'•"•' 
 
 f f*-/'^ 
 
 «v 
 
 J^' 
 
 fllA'*JJ 
 
 V»!*L 
 
 ,>>.■/ 
 
 .J /?•«' 
 
 
 \v 
 
 Itit" 
 
 
 -*v>// /, 
 
 .]■ 
 
 Bo»v«- 
 
 V } RapLl 
 
 ^' ^' ^ .1 
 
 i'^"''.. 
 
 fifikitui I.- 
 
 f(n»tl»i 
 
 \^;es:^'-#; 
 
 ■;l«H 
 
 
 
 y/jtike 
 
 ''"^'A, 
 
 V,. 
 
 ■v. 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 '•S, JP«"? ^ • 
 
 \ iH-tft i 
 
 H' n'in'f 
 
 xjC 
 
 u- 
 
 Sf*^ 
 
 ;r/( /-'«*• M 
 
 ,IA 
 
 JT 
 
 
 M r 
 
 ^J-^ 
 
 
 Hull 
 
 v.>y/;^r 
 
 :s. 
 
 '-"»•"■ y^' 
 
 
 • >V/yj/' 
 
 ^J'^ 
 
 yiBJ^^ 
 
 \Vt 
 
 i»' 
 
 '"Wv 
 
 "'-'* -f^/Xv 
 
 ^P"^ Rrdltert 
 
 t'ciler 
 
 I'ttlf 
 
 .V '> 
 
 iV ■» 
 
 /*w*^ 
 
 flml} 
 
 ,Hf 1'^ 
 
 ^tt. 
 
 1 ( ^ 
 
 '/^V-i' 
 
 ^^^^1 
 
 I'lWie I, 
 
 \fhiml\f ' 
 
 (»((' 
 
 if/ '- 
 
 ,!*'• 
 
 ,ri'/' 
 
 ^'-Vy 
 
 '■/'<'/ J jr«»\ 
 
 /iii**" 
 
 /;i^>w4 
 
 i*/ 
 
 
 tJl" 
 
 
 
 
 L s s £ jsr 
 
 f" 
 
 
 "4.' ''^^ 
 
 >/>';' 
 
 ^-fi'/i"^ 
 
 UK 
 
 fiVi 
 
 ,lh Iff" 
 
 J 
 
 I « 
 
 
 •,T>7. 
 
 '.«<•" 
 
 )Y4V»' 
 
 e<*.l 
 
 — ^1- l- 
 
 I 'lb 
 
 5f 
 
 ■iwtf* 
 
 ,V.J A. 
 
 MiHHonri Kij^^ r* 
 
 /••■K. 
 
 ,V<'' 
 
 
 f Pi***"' 
 
 I'r-'i 
 
 r'JM 
 
 (itH>Jr 
 
 
 ^J' 
 
 r 
 
 ,t^^ 
 
 "v^* 
 
 \Atiin4tMt 
 
 ""-^ 
 
 iMChl'* 
 
 M 'I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 .'«' 
 
 ill>»ir 
 
v*« 
 
 "\" 
 
 .. S 
 
 \0 
 
 1 \ 
 
 // 
 
 ir 
 
 p 
 
 ■I- 
 
 ,!,!« 
 
 iff'*' ^ 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 \ 
 
 ^.ti'' 
 
 p^ 
 
 ^w 
 
 xsa 
 
 trens 
 
 pf,lS 
 
 \y'' 
 
 <v 
 
 \ 
 
 D" 
 
 ii'-" 
 
 ;»' 
 
 ^' 
 
 H*' 
 
 ,iit; 
 
 ,^ ^ > Severn H"^-", 
 
 .>///' 
 
 J 7f '"1 
 
 ri 
 
 • ii-'tut/tutir,, 
 
 .^* 
 
 1:^ 
 
 ''fff/.i 
 
 f„ik' 
 
 /' c 
 
 \V«*^ 
 
 >t>^ 
 
 '^*/ . 
 
 ;,-l'<'''' -^'^i 
 
 '"'••V.w.-'l , X*->' •' 
 
 \'>ifi "^ i yvi"' '1 
 
 i5 
 
 *iST& 
 
 / V 
 
 wi 
 
 s^y- 
 
 ivV' 
 
 c^• 
 
 5,Vo^^ 
 
 *« 
 
 \< 
 
 L"!^ 
 
 '>i^ 
 
 ^«<i 
 
 '-fA<iise\ 
 
 t',louc<>»j 
 
 Hou 
 
 •■r 
 
 /■<r 
 
 honat A. 
 
 ■"<«*. 
 
 t 
 
 
 .tf"" 
 
 
 
 tlH" 
 
 iVi"" 
 
 
 f*!'' 
 
 tiV 
 
 ^v 
 
 in* 
 
 ,vrvci 
 
 ffr^V^ 
 
 ■^-r- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 R 
 
 /. •'•'^ 
 
 rr....'..'""-»"'"^<}.t»>»^^''' 
 
 M" 
 
 iW'M 
 
 .11'' 
 
 
 V'^v.. 
 
 **>«.. 
 
 ««*] 
 
 ^tAfa 
 
 RiW" 
 
 C'^^. 
 
 :'±^« 
 
 
 Al* 
 
 •V 
 
 •"?C 
 
 ' ■*?%», , 
 
 ■"^s^ 
 
 ^^fiit\}f,m^'' 
 
 UxU 
 
 3 , , ^■'^n.<'',jB^^^^^^\^r^A 
 
 ,>u" 
 
 1 1 
 
 Ovv 
 
 tt* 
 
 
 .o» 
 
 ./■i/..f" 
 
 u^ii^"^'''VF:^/"": 
 
 
 > .. 
 
 
 w,^ 
 
 \\' 
 
 Vt'/.i" 
 
 sA;»"' 
 
 \Y 
 
 
 
 
 L-'J. rt' 
 
 rr 
 
 .v' 
 
 r-^r' 
 
 /? 
 
 
 ,i-\.'5 
 
 i »IH 
 
26 
 
 HAKMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 :i 
 
 t.l 
 
 I 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^f 
 
 age them with greater dexterity, than any other 
 people. 
 
 Wednesday^ 30. Point Claire. Rainy even- 
 ing. For the first time in my life, I am to pass 
 the night in a tent. In the former part of the 
 day, I was employed in marking bales of goods, 
 which are to br sent to the Grand Portage or 
 General Rendezvous. About 12 o'clock, I em- 
 barked on board of one of the canoes, destined for 
 the above mentioned place. The whole squad- 
 ron, which consits of thirty canoes, is divided into 
 three brigades. One or two Guides or Pilots are 
 attached to each brigade. Their business is, to 
 point out the best course up and down the 
 streams and through the lakes, and to take 
 charge of the canoes and property on board. 
 They attend to the repairs of the canoes, which 
 are frequently broken, and have the same com- 
 mand over the men, attached to their respective 
 brigades, as the commander of a vessel has, over 
 the men on board. ^ The Voyagers, as the men 
 are called, have many of the customs of sailors ; 
 and among them the following. By all those on 
 board, who have never passed certain places, they 
 expect to be treated with something to drink; 
 and should a person refuse to comply with their 
 requisitions, he would be sure of being plunged 
 into the water, which they profanely call, baptiz- 
 
 .:i«" 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 27 
 
 ing liim. To avoid such a disaster, I gave the 
 people of my canoe a few bottles of spirits and 
 porter, by drinking which, they became very mer- 
 ry, and exhibited the reverse of their appearance 
 a few days since, when, with heavy hearts and 
 weeping eyes, they parted from their relations. 
 Shortly after we had pitched our tents, an Irish 
 gentleman, whose house was near the margin of 
 the water, politely invited me to take tea with 
 him. 
 
 Friday, May 2. Chute au Blondeau. We 
 have a strong head wind. But, since yesterday 
 morning, we have come nearly sixty miles, and 
 have passed two Rapids. At these places, most 
 of the property was taken out of the canoes, and 
 carried across the Portages, on the backs of the 
 people. The young men, who had never been in 
 the Indian countries, now began to regret that 
 they had enlisted into this service, which requires 
 them, as they say, to carry burdens like horses, 
 when, by remaining in their own country, they 
 might have laboured like men. , *%ir.k^ 
 
 Sunday, 4. The wind has been so high, during 
 the whole of the day, that we could not go upon 
 the water, I have therefore passed the tirpe in 
 reading, and in the society of a fellow-clerk. 
 <u Monday, 5. We are now about one hundred 
 and twenty miles from Montreal- This afternoon. 
 
 y 
 
 1 
 
 '.I 
 
 t t 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 our people killed a deer, with their setting poles, 
 ag he was crossing the river. 
 
 Tuesday, 6. The three Kettles. In the for- 
 mer part of the day, we passed a beautiful water- 
 fall, where the Riviere au Rideau, or Curtain 
 River, falls into this, which is the Ottawa River. 
 The former is ten or twelve rods wide, and the 
 water falls perpendicularly, about forty feet, pre- 
 senting at a little distance, an appearance at once 
 pleasing and grand. We are now about one hun- 
 dred and fifty miles from Montreal ; the land on 
 each side of the river is very level, and the soil 
 appears to be good. William M'^Gilvray, Esq. 
 passed us this evening, in a light canoe, bound like 
 ourselves, to the Grand Portage. >'.^. 
 
 Tfiursday, 8. A Chat. We now, for the first 
 time, see Indian huts or tents. 
 
 Friday, 9. We arrived this morning, at this 
 place, where the North West Company have a 
 small establishment } and I have passed the after- 
 noon, in shooting pigeons. , .» iif! i ^ ^ m * 7* 
 
 Saturday, 10. Grand Calumet. This Port- 
 age is nearly two miles long ; and over it, the peo- 
 ple carry both the canoes and their loading. 
 Here stands a house, built by those who came 
 here to traffick with the Indians ; but which has 
 been abandoned for several years, as the Indians, 
 who formerly hunted in this vicinity, are now gone 
 
Harmon's jqurnal. 
 
 29 
 
 farther north, where Beaver, &c. are found in 
 greater plenty. Behind this house, I found a small 
 bark canoe, in which I embarked alone, for the 
 purpose of shooting ducks. Having proceeded 
 some distance from the shore, the canoe overset, 
 and I fell, with my gun, into the water. Having 
 my great coat on, it was with no small difficulty 
 that I reached the shore ; and I was happy to es- 
 cape, with the loss of only my gun. 
 
 Sunday, 11. We are encamped on an Island 
 opposite to Fort Coulonge. Soon after we arriv- 
 ed here, the person who has the establishment 
 in charge, came to invite a fellow-clerk, who trav- 
 els in the same canoe with me, and myself, to sup 
 with him, to which I readily agreed ; but my com- 
 panion chose to remain with the canoes. I was 
 treated with all the politeness of which a Canadi- 
 an is master, which is not a little ; for in this, as 
 well as in many other respects, the Canadians re- 
 semble their ancestors, the French. 
 
 Monday, 12. We are encamped on a large 
 sand bank. I have had a little conversation with my 
 fellow-traveller, respecting his conduct the last 
 evening, while I was absent. When I departed 
 for the Fort, I gave him the keys of our travelling 
 box and basket, that he might have the means of 
 making a supper ; and on my return, I was not a 
 J it tie surprised at finding not only him, but several of 
 
 
 ml 
 
30 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 I : 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 iv. 
 
 the common labourers, much intoxicated. 1 ruprl- 
 manded Mr. P. with considerable severity, to day, 
 and told him, that if I should ever again find him 
 in the like shameful condition, I should be under 
 the disagreeable necessity of informing our em- 
 ployers of his conduct, as soon as we should reach 
 Head-quarters. He promised that he would not 
 again be guilty of such conduct; but I should 
 place more reliance on his promise, had not his 
 mother been a squaw. There seems to be in the 
 blood of an Indian, a kind of predisposition to in- 
 temperance. — Wc barter with the natives, receiv- 
 ing sugar for buscuit, of which, as well as of pork, 
 beef and spirits, they appear to be uncommonly 
 fond. V 
 
 Tuesday, 13. We are encamped on a rockv 
 bank, where it is impossible to find a smooth 
 place, sufficiently large to pitch a tent ; we are 
 therefore obliged to make our bed between two 
 large rocks, and sleep in the open air. On the 
 north side of the river are mountains, which ap- 
 pear almoct destitute of timber, of any kind. 
 
 Wednesday, 14- We shall again sleep where 
 we did last night, as the people have been employ- 
 ed, during the whole of the day, in repairing the 
 canoes, which had become leaky. '.<n«l h*:y 
 
 Thursday, 15. Roche Capitaine Portage, This 
 Portage is so named from a large rock, th^t rises 
 
 to a c\ 
 middh 
 come 
 persoi 
 up oi 
 persor 
 cross 
 custoi 
 I see 
 choly 
 ly an 
 press 
 of his 
 Thus 
 minist 
 during 
 death 
 F 
 
Harmon's jouriVal. 
 
 31 
 
 I rupn- 
 ^ to daj, 
 find him 
 )e under 
 our em- 
 Id reach 
 ould not 
 should 
 
 not his 
 e in the 
 •n to in- 
 , receiv- 
 of pork, 
 mmonly 
 
 a rockv 
 smooth 
 we are 
 en two 
 On the 
 lich ap- 
 1. 
 
 where 
 mploy- 
 ng the 
 
 This 
 t rises 
 
 
 to a considerable height above the water, in the 
 middle of the rapid. During the day, we have 
 come up several difficult ones, where many 
 persons have been drowned, either in coming 
 up or going down. For every such unfortunate 
 person, whether his corpse is found of not, a 
 cross is erected by his companions, agreeably to a 
 custom of the Roman Catholics ; and at this place, 
 I see no less than fourteen. This is a melan- 
 choly sight. It leads me to reflect on the fol- 
 ly and temerity of man, which cause him to 
 press on in the path, that has conducted so many 
 of his fellow creatures, prematurely to the grave. 
 Thus in hope of gaining a little money, which can 
 minister but imperfectly to our comfort, and that, 
 during a short season, we expose ourselves to 
 death. ^A..'^^,r^"' a-:. ":^ , .,^• ^ ,\ ,\*\: .^ m-\^s. 
 
 « , Friday, 16. Came up a rapid where, a few 
 years since, two canoes, in going down, were brok- 
 en, and several men were drowned ; therefore, 
 we see more crosses erected. 
 
 Saturday, 17. Roderick M^Kenzie, Esq. agent 
 for the North West Company, passed us, who, 
 with those that accompany him, is on his way to 
 the Grand Portage. 
 
 Sunday, IS, The Lazy Portage. This day 
 we left the Ottawa River on our right hand, and 
 came up a small river, that falls info it. A- 
 
 - f 
 
 t * . 
 
 
32 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 bout noon, we passed a cave, in the side of a 
 high h^ll. This cave, I am told, is spacious ; hut 
 we were in too great haste, to permit my examin- 
 ing it. This I was the more inclined to do, as I 
 am told that the natives relate many remarkable 
 stories respecting it ; and among others, that a 
 large animal remains in it, which they call a Man- 
 eater, and which devours all those, who have the 
 presumption to approach the entrance, of his soli- 
 tary dwelling. 
 
 Monday, 19. The Pines. Came up several 
 bad rapids ; but have been so fortunate, thus far, 
 as to meet with no disaster. The banks on each 
 side of the river, for a considerable distance, are 
 a perfect natural wall, formed of smooth stones ; 
 and are about one hundred (eet high. 
 
 Tuesday, 20. La Vase, or Miry-place. Dur- 
 ing the whole of this day, we have been crossing 
 pcnds, and small lakes. 
 
 Wednesday, 21. After coming over a number 
 of short portages, and crossing several ponds, and 
 descending a small river, at the source of which is 
 a height of land, we have at length arrived at a 
 place, called the Meadows, which constitutes the 
 north end of Lake Nipisangue, or, as it is com- 
 monly written, Nippising. Here we find several 
 Indians, who appear to be in poor circumstances. 
 We, however, obtain from them a little sugar, 
 
 IM- 
 
\-' 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 33 
 
 .\\ 
 
 and a few wooden dishes and spoons, for which we 
 
 give them provisions. * ^ ■ . ' 
 
 ^- Thursday, 22. Sailed a part of the day, on 
 
 the above mentioned lake ; but, towards noon, the 
 
 wind was so high, that we were obliged to encamp 
 
 on a small Island, which is almost destitute of 
 
 wood. 
 
 -t Friday^ 23. The lost Child. This place took 
 its name from the following circumstance. Seve- 
 ral years since, the natives, being encamped here, 
 lost a child, for whom they made diligent search, 
 but in vain. They imagined, however, that they 
 heard his lamentations in the bowels of the earth; 
 whereupon they commenced digging, but to no 
 purpose ; the reason of which they conceived to be, 
 that the Devil, or Bad Spirit, as he is called by 
 the Indians, was continually carrying him from one 
 place to another, in the earth. Many large holes 
 have actually been dug in the earth, as our peo- 
 ple have shown me. 
 
 In the morning we left Lake Nipisangue, and 
 have ever since been descending the French Riv- 
 er, which is a considerable stream. 
 
 In the latter part of the day, we passed a nar- 
 row place in the French River, to which, a num- 
 ber of years since, many of the most abandoned 
 and savage Natives were accustomed to resort 
 pv<iry spring, and where th^y built a kind of Fort, 
 
 «♦ 
 
 ■• : ; I 
 
 
 
 5 
 
34 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 or stone wall, which is still to be seen. Behind 
 this, these villains secreted themselves ; and, when 
 the vojagers were passing by, discharged volleys 
 of shot into their canoes, and of course, as the dis- 
 tance was small, killed many of them. They 
 would then rush from their hiding place, and fall 
 upon and butcher the remainder, and go off with 
 the plunder, which they had thus seized, into 
 a distant part of the country. But the bet- 
 ter sort of their countrymen, would not join 
 them in such barbarous and unprovoked hostilities. 
 At length the good Indians, who were well dispos- 
 ed towards the white people from Canada, pro- 
 nounced these murderers a nuisance to society, and 
 made war upon them, until the greater part of 
 them were destroyed. The few that survived, 
 retired into a distant part of the country, and no- 
 thing has since been heard, respecting them. The 
 friendly Indians, for their exertions in extirpating 
 their unworthy relations, were handsomely re- 
 warded by the North West Company. 
 
 The Canadian Voyagers, when they leave one 
 stream to go up or down another, have a custom 
 of pulling off their hats, and making the sign of the 
 cross, upon which one in each canoe, or at least, in 
 each brigade, repeats a short prayer. The same 
 ceremonies are observed by them, whenever they 
 pass a place, where any one has been interred, and 
 
-Harmon's journal. 
 
 36 
 
 
 a cross has been erected. Those, therefore, who 
 are in the habit of voyaging this way, are obliged 
 to say their prayers more frequently perhaps, 
 than when at home ; for at almost every rap- 
 id which we have passed, since we left Mon- 
 treal, we have seen a number of crosses erected ; 
 and at one, I counted no less than thirty ! It is 
 truly melancholy, and discouraging, seriously to re- 
 flect on the great number of my fellow creatures, 
 who have been brought to an untimely end, by 
 voyaging this way, as I know not but I shall my- 
 self, also, be doomed to the same watery grieve. 
 With such dismal spectacles, however, almost con- 
 tinually before our eyes, we press forward, with 
 all the ardour and rashness of youth, in the same 
 dangerous path, stimulated by the hopes of grati- 
 fying the eye, and of securing a little gold, j . 
 «. Saturday, 24. Lake Huron. We find on the 
 shore of this lake, low Cranberries, in great abun- 
 dance. 
 
 Sunday, 25. The wind has been so high, that 
 it has prevented us from sailing, the greater part 
 of the day. We are encamped on an island, of 
 which there are many in this lake. On one of 
 them, it is reported, that the Natives killed a 
 snake, which measured thirty six (eet in length. 
 The length and size of this astonishing serpent, 
 they have engraved on a largo smooth rock, which 
 
 ? ii 
 
 
 , »( 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
36 
 
 Harmon's travels. 
 
 fc 
 
 we saw, as we passed by. But we have otteu 
 seen other engravings, on the rocks, along the 
 rivers and lakes, of many different kinds of animals, 
 some of which, I am told, are not now to be found, 
 in this part of the world, and probably never 
 existed.. '' '*'*• -^ •'■ '■ 'v-ti ;f...M^^v' 
 
 * Wednesday, 28. Island of St. Joseph. To 
 this place the British troops came and built a for- 
 tification, when the Americans took possession of 
 Michilimackinack. There are stationed here one 
 Captain, one Lieutenant, one Ensign and thirty 
 nine privates. The fort is built on a beautiful 
 rise of ground, which is joined to the main island 
 by a narrow neck of land. As it is not long since 
 a settlement was made here, they have only four 
 dwelling houses and tvt^o stores, on the other parts 
 of the peninsula ; and the inhabitants appear like 
 exiles. The North West Company have a house 
 and store here. In the latter, they construct ca- 
 noes, for sending into the interiour, and down to 
 Montreal. Vessels, of about sixty tons bur- 
 then, come here from Detroit and Mackana and 
 Soult St. Maries. The whole island is computed 
 to be about twenty miles in circumference ; the 
 soil is good ; it is distant, nearly nine hundred 
 miles from Montreal, and forty five from Macka- 
 na, and is in Lat. 47° North. Spirits are sold here 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 37 
 
 tor six dollars a gallon ; and other things, in the 
 same proportion. »yr^ i. . - ' ' >^ ■ 
 
 Thursday, 29. Duncan M^Gilvray, Esq. one 
 of the agents for the North West Company, arriv- 
 ed in the morning, at St. Josephs, from Mackana ; 
 and soon after, we emharked on board of our 
 canoes, to come to this small Island. As the 
 weather is calm, my fellow-traveller and I in- 
 tend sleeping in our canoe ; but the labourers 
 will pass the night on shore. * >- v.,- , ' *.v 
 
 Friday, 30. Soult St, Maries. Here the 
 North West Company have another establish- 
 ment, on the nortft side of the Rapid ; and on 
 the opposite shore, there are a few Americans, 
 Scotch and Canadians, who carry on a small traf- 
 fic with the Natives, and also till the ground a lit- 
 tle. The soil aboct Lake Huron, which we have 
 just passed, appears to be good, and the face of the 
 country is low and level. — Here the North West 
 Company have built locks, in order to take up 
 loaded canoes, that they may not be under the 
 necessity of carrying them by land, to the head of 
 the Rapid ; for the current is too strong to ie 
 stemmed by any craft. The Company are like- 
 wise building a saw mill, at the foot of the Rapid, 
 to furnish boards, &c. for the Grand Portage, &c. 
 Here is the outlet of Lake Superiour, by which its 
 waters pass into Lake Huron. On each of these 
 
 r 
 
 » <" I, 
 
 !'{ 
 
 i lj.,1 
 
38 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 -( 
 
 lii! f 
 
 lakes, the North West Company have a vessej. 
 One goes to the Grand Portage, and the other to 
 Detroit, Sic. 
 
 Saturday, 31. We shall sleep where we did 
 the last night. Several of us have visited the 
 people, who live on the other side of the rapid, 
 where we saw a dance of the Natives, who are 
 Sauteux or Chippeways. 
 
 Sunday, June, 1. Poinl au Pin, or Pine Point, 
 in Lake Superiour. We here find the vessel that 
 sails from this to the Grand Portage. I went on 
 board, and the Captain informed me, that she 
 would carry about ninety five tons, and that she 
 mJikes four or five trips every season. I left the 
 Soult Sc. Maries, in company with three hundred 
 men, who are in thirty five canoes. 
 
 Monday, 2. Point aux jfrahles, or Maple 
 Point, We now form four Brigades, in which 
 there are six clerks. ^' '"' ' > ^ i* t^ -^ ...v, 
 
 Tuesday, 3. A high wind during the whole 
 day. In the morning, we attempted to sail, but 
 soon found we could not, without shipping a great 
 deal of water ; we therefore soon landed again, 
 and r.re encamped, within one hundred rods of 
 the place where we tarried the last night. * (t \» 
 
 Wednesday, 4. As it has rained and snowed 
 all day, accompanied by a high wind, we have not 
 been able to leave our encampment of the last 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 39 
 
 night. Mons. St. Germain, who has the charge 
 of a small Fort, belonging to the North West 
 Company, not far from this, visited us, and brought 
 with him a few necessaries, t. - ** >i«*ii 4i^*itiii j 
 ^" Thursday, 5. Although the swells in the Lake 
 are very high, we have made good prepress, dur- 
 ing the whole day. We are encamped neaT a 
 large rock, on which the Natives, as they pass 
 this way, leave an arrow or two, or some other 
 article of little value to appease the Devil, or 
 Muchamunatoo, as they call him, and prevent him 
 from doing them harm. l^i.^ *. -i ,. > 
 
 Sunday, 8. In the course of the day, we have 
 passed several islands, which, aa well as the main 
 land, appear to be covered with little else besides 
 moss, with here and there a shrubby spruce. ^ 
 - Monday, 9. In the morning we passed anoth- 
 er Fort, belonging to the North West Company. 
 
 Tuesday, 10. We are obliged to anchor our 
 canoes by a small island, instead of unloading them^ 
 as is customary every night, for the whole coun- 
 try is on fire ; but whether by accident or design, 
 I am unable to learn. Our people, who pass this 
 way every summer, say that, almost every year, 
 fire runs over this part of the country, which is, 
 of course, nearly destitute of animals, of any kind, 
 
 Thursday, 12. Sugar Point. Our people say 
 we have sailed ninety miles during the day. 
 
 'J 
 
 h 
 
 4 W| 
 
 ■m 
 
40 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 .i 
 
 !i! 
 
 
 
 Friday, 13. Grand Portage, where we arriv- 
 ed late this evening. This place lies in the 48th 
 degree of north latitude ; and is said to be nine 
 hundred miles from the Soult St. Maries, and 
 eighteen hundred from Montreal. The Fort, 
 which i^ twenty four rods by thirty, is built on 
 the margin of a bay, at the foot of a hill or moun- 
 tain, jf considerable height. Within the fort, 
 there is a considerable number of dwelling houses, 
 shops and stores, all of which appear to be slight 
 buildings, and designed only for present conven- 
 ience. The houses are surrounded by palisades, 
 which are about eighteen inches in diameter, and 
 are sunk nearly three feet in the ground, and rise 
 about fifteen feet above it. The bay is so shallow 
 that the vessel cannot approach the shore, unless 
 she is almost without lading. There is a conside- 
 rable island, directly opposite to the fort, which 
 shelters the vessel from the winds that blow from 
 the Lake ; and which renders this, a tolerably 
 good harbour. There is also another fort, which 
 stands about two hundred rods from this, belong- 
 ing to the X. Y. Company, under which firm, a 
 number of merchants of Montreal and Quebec, 
 &c. now carry on a trade into this part of the 
 country. It is only three years since they made 
 an establishment here ; and as yet, they have had 
 but little success. ■ t :* - >;. - Wf;^,' -^iiit 
 
"frp 
 
 '% 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 41 
 
 This is the Head Quarters or General Ren- 
 dezvous, for all who trade in this part of the 
 world ; and therefore, every summer, the greater 
 part of the Proprietors and Clerks, who have spent 
 the winter in the Interiour, come here with the 
 furs which they have been able to collect, during 
 the preceding season. This, as I am told, is about 
 the time when they generally arrive ; and some 
 of them are already here. The people who come 
 from Montreal with the goods, go no farther 
 than this, excepting a few who take those articles 
 to the Rainy Lake, which are intended for Atha- 
 basca, as that place lies at too great a distance 
 from this, to permit people who reside there to 
 come to t'iis place and return, before the winter 
 commences. Those who bring the goods from 
 Montreal, on their return, take down the furs, &;c. 
 from the north, ^m r; „. .v f?/ ^li;*^ j.j cm^O' 
 
 Excellent fish, I am informed, are taken here. 
 White fish are sometimes speared, which will 
 weigh twenty two pounds. The water in the 
 lake is uncommonly clear. , , - ...w 
 
 Sunday^ 15. The people here pass the sab- 
 bath, much in the same manner as they do, the 
 other days of the week. The labouring people 
 have been employed, during the day, in making and 
 pressing packs of furs, to be sent to Canada. This 
 appears, not as it should be. to me, who have been 
 
 6 
 
 " 'W 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
42 
 
 HAUMO^ S JOUKNAL. 
 
 ll 
 
 tauglit to abstain form labour on the sabbath, and to 
 consider that it should be employed ii a religious 
 manner. The people, however, who have been 
 long in this savage country, have no scruples ot 
 conscience on this subject. ...,v,.,.^ .-. 
 
 .^ ,, Tuesday, 24. I have, for some days past, been 
 employed, together with several other clerks, in 
 marking packs of furs. Almost every day, for some 
 time past, people have been flocking in from 
 the Interiour, with the returns of the season. 
 
 Saturday, 28. The last night, a squaw, in a 
 state of intoxication, stabbed her husband, who 
 soon after expired. This afternoon, I went to 
 their tent, where I saw a number of Indians, of 
 ,both sexes, drinking and crying over the corpse, 
 to which they would frequently offer rum, and try 
 to pour it down his throat, supposing him to be as 
 fond of rum when dead, as he was when alive. 
 The Natives of this place are Chippeways. .v . 
 
 Friday, July 4. In the day time, the Natives 
 were permitted to dance in the fort, and the Com- 
 pany made them a present cf thirty six gallons, of 
 &hrub. In the evening, the gentlemen of tlie 
 place dressed, and we had a famous ball, in the 
 dining room. For musick, we had the bag- pipe, 
 the violin and the flute, which added much to 
 the interest of the occasion. At the ball, there 
 was a number of the ladies of this country ; and 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 I was surprised to find that they could conduct 
 with so much propriety, and dance so well, r \ . 
 
 Sunday, 13. Yesterday, several gentlemen, 
 on their way to their winter quarters, accompani- 
 ed me to Charlotte, at the other end of this Port- 
 age, which is nine miles over. My business was 
 to send oiF a number of canoes, bound for Fort 
 des Prairies. The country between this and Fort 
 Charlotte, is tolerably level ; and the soil appears 
 to be pretty good. "*' > • • .^ ' 
 
 Tuesday, 15. This morning a number of gen- 
 tlemen, as well as myself, left the Grand Portage, 
 to proceed to winter quarters. I am to accompa- 
 ny John McDonald, Esq. to Fort des Pra^ es. We 
 left fort Charlotte, about 3 o'clock P. M. on board 
 of two canoes, each of which will carry about two 
 tons, and is pushed on by six Canadians. This is a 
 small river ; and we have passed several places, 
 where the men were obliged to carry the lad- 
 ings, a short distance, and in some places, to trans- 
 port the canoes also. r^ y.,^ 
 
 Wednesday, 16, The long Cherry Portage. In 
 the former part of the day, we crossed small 
 lakes and ponds, connected by several portages, 
 and then came over the height of land. Since 
 passing this, we have descended a small river, 
 which, I am informed, after running through seve- 
 ral lakes, at length discharges itself into Hud- 
 
 1 .1 
 
 r f 
 
 i 
 
44 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 son's Bay, in latitude 51° north. At the mouth 
 of this river, the Hudson Bay Company have a fort, 
 which is called Albany Factory. 
 
 -Friday^ 18. Great Pines. We have this day 
 crossed the Flinty Lake, so na'"ied from the stone?), 
 found on its shore. For some time past, I have 
 had a fit of the ague and fever, every day. It 
 commenced when I was crossing the large Lakes ; 
 and, I am told, that it is seldom that a person is 
 attacked with it, in the region where I now am. 
 ' 'Monday, 21. For the h-it few days, we have 
 been crossing small lakes and ponds, and coming 
 down a small river. The country appears thinly 
 timbered, lies rather^low, and the soil is good. ^ • 
 ^ Tuesday, 22. This evening, there came here 
 three canoes, manned by Iroquois, who are going 
 into the vicinity of the upper Red River, to hunt 
 Beaver, for the North West Company. Some ot 
 them have their families with them. ''^'i' n kiv 
 Thursday, 24. Rainy Lake Fort. This is 
 built about a mile and an half down the river, 
 from the entrance of the Lake, where there is 
 a considerable fall. Here the soil is better than 
 any we have seen, since we left the Ottawa Riv- 
 er. The timber, also, is of a very good size. 
 The Lake and River are said to contain excellent 
 fish, such as sturgeon, white-fish, &c. In the vicin- 
 ity, a considerable quantity of wild rice is gather- 
 

 4 
 
 '-'( 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 45 
 
 B mouth 
 ^e a fort, 
 
 this day 
 3 stonefj, 
 
 I have 
 lav. 1 1 
 
 Lakes ; 
 erson is 
 iv am. 'i 
 7e have 
 coming 
 s thinly 
 3od. 
 le here 
 3 going 
 
 hunt 
 ome 01 
 
 his is 
 ^ river, 
 ^ere is 
 r than 
 a Riv- 
 size. 
 jellent 
 
 1 vicin- 
 ather- 
 
 ■■:^ 
 
 ed, bj the Natives, who are Chippeways. This 
 is thought to be nearly as nourishing as the real 
 rice, and almost as palatable. The kernel of the 
 former, is rather longer than that of the latter, and 
 is of a brownish colour. • •♦t"'*b ^t^ .h^ir//.^^ 
 
 Friday, 25. In the former part of the day, 
 we overtook several gentlemen, who, like our- 
 selves, are on their way to their winter quarters. 
 This is a beautiful river, and pretty free from 
 rapids. f :*.rii ]f^ vn i iimJW^ ji^'» Jjii; r»n .■*?<• i"^! 
 
 Saturday, 26. This morning, we met twenty 
 four canoes from Athabasca. They say they suf- 
 fered much for want of food, on their way ; and 
 during four days, ate nothing. We gave them a 
 dram, which made them almost forget their late 
 sufferings. They will arrive at the Rainy Lake, 
 later than usual. c-"^v? s^?/ Tfrvn fi^ >Mt .?> t; .^.M,r. v 
 
 Monday, 28. We have come down several 
 rapids, at one of which a canoe was broken, the 
 last year, and a man drowned. We are still in 
 the Rainy Lake river, which is about one hundred 
 and twenty miies long, and twelve or fifteen rods 
 broad. The land on each side is low, and is said 
 to be excellent. The timber consists of birch, a 
 species of pine, hemlock, poplar, aspin, cedar, 
 
 Tuesday, 29. This day we came across the 
 Woody Lake, which is full of islands. It is about 
 
 'i 
 
 s 
 
46 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 thirty six miles in length ; and the soil ahout it is 
 much like that, along the Rainy Lake River. 
 We are now in Winipick River, and have passed 
 a rapid where the last year, three men were 
 drowned. One of our men fired at a black bear, 
 but did not kill him. "'"' ^J ^< i-ft^M 
 
 Wednesday, 30. Passed a number of miry 
 Portages, and a place where, three years since, 
 the Natives, who are Chippeways, fired upon our 
 people, but without killing any of them. One of 
 the Indians was taken, with the intention of carry- 
 ing him to the nearest Fort, and there punishing 
 him as he deserved. After proceedinoj a consid- 
 erable distance, however, and when near a rapid, 
 he jumped out of the canoe, intending, as was sup- 
 posed, to swim to the opposite shore, and thus es- 
 cape. But the current was too strong ; and he 
 went down the rapid, and was probably drowned. 
 
 Thursday, 31. Mouth of the River Winipick. 
 Here the North West Company, and the Hudson 
 Bay Company, have each a fort. Here the above 
 named river discharges its waters into Lake Win- 
 ipick. The River Winipick, through the greater 
 part of its course, is a succession of small lakes ; 
 and in several places there are falls, of a conside- 
 rable height. The country around it is broken ; 
 and occasionally, majestick and frightful waterfalls 
 are to be seen, particularly where the White 
 
 m 
 

 
 
 1 
 
 bout it is 
 
 'l 
 
 3 River. 
 
 
 e passed 
 
 
 en were 
 
 V' 
 
 ick bear, 
 
 1 
 
 of miry 
 
 1 
 
 •1 
 
 rs since, 
 
 
 jpon our 
 One of 
 
 ' 
 
 of carry- 
 >unishing 
 I consid- 
 
 
 a rapid, 
 
 
 ivas sup- 
 
 
 thus es- 
 
 (k 
 
 and he 
 
 1 
 
 rowncd. 
 
 B 
 
 ^inipick. 
 Hudson 
 
 1 
 
 e above 
 
 H 
 
 te Win- 
 
 H 
 
 greater 
 lakes ; 
 
 1 
 
 ^onside- 
 
 V 
 
 )roken j 
 
 I 
 
 lerfalls 
 
 H 
 
 White 
 
 H 
 
 .-■J 
 
 HARMON S JOUKNAL. 
 
 47 
 
 River joins this, about thirty miles above where 
 wfc now are. A few miles above this, there is a 
 small lake, called Lac de Bonne, from which the 
 Hudson Bay people leave our rout, and proceed to- 
 ward the Albany Factory. The soil is good ; and 
 among the fruit, I observe the red plum. The 
 grape, al^y, grows well in this vicinity. In the neigh- 
 bouring woods, a few moose and deer are found; 
 and the Lake and River are well supplied with 
 fish. — Our people are employed in drying the 
 gooda some of which were wet, in coming down 
 the rapids, yesterday. • . ...it-.. -,.x,,..i .* ?.-; ^•'../'r 
 Saturday^ jhigust 2. When I left the Grand 
 Portage, it was expected that I should go up the 
 Sisiscatchwin river, to spend the winter. That 
 river falls into the north western end of Lake 
 Winiplck. But, since our arrival here, we have 
 received intelligence from ♦he Sw^v River De- 
 partment, which country lies between Lake Win- 
 ipich and the Red and Asslniboin rivers, that, in 
 the cpinion of Mr. M<^Leod, who superiiuends the 
 concerns of that region, it is necessary to make 
 another establishment there. It is therefore de- 
 termined that I shall go and take charge of it ; 
 and I shall accordingly remain here a few days, 
 to wait for the arrival of the brigade, destined to 
 the Swaij River department. — The after part of 
 the day, I spent in shooting pigeons, which I {ounA 
 
 "N't 
 V 
 
 (>■ 
 
 
 -4 *■ 
 
 A^ 
 
f 
 
 m 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 to be imrneroiis, as at this season, red raspberries, 
 and other kinds of fruit, are ripe, and exist here 
 in abundance. ^ «,v.;>H -*->-? i--|i •?- 
 
 Sunday, 3. In walking in the adjacent coun- 
 try, I saw the bushes and brambles loaded with 
 ripe fruit. While partaking of it, I was led to 
 reflect on the beneficence of the great Authour of 
 nature, who scatters his favours with an unsparing 
 hand, and spreads a table here in the wilderness, 
 for tb. refreshment of his creatures. ' "■''^ — ' ' 
 * , T'as is the first day which I have ever spent, 
 since my infancy, without eating either bread or 
 biscuit. As a substitute for bread, we now make 
 use of what the Natives call 'pimican^ which con- 
 sists of lean meat, dried and pounded fine, and 
 then mixed with melted f|^t. This compound is 
 put into bags, made of the skins of the buffaloe, 
 &c. and when cold, it becomes a solid body. If 
 kept in a dry place, it will continue good for years. 
 But, if exposed to moisture, it will soon become 
 musty, and unfit for use. Pimican is a very pala- 
 table, nourishing and healthy food ; and on it, our 
 Voyagers subsist, while travelling in this country* 
 Sometimes we add to the two above named ingre- 
 dients, sugar or dried berries, which we procure 
 
 from the Natives ; and the tfiste of it is thus verv 
 much improved. ^ .. ,/,.«. ^ 
 
 '. Monday, 4. 1 have visivcd the Hudson Bay 
 
.t'c 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 49 
 
 Dberries, 
 
 '■^V 
 
 ist here 
 
 
 nt coun- 
 
 
 ed with 
 
 
 s led to 
 
 
 thour of 
 nsparing 
 iderness. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3r spent, 
 Dread or 
 
 
 )W make 
 
 « 
 
 ich Con- 
 
 
 ine, and 
 
 
 pound is 
 juiTaloe, 
 
 1* 
 1 
 
 )dy. If 
 
 
 r years. 
 
 
 become 
 
 
 y pala- 
 
 '*■ 
 
 1 it, our 
 ;ountry» 
 
 ! 
 
 1 ingre- 
 
 
 jrocure 
 
 
 is very^ 
 
 i 
 
 m Bay 
 
 people, whose fort is but a few rods from ours. 
 Mr. Miller, the gentleman who has charge of it, 
 informed me, that they obtain their goods from Al- 
 bany Factory ; that, in going down with their bar- 
 ges, they are generally about forty days ; but, that 
 they arc nearly twice that time in returning, in 
 consequence of the current. The Factory lies to 
 the north east from this. 
 
 Wednesday, 6. This morning Mr. M^Donell, 
 whom we passed a few days since, overtook, and 
 informed us, that one of his canoes broke, in com- 
 ing dow\ the rapids, that one of the men was 
 drowned, and most of the property on board was 
 lost. 
 
 Friday, 8. This evening, Mons. Mayotte took 
 a woman of this country for a wife, or rather con- 
 cubine. All the ceremonies attending such an 
 event, are the following. Wheu a person is desi- 
 rous of taking one of the daughters of the Natives, 
 as a companion, he makes a present to the parents 
 of the damsel, of such articles as he supposes will 
 be most acceptable ; and, among them, rum is in- 
 dispensable ; for of that all the savages are fond, 
 to excess. Should the parents accept the articles 
 oflered, the girl remains at the fort with her 
 suitor, and is clothed in the Canadian fashion. 
 The greater part of these young women, as 1 am 
 informed, are better pleased to remain with the 
 
 7 
 
 #■ 
 
50 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 !i 
 
 i; I 
 
 Mi 
 
 whits people, than with their own relations. 
 Should the couple, newly joined, not agree, they 
 are at liberty, at any time, to separate ; but no 
 part of the property, given to the parents of the 
 girl, will be refunded, .t -^ v! :f %rf • , 
 
 Sunday, 10. Lnkc Winipick. In the former 
 part of the day, the people for whom I have long 
 been waiting, came up ; and soon after, I embark- 
 ed with them, and came hither. Although we are 
 not in want of provisions, yet our people have 
 killed a dog to eat, the flesh of which, they say, is 
 delicious. The dogs of this country, which resem- 
 ble wolves, differ considerably from the dogs, 
 found in the civilized part of the world. 
 
 Monday, 11. We embarked, early in the 
 morning ; but soon, the wind blew so as to oblige 
 us to make the land, which we have done, on a 
 point that projects far into the Lake. Soon after 
 we reached the shore, a number of the Indians of 
 this quarter, who are Chippeways and Muscagoes, 
 came to pay their respects to us, to whom we gave 
 some rum, tobacco, &;c. 
 
 Sunday, 17. Entrance of the river Dauphine. 
 Lake Winipick, which we now leave to go up this 
 river, is about two hundred and fifty miles in 
 length, and from three to sixty or seventy, in 
 breadth. The country about this lake, for a consid- 
 erable distance, is low, and is overspread with 
 
 »ng, 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL, 
 
 di 
 
 clations. 
 
 je, they 
 
 but no 
 
 s of the 
 
 former 
 ave long 
 embark- 
 h we are 
 le have 
 'J say, is 
 K resem- 
 iie dogs, 
 
 pretty heavy timber, and the soil appears to be 
 good. Dauphine river is so shallow, at present, 
 that our people are under the necessity of leaving 
 half their ladings, for which they will return, after 
 having proceeded a certain distance with the re- 
 mainder. ;^;^t^:»^?_ ■'i^^ik' bm -. i-m^in >r\ -mi} i/i*yfi 
 
 Tuesday, 19. Last night, the wind blew so 
 high, that it drove the water of the Lake to such 
 a distance up the beach, that we were under the 
 necessity of removing our baggage farther into 
 the woods, at three different times. This morn- 
 ing, our people came back for the remainder of 
 the property ; and we proceeded up the river, 
 which is about ten rods wide. The country about 
 it is level. 
 
 Wednesday, 20. Lac St. Martin. The river 
 Dauphine passes ^hrough this lake. We here 
 see a great number of swans, bustards, pelicans, 
 &;c. The country around is swampy j and I am 
 informed, that Moose are numerous in the vi- 
 cinity. ■'"■' '''■ ' ^' '" ' '■ ■'■^'' ■• ^^ ■ ^ "'' 
 
 Friday, 22. This morning we left Lac St. 
 Martin, and entered the Muddy Lake, where w6 
 again find fowls, in great abundance. 
 
 Saturday, 23. JYorth end of the Plain Portage. 
 This portage is about two miles over, through a 
 beautiful country, and the soil is excellent* 
 
 Sunday, 24. Little Lake Winipick. Here 
 
 
 4 
 
Wd 
 
 52 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 l:';:! 
 
 iA f ; 
 
 
 11 
 
 ill 
 
 N 
 , Hi;, : 
 
 we find a number of the Natives, who arc 
 Chlppeways, waiting our arrival, to get rum to 
 drink, and necessaries, to enable them to hunt 
 the beaver. , 
 
 Monday, 25. We remain still, where we 
 were the last night ; and have been employed, 
 during the day, in making out a selection of goods 
 for the establishment at the entrance of the 
 river Dauphine, which falls into the west end of 
 this Lake. At that place, a French missionary 
 resided, before the British obtained possession 
 of Canada. He remained there, but for a short 
 time ; and great success, therefore, could not 
 have been expected. I am told, however, that 
 there are some Indians, still living, who recollect 
 prayers, which were taught them by the mis- 
 sionary. 
 
 Saturday, 30. Encampment Island. Here we 
 arrived, in the fore part of the day ; and we have 
 been employed, ever since, in setting aside goods 
 for the Red Deer River, which falls into this 
 lake, at the north end. We are now nearly 
 across the lake, which is about one hundred and 
 twenty miles long, and from five, to thirty broad. 
 There are no mountains, of any magnitude, in this 
 part of the country. The land is generally low, 
 and well covered with timber, which consists 
 

 Harmon's journal. 
 
 63 
 
 of a species of pine, birch, poplar, aspiii, wil- 
 low, &c. 
 
 Friday^ September 1. In the morning, Mr. M^ 
 Gillis, with most of the people, left us to proceed 
 to the Red Deer River, where they are to pass 
 the ensuing winter. Mr. M^^Leod, with a num- 
 ber of people in one canoe, has gone to Lac 
 Bourbon, which place lies nearly north west from 
 this. We here take, in nets, the white fish, which 
 are excellent. f 
 
 r; Wednesday, 3. I have passed the day in 
 reading the Bible, and in meditating on my pre- 
 sent way of living ; and, I must confess, that it too 
 much resembles that of a savage. ■ '': ^ s 
 
 Sunday, 7. Late the last evening, Mr. Mc 
 Leod returned from Lac Bourbon; and, this 
 morning, they again embarked for Swan River, 
 and left me here, with two men, and as many 
 women, to wait for the arrival of a number of 
 canoes, which are still behind, but which are 
 expected in daily. 
 
 Wednesday, 10. Yesterday, a part of the 
 people arri>ed, for Avhom I have been waiting, 
 some of whom I sent to the Red Deer River, and 
 
 others to Swan River. , t .a. 
 
 Sunday, October 4. JVorth end of Little Lake 
 
 WinipicL From the 29th of August, until the 
 
 morning of this day, I remained on Encampment 
 
 
 w^ 
 
 Pi 
 
 m 
 
i 
 
 54 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 'n 
 
 ul^ 
 
 f 
 
 "i I 
 
 
 u 
 
 ill 
 
 ! 
 
 Island, waiting for the arrival of the people, v.Iii^ 
 were left behind. But, as they had almost con- 
 stantly high winds, which, I am told, are common 
 in this late part of the season, they did not make 
 their appearance, until the second instant. - • 
 "f During the long stay which I made at that 
 unpleasant Island, we had little or nothing to eat, 
 excepting what we took from the water with our 
 nets. There were times, when we iiet with 
 little saccess. When the wind was high, we could 
 not set our nets ; and consequently took nothing. 
 One night the wind was so high, that it took the 
 only canoe which we had, to the other side of the 
 Lake, a distance of five miles, at least. We were 
 thus deprived of the means of setting our nets. 
 On the eighth day after this disaster, Provi- 
 dence sent an Indian to the place of our en- 
 campment, who lent us his canoe to go in search 
 of ours, which our people found, uninjured. 
 While we had no canoe, we were under the 
 disagreeable necessity of living upon the fish 
 which we had left on the beach, when we took 
 them in plenty. They had, by this time, become 
 almost putrid. Unsavoury, however, as they 
 were, they did not last so long as we could have 
 wished; for, when they were expended, we had 
 nothing to eat, until a kind Providence sent a 
 black bear near oar tents. One of my men fired, 
 
» 
 
 )lc, v.an 
 ost con 
 common 
 )t make 
 
 at that 
 to eat, 
 vhh our 
 ct with 
 7e could 
 lothinff. 
 Dok the 
 ! of the 
 '^e were 
 ir nets. 
 Provi- 
 our en- 
 search 
 injured, 
 er the 
 le fish 
 e took 
 
 become 
 » they 
 3 have 
 ve had 
 sent a 
 1 fired, 
 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 55 
 
 and killed him, which was a blessing, for which 
 we endeavoured to be thankful. We considered 
 it sent by Heaven ; and felt, that we deserved not 
 such a favour. But ^he rain descends on the un- 
 just as well as the just. — Yesterday, it snowed, 
 during most of the day, which prevented us from 
 decamping. But early this morning, without re- 
 luctance, we left the solitary Island, where many 
 a moment of ennui passed over me. As I had 
 no other book, I read during my stay there the 
 greater part of the Bible. This afternoon, we 
 meet two men, in a small canoe, from Swan 
 River, loaded with provisions, for the people 
 of the Red Deer River. We did not suffer so good 
 an opportunity, for furnishing ourselves with a 
 sufficiency of food, to sustain us until we should 
 meet with another supply, to pass unimproved. 
 How delicious is food to a person who is near 
 famishing ! But there are thousands, who know 
 not how to prize abundance, because they have 
 never experienced the distresses of want. 
 
 Thursday, October 9. Little Swan River. Yes- 
 terday, on account of high winds, we could not 
 leave our encampment ; but early this morning, 
 we embarked on board of our canoes, and at 
 twelve, left Little Lake Winipick, and entered 
 this river, which is eight or ten rods wide, very 
 shallow, and full of rapids. I therefore debark- 
 
^^ 
 
 56 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 4 
 
 :' 
 
 
 ed, and walked along on the beach about four miles, 
 in the snow, mud and water. The people, also, 
 for want of a sufficiency of water, were obliged to 
 debark, and drag their canoes up the shallow 
 places. But we are now encamped around a 
 large fire, with plenty of food ; I have given to 
 each of the people a dram, and we have all ceas- 
 ed to think of the fatigue and trouble of the day. 
 To make a place to lie down, the people scrape 
 away the snow, and lay down a few branches ot 
 the pine, such as this country in every part pro- 
 duces ; and on this we spread a blanket or two, 
 and cover ourselves with another. A day of hard 
 labour, and of great fatigue, will enable a person 
 to sleep soundly, on such a bed ; and to obtain 
 refreshment, such as a sluggard will seek for in 
 vain, on a bed of down. 
 
 Friday., 10. Swan River Fort. In the morn- 
 ing we crossed Swan Lake, which is nearly eight 
 miles long, and then entered the Great Swan 
 River. This river is about eleven rods wide ; 
 there is a sufficiency of water, and there is no 
 rapid from its mouth to the fort, a distance of 
 twelve miles. The country adjoining, is low, and 
 in many places, swampy, and the soil is rich. 
 Mons. Perigne, the superintendant of the fort, has 
 a tolerable kitchen garden. The Hudson Bay 
 people, once came here ; but it is several years 
 
 :im . 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 57 
 
 since they abandoned the place. As they have 
 nothing to expect from the Company, but their 
 salaries, they seem, so far as I can learn, to make 
 but little exertion to extend their i^'ade, and, 
 thereby, to benefit their employers. H'-vj •<;;.' '^r 
 • Saturday, 11. The day has been employed in 
 fitting out Mons. Perigne, who, with six labouring 
 men, is to go and build a fort, about fifty miles 
 up this river, where they will pass the winter. A 
 few miles from this, there is a salt spring, by boil- 
 ing down the water of which, tolerable salt is 
 made. It is less strong than that brought from 
 Canada ; but, used in sufficient ouantity, it will 
 preserve meat very well. ' * "^ ... ....x< .vv+ 
 
 Sunday, 12. The people destined to build a 
 fort up the river, left us to day. I shall remain 
 here until some persons arrive from Alexandria, 
 which is situated nearly one hundred miles to the 
 westward of this, among the Prairies. There I 
 shall pass the winter, with Mr. M'^Leod, or go 
 and build by the side of the Hudson Bay people, 
 who are about three leagues distant from him. 
 — Our men shoot a few hares and ducks. 
 
 Thursday, 16. We have taken a few fish 
 out of this river, with nets. This evening, two 
 men on horses arrived from Alexandria, by whom 
 I received a letter from Mr. M^Leod, requesting 
 me to accompany them to that place. 
 
 8 
 
 '^f 
 
 \ h 
 
58 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ,:' s ,'! 
 
 Saturday, IS. Second crossing place in the Swan 
 River. In the morning we left the fort. The 
 country which we have passed through, is low ; 
 and the timber, consisting of poplar, aspin, birch, 
 willow, pine and an inferiour kind of maple, is 
 small. Of the sap of the maple, sugar is made ; 
 but its quality is not equal to that, produced 
 from the real maple. >• >- y,ui4A hr.r iru.<'t w-.arjfu 
 Monday, 20. Bird Mountain. Here Mons. 
 Pcrigne and others are building a fort. Yester- 
 day and to day, our way has been through prai- 
 ries, interrupted occasionally, by small groves of 
 wood. Cranes and Pheasants are to be seen in 
 the prairies ; and to day, I have also seen and 
 fired at eight Elk, without having killed any of 
 them. They are about the size of a cow, and of 
 a light grey colour. The males, which have long 
 branching horns, are animals of a noble and majes- 
 tick appearance. .v-t..^ 
 
 J., Wednesday, 22. The foot of a high hill, and 
 near a small Lake. The waters of this lake 
 have a sulphureous taste. In the morning, we 
 left Swan River on our right, after having 
 crossed it on a raft, made by tying several dry 
 trees together. Since leaving that river the 
 country appears more hilly, and almost destitute 
 of timber of any kind. Cranes and pheasants 
 arc to be seen, iiXGij where. I'w «{?, .Hpf'-'.-wi n* ^f 
 
* 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 59 
 
 ' Thursday^23. Alexandria. We arrived here 
 in the afternoon ; and I am happy to find myself, 
 at length, at the end of my journey, and where I 
 hope to pass a few months, at least, in quietness. 
 The fort is built on a small rise of ground, on the 
 bank of the Assiniboine, or Upper Red River, 
 that separates it from a beautiful prairie, about 
 fen miles long, and from one to four bi'oad, which 
 is as level as the floor of a house. At a little 
 distance behind the fort, are small groves of 
 birch, poplar, aspin and pine. On the whole, 
 the scenery around it, is delightful. The fort is 
 sixteen rods in length, by twelve in breadth ; 
 the house?, stores, &c., are well built, are plaister- 
 cd on the inside and outside, and are washed over 
 with a white earth, which answers nearly as well 
 vs lime, for white washing. This earth is found, 
 in certain places, in all parts of this country. — 
 Here horses are to be bousrht of the Natives 
 for a mere trifle. They are well built, strong, and 
 tolerably fleet. /^ * tw&k^ f^'A'V^u**^ »t»«, Ui^i\(Jt»>Ahx',\;^ 
 
 ' This place lies in Latitude 52" north, and in 
 103** west Longitude. Mr. M^Leod is now gone 
 to fort Dauphine, on horse back, which lies only 
 four days' march from this, over land ; yet it is 
 nearly two months, since f passed iherc in a 
 
 iiJ: 
 
■# 
 
 60 
 
 HARMON 8 JOURNAL. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ":\i.:\ 
 
 »f Tuesday, 28. Mr. M<^Leod and company 
 have just returned from fort Dauphine ; and I 
 am happy in meeting him» after so loqg a sep- 
 aration, and he appears to be pleased to see me, 
 safely here. From the time that I was left at the 
 Encampment Island until now, I have had no 
 person with whom I could converse in English ; 
 and I am not yet able tp converse in French, 
 though I can read it tolerably well. .^-^ ,**-.-; 
 Smday, JSTovember 9. Qn the 30th ultimo, I 
 set ofij in company with four Canadians, on hor^^ 
 back, for Swan River fort. The day we left 
 this, it snowed and raired, which caused us tp 
 pass a very disagreeable night, as we had noth- 
 ing but our wet blankets with which to cover 
 ourselves. The people went down for goods ; 
 and as there is no person there who can rpad and 
 write, I went to deliver out such articles as we 
 are in immediate want of here. , „, .. ..,,, 
 
 Sunday, 16. The Indians who come to this 
 establishment are Crees and Assiniboins. The 
 principal part of the former, generally remain in 
 the woody part of the country, and hunt the 
 moose, elk, beaver, &c. and the latter remain in 
 the large prairies, and hunt buffaloes, wolves, &;c. 
 Last Wednesday, twelve families of Creea and 
 .\s9inib0ins came from the large prairies, and let 
 us have furs and provisions. Both the men and 
 
% 
 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 61 
 
 women have been drinking, ever since, and their 
 noise is very disagreeabJe ; for they talk, sing and 
 cry, at the same time. — Our men play at cards on 
 the skbbath, the same as on any other day. For 
 such improper conduct, I once reproved them ; 
 but their reply was, there is oo sabbath in this 
 country, and, they added, no God nor devil ; and 
 their behaviour but too plainly shows, that they 
 spoke as they think* It is a lamentable fact, that 
 those who have been for any considerable time 
 in this savage country, lay aside a greater part 
 of the regulations of civilized and christian peo- 
 ple, and behave little better than the savages. 
 It is true, we have it not at all times in our 
 power, to observe the sabbath As we ought, as 
 the Natives come to our establishments as often 
 on that day, ds any other ; and when they do 
 come, they must be attended to, and their wants 
 must be supplied. We are, also, frequently under 
 the necessity of travelling on the sabbath. But 
 it is likewise true, that, if we were rightly dis- 
 posed, our minds might, on this day, be almost 
 wb jy occupied with divine things. I must, 
 therefore, acknowledge, that wc have no rea- 
 sonable excuse for violating the sabbath, as we 
 
 ^11 do. ^ \J*10ifH '»^ *« »i -*« »'->r«V .vt«. niftrt. 
 
 Wednesday^ 19. Last night, there fell about 
 four inches of snow, which is the first that we 
 
 ;'.1 
 

 62 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 ll f H 
 
 have had, this season. — Yesterday, eight families 
 of Crees came in. While drinking, one of their 
 women, who had a sharp pointed knife about her, 
 fell down, and drove it nearly two inches into her 
 side ; but the wound is not thought to be mortal. 
 To see a house fuH of drunken Indians, consisting 
 of men, women and children, is a most unpleasant 
 sight ; for, in that condition, they often wrangle, 
 pull each other by the hair, and fight. At some 
 times, ten or twelve, of both sexes, may be seen, 
 fighting each other promiscuously, until at last, 
 they all fall on the floor, one upon another, some 
 spilling rum out of a small kettle or dish, which 
 they hold in their hands, while others are throw- 
 ing up what they have just drunk. To add to 
 this uproar, a number of children, some on their 
 mothers' shoulders, and others running about and 
 taking hold of their clothes, are constantly bawl- 
 ing, the older ones, through fear that their par- 
 ents may be stabbed, or that some other misfor- 
 tune may befal them, in the fray. These shrieks 
 of the children, form a very unpleasant chorus to 
 the brutal noise kept up by their drunken par- 
 ents, who are engaged in the squabble. 
 
 Sunday^ JYovember 30. This, being St. An- 
 t!rew's day, which is a (vie among the Scotch, and 
 our Bourgeois^ Mr. M^Leod, belonging to that 
 nation, the people of the fort, agreeably to the 
 
 fi 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 63 
 
 families 
 of their 
 ►out her, 
 
 into her 
 
 mortal, 
 onsisting: 
 pleasant 
 wrangle, 
 At some 
 be seen, 
 
 at last, 
 er, some 
 1, which 
 3 throw- 
 ) add to 
 on their 
 30ut and 
 \y bawl- 
 leir par- 
 • misfor- 
 
 shrieks 
 lorus to 
 :ei) par- 
 
 St. An- 
 tch, and 
 to that 
 ' to the 
 
 custom of the country, early in the morning, pre- 
 sented him with a cross, &c. and at the same 
 time, a number of others, who were at his door, 
 discharged a volley or two of muskets. Soon af- 
 ter, they were invited into the hall, where they 
 received a reasonable dram, after which, Mr. 
 M'^Leod made them a present of a sufficiency of 
 spirits, to keep them merry during the remainder 
 of the day, which they drank at their own house. 
 In the evening, they were invited to dance in the 
 hall ; and during it, they received several flagons 
 of spirits. They behaved with considerable pro- 
 priety, until about eleven o'clock, when their 
 heads had become heated, by the great quantity 
 of spiritou;} liquor which they had drunk, during 
 the course of the day and evening. Some of 
 them became quarrelsome, as the Canadians gen- 
 erally are, when intoxicated, and to high words, 
 blows soon succeeded; and finally, two battles 
 were fought, which put an end to this truly genteel, 
 North Western ball. **{*»<»'< v.^ i;;.j(t.«»j,> is ^ 9i «»,.;.> 
 if'^ Tuesday, December 2. As yet, we have only a 
 few inches of snow. Yesterday morning, accom- 
 panied by six men on horse-back, I went to the 
 lodge or tent of one of our hunters. The people 
 went for meat, and I, for the pleasure of riding, 
 and seeing the country. We arrived at the place 
 where the Indian was encamped, just as tho sun 
 
 
64 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 was sinking below tli(5 horizon, and when the hun- || 
 ter was about to take a sweat, which is frequently 
 done in the following manner. The women make 
 a kind of hut, of bended willows, which is nearly 
 circular, and if for one or two persons only, not 
 more than fifteen feet in circumference, and three 
 or four in height. Over these, they lay the skins 
 of the buifaloe, Sic. and in the centre of the hut, 
 they place heated stones. The Indian then en- 
 ters, perfectly naked, with a dish of water in his 
 hand, a little of which, he occasionally throws on 
 the hot stones, to create steam, which, in connex- 
 ion with the heat, puts him into a profuse perspi- 
 ration. In this situation he will remain, for about 
 an hour ; but a person unaccustomed to endure 
 such heat, could not sustain it for half that time. 
 They sweat themselves in this manner, they say, 
 in order that their limbs may become more 8U|> 
 pie, and they more alert, in pursuing animals, <. 
 
 which they are desirous of killing. They, also, 
 consider sweating a powerful remedy, for the most 
 of diseases. As they come from sweating, they 
 frequently plunge into a river, or rub themselves 
 over with snow. The country we passed 
 through, is large prairies, with here and there 
 a grove of small trees. This evening we return- 
 ed to the fort ; and the horses of our people 
 were loaded with the flesh of the moose and elk. 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 65 
 
 The buffaloes are as yet a considerable distance 
 farther, out in the spacious prairies. Nothing but 
 severtj cold weather will drive them into the 
 woodjr part of the country, to which they will 
 then come, in order to be less exposed to the 
 wind and weather, than they would be, to remain 
 in the open plains. 
 
 Sunday, 21. There is now J.bout a foot of 
 snow on the ground; and, on th<j 11th instant, 
 I left this place, in company with ieven Canadians, 
 for Swan River fort. Each man had a sledge, 
 drawn by two dogs, loaded with one hundred and 
 Mty pounds weight of furs, besides provisions to 
 serve man and beast, to perform the trip. On 
 our return, the sledges were loaded with goods. 
 We reached our fort, this afternoon, where 1 am 
 happy to find Mr. Hugh M<^Gillis, on a visit from 
 Red Deer River, and also, two men with letters, 
 from Fort des Prairies, or Sisiscatchwin River. 
 The former place, lies about one hundred and 
 fifty miles from this, and the latter, four or five 
 hundred, in nearly a north direction. 
 
 Wednesday, 24. Yesterday, I went to see 
 the fort of the Hudson Bay Company, which is 
 siti/atcd about nine miles down this river, and is 
 in the charge of a Mr. Sutherland. He has a 
 woman of this country, for a wife, who, I was 
 pleased to find, could speak the English language, 
 
 9 
 

 86 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 r 
 
 tolerably well. I understand, also, that she can 
 both read and write it, which she learned to do at 
 Hudson's Baj, where the Company have a school. 
 She speaks, likewise, the Cree and Sauteux lan- 
 guages. She appears to possess natural good 
 sense, and is far from being deficient, in required 
 knowledge. * " ' • • 
 
 Friday^ January 2, '*^^ The weather, 
 for several days past, hat '^ecn severely cold. 
 Yesterday, being the commencement of a new 
 year, our people, according to a Canadian custom, 
 which is to get drunk if possible, spent the day 
 in drinking, and danced in the evening; but 
 there was neither scratching nor fighting, on this 
 occasion. . - 
 
 Sunday t 4. In the morning, the greater part 
 of our people, consisting of men, women and chil- 
 dren, were sent away to pass the remainder of 
 the winter, about two days' march from this, in 
 the prairie. They will subsist on the flesh of the 
 buifaloe, which thev will themselves kill in abund- 
 anco> During their stay there, they will reside 
 in tents or lodges, made of the skins of the buffa- 
 loe, moose or elk. These skins, after hr.ving been 
 dressed, are sewed together ; and one tent yfiW 
 contain from ten to twenty five of them. These 
 tents are erected on poles, and assume the form of 
 a sugar loaf. Ten or fifteen persons will residd* in 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 6t 
 
 one of them; for while there, they are either sit- 
 ting or lying down. 
 
 The Indians, who come to this establishment, 
 are, as has been already observed, Crees and As- 
 siniboins ; or as some call them, Kinistinoes and 
 Stone Indians. Both of them are numerous 
 tribes ; and as they often meet, and some of them 
 intermarry, their manners and customs are simi- 
 lar ; but there is no resemblance in their lan- 
 guages. Both tribes are well furnished with 
 horses. The Assiniboins, however, are, by far, 
 the best horsemen; they never go any distance 
 on foot, and it is generally on horse back, that 
 they kill their game. ♦'"** '^ '*" ' ''' '-'^' '''' 
 • They mount their horses, and run down, and 
 kill the buffaloe, and some other animals, with 
 bows and arrows, which they find every way as 
 convenient for this purpose, as lire arms. But the 
 Crees, when they can procurcSRliem, always make 
 use of guns. Their clothing consists of leggins of 
 cloth or dressed Antelope skins, a shirt or frock 
 of the same materials, and a blanket or dressed 
 Buffaloe skin, which they wrap round their bodies, 
 and tie about their waists. To the above they 
 will often add a cap or bonnet, of the wolf skin, 
 and shoes for their (eet m^*''' ^ ' ' ^y. 
 
 Last evening, I wrote to two fellow travellers 
 with me from Montreal ; and the letters will be 
 
6§ 
 
 HAUMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 M[ 
 
 taken to them by the winter express, which 
 leaves this, tomorrow, and is to pass by the way of 
 Fortdes Prairies, thence to the Enghsh River, and 
 thence directly to Athabasca. And, I am inform- 
 ed, there is an express, which every year leaves 
 Athabasca, in the month of December, and passes 
 through the whole country called the orth West, 
 and in the latter part of March, reach the Soult 
 St. Maries. Thus the gentlemen who come up 
 from Montreal, obtain from the interiour, intelli- 
 gence respecting the transactions of the preceding 
 summer and fall much earlier than they could 
 otherwise do. This information, it is importj^nt 
 that they receive, as soon as possible. This con- 
 veyance of intelligence, extending^ to, the distan(;e 
 of nearly three thousand miles, is attended^ .vvith 
 but a trifling expense to the Company. ? .- — 
 Thursday, 15. Beautiful weather. On the 
 eleventh, I accompanied six of our people to the 
 tent of one of our hunters ; and the day following, 
 th^y returned with their sledges loaded with 
 meat ; but I remained, to go along with the 
 hunter, farther in the prairie. Accordingly, the 
 next day, I proceeded with him, and saw, in dif- 
 ferent herds, at least a thousand bufialoes, graz- 
 ing. They would allow us to come within a few 
 rods of them before jthey would leave their pla- 
 ces. At this season, they arc tame, and it is not 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 69 
 
 at all dangerous to go among them. But, in the 
 fore part of the summer, ^vhich is their rutting sea- 
 son, it is quite the reverse. Then, if they [)er- 
 ceive a human being, the males will pursue him, 
 and if they can overtake, will trample him under 
 their feet, or pierce their horns through his 
 body. • i. ;• * '^. . ' ' ^.* . - . . 
 
 The male buffaloe, when fat, will weigh from 
 one thousand, to fifteen hundred pounds, and 
 the female, from eight hundred, to a thousand. 
 Their meat is excellent eating; but is not gene- 
 rally considered so delicious, as that of the moose. 
 
 Wednesday, February II. On the 1st inst. ac- 
 companied by eight of our people, and one of thd 
 Natives as a guide, I. set otF, with a small assort- 
 ment of goods, to go and trade with about fifty 
 families of Crees and Assiniboins. In going to 
 their camp or village, we were three days, and at 
 all times, in an open country. After we had en- 
 camped the first night, there came on a terrible 
 storm of snow, accompanied by a strong and cold 
 north wind ; and as we were in an open plain, we 
 had nothing to shelter us from the violence of the 
 weather. . In the morning, we were covered with 
 snow, a foot in depth. Our people, however, soon 
 harnessed the dogs ; and we proceeded, hoping to 
 ^yarm ourselves, by running. This we found it 
 difficult to do, as the wind was strong, and directly 
 
 'if 
 
 *| 
 
 t ,' 
 
 f,i^ 
 
^ 
 
 |i tt 
 
 .- 
 
 70 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 in our faces. At the close of the day, after we 
 had encamped, our guide killed a fat buflfaloe, 
 which supplied food, both to men and beasts. 
 While eating it around a large fire, we almost for- 
 got the suffering which we endured, by the cold of 
 the preceding night and morning ; and, if we were 
 not thankful for the blessing bestowed upon us, we 
 were, at least, glad to enjoy it. After having pass- 
 ed one or two cold days without eating, there is a 
 relish in food to which the sons of indolence and 
 of pleasure, are perfect strangers ; and which they 
 
 can purchase only, at the expense of toil and of 
 hardship, '^"t »■'♦ •ifrt'^s'vAT*^*'*. t .VAjjVft^^Uvvvi - 
 
 When we had approached within about a mile 
 of the camp of the Natives, ten or twelve of their 
 Chiefs, or most respectable men among them, 
 came on horseback, to meet, and conduct us to 
 their dwellings. We arrived at them, through a 
 crowd of people, who hailed us with a shout of 
 joy. Immediately after our arrival, the principal 
 Chief of the village sent his son, to invite me and 
 my h.terpreter to his tent. As soon as we had en- 
 tered it, and were seated, the respectable old 
 Chief caused meat and berries, and the best of 
 every thing which he had, to be set before us. Be- 
 fore we had eaten much, we were sent for to an- 
 other tent, where we received a similar treatment ; 
 and from this, we were invited to another ; and so 
 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 71 
 
 after we 
 ; buffaloe, 
 id beasts, 
 ilmost for- 
 •le cold of 
 f we were 
 >on us, we 
 iving pass- 
 there is a 
 ence and 
 hich they 
 m1 and of 
 
 »ut a mile 
 e of their 
 ig them, 
 ict us to 
 hrough a 
 
 shout of 
 principal 
 
 me and 
 3 had en- 
 able old 
 1 best of 
 
 M 
 
 'M 
 
 .1 
 
 on, till we had been to more than half a dozen. 
 At all these, we ate a little, and smoked our 
 pipes; for, my interpreter iiilor ned me, tL^y 
 would be greatly affronted, and think that we de- 
 spised them, if we refused to taste of every thing 
 which was set before us. Hospitality to strangers, 
 is among the Indian virtues. — During several days 
 that we remained with these people, we were 
 treated with more real politeness, than is com- 
 monly shown to strangers, in the civilized part of 
 
 the world. , ji^^j. ^.:;.t; ^ * a^it,* > >;ai -ia-nui 
 While I was at the camp of the Natives, 1 
 was invited to attend and see them dance. The 
 dancers were about thirty in number, and were all 
 clothed with the skins of the Antelope, dressed, 
 which were nearly as white as snow ; and upon 
 their heads they sprinkled a white earth, which 
 gave them a very genteel appearance. Their 
 dance was conducted in the following manner. A 
 man, nearly forty years of age, rose with his tom- 
 ahawk in his hand, and made, with a very distinct 
 voice, a long harangue. He recounted all the 
 noble exploits which he had achieved, in the sev- 
 eral war-parties with which he had engaged his 
 enemies ; and he made ment'on of two persons, in 
 particular, whom he first killed, and then took off 
 their scalps ; and for each of these, he gave a 
 blow with his tomahawk against a post, which was 
 
 
72 
 
 HARAION S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 set up, expressly for that purpost;, near the cen- 
 ter of the tent. And now the miisick began, 
 which consisted of tambourines, and the shaking of 
 bells, accompanied by singing. Soon after, the 
 man who had made the harangue, began the dance, 
 with great majesty ; then another arose, and join- 
 ed him ; and shortly after, another ; and so on, one 
 after another, until there Avere twelve or fifteen 
 up, who al! danced around a small fire, that was 
 in the centre of the tent. While dancing, they 
 made many savage gestures and shrieks, such as 
 thcv are in the habit of makinfr, when they encoun- 
 ter their enemies. In this course ihcy continued, 
 for nearly an hour, when ihcy took their sweats, 
 and another party got up, and went through with 
 the same ceremonies. Their dancing and singing, 
 however, appeared, to be a succession of the same 
 things ; and therefore after having remained with 
 them two or throe hours, I returned to my lodg- 
 ings ; and how long they continued their amuse- 
 ment, 1 cannot r.ay, ' 
 
 In this excursion, we aaw butfaloes in abun- 
 dance ; and Avhen on a small rise of ground, I think 
 I may with truth affirm, that there were in view, 
 grazing on tlie Hurroundirjg plains, at least five 
 thousand of them. Of these animals, we killed 
 what wo wanted for our own subsistence, and the 
 support of our dogs ;; and ithis evening, we return^ 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 ed to the i'ort, well pleased with our jaunt, loaded 
 with furs and provisions, and without having re- 
 ceived the least affront or the smallest injury from 
 tlie Natives, notwithstanding most of them became 
 intoxicated with the spirits, with whici) we suppli- 
 ed them. V; 
 - Tuesday, February 17. We have now about 
 a i'oot and an half of snow on the ground. — Mr. 
 Monteur, accompanied by two Canadians, arrived, 
 with letters from our friends, in Fort des Prairies. 
 — This morning, one of our people killed a buffa- 
 loc in the Prairie, opposite to the fort; and an- 
 other came within ten rods of the fort gate, when 
 the dogs pursued hi a?, and he ran off. ^ 
 ^ Thursday^ J 9. This day, I am twenty three 
 years of age, and iiow rapidly does this space of 
 time appear to have passed away ! It seems as 
 if it were but. yesterday, that I was a child. The 
 truth is, the time tliat we are allowed to remain 
 in this ileeting world is so short, even if we should 
 be permitted to reach the utmost boundary of hu- 
 man life, that a person can scarcely have passed 
 the ihreshhold of existence, before he must set his 
 houae in onhr to die. • * - -^ 
 Friday^ 20.. During the lr,st night, we sat up 
 to deal out spirits to the Indians. One of them has 
 his own daujL^^liter for a wife, and her mother at the 
 same time! Incest, however, is a crime, of which 
 
 10 
 
 ; 1 
 
 * 
 
 
 
n 
 
 iIAKlV10x\ S JOURNAL. 
 
 ■ -i!! 
 
 i.' 
 
 i^^- f- 
 
 f I'. 
 
 I ■ V 
 
 m 
 
 the Indians of this quarter are not often guilty. 
 When one of them does commit it, he is regarded 
 by the rest of his tribe, as void of sense. 
 ■' Saturday, March 14. The greater part of the 
 snow is now dissolved. On the sixth inst. accom- 
 panied by eighteen of our people, I left this, to go 
 to Swan River fort. We had thirty sledges, some 
 drawn by horses, and some by dogs, which were 
 loaded with furs and provisions. ^ 
 
 - Saturday, jipril 4. Swan River Fort. Here 
 I arrived this afternoon, and have come to pass 
 the remainder of the spring. While at Alexan- 
 dria, my time passed agreeably in company with 
 A. N. M^^Leod, Esq. who is a sensible man, and an 
 agreeable companion. He appeared desirous of 
 instructing me in what was most necessary to be 
 known, respecting the aflfairs of this country ; and 
 a taste for reading 1 owe, in a considerable degree, 
 to the influence of his example. These, with many 
 other favours, which he was pleased to shoW' me, 
 I shall ever hold in grateful remembrance. — But 
 now I am comparatively alone, there being no 
 person here, able to speak a word of English ; and 
 as I have not been much in the company of those 
 who speak the French language, I do not as yety 
 understand it very well. Happily for me, I have 
 a few books; and in perusing them, I shall pase 
 most of my leisure moments. . . , . . , ^f .-4 ^. 
 
 * 
 
 
HARMON S JOURNAI* 
 
 75 
 
 * Monday, 6. I have taken a ride on horseback, 
 to a place where our people are making sugar. 
 My path led me over a small prairie, and through 
 a wood, where I saw a great variety of birds, that 
 were strairyng their tuneful throats, as if to wel- 
 come the return of another spring; small animals, 
 also, were running about, or skipping from tree to 
 tree, and at the same time, were to be seen swans, 
 bustards, duckc, &c. swimming about in the river 
 and ponds. All thepe things together, rendered 
 my ramble beyond expression delightful. 
 
 - Friday, 10. Fine pleasant weather. This 
 afternoon, I took a solitary, yet pleasing walk, to 
 the ruins of a fort, which was abandoned, a few 
 years since, by the Hudson Bay people, to whom 
 it belonged, but who do not now come into this 
 part of the country. While surveying these ru- 
 ins, I could not avoid reflecting on the short dura- 
 tion of every thing in this fleeting and perishing 
 world. I then went to a spot, where a number 
 of their people had been interred, far from their 
 native country, their friends and relations! And 
 while I was lamenting their sad fate, ray blood 
 chilled at the thought, that what had happei^ed 
 to them might, very probably, befal me also. 
 But my prayer shall ever be, that a merciful God 
 will, in duo time, restore mc to my friends and re- 
 
 s If 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
harmok's jouri^al. 
 
 n 
 
 lations, in ^-^od health, und with an unblemished 
 charr;H^;i% •- ■■ • - --" •'• " ' 
 
 • Snadoijy 19. ^i\ Friday last, there fell nearly 
 a foot of snow, which, however, was soon dissolv- 
 ed ; and it caused the river to overflow its banks 
 to such a distance, that our people who were mak- 
 ing sugar, were obliged to leave the woods and 
 to return to the fort. ..-«;• ",'<-. S-»«- ♦i^h* 
 
 Tuesday^ 21. All the snow |ias left us ; and 
 we are again favoured with line weather. The 
 last night, the ice in this river broke up. 
 
 Monday^ 27. It has snowed all day, and has 
 fallen to the depth of six inches. — I now begin to 
 feel the want of books, having brought but few 
 with me, on account of the short time that I ex- 
 pect to remain here. 
 
 Saturday, May 2. It has rained all day, 
 which is the first time that any has fallen, since 
 the last autumn. — As \. have but little bufJness 
 that requires my attention, I employ the incffter 
 part of my time in reading the bible, and in study- 
 ing the French language. 
 
 Sunday, 10. It has rained constantly, during 
 three successive days, which has caused the wa- 
 ter in the river, since yesterday, to rise more than 
 four (eei. — Yesterday, one of my men went out to 
 shoot duc'n 3, and lost his way, and was therefore un- 
 der the necessity of j.assing the night in the woods, 
 
 :psi- r-H 
 
5:-fA>?M0«'S JOURNAL. 
 
 77 
 
 wiiho'M iJiy covering from the cold ar;d the rain, 
 which poured down in torrents. This morning, how- 
 ever, by chance, or rather directed by an all pro- 
 tecting Providence, he fell upc.5 a small foot path, 
 which brought him directly to the fort, where he 
 was not a little pleased to arrive. Experience 
 only can teach us how to value such a deliver- 
 a nee. 
 
 Wednesday, 13. The late rains have caused 
 this river to overflow its banks to such an uncom- 
 mon distance, that when I arose this morning, to 
 my surprise, I found seven inches of water, on the 
 first floor of 'he house, whrch is an event that the 
 oldest person here does not remember before to 
 have witnessed. We arc obliged to leave the 
 fort, and to pitch our tents on a small rise of 
 groundj at no great distance off, where we shall 
 r. main, until the deluge is abated. - « 
 
 Friday, 15. Sent five men with 9. canoe, two 
 days march up this river, for Mr. M'^Leod and 
 company, as the face of the country extensively, 
 lies under water. * 
 
 Wednesday, 20. The water has left the fort ; 
 and with pleasure, we leave our tcnls, to occupy 
 our former dwellings. This afternoon Mr. M^ 
 Leod, and company, arrived, and arc thus far on 
 their way to the Grand Poi tage. 
 
 Tuesday, 26. Yesterday, our people finished 
 
 
 i^i 
 
■V 
 
 78 
 
 JlAUMO^ S .lOUttNAL. 
 
 
 ■'JL_!_ 
 
 makiK^^ our iurs into packs, oi nuicly pounds 
 weight eacli. Two or throe of these make a load 
 for a man, to carry across the portages. This 
 morning, all the hands, destined to this service, 
 •^mbarked on board of five canoes, for Head-qimr- 
 ters. To Mr. M<=Leod, I delivered a packet of 
 letters, to be forwarded to my friends, who reside 
 at Vcrgcnne^ in the state of Vermont, and tomor- 
 row, I shiiii set out for Alexandria, where I ex- 
 pect to pass the ensuing summer, and to superin- 
 tend the nfifairs of that place and of this, yntii the 
 next atifumn. .. -tr^.*^,.. t-^ 
 
 Monday, June 1. Accompanied by two men, 
 I at rived at Alexandria, this afternoon ; and I here 
 found six families of Crees, encamped about the 
 fort. I have with ne one clerk, two interpreters 
 and five labouring men, also six women and tbir- 
 t^fu children, belonging ;o oui people, and a num- 
 ber of women and children beionirirjg to the Na- 
 tives, whose husbands bav i gone to make war up- 
 on the Rapid Indian^^ oJ' as they rail themselves, 
 Paw-is-tick 1-^-ne-wuck. This is a small but brave 
 tr-'be, who remain a ccnsiderable dist^.nce out in 
 the large prairies, atid tov/ard the upper part of 
 the Missouri river. vVe 'iiaU have nearly one hun- 
 dred mouths to fill, for tLo ^:;reater part of the 
 summer, out of our store ; but to furnish the 
 means, we have hired two of the Natives to hunt 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 79 
 
 for us, during the season ; and moose, elk, &c. are 
 considerably numerous in this vicinity. We hope, 
 there/ore, that we shall not want for the means of 
 subsistence. Buffaloes have now returned several 
 days' march from this place, into the spacious 
 prairies ; but this is no serious loss to us, since, if 
 they were near they would be but indifferent food, 
 as at this season of the year, they are always lean, 
 and consequently, rank and tough. '• 
 
 ^i^Vednesday, 10.^ It is currently reported and 
 believed, that the Rapid Indians are forming a 
 war-party, in order to come against the Indians 
 of this quarter^ whom they consider, and I think 
 with suflicieni reason, as their enemies. Should 
 they come this way, they will as probably fall 
 uptT us m upon the Natives themselves ; for 
 they say, that we furniuh the Crees and Assiniboins 
 with what fire arms they want, while they get 
 but few. I have, therefore, thought it expedient 
 to direct our people, to bnild block-houses over 
 the ibrt gates, and to put the bastions in order, 
 that we may be prepared to defend ourselves, in 
 case of an attack./ !«» 
 
 Sunday^ 14. This afternoon, a number of tho^> 
 Natives danced in the fort. Their dance was 
 conducted in the following manner. Two stakes 
 wore driven into the ground, about twenty feet 
 apart ; and as one person boat the drum, the oth- 
 
 ■ f L\ 
 
 , i 
 
 f i 1 
 
 L^_, 
 

 PO 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 !»l I 
 
 ors, consisting of men and women, danced round 
 these stakes. The men had a different step from 
 that of the women. The latter placed both 
 feet together, and first moved their heels forward 
 and then their toes, and thus went slowly round 
 the stakes. But the men rather hopped than 
 danced, and therefore went twice round the 
 stakes, while the women went once. They all 
 kept exact time with the music, for they have 
 excellent oars. Indeed, I believe that all their 
 senses are more acute than those of the white 
 people. ^ ■/,, 
 
 , Tlmrsday^ July 9. This day, there came here an 
 American, that, when a small child, was taken 
 from his parents, who then resided in the Illinois 
 country. He was kidnapped by the Sauteux, with 
 whom he has resided ever since ; and he speaks no 
 other language excepting theirs. He is now about 
 twenty years of » ^e, and is regarded as a chief 
 among that tribe* He dislikes to hear people 
 speak to him, respecting his white relations ; and 
 m every respect exceptmg his colour, he resem- 
 bles the savages, with whom he resides. He is 
 said to be an excellent hunter. He remains with 
 an old woman who, soon after he was taken from 
 his relations adopted him into her family *, and 
 they appear to be mutually as fond of each 
 other, as if they wore actually mother and son. . 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 81 
 
 •' Tliur^day^ 30. Different kinds of berries are 
 now ripe, such as strawberries, raspberries, 
 and what the Canadians call paires, which the 
 Natives denominate Mi-sas-qui-to-min-uck. The 
 last, if they are not the same in kind, exactly 
 resemble, in shape and taste, what in the New 
 Enirland states are called shad berries. When 
 they are found in the prairies, they glow on bush- 
 es, four or five feet high ; but in a thick wood they 
 often reach to the height of fifteen or twenty feet. 
 Of this wood, the Natives always make their ar- 
 rows. These berries, when properly dried by the 
 sun, have an agreeable taste, and are excellent to 
 mix with pimican. The Natives generally boil 
 them in the broihof fat meat ; and this constitutes 
 one of their most dainty dishes, and is introduced 
 at all their feasts. 
 
 Mr. A. N. M<^Leod has a son here named Al- 
 exander, who is nearly five years of age, and whose 
 Mother is of the tribe of the Rapid Indians. In my 
 leisure time, lam teaching him the rudiments of the 
 English language. The boy speaks the Sauteux 
 and Cree fluently, for a child ; and makes him- 
 self understood tolerably well, in the Assiniboin 
 Mnd French languages. In short, he is like most 
 of the children of this country, blessed with a re- 
 tentive memory, and learns very readily. 
 
 We have made about ten tons of hay, to feed 
 
 11 
 
 I f 
 
 t 
 
 , i 
 
 ' t 
 
 -1 *-' 
 
62 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 'I', 
 
 iil 
 
 '11 
 
 
 those ot our horses which we intend shall work, 
 during the winter season. The others live the 
 whole year, upon the grass which they find in 
 the prairies. In the winter, to procure it, they 
 must scrape away, with their feet, the snow, 
 which is generally eighteen inches deep, except- 
 ing on the highest hills, from which the wind, 
 drives most of it into the valleys. ^' 
 
 Thursday, AiLgust 27. All the provision 
 which we now have in the fort, consists of only 
 about fifteen pounds of pimican ; and when we 
 shall be able to add to our supply, God only knows. 
 All our dependance is on our hunters ; and it is 
 now a considerable time since they have killed any 
 thing, though moose and elk are numerous in this 
 vicinity. ^ . ... 
 
 Sunday, 30. Yesterday, thrre of our people 
 arrived from the Grand Portage, with letters 
 from Mr. M<=Leod, &c., which inform me, that 
 the above mentioned people, together with oth- 
 ers who remained at Swan River fort, were sent 
 off from head quarters, earlier than usual, with an 
 assortment of goods, supposing, that we might 
 need some articles, before the main brigade ar- 
 rives. , . V *,V . ft^.jr^.'*, I. .--: 
 
 Sunday, September 6. This is the third day. 
 during which it has rained, without the least 
 cessation.^ — There are five families of Crees, en- 
 
 :# 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 a3 
 
 camped about the fort, who have been continual- 
 ly drunk, during the last forty eight hours ; but 
 now they begin to be troublesome, for they have 
 nothing more to sell, yet they wish to continue 
 , drinking. ^ •" • •» ^'^ 
 
 One of ihe Indians, who w&s of the party that 
 Jast spring went to war, has recently come in. 
 When he arrived, his face was pairted entirely 
 black, which I am informed, is always their cus- 
 tom, when they return from such expeditions. 
 As he drew nigh to the fort, he began to sing a 
 war song. He Gtatcs, that his party, the Crees and 
 Assiniboins, have made great slaughter among 
 their enemies, the Rapid Indians, and are bring- 
 ing a number of their women and children home, 
 for slaves. He was sent forward, as he says, to 
 inform us of what they consider, glorious news. 
 
 Monday^ 7. More of the Indians, who have 
 been to war, have reached this place, and have 
 brought several slaves, and a few scalps, with 
 them. This afternoon, they danced and sung 
 their war songs. Agreeably to the custom of the 
 country, I gave them a few trifling articles, not as 
 a reward for having been to war, but because 
 they have done us honour, as they think, by dan 
 cing in our fort. - « 
 
 Sunday^ 27. It lias snowed and rained all 
 day. This afternoon, Mr. M<=Leod and company, 
 
 I 
 
 ")'?A 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 ■rr' 
 
 n: 
 
 — \x\ 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 /. 
 
 / 
 
 
 %J/ M^'£^ M 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 !f IIM IIIIIM 
 
 [ff i- 12.2 
 
 IT lj£ 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 -U ■ 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 /a 
 
 "cr-l 
 
 e. 
 
 el 
 
 ''^A 
 
 ^4 
 
 >/ 
 
 7 
 
 ■^ > 
 
 y 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4^03 
 
 4% 
 
 V 
 
 ^V 
 
 <h 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 <<^^>, 
 
 '^.^ 
 
 V 
 
 
 >^ 
 
p 
 

 VA 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 i>'^.i 
 
 <'.\ 
 
 ■f- 
 
 returned from tho Grand Portage, and delivered 
 to me letters from my friends in my native land ; 
 and I am happy in being informed, that they left 
 them blessed with good health. Self-banished^ 
 as I am, in this dreary country, and at such a dis- 
 tance from all I hold dear in this world, nothing 
 beside, could give me half the satisfaction which* 
 this intelligence affords. I also received several 
 letters from gentlemen in different parts of the 
 widely extended North West Country. -^ 
 
 Friday, October 2. Moniagne j^iseau, or the 
 Bird Mountain, In the morning, I left Alexan- 
 dria, on horse back, and arrived here this evening 
 where, by permission of Providence, I shall pass 
 the ensuing winter. I have with me three inter- 
 preters, six labouring men and two women. The 
 fort is built on the bank of Swan River, a little 
 more than fifty miles distant from its entrance in- 
 to Swan Lake. The Indians who frequent this 
 establishment are Sauteux, Crees and Mus-ca-goes, 
 all of whom speak nearly the same language. 
 Moose and elk are considerably numerous, in this 
 vicinity ; but buffaloes seldom come thus far, into 
 the woody country. '* ...'^^ ..a^y^ .*.. 
 
 Thursday, 29. On the 22nd instant, Mr. 
 M^Leod, with ten of his people, arrived on horse- 
 back; and on the day following, I accompanied 
 them to the lower fort, where I met Mr. William 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 85 
 
 delivered ^m 
 
 tive land ; m 
 
 they left J 
 -banished/ jH 
 
 ich a dis- H 
 
 , nothing ^| 
 3n which. WM 
 
 i several 8 
 
 s of the M 
 
 M, or the .« 
 
 't Alexan- S 
 
 3 evening m 
 shall pass ^^ 
 ree inter- J 
 
 3n. The m 
 
 , a little ;9 
 
 ranee in- 9 
 
 uent this '^ 
 
 s-ca-goes, « 
 
 anguage. M 
 IS, in this 1 
 
 far, into ^m 
 
 ant, Mr. H 
 
 3n horse- H 
 
 »mpanied ^| 
 William ■ 
 
 Henry, a clerk. Mr. M^Leod has also brought 
 another clerk into this country, by the name of 
 Frederick Goedike. This evening, Messrs. 
 M^Leod, Henry and myself, returned, but left 
 the people behind, whose horses are loaded with 
 goods, for this place and Alexandria. 
 ^ Tuesday, JYovember 3. Snow has fallen, to the 
 depth of three inches, which is the first that we 
 have had, this fall. = -- . 
 
 Thursday, 19. A foot and an half of snow has 
 fallen. 
 
 Wednesday, December 23. Clear and cold. On 
 the 16th inst. I went to Alexandria, where I pass- 
 ed several days agreeably, in the company of 
 Messrs. M*=Leod, Henry, and Goedike. We 
 have now more snow than we had at any time 
 the last winter. In consequence of lameness, I 
 returned on a sledge drawn by dogs. 
 
 Friday, 25. This being Christmas day, agree- 
 ably to the custom of the country, I gave our peo- 
 ple a dram, and a pint of spirits, each. ^«* ' 
 
 Monday, 28. Payet, one of my interpreters, 
 has taken one of the daughters of the Natives for 
 a wife ; and to her parents, he gave in rum, dry 
 goods, &c. to the value of two huhJrcd dollars. 
 No ceremonies attend the formation of such con- 
 nexions, as I have before remarked, excepting that 
 the bridegroom, at the time to retire to rest, shows 
 
 '?.!• 
 
 
 f 
 

 i 
 
 ,. f 
 
 86 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 «; ' 
 
 his bride where their common lodging place is ; 
 and they continue to cohabit, as long as both par- 
 ties choose, but no longer. One thing is secured 
 by this arrangement, which is by no means always 
 found in the civilized world, and that is, while per- 
 sons live together, in a state of wedlock, they will 
 live in harmony. "^ • ^ 
 
 Friday, January 1, 1802. This being the first 
 day of the year, in the morning, I gave the peo- 
 ple a dram or two, and a pint of rum each, to 
 drink in the course of the day, which enabled 
 them to pass it memly, although they had very 
 little to eat ; for our hunters say they can kill 
 nothing. One of them will not go out of his tent ; 
 for he imagines, that the Bad Spirit, as they call 
 the devil, is watching an opportunity to find him 
 in the open air, in order to devour him. What 
 will not imagination do ! 
 
 Saturday^ 9. Several days since, I sent a num- 
 ber of my people to Alexandria for meat, as neith- 
 er of my hunters kill any thing ; though tl^erc is 
 no scarcity of animals, in this vicinity. But they 
 have just returned, without any thin>r. They say 
 that the buffaloes, in consequence of the late mild 
 weather, have gone a considerable distance, into 
 the large prairie. We are therefore under the 
 necessity of subsisting on pounded meat, and dried 
 chokecherries. This latter article, is little better 
 
 ni .„-..•. n.j 
 
'4-s^ 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 87 
 
 than nothing. When we shall be in a better situ- 
 ation, God only knows. Hope, however, which 
 seldom abandons the wretched, denies us not her 
 comforting aid ; and past experience teaches .us, 
 that it is possible our circumstances may suddenly 
 change for the better. 
 
 Sunday, 17. Last evening, our people brought 
 from the tent of our hunter, the meat of a moose, 
 which lighted up a smile of joy upon our counte- 
 nances. We were happy to find, that a kind 
 Providence, instead of abandoning, had favoured 
 us with one of the richest dainties, that this coun- 
 try affords. It would be well if our joy was true 
 gratitude to our kind Benefactor. — There are 
 twelve persons in the fort ; and yet for the last 
 fifteen days, we have subsisted on what was scarce- 
 ly sufficient for two people ! These were cer- 
 tainly the darkest days that I ever experienced, 
 in this Oi any other country. . , .,ps*, 
 
 Tuesday, ]9. I have taken a walk, accompa- 
 nied by Payi*, a short distance from the fort, 
 where we found hazelnuts, still on the bushes, 
 in such plenty, that a person may easily gather a 
 bushel in the course of a day. I am told, that 
 when sheltered from the wind, all of them do not 
 fall off, until the month of May. 
 
 Monday, February I. For several days past, 
 the weather has been excessively cold ;. and thiis 
 
 I) 
 
88 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ;i>'^ 
 
 i: ^'! 
 
 
 ':' 
 
 has been, as I think, the coldest day that I ever 
 experienced. In fact, the weather is so severe, 
 that our hunters dare not venture out of their 
 tents, although they, as well as ourselves, have lit- 
 tle to eat. . . .* 
 
 Sunday^ 7. During the last three days, we 
 have subsisted on tallow and dried cherries. This 
 evening, my men returned from Alexandria, with 
 their sledges loaded with buffaloe meat ; and the 
 sight of it, was truly reviving. Had this favour 
 been withheld from us a few days longer, we must 
 have all miserably perished by famine. ^-^ 
 
 Monday^ 8. All the Indians of this place, ex- 
 cepting my hunters, have gone to pass about a 
 couple of 'months, as they are accustomed to do, 
 at this season, on their beloved food, the buffaloe. 
 „ Friday, 19. At present, thanks to the Giver 
 of all good, we have a pretty good stock of pro- 
 visions in store, and therefore expect not again to 
 want, this season. 
 
 Saturday, March 6. I have just returned from 
 a visit to my friends at Alexandria, where I pass- 
 ed four days very pleasantly, in conversing in my 
 mother tongue. This is a satisfaction that no one 
 knows, excepting those, who have been situated 
 as I am, wilh a people with whom I cannot speak 
 fluently. And if I could, it would afford me little 
 satisfaction to converse with the ignorant Canadi- 
 
 S.; ii:i: 
 
t 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 89 
 
 ans around me. All their chat is about horses, 
 dogs, canoes, women and strong men, who can 
 fight a good battle. I have, therefore, only one 
 way left to pass my time rationally, and that is 
 reading. Happily for me I have a collection of 
 good books ; and mine will be the fault if 1 do 
 not derive profit from them. I, also, begin to find 
 pleasure in the study of French. ; , m ,> r.nu: 
 
 Saturday, 20. The greater number of our 
 Indians have returned from the prairies ; and 
 as they have brought little with them to trade, I, 
 of course, give them as little ; for we are at too 
 great a distance from the civilized world, to make 
 many gratuities. Yet the Indians were of a differ- 
 ent opinion ; and at first made use of some unpleas- 
 ant language. But we did not come to blows, and 
 are now preparing to retire to rest, nearly as good 
 friends as the Indians and traders generally are. 
 With a few exceptions, that friendship is little 
 more, than their fondness for our property, and 
 our eagerness to obtain their furs. .:<i • rr i jii, 
 
 Wednesday, April 21. The most of the snow 
 is now dissolved ; and this afternoon the ice in the 
 river broke up. — All our Indians, who for several 
 days past encamped near the fort, have now de- 
 parted, to hunt ihe beaver. While they were 
 here, they made a feast, at which they danced, 
 cried, sung and howled, and in a word, made a ter- 
 
 12 
 
 
 r 
 
 3 ■. 
 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 i . i 
 
 E' ■ < 
 
 . t 
 
 i 
 
iM 
 
 90 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 Vll 
 
 rible, savage noise. Such feasts, the Crees are 
 accustomed to make, af the return of every spring ; 
 and sometimes also at other seasons of the year. 
 By so doing, they say they appease the anger 
 of the Evil Spirit or devil, and thus prevent 
 him from doing them harm, to which they consid- 
 er him as ever inclined. They have, also, certain 
 places, where they deposit a part of their proper- 
 ty, such as guns, kettles, bows, arrows, &c. as a 
 sacrifice to the same Spirit. To the Supreme 
 JBeing, however, the creator and governor of the 
 universe, whom thev call Kitch-e-mon-e-too, that 
 is. Great Spirit, 4hey address their prayers ; yet 
 they say there is no necessity of paying him any 
 sacrifice, since he is a good Spirit, and is not dis- 
 posed to do them injury ; whereas the Evil Spirit 
 is malicious, and therefore, it is proper that they 
 should strive to appease his anger. — The above 
 mentioned feast was made by the Chief of the 
 band, whose name is Ka-she-we-ske-wate, who for 
 the long space of foiity eight hours previous to 
 the entertainment, neither ate nor drank any thing. 
 At the commencemeut of the feast, every person 
 put on a grave countenance ; and the Chief went 
 through a number of ceremonies, with the ut- 
 most solemnity. After the entertainment was 
 over, every Indian made a voluntary sacrifice of a 
 
 'ijp.. 
 
 m 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 91 
 
 part of his property to the devil, or as they call 
 him, Much-e-mon-e-too. ' " > 
 
 Sunday y May 2. Accompanied by one of my 
 interpreiers, I have taken a ride to a place where 
 I intend building a fort, the ensuing summer. The 
 animals in this vicinity are moose, red deer, a spe- 
 cies of the antelope, grey, black, brown, choco- 
 late coloured and yellowish bears, two spscies of 
 wolves, wolverines, polecats or skunks, lynxes, 
 kitts, beavers, otters, fishers, martins, minks, badg- 
 ers, muskrats and black, silver, cross and red fox- 
 es. Of fowls, we have swans, geese, bustards, 
 cranes, cormorants, iocns, snipes, several species 
 of ducks, water-hens, pigeons, partridges, pheasants, 
 &c. &:c. Most of the above named fowls, are nu- 
 merous in spring and autumn ; biit, excepting a few, 
 they retire to the north in the summer, to brood. 
 Toward the fall, they return again ; and before 
 winter sets in, they go to the southward, where 
 they remain, during a few of the coldest months 
 of the year. ;.'„. .^ t ,..''.*,;. . >^ 
 
 Thursday^ 6. This morning, I received a let- 
 ter from Mr, M^^Leod, who is at Alexandria, in- 
 forming me- that a few nights since, the Assini- 
 boins, who are noted thieves, ran away with twenty 
 two of his horses. Many of this tribe, who reside 
 in the large prairies, are constantly going about 
 to steal horses. Those which they find at one 
 
 
 it- 
 
 8 
 
 
 l\-%\ 
 
92 
 
 Harmon's journaLc 
 
 ■H.Si 
 
 fort, they will take and sell to the people of ai*- 
 other fort. Indeed, they steal horses, not unfre- 
 quently, from their own relations. ^^ 
 
 Wednesday, 12. It has snowed and rained, dur- 
 ing the day. — On the 7th inst. I went to Alexan- 
 dria, to transact business with Mr. M^Leod. Dur- 
 ing this jaunt, it rained almost constantly; and on 
 my return, in crossing this river, I drowned my 
 horse, which cost last fall^ one hundred dollars in 
 goods, as we value them here. ' 
 
 Monday, 17. This afternoon, Mr. M<^Leod 
 and company passed this place, and are on their 
 way to the Grand Portage. But I am to pass, if 
 Providence permit, another summer in the inte- 
 riour, and to have the superintendence of tlie 
 lower fort, this place and Alexandria, residing 
 chiefly at the latter place. ' " "'"'■ ' *' 
 
 lliesday, 18. All the Indians belonging to 
 this place, have now come in with the produce of 
 their hunts, which is abundant ; and to reward 
 them for their industry, I clothed two of their 
 Chiefs, and gave a certain quantify of spirits to 
 them, and to the others. With this they became 
 intoxicated, and continued so during the last night, 
 which preventeH our closing our eyes in sleep ; 
 for it is at all times necessary to watch the mo*- 
 tions of the Indians, and especially is this the case. 
 
 .'E -i i 
 
■''i- ^*: 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 93 
 
 when reason has been dethroned, and passion has 
 assumed the sole dominion over them, through the 
 influence of ardent spirits. While in that condi- 
 tion, they, like other people, often do things which 
 they will regret in their sober moments. 
 
 Sunday, 23. It has snowed all day ; and about 
 six inches have fallen. I am waiting the arrival 
 of Mr. Henry to take charge of this post, when 
 I shall proceed to Alexandria. Two women 
 brought me a few hazelnuts, which they this day' 
 gathered from the bushes. 
 
 Monday, 31. Alexandria. Here, accompani- 
 ed by two of my people, I arrived this afternoon. 
 I ncrossing Swan River, I was so unfortunate as to 
 drown another horse ; and I was therefore obliged 
 to perform the remainder of the journey on foot, 
 with nothing to eat. Here, thanks to the Bestow- 
 er of all good, I find a tolerable stock of provis- 
 ions. Mr. Goedike is to pass the summer with 
 me, also two interpreters, and three labtouring 
 men, besides several women and children, who 
 together, form a snug family. '-^ ^'"^■ 
 
 Wednesday, June 23. On the 16th inst. accom- 
 panied by two of my people, I set off for Swan 
 River fort, on horseback. The first night, we 
 slept at Bird Mountain ; and the day following, 
 we arrived at the lower fort. From that place, 1 
 returned in one day, which is a distance of ninety 
 
 Mi 
 
 ■ i 
 
 
 
 
 'Un 
 
 9 '/" 
 

 V\\' ■IIP"'"' 
 
 04 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 \ . 
 
 i I 
 
 il '"'.:• 
 
 i)j .' ii iif. 
 
 ijf 
 
 miles. I, however, took a fresh horse at the Bird 
 Mountain. One of my people, who travelled less 
 rapidly, has arrived this evening, and informed me, 
 that he drowned his horse, at the same place 
 where I had before drowned two. 
 
 On my return here, those in whose charge I 
 "had left the place, had nothing to offer me to eat, 
 excepting boiled parchment skins, which are little 
 better than nothing, and scarcely deserve the 
 name of food. I have therefore sent a part of my 
 people, to endeavour to take some fish out of a 
 small lake, called by the Natives Devil's Lake, 
 which lies about ten miles north from this. If 
 they should not succeed, and our hunters should not 
 be more fortunate than they have been for some 
 time past, I know not what will become of us. 
 All our dependance is on a kind Providence ; and 
 we cannot but hope for a speedy relief, from our 
 truly sad condition. ■ 
 
 Friday, July 2. For six days, after I sent the 
 people to fish in the above mentioned lake, we 
 subsisted at the fort on parchment skins, dogs, 
 herbs and a few small fish, that we took out of the 
 river opposite to the fort. But now, we obtain 
 fish in greater plenty. 
 
 One of our hunters aas been in, and told me 
 what he thought to be the cause why he could 
 not kill. He said that when he went to hunt, he 
 
' tc- 
 
 '■'*'?*»•■'« 
 
 HARMON'S .TOURNAL. 
 
 95 
 
 generally soon fell upon the track of some animal, 
 which he followed; but that, as soon as he came 
 nigh to him, he heard the terrible voice of an 
 Evil Spirit, that frightened both himself and the 
 animal. The animal would of course run off, and 
 the pursuit would etid. — I told the hunter, that I 
 had a certain powerful medicine ; and provided 
 he would do with it as I would direct him, it 
 would not only frighten the Evil Spirit in his 
 turn, but would also render him at first speechless, 
 and that shortly after it would cause him to die. 
 I then took several drug:; and mixed them togeth- 
 er, that he might not know what they were, 
 which I wrapped in a piece of white paper, and 
 tied to the but-end of his gun, and thus arm- 
 ed him to encounter great or little devils; for 
 they believe in the existence of different orders. 
 I told him to go in search of a moose or deef ; 
 and as soon as h© should hear the voice of the 
 Evil Spirit, to throw the paper tied to his gun 
 behind him into the air, and that it would fall in- 
 to the mouth of the Evil Spirit pursuing himj and 
 silence and destroy him. I warned him not to 
 look behind him, lest he should be too much 
 frightened at the sight of so monstrous a creature, 
 but to pursue the animal, which he would un- 
 doubtedly kill. ■> ,v. 
 
 The same day, the Indian went to hunting. 
 
 i 
 
 r X 
 
 i 
 
 ■ r 
 

 96 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 .lilt 
 
 and fell upon the track of an animal, which he 
 followed, as he has since told me, but a short 
 distance, before the Evil Spirit, as his custom was, 
 began to make his horrid cries. The Indian, 
 however, did with the medicine as I had directed 
 him, and heard no more of the frightful voice, 
 but continued following the animal until) ap- 
 proaching him, he fired, and killed a fine fat red 
 deer ; and he has since killed several others. 
 Not only he, but the other Indians place, from 
 this circumstance, perfect confidence in my medi- 
 cines. What will not imagination, aided by great 
 superstition, make a person believe ! It may be 
 caused, however, at times, to remove the evils of 
 its own creation.? -. li io hi^B^^^'f'- f^Ai -^ i.^r 
 f Sunday, 4. Mr. William Henry and company 
 arrived from the Bird Mountain, and inform us, 
 that they are destitute of provision there. 
 They will, therefore, come and pass the re- 
 mainder of the summer with us for we now 
 have provisions in plenty..*, oi) otrti fo.tl bnirin ^ 
 Monday, 17. In consequence of the great 
 increase of our family of late, we are again poorly 
 supplied with provisions. In order, if possible, to 
 obtain a supply, I have sent seven of my people 
 several different ways, in search of the Natives, 
 \Vho will be able to relieve our wants, should our 
 men chance to find them. For this is the season 
 
 iia. 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 97 
 
 e season 
 
 of the year, when almost all wild animals are 
 the fattest ; and therefore, \* is the best time to 
 kill them, and make them ihco dry provisions. 
 
 Friday, 23. There are at present, in this vi- 
 cinity, grass-hoppers, in such prodigious numbers, 
 as 1 never before saw in any place. In fair 
 weather, between eight and ten o'clock, A. M. 
 which is the only part of the day when many of 
 them leave the ground, they are flying in such 
 numbers, that they obscure the sun, like a light 
 cloud passing over it. They also devour every 
 thing before them, leaving scarcely a leaf on the 
 trees, or a blade of grass on the prairies ; and our 
 potatoG tops escape not their ravages. 
 
 Tuesday, August 3. The most of the mosque- 
 toes and horse flies, which are so troublesome to 
 man and beast, have left us, as the nights now be- 
 gin to be cool. 
 
 Yesterday, six families of Crees came to the fort; 
 and they have been drinking, ever since. An In- 
 dian had a few wrangling words with a squaw, be- 
 longing to another band, to whom he gave a slight 
 beating. At that time, the chief, who was the 
 friend of the Indian, was passing by ; and he was 
 so enraged at the abusive language given by 
 the woman to his friend, that he commenced 
 boating her on the head with a club, and soon 
 terminated her life. This morning, th? Indian 
 
 13 
 
 n\ 
 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 ■I 
 
 1 • T 
 
 ■ki I 
 
 ' ' :f 
 
 ' i ;l 
 
Ilk 
 
 I (' 
 
 ? ' 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 • 
 
 women buried her corpse ; and no more notice 
 is taken of her death, than if a dog had been 
 killed ; for her relations are at a considerable 
 distance, in another part of the country. — An In- 
 dian is not much regarded or feared by his 
 fellows, unless he has a number of relations to 
 take part with him in his contests while in life, 
 or to avenge his death, in case he should be 
 murdered. This is true among all the Indian 
 tribes, with which I have been acquainted. 
 
 Wednesday, 11. On the ninth instant, a Chief 
 among the Crees, came to the fort, accompanied 
 by a number of his relations, who appeared very 
 desirous that I should take one of his daughters, 
 to remain with me. I put him off by telling 
 him, that I could not then accept of a woman, 
 but probably might, in the fall. He pressed me 
 however, to allow her to rema!.i with me, at 
 once, and added, " I am fond of you, and my wish 
 is to have my daughter with the white people ; 
 for she will be treated better by them, than by 
 her own relations." In fact, he almost persuaded 
 me to keep h«r ; for I was sure that while 1 had 
 the daughter, I should not only have the father's 
 furs, but those of all his band. This would be 
 for the interest of the Company, and would there- 
 fore, turn to my own advantage, in some meas- 
 ure J so that a regard to interest, well nigh made 
 
HARMOtf's JOURNAL. 
 
 m 
 
 me consent to an act, which would have been un- 
 wise and improper. But, happily lor me, I es- 
 caped the snare: ''* '■■ * 
 
 Saturday, 28. I have sent Primault, one of my 
 interpreters, with a letter, about six days' march 
 from this, where I expect he will meet Mr. 
 M<^Leod and company, on their way from the 
 Grand Portage. Two of our people, whom I 
 sent a few days since into the large prairie, have 
 just returned with the news, that buffaloes are 
 numerous, within two days' march from this. 
 They say, that the Natives, during the two days 
 that they remained with thekii, killed upwards of 
 eighty, by driving them into a park, made for that 
 purpose. ? Ji vh 
 
 Sunday, October 3. Yesterday, a little snow 
 fell, which is the first that we have had this sea- 
 We now begin to think some disaster has 
 
 son. 
 
 e me as- 
 
 befallen our people, on their way in, as they do 
 not make their appearance so soon as usual. ?vm * 
 M^^^MondoAj, 4. One of our men has just arrived 
 from the Grand Portage, and delivered me a let- 
 ter from- Mr. M^^Leod, informing me, that he is 
 going to Athabasca, and is to be succeeded here 
 by Mr. Hugh M^^Gillies. The canoe in which this 
 man came, left head-quarters alone, some time 
 before the main brigade was prepared to leave. 
 ;r Thursday, 21. This afternoon, Mr. Hugh 
 
100 
 
 HARMON'S. JOURNAL. 
 
 I'M 
 
 ! , 
 
 M 
 
 M*^Gillle9, accompained by one man on horse 
 back) arrived, and informs me, that they were 
 stopped by the ice, fifteen miles below Swan 
 River fort, whence they will be obliged to bring 
 the goods, on sledges. 
 
 Monday, 25. A large band of Indians have 
 been here, who were continually drinking, during 
 the last 'forty eight hours. They have now ta- 
 ken their departure ; but another band has just 
 arrived, and, therefore, we must pass another 
 night without sleep ; for when the Natives are at 
 the fort, and have the means of purchasing spirits, 
 they expect to drink both night and day. 
 
 n Saturday, 30. Several of our people arrived 
 from Swan River, and delivered me letters from 
 my friends in the United States, the perusal of 
 which, has afibrded me much satisfaction. 
 
 Samuel Holmes, a clerk and interpreter, and 
 a countryman of mine, has left us, to go and join 
 our opponents, the X. Y. people. *[Soon after- 
 wards, he left the service of the last mentioned 
 company, and went to live with the Natives, the 
 Assiniboins, by whom, a year or two after, he 
 was killed, while he was on his way from the Red 
 River to the River Missouri.] 
 
 Monday, JYovember 1. I have taken a ride, 
 
 * The remarks included in brackets were added at a lat- 
 6r date. 
 
 ,f { 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 101 
 
 accompanied by my interpreter, down to see the 
 Hudson Bay people. A Mr. Miller has charge 
 of the place, and has with him fifteen labouring 
 men, the greater part of whom, have just return- 
 ed from Albany fort, which stands at the mouth 
 of Albany River. 
 
 .^ Tuesday, 9. Bird Mountain. Here I am to 
 pass another winter ; and with me there will be 
 one interpreter and six labouring men, &c. Thus 
 I am continually moving from place to place ; and 
 when my residence will be more stationary, God 
 only knows. I cannot, however, but look forward, 
 with pleasing expectation, to the time, when I 
 hope to be permitted to settle down in some part 
 of the civilized world. i{> 
 
 i^ Friday, ^ 9. I have just returned from the 
 lower fort, where I have been accompanied with 
 part of my people, for goods. I find here a band 
 of Indians, who have been waiting for my return, 
 in order to procure such articles as they need, to 
 enable them to make a fall hunt. The Indians in 
 this quarter have been so long accustomed to use 
 European goods, that it would be with difficulty 
 that they could now obtain a livelihood, without 
 them. Especially do they need fire arms, with 
 which to kill their game, and axes, kettles, knives, 
 &c. They have almost lost the use of bows and 
 arrows; and they would find it nearly impossible 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 •',4 
 
 I' 'n 
 
 ?' ( 
 
 
 
 !h 
 
 w^ 
 
 
 f- 
 
 i-'Al 
 
102 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 to cut their wood with implements, made ol' stone 
 or bone. ■'*'•'■ ■''■■.' >-• ' ■*' .r -s lv-- ^.-.--j,',.* 4', 
 
 Thursday, December 25. Severe cold weath- 
 er. This day being Christmas, our people have 
 spent it as usual, in drinking and fighting. — My ed- 
 ucation has taught me, that the advent of a Sa- 
 viour, ought to be celebrated in a far different 
 manner. — Of all people in the world, 1 think the 
 Canadians, when drunk, are the most disagreea- 
 ble ; Tor excessive drinking generally causes them 
 to quarrel and fight, among themselves. Indeed, 
 I had rather have fifty drunken Indians in the fort, 
 than five drunken Canadians. . ^ - . - .- «: 
 
 Thursday, January 27,1803. I have just return- 
 ed from Alexandria, where I passed six days, much 
 to ray satisfaction, in the company of Messrs. H. 
 M^Gillies, W. Henry and F. Goedike. While 
 there, I wrote to Messrs. M*=Leod, A. Henry and 
 .7. Clarke, all of Athabasca, which letters will be 
 taken to them, by our winter express. ,- : 
 
 r Sunday, February 20. Yesterday morning, 
 one of the Indian women came to the fort and said, 
 her husband had cut off her nose, and was deter- 
 mined to kill her, and that she therefore thought 
 proper to leave him, and go to Alexandria, where 
 she we'd be out of his reach, at least for the 
 present. But, after her arrival here, she altered 
 her mind, and desired my interpreter to nut an 
 
HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 103 
 
 end lO her life, which he, of course, refused to do. 
 Then said she, * I will do the business myself, for 
 I am resolved that I will live with my husband no 
 longer.' We did not believe, however, that she 
 would execute this determination, — Soon after, she 
 went into the woods, a short distance, and laid 
 down her load of the few things which she had 
 upon her back, and struck and kindled up a fire, in- 
 to which she threw the most of her property. 
 When it was nearly consumed, she took a little 
 bag of powder and put it into her bosom, and then 
 set fire to it. The explosion burned a great part 
 of the hair from her head, injured her face very 
 much, and rendered her perfectly blind. She now 
 commenced running about, in order if possible, to 
 catch her dogs, which she was resolved next to 
 burn. When we heard her calling out for them, 
 we went out to see what she was doing; for at 
 this time, we knew nothing of what had taken 
 placo. — The spectacle was truly shocking! She 
 was so disfigured, as scarcely to appear like a hu- 
 man being. We brought her into the fort, where 
 she remained very quiet, until we were all in bed 
 and asleep, when she got up, and went again into 
 the woods. There she tied a cord about her neck, 
 and then fastened it to the limb of a tree. But 
 on throwing herself off, the branch broke, and she 
 fell into the snow, where she remained until morn- 
 
 y, -* • 
 
 !1 
 
 • 4 
 
 
 
 .'i i 
 
 ,U 
 
104 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 f,f * 
 
 I i 
 
 ing, when we found her nearly lifeless. On ex- 
 amining, we iiiscovered that she had run a needle 
 its full length, into her right ear. We brought 
 her again to the fort ; but her head is very much 
 swollen, and her face is perfectly black ; and 
 whether she will recover, is uncertain. [Several 
 years afterward, 1 saw her with her old husband ; 
 and she appeared to enjoy as good health as for- 
 merly.] '""■"' -- -i '»..»> •mJ; ,*. .,.,..•.„• :.^.,-J,.. 
 
 Wednesday, May 4. Alexandria. Here, if 
 Providence permit, I shall pass another summer, 
 and have with me Mr. F. Goedike, one interpre- 
 ter an(i several labouring men, besides women and 
 children. As Mr. Goedike will be absent from 
 the fort, during the greater part of the summer, 
 I shall be, in a great measure, alone ; for ignorant 
 Canadians furnish little society. Happily for me, 
 I have lifeless friends, my books, that will never 
 abandon me, until I first neglect them. 
 
 Thursday^ June 2. I have set our people to 
 surround a piece of ground for a garden, with pal- 
 isades, such as encompass our forts. The X. Y. 
 people are building a fort, five miles up this 
 river. ■ " " ' • ' •- 
 
 One of our men, a Canadian, gave me his son, 
 a lad of about twelve years of age, whom I agree, 
 in the name of the North West Company, to feed 
 and clothe, until he'becomes able to earn some* 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 105 
 
 thing more. His mother is a Sauteux woman. 
 He is to serve me as cook, &;c. 
 
 •UM - ^^jfr-T 
 
 4 . 1 » tfcF f^-^*^ t-W 
 
 Tuesday, 21. This afternoon, we had an un- 
 commonly heavy shower of hail and rain, ^n is- 
 
 Yesterday, I sent Mr. F. Goedike, accompa- 
 nied by several of our people, with a small assort- 
 ment of goods, to remain at some distance from 
 this, for several weeks. In the absence of my 
 friend, this is to me, a solitary place. At such 
 times as this, my thoughts visit the land of my na- 
 tivity ; and I almost regret having left my friends 
 and relatives, among whom I might now have been 
 pleasantly situated, but for a roving disposition. 
 But Providence, which is conceited in all the af- 
 fairs of men, has, though unseen, directed my way 
 into this wilderness ; and it becomes me to bear 
 up under my circumstances, with resignation, per- 
 severance and fortitude. I am not forbidden to 
 hope, that I shall one day enjoy, with increased 
 satisfaction, the society of those friends, from 
 whom I have for a season banished myself. 
 
 Sunday, 26. I have just returned from an ex- 
 cursion to the large prairies, in which I was ac- 
 companied by two of my people ; and in all our 
 ramble we did not see a single Indian. The most 
 of them, as is their custom every spring, have gone 
 to war again. We saw, and ran down and killed, 
 buffaloes, and also, saw red deers and antelopes, 
 
 14 
 
 ■: ^1 I' ■ -v 
 
106 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 bounding aero *he prairies, as well as bears and 
 wolves, roving i Jt in search of prey. In the 
 small lakes and ponds, which are to be met with 
 occasionally, all over the prairies, fowls were in 
 considerable plenty ; and with our fire arms, we 
 killed a sufficiency of them, for our daily consump- 
 tion. Although it rained during the greater part 
 of the time that we were absent from the fort, 
 yet the pleasing variety of the objects which were 
 presented to our view, made our ride very agree- 
 able. One night, we slept at the same place 
 where, a few days before, a party of the Rapid 
 Indian warriors had encamped. They were prob- 
 ably in search of their enemies, the Crees and As- 
 siniboins ; and it was happy for us that we did not 
 meet them, for they would undoubtedly have 
 massacred us, as they consider us as enemies, for 
 furnishing their opponents with tire arms. ^ --'• 
 Monday^ August 8. We have now thirty peo- 
 ple in the fort, and have not a supply of provisions 
 for two days. Our hunters, owing to a bad dream, 
 or some other superstitious notion, think that 
 they cannot kill, and therefore make no attempt, 
 notwithstanding animals arc numerous. In the 
 civilized parts of the world, when provisions are 
 scarce in one place, they can generally be obtain- 
 ed from some other place, in the vicinity. But 
 the case is otherwise with us. When destitute, 
 
 . i 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 107 
 
 we must wait until Providence sends us a supply ; 
 and we sometimes think it rather tardy in com- 
 
 Thursday, 18. An Indian has just arrived, who , 
 brings the intelHgence, that forty lodges of Crees 
 and Assiniboins, who the last spring, in company 
 with forty lodges of other tribes, set out on a war 
 party, are returning home. They separated at 
 Battle River from their allies, who, the messenger 
 says, crossed that river, to go and make peace 
 with their enemies, the Rapid and Black-feet In- 
 dians. The tribes last mentioned, inhabit the 
 country lying along the foot of the Rocky Moun- 
 tain, between the Sisiscatchwin and Missouri Riv- 
 ers. Both parties begin to be weary of such 
 bloody wars, as have long been carried on between 
 them, and are much disposed to patch up a peace, 
 on almost any terms. Thus do ruinous wars, wag- 
 ed by restless and ambitious people, in civilized 
 and savage countries, lay waste and destroy the 
 comforts of mankind. i 
 
 Sunday, October 16. This afternoon there fell 
 a little snow, which is the first we have had, this 
 fall. 
 
 It is now several days since the X. Y. people 
 arrived from the Grand Portage ; but they give 
 us no news of Mr. McGillies and his company; 
 neither would they, were their condition ever so 
 
 '4 
 
108 
 
 HARMON 8 JOURNAL. 
 
 
 bad. Neither company will convey to the other 
 the least intelligence, that at all concerns their af- 
 fairs in this country. The North West Company 
 look upon the X. Y. Company as encroachers upon 
 their territories ; and, I think, with some reason, 
 since the former company first led the way into 
 this savage country ; while the latter people think, 
 that the former have no more right to trade in this 
 part of the world, than themselves. This jarring 
 of interests, keeps up continual misunderstandings, 
 and occasions frequent broils between the contend- 
 ing parties ; and to such a height has their enmity 
 risen, that it has, in several instances, occasioned 
 blood shed. But here the murderer escapes with- 
 out punishment ; for the civil law does not extend 
 its protection, so far into the wilderness. I under- 
 stand, however, that measures are in contempla- 
 tion in England, which will remedy this evil. If 
 something should not be done soon, I fear many of 
 us may lose our lives! ?»*.*. 
 
 Wednesday, 19. About six inches of snow have 
 fallen. Mr. M' Gillies and company arrived from 
 the Grand Portage, and delivered me letters from 
 my friends in the United States ; and I rejoiced to 
 hear that they were in health and prosperity. 
 
 Saturday, 22. This afternoon, one of our men^ 
 an Iroquois, died ; and it is thought the founda- 
 tion was laid for his death, by too great an exer- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 109 
 
 •ur men. 
 
 tion of his strength at the portages, on his way in- 
 to the country. The death of our people is 
 not unfrequently occasioned by this circumstance. 
 Sunday^ JVovember 6. On the 28th ult. we sent 
 eight of our men, on horseback, into the plains, 
 to look for buffaloes ; and they returned this even- 
 ing, with their hoises loaded with the flesh of 
 those animals. They say that they are still three 
 days' march from this. '^ ^ •'■ * • tw 
 
 Tuesday, December 27. Messrs. Henry and 
 Goedike, my companions and friends, are both ab- 
 sent, on excursions into two different parts of the 
 country. I sensibly feel the loss of theii society, 
 and pass, occasionally, a solitary hour, which would 
 glide away imperceptibly, in their company. 
 When they are absent, I spend the greater part 
 of my time in reading and writing. Now and then 
 I take a ride on horseback, in the neighbourhood 
 of the fort, and occasionally I visit our neighbours, 
 drawn in a cariol by horses, if the snow is light, 
 or by dogs, if it is deep. This afternoon, I ac- 
 companied Mr. M^^Gillies, to pay a visit to our 
 X. Y. neighbours. 
 
 . Wednesday, February 22, 1804. Lac La Peche, 
 or Fishing Lake. This lies about two day's march 
 into the large plains, west from Alexandria, w^cE 
 place I left on the 15th ultimo, accompanied by 
 twelve of our people. I have come here to 
 
110 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 >:.'Wf»V - 
 
 pass the winter, by the side of the X. Y. people. 
 For some time after our arrival, we subsisted on 
 rose buds, a kind of food neither very palatable 
 nor nourishing, which we gathered in the fields. 
 They were better than nothing, since they would 
 just support life. When we should procure any 
 thing better, I knew not, as the buflfaloes at that 
 time, in consequence of the mild weath(}r, were a 
 great distance, out in the large plains, and my 
 hunters could find neither moose nor d(;er. We 
 hoped, however, that a merciful God would not 
 fiaSer us to starve ; and that hope has not been 
 disappointed, for we have now provisions in 
 abundance, for which we endeavour to be thank- 
 ful. '«:•; I rr f?r>:>, :,^f*V■^.>.*]^^^v>^^ai^ <.||^ Wi** i'fc5»^--- .- 
 
 On the llth instant, I took one of my interpre- 
 ters and ten labouring men with me, and proceed- 
 ed several days' march into the wilderness, Tvhere 
 we found a camp of upwards of thirty lodges of 
 Crees and Assiniboins, of whom we made a good 
 purchase of furs and provisions. They were en- 
 camped on the summit of a hill, whfence we had an 
 extensive view of the surrounding country, which 
 was low and level. Not a tree could ha seen, as far 
 as the eye could extend ', and thousands of buffa- 
 loes were to be seen grazing, in dilferent parts of 
 the plain. In order to kill them, the Natives in 
 large bands, mount their horses, rjn them down 
 
HARMOli S JOURNAL. 
 
 Ill 
 
 and shoot, with their bows ami arrows, what num- 
 ber they please, or drive them into parks and kill 
 them at their leisure. In fact, those Indians, 
 who reside in the large plains or prairies, are the 
 most independent, and appear to be the most con- 
 tented and happy people upon the face of the 
 earth. They subsist upon the flesh of the buffa- 
 loe, and of the skins of that animal they make 
 the greatest part of their clothing, which is both 
 warm and convenient. Their tents and beds are 
 also made of the skins of the same animal. 
 '? The Grecs and Assiniboins procure their 
 livelihood with so much ease, that they have but 
 little to confine them at home. They therefore 
 employ much of their time, in waging war with 
 their neighbours. "*t>^?^^^ 
 
 Thursday, March 1. Es-qui-un-a-wach-a, or 
 the last Mountain, or rather Hill ; for there are 
 no mountains in this part of the country. Here I 
 arrived this evening, having left Lac La Peche on 
 the 28th ultimo, in company with my interpreter 
 and seven men. The men, I ordered to encamp 
 at a short distance from this, and to join me early 
 tomorrow morning ; as it is more convenient and 
 safe, especially when we are not in our forts, 
 to give the Indians spirits to drink in the day time, 
 than in the night. On our arrival, we were invit- 
 ed to the tents of several of the principal Indians, 
 
 %^ 
 
 > • r 
 
 
 * t 
 
112 
 
 HARMOrs JOURNAL. 
 
 ?■;' , 
 
 % 
 
 to eat and smoke our pipes. — Indians show great 
 hospitality to strangers, before they have been 
 long acquainted with civilized people, after which, 
 they adopt many of their customs ; but they are 
 by no means always gainers, by the exchange. 
 
 Monday^ 6. On the 2nd, the remainder of 
 our people arrived, and soon after, I commenced 
 dealing out spirits to the Natives ; and they con- 
 tinued to drink during all that day and the follow- 
 ing night. We were, therefore, prevented from 
 resigning ourselves to sleep. For though the In- 
 dians are naturally well disposed toward the 
 white people, and seldom begin a quarrel with us, 
 and will even receive many insults, before they 
 attempt to defend themselves; yet when drunk, 
 they often behave like mad men or devils, and 
 need to be narrowly watched. 
 
 This morning, I sent six of my people to the 
 fort with sledges loaded with furs and provisions, in 
 order to obtain another supply of goods, to en- 
 able us to go and trade with another large Land 
 of Indians, who are about two days' march from 
 this, into the plains. 
 
 "^ Tuesday^ 6. JSorth side of the Great DeviVs Lake, 
 or as the Natives call it, Much-e-matire-to Sd-ky-e- 
 gun. As I had nothing of importance to attend to, 
 while our people would bo absent in their trip to 
 and from the fort, and was desirous of" seeing my 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 113 
 
 friend Henrjr, who, I understood, was about half a 
 days' march from where I was the last night, I 
 therefore, set oif this morning, accompanied by an 
 Indian lad who serves as a guide, with the inten- 
 tion of visiting this place. After walking all day, 
 without finding either wood or water, and but a 
 few inches of snow, just as the sun was descending 
 below the horizon, we thought that we descried 
 a small grove, at a considerable distance, directly 
 before us. So long, therefore, as the light re- 
 mained, we directed our course to that object; 
 but as soon as the day light failed, we had noth- 
 ing by which to guide ourselves, excepting the 
 stars, which, however, answered very > ell, until 
 even their faint twinkling was utterly obscured by 
 clouds, and we were inveloped in total darkness. 
 In this forlorn condition, we thought it best to 
 continue bur march as well as we could ; for we 
 were unwilling to lie down, with little or nothing 
 with which to cover us, and keep ourselves from 
 freezing. There was no wood, with which we 
 could make a fire, nor buffaloe dung, which often 
 serves as fuel, when travelling about in those 
 plains. Neither could we find water to drink ; 
 and without fire, we could not melt the snow, for 
 this purpose. We suffered mucli for want of wa- 
 ter, as we had nothing to eat but very dry provis- 
 ions, which greatly excited thirst.^ — To be tlepriv- 
 
 15 M 
 
114 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 ed of drink for one day, is more distressing than to 
 \ be destitute of food for two. — It would not have 
 ^ been safe for us to encamp, without a fire ; for 
 we should have been continually exposed to be 
 trodden upon by the large herds of buffaloes, that 
 are perpetually roving about in the plains, or to 
 be devoured by the wolves, which ever follow the 
 buffaloe. We therefore continued travelling, un- 
 certain whither we were going, until at length, 
 the dogs that drew my sledge, suddenly passed 
 by us, as if they saw some uncommon object, di- 
 rectly before us. We did not attempt to impede 
 their motion, but followed them as fast as we 
 could, until they brought us to the place where 
 we now are. — It is almost incredible that my dogs 
 should have smelt this camp at such a dis- 
 tance ; for we walked vigorously no less than 
 four hours after they passed us, before we arrived 
 here. 
 
 If: We are happy in finding fifteen tents of Crees 
 and Assiniboins, who want for none of the dainties 
 of this country • and I meet, as usual, with a very 
 hospitable reception. The mistress of the tent 
 where I am, unharnessed my dogs, ana put my 
 sledge, &c., into a safe place. She was then 
 proceeding to give food to my dogs, which 
 labour, I offered to do myself; but she told 
 me to remain quiet and smoke my pipe, for 
 
Harmon's journal, 
 
 ]15 
 
 she added, " they shall be taken good care of, 
 and will be as safe in my hands, as they would be 
 were they in your own." — Notwithstanding it walP^ 
 near midnight when I arrived, yet at that late ^ 
 hour, the most of the Indians rose, and many of 
 them invited me to their tents, to eat a few 
 mouthfuls, and to smoke the sociable pipe. 
 
 But now, all those necessary ceremonies are 
 over; and I am happy in being able to lay my- 
 self down on buffaloe robes, by the side of a 
 warm fire, expecting to obtain sweet and refresh- 
 ing repose, which nature requires, after a day's 
 march so fatiguing. If 1 was ever thankful for ; 
 any of God's favours, it is, to find myself here 
 among friends, and in comfortable circumst^xnces, 
 when, a few hours before, I expected to wander 
 with weariness, anxiety and danger, during the 
 whole night, in the open plain. 
 
 Wednesday, 7. Canadian's Camp. This 
 place is so called from the fact, that a niimber 
 of our people have passed the greater part of 
 the winter here. As there is a good foot path 
 from the place where I slept the last night to 
 this place, I left my young guide, and came here 
 alone. Frequently on the way, I met Indians, 
 who are going to join those at the Devil's Lake. 
 I came here in the pleasing expectation of seeing 
 my friend, Henry ; but I am disappointed. Yes- 
 
 '•\ 'I 
 
 '4' 
 
 '.■*•, 
 
116 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ■MM^^ 
 
 *l.-:\ 
 
 terday morning, he set out for Alexandria. I 
 hope to have the satisfaction, however, of soon 
 ^Jtoeeting him at the fort. — I here find six Canadians 
 rith their families, who have passed the winter 
 in this vicinity, and have subsisted upon the flesh 
 of the buffaloe, which animals are found in 
 plenty. The people appear to be happy in 
 their situation. Indeed, a Canadian, with his 
 belly full of fat meat, is never otherwise. * 
 
 * Friday, 9. JVorth side of DeviVs Lake. In 
 the morning, I left the Canadian's Camp, and this 
 afternoon reached this place, where I found my 
 young guide, waiting my return. He is the son of 
 a chief, among the Crees and Assiniboins. His 
 grandfather was Monsieur Florimeaux, a French- 
 man, who passed a number of years in the Indian 
 country. When he went to Canada, he took his 
 son, the father of my youngguide, along with him, 
 as far as Quebec, intending to send him to France. 
 But the lad, who was then twelve or thirteen 
 years old, did not like to leave his native country. 
 After remaining in Canada for some time, there- 
 fore, he deserted and returned to this part of the 
 world, where he, in time, became a famous war- 
 rior, and at length, a chief. He is much respect- 
 ed and beloved by his relatives, and is revered by 
 his own family. As a husband he is affectionate, 
 and as a father he is kind. It was perhaps fortu" 
 
 r' 
 
. HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 117 
 
 nate for him that he did not go to France ; for, I 
 am persuaded he could not have lived more 
 happily and at ease, in any part of the world, than 
 in this independent country, which is abundantly 
 supplied with all of the necessaries, and many of 
 the luxuries of life. ^,^^ 
 
 n Saturday, 10. In the middle of an extensive 
 plain. Early in the morning, accompanied by my 
 young guide, I left our last night's lodgings, to go 
 to the place where I expect to find my people, 
 which is about two days' march further into the 
 great plain, than where I separated from my inter- 
 preter, on the 6th inst. After walking all day^ 
 without finding either wood or water, at eight 
 o'clock at night, we have concluded to lay our- 
 selves down, in order if possible, to get a little rest. | 
 In the day time, the snow melted a little ; but in 
 the evening it has frozen hard, and our feet and 
 our legs, as high as our knees, are so much cover- 
 ed with ice, that we cannot take of our shoes ; and 
 having nothing with which to make a fire, in order 
 to thaw them, we must pass the night with them 
 on. A more serious evil is, the risk me must run 
 
 of being killed by wild beasts. - • .^ - 
 
 Sunday, 1 1. Ca-ta-buy-se-pu, or the River that 
 calls. This stream is so named by the supersti- 
 tious Natives, who imagine that a spirit is constant- 
 ly going up or down it ; and they say that they 
 
 f- ' •. i 
 
118 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 I. ' ' « 
 
 
 «♦. 
 
 often hear its voice distinctly, which resembles the 
 cry of a human being. The last night was so un- 
 
 ^^leasant to me, that I could not sleep, arising in 
 part from the constant fear which I was in, of be- 
 ing torn in pieces before the morning, by wild 
 beasts. Despondency to a drqrree took possession 
 of my spirit. But the light of the morning dissi- 
 pated my fears, and restored to my mind, its usu- 
 al cheerfulness. As soon as the light of day ap- 
 peared, we left the place where we had lain, not 
 a little pleased, that the wild beasts had not fall- 
 en upon us. It has snowed and rained all day. — 
 
 ^f^ere I find my interpreter, and eighty tents, or 
 nearly two hundred men, with their families. — 
 Along the banks of this rivulet, there is a little 
 timber, consisting principally of the inferiour spe- 
 cies of the maple ; but no where else, is there 
 even a shrub to be seen. The surrounding coun- 
 try is a barren plain, where nothing grows except- 
 ing grass, which rises from six to eight inches in 
 height, and furnishes food for the buffaloe. 
 4i Here again, as usual, I meet with a kind re- 
 ception. These Indians seldom come thus far 
 into the plains, as the part of the country where 
 we now are, belongs to the Rapid Indians. A 
 white man was never before known, to penetrate 
 so I ar. /.','.« v* ^p«*'*\' n •'>ff 
 
 Wedmsday, 14. Last evening my people re- 
 
 t"1 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 119 
 
 turned from the fort ; and as I now had spir- 
 its for the Natives, they, of course, drank during 
 the whole night. Being so numerous, they made > 
 a terrible noise. They stole a small keg of spir- 
 its from us, and one of them attempted to stab me. 
 The knife went through my clothes, and just graz- 
 ed the skin of my body. To day 1 spoke to the 
 Indian who made this attempt, and he cried like a 
 child, and said, he had nearly killed his father, 
 meaning me, and asked me why I did not tie him, 
 when he had lost the use of his reason. — My peo- 
 ple inform me that there is little or no snow, for 
 three days' march from this ; but that after that, 
 there is an abundance, all the way to the fort. .^ 
 
 Friday, 16. About twelve o'clock, we left the 
 Indians' camp ; but being heavily loaded, consider- 
 ing there is no snow and our property is drawn by 
 dogs on sledges, we made slow progress. After 
 we had encamped, we sent our dogs, which are 
 twenty two in number, after the buffaloe ; and 
 they soon stopped one of them, when one of our 
 party went and killed him with an axe, for we 
 have not a gun with us. It is, however, impru- 
 dent for us to venture thus far, without fire arms ,; 
 for every white man, when in this savage country, 
 ought at all times to be well armed. Then he 
 need be under little apprehension of an attack j^ 
 for Indians, when gober, are not inclined to hazard 
 
120 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 iH 
 
 f 
 
 their lives, and when they apprehend danger from 
 quarrelling, will remain quiet and peaceable. 
 ^siH Saturday^ i7. JYorth West end of DevWs Lake. 
 The weather is extremely mild, for the season. 
 The surrounding country is all on fire ; but happi- 
 ly for us, we are encamped in a swampy place. 
 When the fire passes over the plains, which cir- 
 cumstance happens almost yearly, but generally 
 later than this, great numbers of horses and buffa- 
 loes are destroyed ; for those animals when sur- 
 rounded by fire, will stand perfectly still, until they 
 are burned to death. — -This evening, we killed an- 
 other buffaloe, in the same manner as we killed 
 one, the last evening. - .m^.; 
 
 ' Sunday, 18. The weather is still mild, and we 
 see many grass-hoppers, which appear unusually 
 early in the season. As I found that we were 
 ' coming on too slowly with our heavy loads, about 
 twelve o'clock, I left our property in charge of 
 three of my people, and am going to the fort with 
 the others, for horses to come for it. 
 
 This afternoon we met several of the X. Y. 
 people, who were in search of Indians ; but from 
 the information they received from us, they 
 thought them at too great a distance, and they 
 are, therefore, accompanying us to the fort. — 
 3.he same success has attended us this evening, 
 which we met with the two preceding days, in re- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 121 
 
 gard to supplying ourselves with food. Indeed, in 
 these plains, where bufTaloes are numerous, it is 
 not customary, nor is it needful for people who are 
 travelling, to burden themselves with provisions ; 
 for if thej have fire arms, they can always kill a 
 sufficiency for the day. This renders travelling 
 cheap and convenient, nrsf ttj f>^ ! '.^^^1 
 
 •I* Thursday^ 22. Lac la Peche. Here tve have 
 arrived, and I am happy in reaching a place, where 
 I can take a little repose, after so long and fatig- 
 uing a jaunt. Yet it has been in many respects, 
 both pleasant and profitable. The country which 
 I travelled over was beautifully situated, and over- 
 spread with buffaloes, and various other kinds of 
 animals, as well as many other delightful objects, 
 which in succession presented themselves to our 
 view. These things made the day glide away al- 
 most imperceptibly. But there were times, when 
 my situation was far from being agreeable ; they, 
 however, soon passed away, and we all have abun- 
 dant reason to render thanks to a kind Providence, 
 for his protection, and for our safe return to our 
 home and our families. ■'* "* ' ' ' 
 
 At three different times, while performing the 
 tour above described, I was in great danger of 
 losing my life, by the evil machinations of the Na- 
 tives. One escape has been already mentioned, 
 when one of them attempted to stab me. While 
 
 16 
 
 m 
 
122 
 
 HARMON 8 JOURNAL. 
 
 id jj 
 
 
 V 
 
 I was dealing out spirits to the Savages, at the last 
 mountain, on the night of the 5th inst. an Indian, 
 who was inuch intoxicated, told me, that I should 
 never see another sun arise ; and he, unquestiona- 
 bly, intended to kill me. The night following, af- 
 ter I arrived at the north side of the Devil's Lake, 
 I was well received by the greater part of the Na- 
 tives there ; but as I have «ince been informed, 
 one of them had resolved to take my life. And 
 yet, this villain invited me to his tent, and I visited 
 it, without suspicion.' He was prevented from 
 executing his purpose by my host, who was ac- 
 quainted with his purpose, and told him that he 
 must first despatch him ; for, he added, ' Fitch-e- 
 mo-cum-mon' (that is Big Kife, which is the name 
 that they give me,) ' is my brother, and iias taken 
 up his lodging with me, and it therefore becomes 
 me to defend him and his property.' No Indian 
 will suffer a stranger, if he be able to defend him, 
 to be injured, while in his tent, and under his pro- 
 tection.' Therefore, he who had intended to 
 massacre me, thought it best to remain quiet. 
 This hostile Indian had nothing against me, but that 
 I was a friend to a person who he considered had 
 injured him ; and as this person was at a great dis- 
 tance, and therefore beyond his reach, he was re- 
 solved to avenge the affront upon me. It is the 
 custom of all the Savages, not to be very particu- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 123 
 
 lar on whom the punishment of an offence falls, 
 whether the guilty person, or a relation or friend 
 of this person. The first of these whom he hap- 
 pens to meet, becomes the object of his ven- 
 geance ; and then his wrath is appeased, and he will 
 not even lift his hand against the person who has 
 offended him. '^ *^-^' 
 
 ^^ Saturday, 24. Yesterday, Mr. F. Gocdike ar- 
 rived from Alexandria, and delivered me a letter 
 from Mr. M'^Gillies, requesting me to abandon Lac 
 la Pfeche, and proceed, with ail my people, to Alex- 
 andria. In the fore part of the day, we all left 
 the former place. There is a woman with us, be- 
 longing to one of our men, who has walked the 
 whole day, in the snow and water, and who, this 
 evening, gave birth to a son. 
 ^ . Tuesday, 27. Alexandria. Here we arrived 
 this afternoon. The woman who, on the 24th. inst. 
 was delivered of a child, took it on her shoulders 
 the day following, and continued her march, as 
 though nothing unusual had occurred ! It is a 
 very happy circumstance, that the women of this 
 country are blessed with such strong constitutions, 
 as they would otherwise be utterly unable to en- 
 dure the hardships to which they are often expos- 
 ed, and particularly in child-birth. ■ ^^j r-^r-^ /Wf-rt 
 -i Monday, April 9. Yesterday, the ice in this 
 river broke up ; and to day, we sent off four mea 
 
^'^■- 
 
 124 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 is ,■' ' 
 
 >'*( 
 % 
 
 jv, ; i 
 
 '^ . 
 
 m a boat, loaded with pimican, to be transported 
 as far as the entrance of Winipick River. — The 
 country all around us, is on fire. z...-. ,a.^, + -.^ 
 
 Sunday, 29. Yesterday, the greater part of 
 our people set out for Swan River ; and to day, 
 Mr. ]Vr Gillies, and the most of those who were 
 left, have departed for the New Fort, which is 
 distant about forty five miles, to the north west 
 from the former general rendezvous, the Grand 
 Portage, which the Americans hcUY« obliged us to 
 abandon. * ' ' ^. 
 
 It i» thought necessary that I should pass an- 
 other summer at this place ; but I am happy in 
 having with me my friends Henry and Goedike. 
 There are here also one interpreter and several 
 labouring men, besides women and children. We 
 are preparing a piece of ground for a garden, the 
 culti.vation of which, will be an amusement ; and 
 the produce of it, we hope, will add to our com- 
 forts. Mr. Goedike plays the violin, and will occa- 
 sionally cheer our spirits, with an air. But the 
 most of our leisure time, which is at least five 
 sixths of the whole, will be spent in reading, and 
 in meditating and conversing upon what we read. 
 How valuable is the art, which multiplies books, ' 
 with great facility, and at a moderate expense. 
 Without, thera the wheels of time would dfag 
 heavily, in this wilderness. » Urn 
 
 
 ti - 4|t<j> 
 
 :q -1 
 
HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 125 
 
 Tuesday, May 22. The seeds which we put 
 into the ground on the 10th inst. have sprung up, 
 and grow remarkablj well.- " ' " i^." 
 
 "^Tuesday, 29. During the last forty eight 
 hours, it has rained without cessation ; and I think 
 1 never witnessed so great a fall of water, within 
 the same space of time. The river has overflow- 
 ed its banks.^ to £i much greater distance than is 
 common ; and our garden, which is not far from it, 
 now lies under water. ••' •*! -. - -— 
 
 Thursday, 31. In the morning, Mr. Goedike, 
 Collin, my interpreter, a young lad and myself, set 
 off for the purpose of paying a visit to our X. Y. 
 neighbours. On leaving the fort, we had the river 
 to croso, which, in consequence of the late rains, is 
 about sixty rods broad. Our only means of cross- 
 ing it was a canoe, made of the skins of buflaloes, 
 which, on account of the length of time that it 
 had been in the water, began to be rotten. Be- 
 fore we reached the other side of the river, the 
 canoe was nearly half filled with water. We 
 drew it on shore, mounted our horses, visited our 
 neighbours, and returned to the place where we 
 had left our canoe, at about three o'clock P. M. 
 Having repaired it a little, we embarked, for the 
 purpose of returning to the fort. iVe soon per- 
 ceived that the water came into the canoe very 
 fast ; and we continued paddling, in hope of reach- 
 
 # 
 
126 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 i 
 
 ing the opposite shore, before it would fill. . We 
 were, however, sadly disappointed ; for it became 
 full, when we had gone about one third of the dis- 
 tance ; but it did not immediately overset. The 
 water, in that place, was about five feet deep ; 
 but the current was strong, and it soon carried us 
 to a place where we could not reach the bottom, 
 and the canoe overset. We all clung to it and, 
 thus drifted a considerable distance, until the ca- 
 noe was, at length, stopped by a few willows, 
 whose tops rose above the water. Here I had a 
 moment, in which 1 could reflect on our truly de- 
 plorable condition, and direct my thoughts to the 
 means of relief. My first object was, if possible, 
 to gain the shore, in order to free myself from my 
 clothes, which I could not do where I then was. 
 But my great coat, a heavy poniard, boots, &c. 
 rendered it very difficult for me to swim ; and I 
 had become so torpid, in consequence of having 
 been so long in the cold water, that before I had 
 proceeded one third of the way to the shore, 1 
 sunk, but soon rose again, to the surface of the 
 water. I then exerted myself to the utmost; 
 but, notwithstanding, soon sunk a second time, i 
 now considered that I must inevitably drown ; 
 the objects of the world retired from my view, 
 and my mind was intent only upon approaching 
 death ; yet I was not afruid to meet ray dissolu- 
 
 '*^^si 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 127 
 
 tion.* I however made a few struggles more, which 
 happily took me to a small tree that stood on what is 
 usually the bank of the river, but which is now some 
 rods distant from dry land, I remained there for 
 sometime, to recover strength, and at length pro- 
 ceeded to the shore ; and as soon as I had gained 
 it, my mind rose in ardent gratitude to my gra- 
 cious Preserver and deliverer, who had snatched 
 me from the very jaws of death ! / was now safe 
 on shore ; but the condition of my unfortunate 
 companions, was far different. They had still 
 hold of the canoe in the middle of the river, and 
 by struggling were just able to keep themselves 
 from sinking. We had no other craft, with which 
 to go upon the water, nor could any of our people 
 swim, who were standing on the shore, the mel- 
 ancholly spectators of this scene of distress. I 
 therefore tooJ<. off my clothes, and threw myself, 
 a second time, into the water, in order, if possible, 
 to afford some aid to my companions. When I 
 had reached the place where they were, I direct- 
 ed the boy, to take hold of the hair of my head, 
 and I took him to a staddle, at no great distance, 
 
 
 
 
 ) ■ * For at that time, 1 wa« if norant of my lost condition by 
 nature, and of the necessity of being clothed in a better righ- 
 teousnesB than my own, to prepare me to appear with safety 
 before a holy God, in judgment. Mfi -t ',-**. »^ 
 
 
128 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 1 Hki f 
 
 and directed him to lay fast hold of it, by which 
 means he would be able to keep the greater part 
 of his body above water. I then returned to the 
 canoe, and took Collin to a similar place. Mr. 
 Goedike had alone proceeded to a small staddle, 
 and would have reached the shore, had not 
 the cramp seized him in one of his legs. I next 
 tried to take the canoe ashore, but could 
 not alone effect it. I therefore, swam to the op- 
 posite shore, caught a horse and mounted him, 
 and made him swim to the canoe, at one end of 
 which I tied a cord, and taking the other end in 
 my teeth and hands, after drifting a considerable 
 distance, I reached the land. After repairing the 
 canoe a little, I proceeded to my three wretched 
 fellow creatures, who had, by this time, become 
 nearly lifeless, having been in the water at least 
 two hours. By the aid of a kind Providence, 
 however, they at last safely reached the shore ; 
 and so deeply were they affected with their un- 
 expected escape, that they prostrated them- 
 selves to the earth, in an act of thanksgiving, to 
 their great and merciful Deliverer. ."♦' J**'*^ !«*• 
 "^ Sunday, July 1. We now begin to have straw- 
 berries, and the prospect is, that they will be 
 abundant. - ■ - -■ < ■ • . -»- , 
 
 Tuesday, 17. On the 8th instant, some In- 
 dians ran away with three of our horses ; and on 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 1S9 
 
 !<■■ ilTJH«i»Jl 
 
 the following morning, Mr. Goedike and myself 
 mounted two others, to pursue the thieves. We 
 followed them for two days, and then, ascer- 
 taining that they were so far in advance of us, 
 and travelled so fast, that it would be impossible 
 to overtake them, before thoy would reach their 
 camp, which is six or seven days' march from this, 
 we ceased following them. We di«"?cted our 
 course another way, for the piirpose of finding 
 buffaloe, but without success. We, however, kill- 
 ed as many fowls, in the small lakes, as we need- 
 ed for daily consumpt'on ; and this evening re- 
 turned to the fort, having had on the whole a 
 pleasant ride. :,«»- ..i - .. ^>.- ^ * . .,^ .^..,^^.,v.- .v*r- 
 
 We have had a frost, so hard, that it has in- 
 jured many things in our garden. *i*^ |.v«i^.tt»^•v 
 
 Wednesday, 25. An Indian has arrived here 
 with six horses, who states, that he came directly 
 from the territory of the Black feet Indians. He 
 brings the intelligence, that this tribe have con- 
 cluded a peace with the Crees and Assiniboins; 
 and that forty tents of the latter tribes, who went 
 into that quarter, two years since, are on their 
 way home, and will reach this pl^oe before the 
 commencement of winter. "•^' 
 
 Saturday, September I. This afternoon, Mr. 
 Ferguson and company arrived, from fort Dau- 
 phin, bringing the intelligence, that all the Indians 
 
 17 
 
 Nil 
 
130 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 t< 1 » i ' 
 
 jiv 
 
 'If ' t. 
 
 i *!,v 
 
 ivho are accustomed to remain, in that vicinity, 
 have now gone to the Great Winipick lake. iHfiM- 
 •■! Thursday, October 4. This afternoon, Mr. 
 Francis la Rocque arrived, from Montagne a la 
 Basse, which lies about five days' march from this, 
 down the river. He brought me letters from 
 several gentle "len in this country, one of which is 
 from Mr. Charles Cbaboillez, who informs me that 
 this place will be supplied with goods, this season, 
 by the way of the Red River, of which depart- 
 ment he has the superintendence. As I am to 
 pass the winter here, he desires me to accompa- 
 ny Mr. La Rocque, down to Montagne a la Basse, 
 and receive such goods as will be necessary for 
 the Indians at this post, ^^i * j>^ t*'<^UM^*/</ 
 
 Friday, 26. Agreeably to the instructions of 
 Mr. Cbaboillez, in company with Mr. La Rocque, 
 and an Indian, who served as guide, I set out on 
 the 6th instant, for Montagne a la Basse. Our 
 course was nearly south, over a plain country ; 
 and on the 9th, we reached Riviere qui Apelle, 
 where the North West and X. Y. companies 
 have each a fort, where we tarried all night, with 
 Monsieur Poitras, who has charge of that post. 
 The next morning, we continued our march, which 
 was always in beautiful plains, until the 11th, 
 when we arrived at the place of our destination. 
 There I found Mr. Cbaboillez, C. M^Kenzie, &c. 
 
 >> 
 
 * T 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 131 
 
 The fort is well built, and beautifully situated, on 
 a very high bank of the Red River; and over- 
 looks the country round to a great extent, whicb 
 is a perfect plain. There can be seen, at almost 
 all seasons of the year, from the fort gate, as I 
 am informed, buffaloes grazing, or antelopes 
 bounding over the extensive plains, which cannot 
 fail to render the situation highly pleasant. I spent 
 my time there very pleasantly, during eight days, 
 in company with the gentlemen above mentioned. 
 At times, we would mount our horses, and ride 
 out into the plains, and frequently try the speed 
 of our beasts. On the 19th, I left that enchanting 
 abode, in company with Messrs. Chaboillez, 
 M^Kenzie, &c., and the day following, arrived 
 at Riviere qui Apelle, where we found the peo- 
 ple, waiting our arrival. They ^ame here by 
 water ; but at this season, canoes go up no fur- 
 ther, on account of the shallowness of the river. 
 The goods intended for Alexandria, therefore, 
 must be taken from this on horse back. Accord- 
 ingly, we delivered out to the people such articles 
 as we thought necessary, and sent them oflf ; and 
 the day following, Mr. Chaboillez returned to 
 Montagne a la Basse, and Mr. M^Kenzie and my- 
 self proceeded to Alexandria, where we arrived 
 this afternoon, after having made a pleasant jaunt 
 of twenty one days., -^A,, <|jm' !»«ii'»-oi .'• 
 
 I. \ 
 
 ,> 
 
 i 
 
 •? i 
 
 .*;t 
 
 Ii.i.i 
 
132 
 
 Harmon's journal.. 
 
 fi I .r S i 
 
 
 
 ! \ 
 
 
 a Here I shall pass the winter, having with me 
 Mr. Goedike, two interpreters, twenty labouring 
 men^ fourteen women and sixteen children. 
 
 Saturday, JVovemher 24. Some people have 
 just arrived from Montagne a la Basse, with a 
 letter from Mr. Chaboillez, who informs me, that 
 two Captains, Clarke and Lewis, with one hund- 
 red and eighty soldiers, have arrived at the Man- 
 dan Village on the Missouri River, which place 
 is situated about three days' march distant from 
 the residence of Mr. Chaboillez. They have in- 
 vited Mr. Chaboillez to visit them. It is said, 
 that on their arrival, they hoisted the American 
 flag, and informed the Natives that their object 
 was not to trade, but merely to explore tht coun- 
 try ; and that as soon as the navigation shall open, 
 they design to continue their route across the 
 Rocky Mountain, and thence descend to the Pa- 
 cific Ocean. They made the Natiyes a few small 
 presents, and repaired their guns, axes, d^c, gratis. 
 Mr. Chaboillez writes, that they behave honour^ 
 ably toward his people, who are there to trade 
 
 with the Natives. ■*'^'^' ^^Hfe "i*4i' liiiKntt.Ji* '"n^**!! 
 
 f * 
 "^ Tuesday, January 21,1805. For nearly a month, 
 
 we have subsisted on little besides potatoes ; but 
 thanks to a kind Providence, the last night, two of 
 tny men returned from the plains, with their sledg- 
 es loaded with the flesh of the buffHloe. They 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 133 
 
 bring us the pleasing intelligence, that there is a 
 plenty of these animals within a day's march of us. 
 This supply of provisions could not have come 
 more opportunely, for our potatoes are almost 
 gone. 
 
 About a month since, I sent Mr. Goedike, ac> 
 companied by ten men, out into the -plains, in 
 hopes that they might fall in with the Natives, 
 who would be able to furnish us with food ; but 
 we have heard nothing from them, and I cannot 
 conjecture what should have detained them so long, 
 as I did not expect that they would be absent^ for 
 more than ten days, from the fort. ^. - ,... 
 
 Thursday, February 7. At the most of the 
 forts in the Swan River department, they have 
 not a sufiiciency of provisions ; and they have 
 therefore, sent the greater number of their peo- 
 ple, to pass the remainder of the winter here. 
 We now have bulfaloe in abundance, though our 
 family consists of upwards of seventy persons, who 
 consume, at least, four hundred and fifty pounds, 
 daily. f'*i.it\^:''fr ma .:/3/ Mi-^^'vdiSiH^-iM' 
 
 Thursday, 19. On the 8th inst. two men ar- 
 rived from Montagne k la Basse, with a packet of 
 letters, informing me, that a coalition took place, 
 the last autumn at Montreal, bet^veen the North 
 West and the X. Y. companies, which letters I 
 have forwarded to Fort des Prairies. ^»5. ♦ ; uiffu tu 
 
 
 I: 
 
134 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 1 ii, 
 
 p * til ' 
 
 1,1 •' I t 
 
 i. . i 
 
 ^ '■ 
 
 s.« On the 16th inst. I left this, in a cariol, drawn 
 by a horse, to visit a place, about two days' march 
 from this, into the plains, were a number of our 
 people have passed a greater part of the winter : 
 and in the course of this pleasant ride, I saw thou- 
 
 H Saturday, March % People arrived from Fort 
 dee Prairies, with letters from that place, the 
 English River, and Athabasca. — Yesterday, swans 
 passed this place, on their way to the north- 
 ward. ' ' '. ' 
 
 Monday^ 18. A band of Crees and Assiniboins 
 came in, a few days since, consisting of more than 
 a hundred persons. As they brought a considera- 
 ble quantity of furs and provisions, they were j;.ole 
 to purchase a large supply of spirits for several 
 days, and of course continued drinking, until tl^eir 
 means were exhausted. During this period, one 
 of the Assiniboins stabbed one of the Crees. The 
 wound, however, is not thought to be mortal. The 
 injury has been atoned for, therefore, by a horse, 
 presented by the aggressor, to the wounded In- 
 dian ; and now, they appear to be as great 
 friends, as they were before the quarrel took 
 place. , ; „ ,f _ , . . 
 
 ,., It is a common thing among all the Natives, 
 ' for an offender to offer property in satisfaction for 
 an injury j and when this is accepted by the in- 
 
HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 135 
 
 f >* ■f'j'vif-j ^ .#■*■ 
 
 jtired party, contention between them entirely 
 ceases. Even murder is, sometimes, in this ' 
 way, atoned for; but not commonly. In ordinary 
 cases, nothing but the death of the murderer, or of 
 some of his near relations, will satisfy the desire 
 of revenge in an Indian, whose relative has been 
 murdered. •« i*umf Mi:tf>-f'ttt' ^f*if».H.i .mF^nvHi 
 
 Wednesday, Jpril 10. On the 24th ult. I set 
 out on horse back, accompanied by one man, for 
 Montagne a la Basse. When we arrived there, 
 we were not a little surprised to find the fort 
 gates shut, and about eighty tents of Crees and 
 Assiniboins encamped in a hostile manner, around 
 it, and threatening to massacre all the white peo- 
 ple in it. They, in a menacing manner, threw 
 balls over the palisades, and told our people to 
 gather them up, declaring that they would proba- 
 bly have use for them in the course of a few days.* 
 After having passed several days there, I set out"^ 
 to return home. Just as I had gotten out of the 
 fort gate, three villainous Indians approached me; 
 and one of them seized my horse by the bridle 
 and stopped him, saying, that the beast belonged 
 to him, and that he would take him from me. 
 I told him that he had disposed of him to Mr. 
 Chaboillez, who had charge of the post ; and that 
 of this gentleman, I had purchased him, and that I 
 had no concern with the matter, whiirfi was whol- 
 
 
fw 
 
 136 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 si 
 
 '■^VU 
 
 Bj 
 
 I'l'i 
 
 ,. . 
 
 \y between him and Mr. Chabolllez. Perceiving, 
 however, that he was determined not to let go of 
 the bridle, I gave him a smart blow on his hand, 
 with the but end o{ my whip, which consisted of 
 a deer's hor. , and instantly striking my horse, I 
 caused him to spring forward, and leave the Indian 
 behind. Finding myself thus clear of this fel- 
 low, I continued my rout ; but he with one of his 
 companions, followed us nearly half of the day, if 
 not longer. After this length of time we saw no 
 more of them. Apprehensive, however, that they 
 might fall upon us in our encampment at night, 
 and steal our horses, and probably massacre us, 
 after it became dark, we went a little out of the 
 path, and laid ourselves down ; but we dared not 
 make a fire, lest the light or the smoke should 
 discover the place where we were. * '• ■* 
 
 On my return, I passed four days agreeably, at 
 Riviere qui Apelle, in the company of a number 
 of gentlemen, whom I found there. On leaving 
 that place, I was obliged to cross the river, and 
 at this late season, the ice was bad. My horse, 
 while I was on him, fell through the ice twice, and 
 the last time, I came very near passing under it; 
 but a kind Providence once more, granted me de- 
 liverance. ..,;,,„. 
 
 While at Montagne a la Basse, Mr. Chaboillez, 
 induced me to consent to undertake a long and 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 137 
 
 arduous tour of discovery. I am to leave that 
 place, about the beginning of June, accompanied 
 by six or seven Canadians, and by two or three In- 
 dians. The first place, at which we shall stop, 
 will be the Mandan Village, on the Missouri Riv- 
 er. Thence, we shall steer our course towards 
 the Rocky Mountain, accompanied by a number 
 of the Mandan Indians, who proceed in that di- 
 rection every spring, to meet and trade with another 
 tribe of Indians, who reside on the other side of 
 the Rocky Mountain. It is expected that we 
 ahall return from our excursion, in the month of 
 November next*. « •» ■ 
 
 [This journev I never undertook; for soon af- 
 ter the plan of it was settled, my health became 
 so much impaired, that I was under the necessity 
 of proceeding to Head Quarters, to procure med- 
 ical assistance. A Mr. La Rocque attempted to 
 make this tour ; but went no farther than the 
 Mandan Village.] *? 
 
 Thursday^ 18. We are packing our furs, in 
 order to send them to the general rendezvous ; 
 and a few days hence, I shall abandon this fort, 
 and the Indians in this vicinity will go either into 
 the region of Riviere qui Apelle, or up the SisisK 
 catchwin' River, near Fort des Prairies. 
 .■-» f^Sunday, May 5. We are now about three 
 leagues below Alexandria, which place we aban^ 
 
 18 
 
 
138 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 % 
 
 
 \\ 
 
 '), IrM' '111 
 
 \m- ■■<' -' i'i 
 
 doned on the 28th ult. All our property is on 
 board of boats ; but sonie of us travel on horse- 
 back. As it has not rained since the last Autumn, 
 the water in the river is uncommwily low, on ac- 
 count of which, our boats make but poor progress. 
 As we have a pit saw with us, I have directed 
 some of my people to go into the woods, and saw a 
 sufficient quantity of boards, to constiuct another 
 boat, by means of which, we may reduce the load- 
 ing, ) those that we now possess. 
 
 Wednesday, 8. Riviere qui J^pelle. On the 
 6th Mr. Goedike and several other persons with 
 myself, left our boats, and proceeded on horse- 
 back. As the fire has passed over the plains, 
 this spring, it was with difficulty that we could 
 find grass, sufficient for the subsistence of our 
 horses. .■, -^.n ■■■ _,,..• rr-^^ ,■ 
 
 : Monday, 20. Montagne tin Basse, Here I 
 have been waiting ever since the 15th for the ar- 
 rival of our boats. They arrived this afternoon. 
 1*^ Monday, 27. Riviere a la Souris, or Mouse 
 River. This is about Mty miles from Montagne 
 a la Basse. Here are three establishments, form- 
 ed severally by the North West, X. Y. and Hud- 
 son Bay companies. .^iy 
 
 f'-^- 
 
 ■■-4fckiji. w '% ■ T*«# . 
 
 Last evening, Mr. Chaboillez invited the people 
 of the other two forts to a dance ; and we had a 
 real North West country ball. When three fourths 
 
 Hf 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 139 
 
 of the people had drunk so much, as to be incapa- 
 ble of walking straightly, the other fourth thought 
 it time to put an end to the ball, or rather bawl. 
 This morning, we were invited to breakfast at the 
 Hudson Bay House, with a Mr. M^Kay, and in the 
 evening to a dance. This, however, ended more 
 decently, than the one of the preceding evening. 
 ^ It is now more than fifty years, since a French 
 missionary left this place. He had, as I am inform- 
 ed, resided here, during a number of years, for the 
 purpose of instructing the Natives in the Christian 
 religion. He taught them some short prayers, in 
 the French language, the whole of which some of 
 them have not yet forgotten. 
 W The surrounding country consists chiefly of 
 plains ; and the soil appears to be richer, than 
 that which is farther up the river. 
 
 Tuesday, 30. In the morning, I left Mouse 
 River; and I have with me upwards of forty men, 
 in five boats and seven canoes. a uvxysii ' 
 
 ■^ Saturday, June 1. We arc now a little below 
 what was called the Pine Fort. It is twenty 
 years since this fort was built, and eleven since it 
 was abandoned. This River is now so low, aris- *^ 
 ing from the fact that we have had no rain this 
 spring, and we have such a number of boats and 
 canoes, that we drive the sturgeon upon the sand 
 bankr, where there is but little water ; and we 
 
 m 
 
140 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 have no difficulty in killing any number of them, 
 that we [)lease. We novvsubsist entirely on these 
 fish ; and they are excellent food, ^tm ®i'^vt8ui*>A* 
 Thursday^ 13. Portage la Prairie, or Plain 
 Portage. Here the North West company have a 
 miserable fort, the local situation of which, is beau- 
 tiful, beyond any thing that I have seen in his 
 part of the world. Opposite the fort, iheie is a 
 plain, which is about sixty miles long, and from one 
 to ten broad, in the whole extent of which, not the 
 least rise of ground is visible. — To this place, the 
 Natives resort every spring, to take and dry stur- 
 
 Saturday, 15. We are now encamped under 
 a beautiful range of oaks, which separate the riv- 
 er from a pretty extensive plain. Ever since we 
 left Mouse River, the soil on each side of the Up- 
 per Red River, down which we are passing, ap- 
 pears to be excellent, and the timber is very dif- 
 ferent from what it is near its source. We here 
 find oak, elm, walnut, bass wood, &c. and I «'m ^r^- 
 formed that there are grapes and plums in this 
 vicinity. »i*'!»^ J »■>+«• t"^ 
 
 ^ Tuesday, 18. Not far from the place where 
 we are now encamped, there is a considerably 
 large camp of Sauteux. Among them I saw an- 
 other of my unfortunate countrymen, who, like 
 one of whom I have already spoken, was taken 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 141 
 
 from his parents, when a child. Thus, has many 
 a fond mother, in the frontier settlements, been 
 deprived of her beloved and tender offspring. — 
 but this fellow is lost, beyond recovery, for he now^. 
 Hpeaks no other language, but that of the Indians, 
 among whom he resides, and he has adopted all 
 their manners and customs ; and it would now be 
 as difficult to reconcile him to the habits of civil- 
 ized life, as it would be, were he a real Indian. 
 
 Wednesday, 19. The Forks. At this place 
 the Upper and Lower Red Rivers, form a junc- 
 tion. The country around is pleasant, the soil ap- 
 pears to be excellent, and it is tolerably well tim- 
 bered with oak, basswood, walnut, elm, poplar, as- 
 pin, birch, he. Grape vines &nd plum trees are 
 also seen. 
 
 Friday, tl. We are now enfcampel at the 
 nlace, where the Red River enters the Great Win- 
 ipick Lak^. It is now nearly five years since I pass- 
 ed this place, whic'j, at first thought, seems but a 
 moment. But when I deliberately recollect the 
 scenes through which I have passed, during that 
 space of time, it seems as if I had passed the 
 greater part of my days in this country. - . ■ , 
 
 Monday, 24. We are now at the entrance of 
 Winipick River, into the Lake of the same name. 
 Wo, here, find a number of people, who are from 
 
 A'* 
 
142 
 
 HARMON tj JOURNAL. 
 
 
 i'J 
 
 
 their respective winter quarters, and who, like our- 
 selves, are on their way to the New Fort. **f««l 
 
 Friday, July 5. Rainy Lake. On the margin 
 of the waters, which connect this lake with the 
 Great Winipick Lake, the wild rice is found, of 
 which I have spoken on a former occasion. This 
 useful grain is produced in no ther part of the 
 North West Country ; though Carver erroneous- 
 ly states, that it is found every where. It grows 
 in water, about two feet deep, where there is a 
 rich muddy bottom. It rises more than eight feet 
 above the water ; and, in appearance bears p con- 
 siderable resemblance to oats. It is gathered 
 about the latter end of September, in the follow- 
 ing manner. The Natives pass in among it in ca- 
 noes. Each canoe has in it two persons, one of 
 whom is in each end, with a long hooked stick, in 
 one hand, and a straight one in the other. With 
 the hooked stick, he brings the heads'of^he grain 
 over the canoe, and holds it there ; while, with 
 the other, he beats it out. When the canoe is 
 thus sufficiently loaded, it is taken to the shore and 
 emptied. This mode of gathering the wild rice, 
 is evidently more simple and convenient, than that 
 which was practised in Carver's day. This grain 
 is gathered in such quantities, in this region, that, 
 in ordinary seasons, the North West Company 
 purchase, annually, from twelve to fifteen hundred 
 
Harmon's journal. ^ 
 
 143 
 
 bushels of it, from the Natives ; and it constitutes 
 a principal article of food, at the posts in this yi- 
 cinity. "' ' - * '* 
 
 I have here received letters from my friends 
 in Vermont, which left them in April last; and 
 which have, as usual, afforded me much satisfac- 
 tion. *.^- i^jm^'- mi$'^i->A*i t * .^'v''- K /«''. A' ■■,.','. ■ j>t^j, 
 
 Saturday^ 6. Rainy Lake, We are about ten 
 miles from the fort, on this lake ; and have been 
 encamped, during the greater part of the day, in 
 order that our people may repair their canoes ; 
 for they will soon be obliged to transport them 
 over a number of long portages. .,y^^. ^>*> 
 
 vtJUonday 8. Cross Lake. Here we meet 
 several canoes which, about the beginning of May 
 last, left Montreal, that have goods on board, 
 which will be carried in them to the Rainy Lake 
 fort, and will thence be transported to Athabasca. 
 — At this lake, we leave the route which leads to 
 the old Grand Portage. 
 
 ^utTuesday,^ 9. During the whole of this day, 
 we have been crossing small lakes, and coming 
 down what deserve the name of brooks, rather 
 than rivers. — We have met eight canoes, on their 
 way to the Rainy Lake. -i'-n^-^.^^,.', .,, 
 
 Friday^ 12. The Plain Portage. In the for- 
 mer part of the day, we met, A. N. M'^Leod, Esq. 
 who is now from tJie New Fort, on his way back 
 
144 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 Ij i t 
 
 4i 
 
 to Athabasca. We went on shore, and took break- 
 fast with him. He has taken with him my friend 
 Mr. F. Goedike, a young man possessed of a good 
 understanding, and a humane and generous heart, 
 who has been with me for four years past, and 
 from whom I could not separate, without regret. 
 
 Saturday, July 13. Overtook the Swan River 
 people, and entered Nipignon River, which is 
 nearly ten rods broad. This and Dog's river, 
 excepting a few carrying places, on account of 
 rapids and falls, will carry us to the New Fort. 
 The land in this vicinity is low, and in many pla- 
 ces, it is swampy. There are few animals in this 
 region, excepting moose, bears, and a few beavers 
 and martins. This is the rout, by which the 
 French, in former times, passed into the I *eriour. 
 The Indians in this quarter, are a few Sauteux 
 and Muscagoes. The latter, come from towards 
 Hudson's Bay. v^ ^^y^s *^,- 
 
 *v Sunday 14. Dog's Portage, which is about 
 three miles over. After coming down Nipignon 
 River, which is nearly fifty miles long, we enter- 
 ed the Dog's Lake, which may be about forty 
 miles in circumference, and by crossing which, we 
 arriveQ at tnis piace. ■. .mm-vm't-m vtnitK'Wf^v. v^k-t^-,,-^!^, ^.«»' 
 
 Monday 15. The Mountain Portage. Itere the 
 
 water falls perpendicularly, about seventy feet. 
 
 >The North West company have here a store 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 145 
 
 house, to which they send provisions, &c., from 
 the New Fort, as the river from this to that 
 place is generally shallow, and is full of rapids. 
 Those, therefore, who are going into the interi- 
 our, cannot take a full load, until they arrive at 
 this place ; and here they usually take their sup- 
 ply of provisions. 
 
 Tuesday, 16. Mew Fort, or, as \i is called by 
 the Natives, Kd-mi-ni-ti-qui-d, is built on the bank 
 of Dog River, which is a considerable stream, 
 that empties into Lake Superiour, about four or 
 five hundreds rods below the fort. The vessel 
 that runs on that lake, can come, with a part of 
 her lading, quite up to the quay, before the fort. 
 Here the French, before the English conquered 
 Canada, had an establishment. 
 
 We here meet a number of gentlemen, some 
 of whom came this summer from Montreal, and 
 others from different parts of the Interiour. 
 There are also here, one thousand labouring men, 
 the greater part of whom, are Canadians, who 
 answer better in this country, for the service re- 
 quired by the Company, than any other people 
 would probably do. 
 
 The country, for some considerable distance 
 
 round, is covered with heavy timber, consisting of 
 
 a kind of red pine, poplar, aspin, birch, cedar, &c., 
 
 but the soil does not appear to be of the first 
 
 19 
 
 
146 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 — rs 
 
 quality. Potatoes, pease, oats, &c., however, 
 grow tolerably well here, t^* , ri .'^y^ 
 
 Monday, 22. I have passed several days, not 
 unpleasantly, in the company of a number of young 
 gentlemen. They now begin, however, to leave 
 this, to return to their winter quarters; and to- 
 morrow, I expect to depart, and to proceed for 
 Fort des Prairies. As there will be two other 
 young gentlemen in the same brigade, whom I 
 know to be sociable and pleasant companions, I 
 expect to have a pleasant passage to my winter 
 quarters. ,1.- i^^ .^ . .. 
 
 Wednesday, •iugust 28. During nearly a 
 month past we have been coming through a coun- 
 try, which I have already described. We are 
 now at the Grand Rapid, where the Sisiscalichwin 
 River disembogues into the north west part of 
 Great Lake Winipick. This is a noble stream, 
 ajbout two hundred fathoms broad. 
 
 Thursday, September 5. Cumberland House. 
 This fort stands on the north side of a considera- 
 ble lake, called by the Natives, who in this vicini- 
 ty are Muscagoes, Sturgeon Lake. The sturgeon 
 are found in considerable plenty, in this lake. 
 This post was established, thirty three years 
 since, by Mr. Joseph Frobisher. At this place, 
 the people who are destined to Fort des Prairies, 
 and those who are proceeding to Athabasca, sep- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 147 
 
 owever. 
 
 arate. The former go up the Slslscatchwin Riv- 
 er, and the latter up the English River. The 
 latter, is so called, in honour of Mr. Joseph Fro- 
 bisher, an Englishman, who was the first trader 
 that ever went into that part of the country. — 
 On the 30th ultimo, we crossed Lac Bourbon, 
 which is about forty miles long, on which the 
 North West Company had a fort, formerly ; but 
 it was abandoned, in 1802. There are few 
 mountains or hills to be seen, between this place 
 and Lake Winipick. The country has a pretty 
 heavy growth o( timber, and the soil is rich. In 
 the lakes and rivers of this region, excellent fish 
 are taken, such as sturgeon, white-fish, cat-fish, 
 pike, pickefel, &c. This country abounds in fowls, 
 among which are swans, bustards, geese, and many 
 kinds of ducks. Moose are found in considerable 
 plenty; there are a few black bears, otters, musk- 
 rats and martins ; and rarely, a beaver is found. 
 
 Saturday, September 21. So^th Branch Fort. 
 This is about one hundred and twentv miles 
 above the Fork, or the place where this river 
 forms a junction with the North Branch, after 
 which, it assumes the name of Sisiscatchwin River. 
 Both branches take their rise in the Rocky Moun- 
 tain, though at a distance of several hundred 
 miles from each other. The South Branch pass- 
 es through large plains ; but the country through 
 
148 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 n^ 
 
 % ' 'I 
 
 << ill 
 
 ■^1^ 
 
 ^;l Aiv.-* 
 
 which the other runs r yoody, particularly on the 
 north side. From C uberland House to the 
 Fork, the country on both sides of the river is 
 covered with wood. In these woods, and the 
 small plains that are here and there scattered 
 among them, moose, red deer, &c., are to be 
 found. ' ir;~;w^ 
 
 t. This fort was put up the last summer, and 
 two stores were built ; but the dwelling houses 
 are still to be constructed. — I am informed that 
 buffaloes are ill plenty within a half a day's march 
 from this. There are four tribes of Indians, 
 who come to trade at this establishment. They 
 are the Crees, Assiniboins, Sauteux and Musca- 
 goes. A few also of the Black fcit Indians resort 
 here. * ' -*m««' ;-'-»< •. :^.- 
 
 In coming up this river, we sa v many places, 
 where forts have stood, some of which were 
 abandoned thirty years since, and some at a later 
 period. One, which was situated about six miles 
 below this, was abandoned fifteen years since, on 
 account of an attack from the Rapid Indians. The 
 following circumstances, in regard to that affair, 
 were related to me by Mons. Louis Chattel- 
 lain, who, at that time, had charge of the fort. 
 The Hudson Bay Company had a fort in the same 
 neighbourhood, which was first attacked, by about 
 one hundred and fifty Indians oh horse back ; 
 
/ 
 
 UARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 149 
 
 and the few people who were in it, excepting one 
 man, who secreted himself, were killed. After 
 they had taken out of the fort all the property 
 which they could con'jreniently c^rry away with 
 them, they set fire to the fort, and proceeded to 
 the establishment of the North West Company, 
 which was two hundred rods distant from that of 
 Hudson Bay people, with the intention of treating 
 it in a similar manner. 
 
 The fort gates had providentially, been shut, 
 previously to the approach of the Indians. There 
 were in the fort, three men, and several women 
 and children. The men took their stations in the 
 block houses and bastions ; and when the Natives 
 had come sufficiently near, fired upon tliem. The 
 Indians, instantly returned the fire ; and the contest 
 continued, until the night approached. The sav- 
 age assailants, having had several of their party 
 killed, and others severely wounded, while the 
 people in the fort had sustained no injury, thought 
 it best to retreat ; and after dragging their dead 
 and dying into the river, they retired. But Mr. 
 Chattellain did not think it prudent to remain 
 there any longer. Accordingly, the day fol- 
 lowing, thfey embarked all their property on 
 board of several canoes, and proceeded down the 
 river, about two hundred miles, where they com- 
 menced building another fort. The only object 
 
150 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 of the Indians, in attacking these forts, was plun- 
 der. '* ' "•• i3f«iB«.i -.^4 ij . , '?*' 4 .' 5**'; »-'!i€i Jr 
 
 Mr. WiUiain Smith and myself, together with 
 fifteen labouring men, &c. are to pass the winter 
 here ; and a few hundred paces from us, the Hud- 
 son Bay people have a fort. -"-^ ■" 
 
 Thursday, October 10. This day, a Canadian's 
 daughter, a girl of about fourteen years of age, 
 was offered to me ; and after mature considera- 
 tion, concerning the step which I ought to take, I 
 have finally concluded to accept of her, as it is 
 customary for all gentlemen who remain, for any 
 length of time, in this part of the world, to have a 
 female companion, with whom they can pass their 
 time more socially and agreeably, than to live a 
 lonely life, as they must do, if single. If we can 
 live in haimony together, my intention now is, to 
 keep her as long as I remain in. this uncivilized 
 part of the world ; and when I return to my na- 
 tive land, I shall endeavour to place her under the 
 protection of some honest man, wi.h whom she 
 can pass the remainder of her days in this country, 
 much more agreeably, than it would be possible 
 for her to do, were she to be taken down into the 
 civilized world, to the manners, customs and lan- 
 guage of which, she would be an entire stranger. 
 Her mother is of the tribe of the Snare Indians, 
 whose country lies along the Rocky Mountain. 
 
 •m 
 
n HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 151 
 
 The girl is said to have a mild disposition and an 
 even temper, which are qualities very necessary 
 to make an agreeable woman, and an affectionate 
 partner. ... 
 
 .>^ Thursday, JVovember 7. The river froze over 
 the last night ; but we have yet had but little 
 snow. vTKs 1 \ 
 
 Saturday, March 15, 1806. This evening the 
 northern express arrived ; and I am sorry to learn 
 that no letters have come from Athabasca, this 
 season. This failure is owing to the great depth of 
 snow in that quarter. — Buffaloes have been found 
 in plenty, within a few miles of the fort, during 
 the whole winter. Ea?4fs r**^.^ ;ttiBi^<.i^^«&f t.r,,;^®?^ oh«^f- #f 
 
 l^uesday, 25. The snow is chiefly dissolved, 
 we have sent four men, about a day's march from 
 this, to make sugar. 
 
 Saturday, April 19. The greater part of our 
 Indians have gone to wage war upon the Rapid 
 Indians, their inveterate enemies, with whom they 
 frequently patch up a peace, which, however, is 
 generally of short continuance. m 
 
 Monday, 28. This afternoon, the ice in this 
 river broke up. — A few days since, a small war 
 party of the Rapid Indians came and killed seve- 
 ral Assiniboins, who were encamped within fif- 
 teen miles of our fort. They also stabbed an 
 old woman in several places, and scalped her, who. 
 
 ■f 
 
>T 
 
 
 152 
 
 <#^HAHMON^S JOURNAL* 
 
 notwithstanding, is stl!l alive, and, to appearance, 
 likely to recover of her wounds. "^^ :% "^v 
 
 '*; • Monday, June 2. Last evening, Messrs. J. 
 Hughes and Alexander Stewart came here, on 
 horse back, from the North Branch, which passes 
 within fifteen miles from this. There, they left 
 their canoes and people ; and on their return, they 
 will continue their rout to the New Fort.— Mr. 
 Smith and myself, ^if providence permit, "tre 'o pass 
 the summer at this place, where we have three 
 interpreters, four labouring men, and a number ol 
 women and children. As my companion is a sen- 
 sible, well informed and sociable young man, 1 
 hope to pass my time both pleasantly and profita- 
 bly. ^)!**f«-,Jj^:'*ii^'tffe'»» ^**"''4ii0>.mi'*m 
 j.«a«: Friday, August 8. Six Assiniboins have arriv- 
 ed, and inform us, that about eighty tents of Creep 
 and Assiniboins, with about as many of the Black 
 feet Indians, were on their ^ay to wage war with 
 the Rapid Indians, their common enemy. But the 
 two former tribes quarrelled, in their march, re- 
 specting a horse, which they both claimed, and 
 which neither would relinquish. This circum- 
 stance occasioned a battle betu'een them, which 
 lasted during a day, in which twenty five of the 
 Black feet indians^ and three of the Assiniboins, 
 were killed. This put an end to ihe expedition, 
 for this season. -^m ipi# <; 
 
»f 
 
 HARMON'S JOUBNA(<. 
 
 103 
 
 earance. 
 
 ■ V 
 
 essrs. J. 
 here, on 
 h passes 
 they left 
 irn, they 
 rt.-— Mr. 
 e "^n pass 
 e three 
 imber of 
 is a sen- 
 ; man, I 
 1 profita- 
 
 1'. ikJ i . 
 
 ve arriv- 
 
 of Cree? 
 
 le Black 
 
 var with 
 
 But the 
 
 irch, re- 
 
 led, and 
 
 circum- 
 
 a, which 
 
 i of the 
 
 iniboins, 
 
 leditlon, 
 
 ..i^\ Wednesday, September 3. Two men have ar- 
 rived from Cumberland House, situated on Stur- 
 geon Lake, who have brought me letters from my 
 friends below, which communicate the melancholy 
 intelligence, that my father, after a severe illness 
 of but a (gw weeks, expired, on the 25th of June, 
 1805. The protector and guide of my youth, 
 whom I revered and loved, 1 shall never more 
 Bee in this world. It would have afforded me in- 
 expressible satisfaction, could I have seen and con- 
 versed with him, previously to his departure. But 
 " the Judge of the earth has done right," and " his 
 will be done." I am not left to mourn, under this 
 severe bereavement, without consolation ; for his 
 christian character and profession, afford the com- 
 fortable hope, that he has ceased to sin and to suf- 
 fer, and now participates in blessedness, such as 
 this miserable world cannot afford. May his pious 
 example stimulate me, and his other children, to 
 follow him in the path which conducts to a better 
 world. ^^iji^i^Mijif/. /iir^nH mHiizMi:''*ti^i ihi' 
 
 '- 1 have also received letters from Mr. A. N. 
 M^Leod, and Mr. J. M«= Donald, which inform me, 
 that I am to pass the enduing winter at Cuniber- 
 !and House, for which place, I shall leave this, a 
 few days hence. r ♦. i i r la tv ,» (i; ^ u i^n*'> 
 
 .1 Thursday, September 11. Cumler/and House, 
 I arrived here this afternoon, and tind Messrs.^J^ 
 
 20 
 
 .^ 
 
154 
 
 HAtlMON 8 JOURNAL. 
 
 " ! ' 1 ■ 
 
 Hughes, and David Thompson, &c. who have just 
 arrived from the New Fort, and who are on their 
 way to Fort des Prairies. The Huds^^n Fay peo- 
 ple have a fort within a hundred rods of ours, in 
 the charge of Mr. Peter Fidler. ' t ,* 
 
 ^~ Wednesday, 17. Sent Mons. Peras and com- 
 pany, with a small assortment of goods, to go and 
 pass the winter at Moose Lake, which is situated 
 about two days' march from this, and nearly weat 
 from Lake Winnipick. ."♦ 
 
 ^'^ The Indians, who resort to this establishment, 
 are Sauteux and Muscagoes. Moose and black 
 bears are pretty abundant in this vicinity ; and a 
 few beavers are found. We subsist principally upon 
 sturgeon and white hsh, which we take out of the 
 lake. Geese and bustards are numerous, in the 
 fall and spring. The surrounding country is very 
 low and level, so that, at some seasons, much of 
 it is overflowed. This accounts for the periodical 
 influx and reflux of the water, between this lake 
 and the Sisiscatchwin River, which are distant six 
 miles. 
 
 * Friday, October 3. Hudson Bay people, in 
 three canoes, have just arrived from York Facto- 
 ry* They bring late news from England; and in- 
 form us, that war continues to rage as much as 
 ever, on the continent of Europe. 
 ,% Friday^ 24. Wc have now about four inches 
 • . - a*: ■ 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 155 
 
 of snow ; and, the last night, the greater part of 
 this lake froze over. — I have sent people to the 
 other side of this lake, to fish for sturgeon, which . 
 will weigh from ten to one hundred pounds. They 
 are taken in spread nets, which is the manner in 
 which we generally take all kinds of fish, in this 
 country. Some kinds, however, such as trout, cat 
 fish and pike, we at times take, by setting hooks 
 and lines. 
 
 Friday, January 30, 1807. Two of the Hud- 
 son Bay people arrived from Fort des Prairies, 
 who were so obliging as to bring me letters from 
 several gentlemen in that quarter. The greater 
 part of tLe North West and Hudson Bay people, 
 live on amicable terms ; and when one can with 
 propriety render a service to the other, it is done 
 with cheerfulness. ,, 
 
 Sunday, April 5. The Ice in the Sisiscatchwin 
 river, is broken up ; and the great quantity of 
 snow which has recently been dissolved, has caus- 
 ed that river to rise so high, as to give another 
 course to a small river, which generally takes its 
 water out of this lake, but which now runs into it. 
 
 Saturday, May 23. This lake is free from 
 ice ; and we have planted potatoes, and sowed our 
 garden seeds. — Geese have returned from the 
 south, and we now have them in plenty. 
 
 Saturday, 30. Mr. John McDonald and others. 
 
156 
 
 UARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 in seven canoes, have just arrived from Fort dea 
 Prairies, and are on their way to the New Fort. ' 
 ^^ Sfunday, June 1 . Grand Rapid. On the 1st 
 inst. Mr. John M<^Donald, myself and other peo- 
 ple, in seven canoes and one boat, left CutnbeHand 
 House and arrived here, on the 15th, where we 
 have ever since been, stopped by the ice in Lake 
 Winnipick, which is not yet broken up. — We here 
 spear as many sturgeon as wc please, as they are 
 going up or down the rapid, wh'ch is about six 
 miles in length. 
 
 -- Monday^ 8. Lake Winnipick. The last night 
 there arose a strong north west wind, which broke 
 up the ice, and drove it to the north east part of 
 the lake. We, therefore, embarked this morning, 
 and have sailed all dav. ' "^ '..-t**-^ -- 
 
 Tuesday^ 16. White River. In the morning 
 we left the fort, at the entrance of Lake Winnipick 
 River, and this afternoon, Mr. A. N. M^Leod and 
 company, from Athabasca, overtook us. With 
 thi'j gentleman, to whom I am under many obliga- 
 tions, I am happy to spend an evening, after so 
 long a separation. 
 
 r. Saturday, Jidy 4. JYew Fort. Once ittore, I 
 have arrived at the general rendezvous, and find 
 myself among my friends and acquaintances, from 
 different parts of the country. — Here I have re- 
 ceived letters from my friemls beloW, which in- 
 
 , -» 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 157 
 
 ibrm me of their health and reasonable prosperi*- 
 ty. It is a great satisfaction thus to hear from 
 them ; but this satisfaction would be greatly in- 
 creased, could I be permitted to see and converse 
 with them. Although the seven years, for which 
 I was under an engagement to the North West 
 Company, have now expired, I cannot with the 
 least degree of propriety, as I think, gratify the 
 ardent desire which I have of seeing my friends, 
 by going down this year. Ai.d when the happy 
 time will come, that I shall visit them, God only 
 knows. It is trying to a person who has the least 
 affection for his friends, to be separated from 
 them, for such a series of years, in such a savage 
 country. My duty and happiness, however, re- 
 quire that I endeavour to make the best of my 
 situation. Notwithstanding the bad examples 
 which we daily witness, a person can be as virtu- 
 ous in this, as in any other part of tlie world. 
 True it is, if a person were here to lead a really re- 
 ligious life, he would find but few associates, who 
 would directly encourage him in his (^yurac^ But 
 this is in a great measure trub in every part of 
 the world. ^v ■' ••* .. v. >,'j >, i^?. . »-- ,. , 
 
 • Sunday, July 19. This, which was formerly 
 called the New Fort, is now named Fort William, 
 in honour of William M^Gilvray, Esq. the head 
 agent of the North West Company. At the time 
 
158 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 M. 
 
 of giving this name, the Company made a present 
 to their Voyagers, of a considerable quantity of 
 spirits, shrub, &:c. and also a similar present to the 
 Indians, encamped about the fort. 
 
 As I am still in ill health, I shall pass the win- 
 ter wi'th Doctor M'^Laughlin, at Sturgeon Lake, 
 in the department of Nipigon, which lies to the 
 north west from this. y .->^'^i-«. /? i.^ **« 
 ^^^u Saturday, 25. This afternoon, in company 
 with three canoes, I left Fort William ; and we 
 are now encamped on an island, in Lake Supe- 
 riour, . ,. . . 
 
 „,., JHonday, August 3. First long Portage in 
 the JVipigon Road. We yesterday, separated 
 from Messrs. Chaboille" ^iid Leith, who have gone 
 to winter at the Pic and Michipcotton ; and to day, 
 we left Lake Superiour, and have come up a small 
 river. 
 
 Tuesday, 4. South west end of Lake JVipigon, 
 This lake is said to be one hundred and fifty miles 
 in length, and from one, to twenty, broad. Trout 
 are here *^k2£?/SUDeriour to those that are found 
 iritne NorthWesf country, which will weigh up- 
 wards of seventy pounds, and are of an excellent 
 quality. — The country through which we have 
 passed in coming to this place from Lake Superi- 
 our, is rocky and contains but little wood, of any 
 kind. Whortleberries are found in plenty, iri^^^;. 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 159 
 
 •:% "Friday, 7. Fort Duncan, at the north end of 
 Lake JVipigon. The surrounding country is very 
 rough; but where the ground is arable, the 
 soil appears to be good. — Moose and cariboo 
 are found in this vicinity ; and there are, also, a 
 few black bear^, beavers, otters, muskrats, mar- 
 tins, &c. Great numbers of white fish are taken 
 out of the lake, particularly in the fall of the year. 
 These are hvtng up by their tails, in the open air, 
 and are preserved good, in a frozen state, during 
 the winter:. Most people prefer those that have 
 been thus kept, to fish that are taken immediately 
 out of the water. .v a 
 
 Sunday, 9. In the morning, we sent off three 
 canoes, and in the after part of the day, some of 
 the people returned, with the melancholy intelli- 
 gence, that one of their companions was drowned, 
 in going up a small rapid. The canoe overset, 
 and most of the property on board, was lost. The 
 other persons, who were in it, saved themselves 
 by swimming to the shore. 
 
 '«» Thursday, 13. In the morning, Mr. Holdane, 
 the Doctor and myself, with our company, left fort 
 Duncan, where Mr. R. M<=Kenzie will pass the 
 ensuing winter. There, also, we separated from 
 two Messrs. Camerons, whose route is northward, 
 towards Hudson's Bay. Our course is nearly 
 south west. 1 
 
 .'1 
 
 *i ♦■: 
 
160 
 
 .'lARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 m 
 
 it 1 
 
 % i 
 
 im 
 
 
 ^ Monday, 24. Portage du Fort, or Sturgeon 
 Lake. Here, we arrived, yesterday ; and this 
 morning, Mr. Holdane and his company left us, to 
 continue their route to Red Lake. The Doctor 
 and I, with our company, shall leave this tomor- 
 row, to go and build at the other end of this lake, 
 •which may be about forty miles long, and from 
 4/sH; XL 've broad. — The country through which 
 Wfc Lave r.-^ssed, since we left Fort Duncan, is Fow 
 and level ; no mountains, or even hills, arc to be 
 seen ; in many places it is swampy, and small lakes 
 and ponds and rivers and brooks are numerous. 
 Where the land is dry, the soil appears to be prin- 
 cipally a black loam. — This tract of country was 
 formerly well stocked with beavers and otters ; 
 but they have now become scarce, as they have 
 been hunted by the Natives, during more than the 
 last hundred years. Moose and carriboo are still 
 considerably numerous, in this region. 
 
 Tuesday, September, 1. Our people are erect- 
 ing houses for our winter habitations. We now 
 take white fish in considerable numbers. — The In- 
 dians, who frequent this post, are Sauteux and 
 Muscagoes. "^ •'-"'*"■ *"* >)v. .:.>««rJ^*, ..^.vfi ;. 
 
 Saturday, October 3. We sent people to the 
 other end of this lake, to make a fall fishery. 
 They will take white fish, trout, pike, carp, Hcc,, 
 which constitute^ the principal food for those 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 161 
 
 who are in the Nipigon country. In this country, 
 which is at least seven hundred miles long and 
 five or six hundred broad, more people have starv- 
 ed to death, than in all the rest of the Indian coun- 
 try. At this lake, several years since, eleven 
 Canadians lost their lives for want of food. We 
 experience at present, no difHcul ty in this respect ; 
 and I am of opinion that the distresses of our 
 predecessors were, in a considerable measure, 
 owing to the want of good management. 
 
 * Monday, JVovember 9. Our people havt re- 
 turned, and inform us, that they have caught only 
 fourteen hundred fish of all aescriptions. These, 
 however, with what corn, flour, wild rir" and meat 
 we have, together with the trout which we hope 
 to take with set hooks and lines, as soon as the 
 lake is frozen over, will, we expect, furnish us 
 with a comfortable subsistence, during the winter. 
 We are in a solitary place, where we see no one, 
 excepting the Natives ; and they are few in num- 
 ber, compared with those, among whom I have 
 formerly been. Happily for us, we have a 
 few good books ; and in perusing them, we 
 shall pass the greater part of the time. The 
 Doctor, who is of about the same age with 
 myself, is an excellent companion, and fond 
 of conversation ; and I trust, that a friendly inter- 
 course will mutually cheer our spirits, and that we 
 21 
 
 ^ 
 
162 
 
 HARMON'S JOUR:taL. 
 
 
 if 1 
 
 shall spend the winter in a manner, that will be 
 both pleasant and profitable. — We have now 
 about four inches of snow, which will probably re- 
 main with us through the winter. 
 , Sunday, lb. The last night, this lake froze 
 
 Friday, December 4. We now take great 
 numbers of excellent trout from under the ice, 
 with books and lines. if i» 
 
 Early this morning, the woman whom 1 have 
 taken to reside with me, became the mother of a 
 boy, whom 1 name George Harmon. 
 ,.,^, Monday, December 28. Doctor M<^Laughlin, 
 accompanied by two Canadians and one of the 
 Natives,^ has gone to visit Mr. Holdane, at Red 
 Lake. ii a,A« = f.i^.' 
 
 Friday, February 19, 1808. The Doctor 
 and company have returned, from their long 
 juant ; and I am happy in again enjoying his so- 
 ciety, after a season of comparative loneliness. 
 i i^^ Another year of my life is gone, which makes 
 me thirty years of age. This anniversary leads 
 me to reflect on the rapid flight of time, and the 
 brevity of human life. When I attentively con- 
 sider these things, it seems surprising that we 
 should encounter so much difliculty and labour in 
 the acquisition of property, which, if it could min- 
 
k. 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 163 
 
 ister more effectually to our enjoyment than it^ 
 does, we must very soon relinquish forever. 
 
 Friday, May 13. The Doctor, with one man 
 in a small canoe, has set off for Fort William, 
 where he will be wanted as soon as he can arrive, 
 to attend on the sick. Among the great number ' 
 who visit that rendezvous every summer, there 
 are always some, who need medical aid ; thougl^ . 
 I firmly believe, that no part of the world is more 
 healthly than this. — The Doctor has not been 
 able to learn, to his satisfaction, what my com- 
 plaint is. I think that the medicines, which I have 
 taken, in the course of the winter, have been of 
 essential service to me ; and I hope, before long 
 to regain my former state of good health. 
 
 The Indians of this f^ace have subsisted, dur- 
 ing the greater part of the past winter, upon 
 hares. — There is an old Sauteux woman here, 
 who compels her own son to have criminal inter- 
 course with her! ' ( 
 
 Thursday, June 9. Portage du Fort. Here, 
 we shall wait the arrival of the people of this de- 
 partment ; and we shall then continue our route, 
 with them to Fort William. It is nine months 
 and fifteen days since I passed this place, the last 
 autumn, in going into the country, which evinces 
 that our winter has been long; and I may add 
 too, that it has been dreary. But we have reason 
 
 t 
 
164 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 ! 
 
 
 JimWii'jil' 
 
 
 /« 
 
 to be thankful to God, that we have not suffered 
 at all, for the want of the means of sul^sistence. 
 
 Wednesday, 22. Fort Duncan, The people 
 for whoa* we were waiting at Portage du Fort, 
 arrived on the 12th, and the day following, we 
 set out for this place, which we reached this af- 
 ternoon. i« 
 f. Saturday, 25. Yesterday, we left fort Dun- 
 can, and came to an island in Lake Nipigon, on 
 which we are now encamped, and where we in- 
 tend to pass a few days, in fishing for trout, 
 which are here in plenty, and are of an excellent 
 quality. -».r^.. ^ yr, 3-^,^-^87?. 
 
 Thursday, July 7. Yesterday morning, I ar- 
 rived at Fort William, where I had only time to 
 read my letters from my friends below, and an- 
 swer them, and prepare myself for a long journey. 
 This afternoon I embarked for Athabasca, in 
 company with Mr. J. G. M<^Tavish ; and both of 
 us are to remain at the place of our destination, 
 for three years, at least. .-^i-^w^^ 
 
 Wednesday, 20. Rainy Lake. We here find 
 all the Athabasca people, excepting one brigade, 
 which is expected daily. *' ** 
 
 Saturday, 22. Ever since my arrival here, 
 we have been busily employed in preparing to 
 leave this place, for our winter quarters. 
 
 Tuesday, 26. Rainy Lake River. In the 
 
 $ 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 165 
 
 morning, I left the fort in company with Mr. 
 Archib. Id McGiUivray. Our brigade consicts of 
 ten canoes. ' * .. > r . ,. . . 
 
 Friday, 29. Portage de Disk, in Winnipick 
 River. In the morning, we met Mr. David 
 Thomson and company from the Columbia River. 
 
 Monday, Avgust 1. Lake Winnipick. This 
 morning, we arrived at the fort on this lake, 
 where we remained until noon. While there, I 
 wrote to my old friend Mr. William Henry, who 
 is at the Lower Red River. 1 also received a 
 letter from him, in which he informs me, that his 
 fort was attacked this summer, by a considerable 
 party of Sieux. Two shots, from cannon in the 
 block houses, however, caused them to retire, in 
 doing which, they threatened that they would be- 
 fore long, return and make another attempt to 
 take the fort. — The Sieux are a numerous tribe 
 of Indians, who are scattered over a large tract of 
 land, that lies between the Mississippi and Missou- 
 ri rivers ; and they are said to be the greatest 
 villains, in this part of the world. They are the 
 same tribe that Carver distinguishes, by the name 
 of Nandswesseis. .v. * 
 
 baturday, 6. Grand Rapid, at the north west 
 end of Lake Winnipick. The wind has been high, 
 during the day ; and in the latter part of it, one 
 of our canoes filled with water. Happily, it was 
 
166 
 
 harmok's journai^ 
 
 m 
 
 near an island, when tliis disaster happened. The 
 people were, however, under the necessity of 
 throwing a part of their property overboard. 
 
 We find here Mons. Perigne, who was former- 
 ly a clerk to the North West Company, but who, 
 as he informs me, has lately been to Canada, and 
 has coifne up oo his own account. He has 
 brought up a few good^, to enable him to carry on 
 a small traffick with the Natives. He, also,^ in- 
 tends, occasionally to hunt the beaver, &c., himself. 
 But I am convinced, that, at this great distance 
 from the place of market for furs, the trade cannot 
 be profitably carried on, unless it b« done on a 
 large scale, which requires a greater capital ihan 
 an individual can embark in this undertaking. 
 The cixperiment has been m*»de, in a number of 
 ' inslances ; and it has uniformly failed. 
 
 . Friday^ 12. Cumberland House. From this 
 , place, I shall take a route, which I haive never 
 before travelled, 
 
 r-f Saturday^ 113. Eritmnce (!)/' Rtver Maltgne^ or 
 Bad River, This is a considerable river, which 
 runs into Sturgeon Lake. 
 
 Sunday^ 14. llmver Lake, The greater 
 part of the day, we have employed in coming y[) 
 tbti river last mentioned, which, through its 
 whole course, has a continual succession of rapids. 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 167 
 
 The country around is low, a.id the timber, like 
 that of the North West country generally, is small. 
 
 Tuesday^ 16. Pelican Lake, Most of the 
 day has been passed in crossing Lac Martin. 
 
 Wednesday. 17. Portage du Forte de Traite, 
 or Trading Fort Portage. This was so named, 
 from a circumstance which occurred here, thirty 
 lour years since. Mr. Joseph Frobisher and com- 
 pany, who were the first traders who ever came 
 into this quarter, here met a large band of Na- 
 tives, whose canoes were loaded with furs, which 
 they were taking to York Factor)', at Hudson's 
 Bay. He succeeded in bartering his goods for 
 iheir furs, which amounted to more than he could 
 take to head quarters, the next season. He 
 therefore built a fort, and, with his people passed 
 several winters here ; and at that time, it was the 
 most northen post, belonging either to the North 
 
 West, or the Hudson Bay Company. ^ 
 
 All the wTtcrs from this side of the portage, pass 
 through Lake Winnipick, and finally fall into Hud- 
 son's Bay, at York Factory. But, on the other 
 side of the portage, which is about half a mile 
 over, the stream, which is called Mis-sin-ni-pi or 
 Great River, runs in a different direction, and en- 
 ters Hudson's Bay, at Churchill Factory, which is 
 the most northern post belonging to the Hudson 
 Bay Company. The river last mentioned, is call- 
 
 
168 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ¥ 
 
 •I > ! , 
 
 If 
 
 m 
 
 ed, by the Hudson Bay people, Churchill River, 
 and by the people from Canada, English River. 
 
 Thursday, August 18. This afternoon, we ob- 
 tained some dried meat from the Natives, which 
 we find much more palatable than the salted pro- 
 visions, on which we have subsisted, ever since 
 we left Fort William. In the kiteriour we never 
 make 'jse of salted provisions ; not, however, for 
 want of salt, which is found in most parts of the 
 country, and which can be obtained in plenty, at 
 all our establishments. ' "^ ^^ 
 
 Tuesday, 23. Isle a la Cross Lake. Ever 
 since we left Portage du Forte de Traite, we have 
 been in what may with propriety, bo called the 
 English River, though it passes through sev- 
 eral small lakes ; and in this river, our way has 
 been obstructed by thifty six portages. — 
 
 Thursday^ 25. ' Isle la Cross Jort. This fort 
 stands on the north side df the lake of the same 
 tiame, is well built and has attached to it an ex- 
 cellent kitchen garden. Out of the lake, the best 
 of white fish are taken, during the whole year ; and 
 it is the only place in this country, in which theec 
 fish can be taken, at all Beasons.— The Indians 
 who come to this establishment, are Chippewyans, 
 in considerablG numbers, and a few Crees. I am 
 informed that there are, in this vicinity, many 
 moose and carilioo, and a few black bears, bca- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 169 
 
 vers,' otters, cats, &c. The country is low ; and 
 scarcely any mountains are to be seen. 
 
 Tuesday, 30. East end of Portage la Loche, or 
 Loach Portage.' This is so named, from a neigh- 
 bouring lake, where these fish are taken, in abun- 
 dance. This portage is twelve miles oveit; and 
 across h, the pe?>ple are obliged to transport 
 both canoes' and lading. The road, however, 
 is excellent, through a level country, thinly wood- 
 ed with cypress. In coming here from Isle la 
 Cross, we Jiave passed two considerable lakes, 
 aiid come up a small river, which is between 
 those lakes. The country through which we 
 have parsed, is generally level, and the soil 
 iy tolerably \ood. " The streams, before we 
 cross this portage, discharge themselves into 
 Hudson's Bay at Churchill Factory ; but after- 
 ward, the water, after passing through Athabasca, 
 Great Slave, and other lakes, enters the North 
 Sea. 
 
 Saturday, September 3. JYorth west end of 
 Poringe la Loche. We here find a small band of 
 Chipewyans, who assist our people in trans- 
 porting our property across the portage, and 
 who supply us with provisions, which we very 
 much need, since our former btock is nearly ex- 
 hausted. » ' ^ 
 
 About a mile from this end of the portage is 
 22 
 
 'N 
 
 ••* 
 
 
J70 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 « 
 ft 
 
 uir'"\ 
 
 iv^n 
 
 a hill, which towers majestically, to the height of 
 a thousand feet, above the plain below ; and which 
 commands a most exi'ensive and delightful pros- 
 pect. Two lofty and extensive ridges, enclose a 
 valley, about three miles in width, which stretches, 
 far as^ the eye can reach. The Little River, 
 which is, also, by different persons, denominated 
 Swan, Clear water, or Pelican River, winds, in a 
 most k'lightful manner, along this charming val- 
 ley. The majestick forests, which wave upon 
 these ridges, the delightful verdure of the inter- 
 vening lawn, and the beautiful stream, which wan- 
 ders along through it, giving a pleasing variety to 
 the scene, until these objects become blended 
 with the horizon, form, on the whole, the most de- 
 lightful, natural scenery, that I ever beheld. 
 
 Sunday, 4. In the morning, we leO tlie Port- 
 age ; and are now in Little Athabasca River ,: 
 which is about twc- y rods wide. 
 
 Tuesday, 6. Vi . ;ire now in the Great Atha- 
 basca River, which is about three quarters of a 
 mile in breadth. In the early part of the day, 
 we passed the Fork, where Little Athabasca riv- 
 er and Red deer, or as some call it, Elk river, 
 form a junction. — At a small distance from Port- 
 age la Lothe, the navigation of the river is inter- 
 rupted by several carrying places, in ubout the 
 midille of which, are some mineral springs, that 
 
 U-v 
 
i::;^^|^|J 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 ^71 
 
 are evidently smpregnated with sulphur, as ap- 
 pears by the incrustations on their margins. At 
 about twenty miles from the Fork, several bitu- 
 minous fountains are found, into which a pole of 
 twenty (ect in length, m?cy be plunged,' witliout 
 the least resistance. The bitumen, which is in a 
 fluid state, is mixed with gum, or the resinous sub- 
 stance collected from the spruce fir, and is used for 
 gumming canoes. When heated, it emits a smell, 
 like that of sea coal. — There are some places, 
 along this river, which are of many miles in extent, 
 where there is scarcely a t''ee standmg. They 
 were killed by the fire, and were then thrown 
 down by the winds. At these places, a few bulTa.' 
 loes, moose and cariboo, are fodnd. 
 
 Wednesdmf, 7. Fort Chipcwyan. This fort 
 stands on a rocky point, at the south western end 
 of Athabasca Lake, or, as some call it, the Lake 
 of the Hills. — This is the general rendezvous for 
 all Athabasca. Here the goods are set apart for 
 all the difTcrent posts, in thij extensive depart- 
 ment ; and to this place, the greater number of 
 persons who have the charge of these posts, come 
 every fall, to receive their merchandise from 
 those, who have brought it from tho Rainy Lake. 
 — This place is in N. Lat. Sfi- 40' and VV. Long. 
 
 1 1 r. 
 
 < A few Crees, and a greater number of Chipe- 
 
 
 '■I ' ■ 
 
 6K0-. 
 
 r 
 
 *SK-'- 
 
172 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 wyans, resort to this establishment. The latter 
 tribe were accustomed, formerly, to take their 
 furs to Churchill Factory, at Hudson's Bay. 
 They were, generally, six raonths in performing 
 the jounlcy ; and many of them have actually 
 starved to death, on their return home, as the 
 country through wliich they passed, is almost des- 
 titute of gatjie. — This lake is, in no part of it, more 
 than fifteen miles wide ; but it is, at least, two 
 hundred miles long, and extends eastwardly, to- 
 ward Churchill Factory. sj/n «> it 
 ' A.bout sixty 'miles from this, down Slaro River, 
 there are several places, where almost any quan- 
 tity of excellent, clean, white aall; may be taken, 
 with as much case, as sand, along the sea shore. 
 From these places^ the greater part of the North 
 West IS supplied with this valuable article. i- 
 The country around this place, is low and lev- 
 el. ^ nd, iu the spring of the year, much of it iS cov- 
 ered with water. A few moose are found, in this 
 vicinity ; but, the fish of the lake form the princi- 
 pal dependence for food, and they are abundant, 
 ivticl of an excellent quality. — Every fall and spring, 
 bust'irds itnd geese are found in greater numbers, 
 than iii any other part of the North West. 
 
 Wednesday, 21, Ever since my arrival in this 
 place, people, from almost every corner of this 
 extensive department, have boon flocking in, some 
 
 
HARAION^S JOURNAL. 
 
 ot'whom are from more than a thousand miles 
 down McKenzie's River, which is nearly north 
 west from this. Others are from Great Slave 
 Lake and Peace River. Mr. Simon Frazer has 
 just returned from the Pacific Ocean. The hist 
 spring, accompanied by two other gentlemen, 
 twelve Canadians, and two of the Natives, he set 
 out from New Caledonia, on the west side of the 
 Rocky Mountain, on this tour. Mr. Frazer states, 
 that his party met with some ill treatment from 
 the Indians who live along the sea coast, but that 
 they were hospitably received by those who 
 reside farther up the country. The Indians in 
 that quarter, he says, arc less scattered than those 
 who live on this side of the Rocky Mountain, 
 and reside, not in tents, but in houses or huts, 
 constructed of wood. He also reports, that 
 the country through which they passed, is 
 far from being well stocked with beavers, or 
 any other kind of animals ; and that the Na- 
 tives subsist principally upon fish. 
 
 Thursday^ 22. This afternoon, in company 
 with a number of persons, in several canoes, I left 
 Fort Chipewyan; and, after coming two mil. . in 
 Athabasca Lake, wo entered a small river, which 
 is about thirty six miles long, and which now runs 
 out of that lake into Peace river ; but, when 
 this river is high, it discharges itself into the Lake. 
 
174 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL, 
 
 ,;;J 
 
 Jil.. 
 
 I ■XP". 
 
 '^k 
 
 Friday^ 23. Peace River. This river is about 
 seventy rods in breadth, and has a gentle current. 
 It rises on the west side of the Rocky Mountain, 
 at the distance of nearly a thousand miles from 
 this. Below this, it assumes the name of Slave 
 River ; and, after a course of one hundred and 
 forty or fifty miles, it discharges itself into Great 
 Slave Lake. *" ^ - - _.„«t.. 
 
 Sunday, October 2. Fort Vermillion. To this 
 post, great numbers of Beaver Indians bring their 
 furs ; and there are a few Iroquois, also, from Can- 
 ada, who hunt in this vicinity. — About sixty miles 
 below this, where the river is about thirty rods 
 wide, there is a fall, of about twenty feet. 
 Through the whole course, frogi this fall nearly 
 to the Rocky MourUain, at a little distance from 
 the river, on each side, there are plains of con- 
 siderable extent, which afford pasture for nume- 
 rous herds of the buffaloe, the red deer or elk, 
 and a few moose. Great numbers of black bead's 
 are found, that (eed on the berries, wjiich are 
 abundant on the hills, on both sides of the river. 
 
 Friday, 7. Encampment island Fort. This place 
 is, also established, for the purpose of trading with 
 the Beaver Indians. They are the only Indians 
 who live along this noble river, excepting a few 
 Crees, who occasionally come to this quarter, 
 from the Lesser Slave Lake. 
 
 men, nir 
 
 In } 
 
 if 
 
 W'T-S 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 175 
 
 Monday, tO. Dunvegan. This is a well built 
 fort, pleasantly situated, with plains on each side 
 of the river, in N. Lat. 56° and W. Lon. 119°. 
 
 About the Fort a number of Iroquois hunters, 
 and a band of Beaver Indians, have encamped, 
 who have been waiting our arrival, in order to 
 obtain the articles which they need. At this 
 place I expect to pass the ensuing winter. There 
 will, also, be here, Messrs. D. M<^Tavish, J. G. 
 McTavish, J. McGillivray, thirty two labouring 
 men, nine women and several children, which 
 renders this place very different from my solitary 
 abode the last winter. 
 
 Our principal food will be the flesh of the buf- 
 faloes moose, red deer and bear. We have a tol- 
 erably good kitchen garden -, and we are in no 
 fear that we shall want the means of a comforta- 
 ble subsistence. We have, also, a provision for the 
 entertainment and improvement of our minds, in 
 a good collection of books. The gentlemen who 
 are to remain with me, are enlightened, sociable 
 and pleasant companions ; and I hope, therefore, 
 to spend a pleasant and a profitable winter. \ 
 
 Friday, \4. This morning, my old friend Mr. 
 F. Goedike, whom I have been happy to raeei at 
 this place, left us, with his company, for St. Johns, 
 which is about one hundred and twenty miles up 
 this river, where he is to pass the ensuing winter. 
 
 
 I' 
 
 ■r \*'t 
 
 .; :^:.w 
 
J 76 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 ».|! 
 
 Lhir 
 
 1/ 
 
 Saturday, JYovemher 12. About a foot of snow 
 has fallen. 
 
 Tuesday, December 20. During the last night, 
 this river froze over.; and, at nine o'clock this 
 morning, the thermometer was at 4G degret^s be- 
 low 0. 
 
 Wednesday January 4, 1809. Sent the ex- 
 press to the Lesser Slave Lake, which lies about 
 two hundred and fifty miles to the south east 
 from this, whence it will be forwarded to Fort 
 des Prairies. 
 
 Wednesday, March 1. A band of our Indian? 
 have come in, who went a considerable distance 
 to the northward, the last autumn, in search of 
 beavers. They state, that where they were, the 
 snow fell to an extraordinary depth, in conse- 
 quence of which, they suffered greatly for want 
 of provisions. In this vicinity, the snow was, at no 
 time, more than two feet and an half deep. 
 
 Monday, 20. The snow is fast dissolving. — 
 Mr. A. R. M^Leod and company, have just arriv- 
 ed from the Encampment Island ; and they bring 
 the melancholy intelligence of the death of Mr. 
 Andrew M*^Kenzie, natural son of Sir Alexander 
 M<=Renzie. He expired at Fort Vermillion, on 
 the 1st inst.. The death of this amiable young 
 man, is regretted by all who knew him. — They, 
 also, inform us, that several Canadians have lost 
 
Harmon's journal* 
 
 177 
 
 their lives by famine, in the vicinity of Great 
 Slave Lake. Those who survived, were under 
 the necessity of subsisting, several days, upon the 
 flesh of their dead companions. It is reported, 
 that one man killed his wife and child, in order to 
 supply himself with food, who, afterwards, himself 
 starved to death. These Canadians came up into 
 this part of tije world, yrce, to hunt the beaver, 
 &c. and they were at too great a distance from 
 our establishments, to receive any aid from us, 
 until it was too late, for the greater part of 
 them. 
 
 It is not unfrequently the case, that, the sur- 
 viving part of a band of the Natives, subsist upon 
 the flesh of their dead companions, when compel- 
 led to do it for want of other food, sufficient to 
 sustain life. I know a woman who, it is said ate 
 of no less than fourteen of her friends and rela- 
 tions, during one winter. In the summer season, 
 the Indians can find food, almost any where ; but 
 the case is far otherwise, when the ground is cov- 
 ered with snow, to the depth of several feet, tx^mi 
 
 Wednesday^ 22- Sent people to look for birch 
 bark, to make canoes, to take out our returns 
 to the Rainy Lake. The greater part of the ca- 
 noes, in which we bring our merchandise into the 
 country, will not answer to transport our furs be- 
 low. 
 
 v»ir}.«i»*iwi'> 
 
 23 
 

^■^Oi 
 
 
 .V^. ^^%^ ^^ 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 y. 
 
 f/. 
 
 y. 
 
 ^ 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 Sri^ IIIIIM 
 
 ^ 1^ ill 2-0 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^W 
 
 /}. 
 
 
 •« 
 
 * 
 
 
 % -J 
 
 '/ 
 
 /^ 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREIT 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^s^ 
 
 
 <> 
 
 
 
 ^^"-^^.1^ 
 
 
 6^ 
 

 / 
 
 #,^ 
 
178 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 f.\ 
 
 '«i. ^ 
 
 I 
 
 'Kf 
 
 Thursday, April 6. The weather is mild. 
 The people, whom we sent for bark, have re- 
 turned, with one hundred and eighty fathoms, 
 which will make nine canoes, that will carry about 
 two tons burthen, each. Two men will easily 
 transport one of them on their shoulders, across 
 the portages. 
 
 Tuesday, 11. Geese and bustards begin to 
 come from the south. % o^ »j^* 5'y**?? vstr?^ wf»s .v^^: 
 
 Tuesday, IB. This morning, the ice in this 
 river broke up. • ■ * " * *^-*f " ^«^"* 
 
 Saturday, May 6. The surrounding plains are 
 all on fire. — We have planted our potatoes, and 
 sowed most of our garden seeds. — Our people 
 are preparing to set out for the Rainy Lake. 
 c Thursday, l\. We, yesterday, sent off eleven 
 canoes, loaded with the returns of this place and 
 of St John's ; and, early this morning, Messrs. D. 
 McTavish, J. G. McTavish, F. Goedike and J. 
 M<^Gillivray, embarked on board of two light ca- 
 noes, bound for the Rainy Lake and Fort Wil- 
 liam. But I am to pass the ensuing summer, at 
 this place. — The last winter was, to me, the most 
 agreeable one that I have yet spent in this country. 
 The greatest harmony prevailed among us, the 
 days glided on smoothly, and the winter passed, 
 almost imperceptibly, away. 
 
 Tuesday, 16. In the morning, Messrs. Simon 
 
Ji 
 
 ff V*Hi .'WSl 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 179 
 
 Frazer and James M^Dougall and company, arriv- 
 ed, in four canoes. The former gentleman came 
 from the Rocky Mountain Portage, which is about 
 one hundred and eighty miles, up this River. The 
 later is from New Caledonia, on the west side of 
 the Rocky Mountain, which is distant from this, 
 about four hundred and fifty miles. After passing 
 the most of the day with me, they continued their 
 route toward the Rainy Lake. , i ; ?,• ,l•^^ 
 ■H' Friday, June 2. The seeds which we sowed 
 in the garden, have sprung up, and grow remark- 
 ably well. The present prospect is, that straw- 
 berries, red raspberries, shad berries, cherries, &c., 
 will be abundant, this season. ^ 
 
 This river since the beginning of May, has ris- 
 en twelve feet perpendicularly ; and it still con- 
 tinues to rise. This circumstance arises, in part, 
 from the large quantity of rain, which has lately 
 fallen, but more, I presume, from the dissolving of 
 the snow, on and near the Rocky Mountain. 
 -,. Tuesday^ 13. An Indian has come here, who 
 says, that one of their chiefs has lately died ; and 
 he requests that we furnish a chief's clothing to 
 be put on him, that he may be decently interred ; 
 and, also, that we would supply a small quantity 
 of spirits, for his relations and friends to drink, at 
 his interment ; all of which I have sent, for the 
 deceased was a friendly Indian. Nothing pleases 
 
 h't , 
 
 i«. 
 
 rim 
 
180 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 •If '•' 
 
 I! \-t 
 
 '>< ii 
 
 
 J.I- 
 
 an Indian better, than to see his deceased rela- 
 tives, handsomely attired ; for he believes that 
 they will arrive in the other world, in the same 
 dress, with which they are clad, when they are 
 consigned to the grave. " ^ ' ^'^ .-:%.^.^^. 
 
 Wednesday, July 19. A few days since, Mr. 
 John Stuart and company, came here, from New 
 Caledonia, for goods ; and to day, they set out on 
 their return home. During the few days which 
 that gentleman passed here, I derived much sat- 
 isfaction from his society. We rambled about 
 the plains, "conversing as we went, and now and 
 then stopping, to eat a few berries, which are 
 every where to be found. He has evidently read 
 and reflected much. How happy should I be to 
 have sqch a companion, during the whole summer. 
 But such is our mode of life in this country, that 
 we meet but seldom ; and the time that we remain 
 together, is short. We only begin to find the ties 
 of friendship, binding us closely together, when 
 we are compelled to separate, not to meet again 
 perhaps for years to come. fz.. 
 
 Baptiste La Fleur, my interpreter, will accom- 
 pany Mr. Stuart and his men, as far as St. John's, 
 in hopes of obtaining some inform^^tion respecting 
 his brother, who, it is supposed, was killed by 
 an Indian, the last spring, while on his way 
 from the Rocky Mountain Portage to St. John's. 
 
 I 
 
■ -.wpp ...,x 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 181 
 
 . 1^1* Wednesday^ July 19, Baptiste La Fleur has 
 returned from St. Johns, without having been able 
 to obtain the least intelligence, respecting his 
 poor brother, and the two Indians, who were com- 
 ing down the river, in the same canoe with hioi. 
 We are, therefore, apprehensive that all three of 
 them have been drowned, in coming down the 
 rapids, as their canoe was made of the bark 
 of the spruce fir tree, and was, therefore, very 
 weak. 
 
 Friday, 21. We have cut down our barley ; 
 and I think it is the finest that I ever saw in any 
 country. The soil on the points of land, along 
 this river is excellent.* ''^H**-^^ *•*««» > 
 
 The mother of the chief, who died this sum- 
 mer, and who is far advanced in years, now re- 
 mains in a tent, at the distance of a few rods from 
 the fort. Many of the Natives, of both sexes, 
 when they become old and infirm, and unable to 
 travel with their rela:ions, who depend upon the 
 chase for subsisti&nce, ^nd are frequently moving 
 from place to place, settle down near our forts ; 
 and it is easy for us to render them more effectual 
 aid, than their friends could possibly afford them. 
 
 Almost every day, just as the sun is sinking 
 below the horizon, the old lady, above mentioned, 
 goes to the place where her deceased son, when 
 alive, was accustomed to encamp, when he came 
 
 i 
 
 
 'r-i^'^i 
 
,-* * ■ , , 
 
 182 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 to the fort, and there weeps, and sings a mournful 
 kind of song, of which the following is a transla- 
 tion. " My dear son, come to me ! why do you 
 leave me, my son?" This she repeats for two 
 hours together, in the most plaintive and melan- 
 choly tone imaginable. 
 
 It is customary for the women, among the 
 Beaver Indians, when they lose a near relation, to 
 cut off a joint of one of their fingers ; and, in con- 
 sequence of so barbarous a custom, we frequently 
 see some of their aged women, who want the first 
 two joints of every finger, on both hands. The 
 men content themselves, on such occasions, by cut- 
 ting off their hair, close to their heads, and by 
 scratching or cutting their faces and arms, fre- 
 quently in a most barbarous and shocking manner. 
 
 The Beaver Indians are a peaceable and quiet 
 people, and, perhaps, the most honest of any, on 
 the face of the earth. Theft is rarely committed 
 among them ; and when one of their tribe is 
 known to have stolen, he is reg^'ded with a de- 
 testation, like that which follows a highwayman 
 in civilized countries. ; jit ?»■* -Sif^Mr r t; ... 
 
 Formerly, their clothing was made of the 
 skins of the bufialoe, moose, and red deer, and 
 their arms were bows and arrows ; but the great- 
 er part of them, are now clothed with European 
 goods, and are supplied with fire arms. They 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 183 
 
 have, also, iron axes and knives, in the place of 
 those which were made of stone and of bone. 
 
 Friday, September 1. Fowls begin to leave 
 the north, to go to the southward. 
 
 Friday, October 6. As the weather begins to 
 be cold, we have taken our vegetables out of the 
 ground, which we find to have been very produc- 
 tive. '■■'*** •-'*'■'' '■*«JtaM;i*'"4-- ri I ..l'iA>», fiii'i .■ ».■,.. i*>vV 
 
 Saturday, 7. Mr. A. R. M^Leod and company, 
 passed this place, to-day, in three canoes, which 
 are on their way to the Rocky Mountain Portage, 
 and thence to New Caledonia. This gentleman 
 delivered me letters, not only from different per- 
 sons in this country, but also from my relatives be- 
 low. To be informed, in this way, of the health 
 and prosperity of the latter, to attend to the effu- 
 sions of their hearts, and a detail of many of the 
 circumstances of their lives, transports me in im- 
 agination, for a short season, into the midst of 
 their society, and communicates a pleasure resem- 
 bling that of personal intercourse. Excellent in- 
 vention of letters ! thus to enable us to keep up 
 a kind of conversation with beloved friends, while 
 separated from them by thousands of miles. 
 
 Sunday, February 25, 1810. On the evening 
 of the 15th Inst, my woman was delivered of two 
 living boys. They appear, however, to have 
 been prematurely born j and, from the first, little 
 
 -■^I' 
 
 » 
 
 
 ; -■'■■ % 
 
 Ui 
 
 
 
■«. 
 
 
 184 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 hope was entertained that they would long sur- 
 vive. One of them died c.t the morning of the 
 22(3, and the other the last night ; and to day, 
 they were both buried in the same coffin. He 
 who gave them life, has taken it away. He had 
 an undoubted right so to do ; and though his ways 
 are to us, inscrutable, he has the best reasons for 
 whatever he does. It becomes us, therefore, 
 humbly to acquiesce in this afflictive dispensa- 
 tion. ^WJ' -*?i; :--i'f!t*>^:fla^o/»«>i»ites«-fi4*4jsa^ : 
 • Thursday y May 3. This day, the ice in the 
 river broke up. --«--;" v—.f* ..^...i, * 
 
 Tuesday, 15. Early this morning, Mr. D. M'^ 
 Tavish and company, set out ior Fort William ; 
 and this afternoon, Mr. J. Clarke and company, 
 from St. John's, passed this, on their way to the, 
 Rainy Lake. But I shall remain, if providence 
 permit, at this place, during another summer. 
 The local situation is pleasant ; and we have good 
 horses, by means of which, I can, at pleasure make 
 excursions into the surrounding plains, over which 
 are scattered buffaloes, moose, red deers, ante- 
 lopes, black and grey bears, &t. I shall have no 
 intelligent companion, with whom to converse. 
 But thit deficiency will be in a measure supplied, 
 by a good collection of books, with which I am 
 furnished. Were it not for this resource, many ai 
 dreary day would pass over jne. / ^t ,1 .>.... .,. 
 
 and 
 with 
 
 Moui 
 
HARMON 3 JOURNAL. 
 
 185 
 
 jii Tuesday, 22. Messrs. J. Stuart, and H. Farics 
 and company, passed this place in four canoes, 
 with the returns of New Caledonia and Rocky 
 Mountain Portage ; and. like many others, they 
 are on their way to the Rainy Lake. , , 
 «f*- Saturday, June 23. The last night was so cold, 
 that the tops of our potatoes were frozen. 
 This morning, as several red deer were crossing 
 from the opposite side of the river, one of our 
 people leaped into a canoe, and pursued them, 
 and succeeded in killing one of them. 
 
 . Thursday, September 13. Two men have ar- 
 rived from New Caledonia, wiio bring the disa- 
 greeable intelligence, that salmon, this season, do 
 not come up the rivers of that region, as usual. 
 As this kind of fish forms the principal article of 
 food, both for the Natives and white people, it is 
 apprehended that they will all be under the ne- 
 cessity of proceeding towards the Pacific Ocean, 
 until they find a people who have been more fa- 
 voured by Providence. I'* !i rMfti 
 *^^ Wednesday, October 3. We have taken our 
 potatoes out of the ground, and find, that nine 
 bushels, which we planted the 10th of may last, 
 have produced a little more than one hundred and 
 fifty bushels. The other vegetables in our garden 
 have yielded an increase, much in the same pro- 
 portion, which is sufficient proof, that the soil of 
 
 24 
 
 . L -i- f\ 
 
 
 
 
 i i*. 
 
186 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 I '1 
 
 I'- 
 
 I ! ' - . /• 
 
 the points of land, along this river, is good. la- 
 deed, I am of opinion, that wheat, rye, barley, 
 oats, pease, &c. would grow well in the plains 
 around us. *<<■ ^ a'» . . >r. *; .^^^. 
 
 .n 
 
 Saturday, October 6. Mr. John Stuart and com- 
 pany, in four canoes, have arrived from Fort 
 Chipewyan, having on board, goods for the estab- 
 ishment at the Rocky Mountain Portage and 
 New Caledonia. This gentleman delivered me 
 a packet of letters from home, and also a number 
 of others from gentlemen in this country, one of 
 which is a joint letter, signed by three of the part- 
 ners, requesting me to go and superintend the af- 
 fairs of New Caledonia; or, if I prefer it, to ac- 
 company Mr. Stuart, as second in command to him, 
 until the next spring, at which time it is presumed, 
 that 1 shall have learned sufficient of the state of 
 things in that country, to assume the whole man- 
 agement myself. As Mr. Stuart has passed sev- 
 eral years in that part of the country, the infor- 
 mation which his experience will enable him to 
 afford me, will be of great service. I prefer, 
 therefore, accompanying him, to going alone, es- 
 pecially in viev/ of the late unfavourable reports 
 from that country, in regard to the means of sub- 
 sistence. ^ . 
 
 Wednesday, October 10. St. John's. On the 
 7th Mr. Stuart and myself, with our company, 
 
 N 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 187 
 
 left Duiwegan ; and this evening, we arrived here. 
 The current in the river begins to be much strong- 
 er than we found it below Dunvegan. On both 
 sides of the river, are hills of a considerable 
 height, which are almost destitute of timber of 
 any kind. At different places, we saw buffaloes, 
 red deer, and bears. During our passage to this 
 place, the weather has been bad. The snow and 
 rain have been very unpleasant, unprotected 
 against them, as we are, in our open canoes. 
 ^ .. Thursday, 11. In the early part of the day, 
 our people were busily employed in preparing 
 provisions to take with us to New Caledonia. 
 This afternoon, Mr. Stuart and company em- 
 barked in three canoes, for the Rocky Moun- 
 tain Portage. Having a little business still to 
 transact, I shall pass the night here. 
 
 Monday, 15. Rocky Mountain Portage Fort. 
 We here find nearly eight inches of snow. 
 Mr. Stuart and company reached here yester- 
 day ; and I arrived this morning. Between this 
 place and St. John's, the river is very rapid, 
 its banks are high, and the country, on both 
 sides of it, is generally clothed with small tim- 
 ber. Ever since our arrival, we have been era- 
 ployed in delivering goods for this place, and di- 
 viding the remainder among our people, to be 
 taken on their backs, to the other end of the 
 
 vj- 
 
 t ■ •. .s 
 
188 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 V '^: 
 
 portage, which is twelve miles over, tiirough a 
 rough and hilly country. We leave our canoes 
 and take others, at the other end of the car- 
 rying place. '- '' ' '- --- -•** rJ'-^^y .. 
 From the great Slave Lake to this place, 
 there are few rapids, and only one fall ; but at 
 several places, the current is very strong. Yes- 
 terday, we came up one of these places ; and 
 and as our progress was very slow, I went on 
 shore alone, to walk along the beach. Having 
 proceeded some distance, I arrived at a place 
 which I could not pass, without making a con- 
 siderable turn into the woods. I, therefore, left 
 the side of the river, and, after haviog walked 
 a mile or two, I fell upon a well beaten foot- 
 path, which I supposed would take me directly 
 to the fort. After I had followed it for several 
 miles, I perceived that it had been trodden by 
 wild animals, and was as I thought, leading me 
 in a different direction from that which I ought 
 to have taken. I was unwilling to retrace my 
 steps ; and 1, therefore, proceeded in a different 
 direction, hoping soon to come t© the river, far- 
 ther up than the place where I*left it. I march- 
 ed a good pace, for a considerable time, through 
 the snow, eight inches in depth, until I found 
 myself in a swampy country, thickly wooded, 
 when the sun was just sinking below the hori- 
 
IIAHMON'S JOURNAL. VI 
 
 189 
 
 zon. Even while the light lasted, I knew not 
 which way to steer ; but it soon became so dark, 
 that I could not distinguish any object, at the 
 distance of more than ten yards from mc. I had 
 no means of striking fire ; and without this cheer- 
 ing element, it would have been uncomfortable 
 and unsafe encamping. I must have sulfered se- 
 verely with the cold; and might have been torn 
 in pieces by wild boasts, which are numerous in 
 this region. I concluded it best, therefore, to 
 continue walking, until the lighi of the morning 
 should enable me to find the ba»«k of the river. 
 Contrary to my expectation, however, a kind 
 Providence directed my way, out of that dreary 
 swamp, where at every step, I sunk up to my 
 knees in snow, mud and water. <atjiiaji.f*iisJi*i ^t^^i 
 
 f*' With great joy, about ten o'clock, I reached 
 the river side, which I followed down, some dis- 
 tance, where I found our people, encamped 
 around a large and cheering fire. During the 
 greater part of this excursion, the rain poured 
 down in torrents, tmii 4 a#iaEm ai tiius, .?>i4i)e 
 
 •^ Wednesday, .17. JVorth West end of the Rocky 
 Moimtain Portage. In the morning, Mr. S. my- 
 self and our company, left the fort ; and, this 
 evening, we reached this place, where we find 
 some of ^ur people, repairing four, crazy, old ca- 
 noes, in which, I should suppose that no one 
 
 '■'^K*,^ 
 
 t • ■ 
 
i'«1f 
 
 
 pit 
 
 I' t 
 
 '1 
 
 190 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 would be willing to embark, who attaches much 
 value to lifcv The remainder of our hands are 
 employed in transporting our baggage, which is 
 still behmd, to this place. They are assisted in 
 doing this, by some of the Natives, who are Sicau- 
 nies. They have just returned from the other 
 side of the Rocky Mountain, where they go to 
 pass the summer months. During the winter 
 season, they remain on this srde of the Mountain, 
 where they find bufifaloes, moose and deer. On 
 the other sidt, none of these animals, excepting a 
 few straggling ones, are to be found. >* m:» i*iw»«.-. 
 «i«t'< The Sicaunies are a quiet, inoffensive people, 
 whose situation exposes them to peculiar difficulties 
 and distresses. When they proceed to the west 
 side of the mountain, the Natives of that region, 
 who are Tacullies and Atenas, attack and kill 
 many of them ; and when they are on this side, 
 the Beaver Indians and Crees, are continually 
 making war upon them. Being thus s, .Tounded 
 by enemies, against whom they are too feeble 
 successfully to contend, they frequently suffer 
 much for want of food ; for when on the west 
 side, they dare not, at all times, visit those places, 
 where fish are in plenty, and when on the east 
 side, they are frequently afraid to visit those parts, 
 where animals abound. They are compelled, 
 therefore, oftentimes to subsist upon the roots, 
 
HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 191 
 
 which they find in the mountains, and which bare- 
 ly enable them to sustain life ; and heir emaci- 
 ated bodies frequently bear witness, to the scan- 
 tiness of their fttre..-«j i v*i^ '-t-m^ ik?»'.?w^ *» ;«* s<<ip 
 
 We here begin to see lofty mountains at a dis- 
 tance. This place is in the 56°of North Latitude, 
 and 121° of West Longitude. r -*nr:V - f -> 
 
 Monday, 22. It has snovTed and rained, dur- 
 ing the whole of this day. — We are now in the 
 heart of the Rocky Mountain, the lofty summits of 
 which, on each side of the river, tower majestical- 
 ly toward the heavens, and are perpetually whit- 
 ened by snows, that are never dissolved, by 
 solar heat. They are by far the highest moun- 
 tains that I have ever seen. The timber, which 
 grows upon them, is chiefly spruce fir, birch and 
 poplar. It is a curious fact, in the geography of 
 North America, that so many of the lakes and riv- 
 ers, on the west side of this lofty range of moun- 
 tains, discharge their waters through one narrow 
 passage, in this great barrier, and eventually enter 
 the North Sea. 
 
 Wedriesday, 21^ Although we have found 
 the current in this river very stroqg, ever 
 since we left the Rocky Mountain Portage, yet, 
 until this day, we have found no place where we 
 were under the necessity of unloading our canoes, 
 in order to stem the current. This afternoon, 
 
 
 * t \i If 
 
 r 
 
 
 h\ * [ ^^'r 
 
 r 
 
192 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 mi U 'li 
 
 , M 
 
 l|* 
 
 
 just as v/e got through the mountain, we passed 
 Finlaj's or the North Branch, which appeals to 
 he of ahout the same magnitude as the South 
 Branch, which we are following. These two 
 branches take their rise in very different direc- 
 tions. The source of the South Branch, is in the 
 Rocky Mountain, at the distance of nearly two 
 hundred miles from the place where we now are. 
 The North Branch runs out of a very large lake, 
 called by the Natives Musk-qua Sa-ky-e-gun, or 
 Bears Lake. This lake, which is so large that the 
 Indians never attempt to cross it in their canoesi 
 and which, those who reside at the east end of it, 
 affirm, extends to the Western Ocean, is situated 
 nearly west from the place where the two bran- 
 ches form a junction, at the distance, as is thought 
 of about one hundred and fifty miles. Both bran- 
 ches, before their junction, run along ihe foot of 
 the mountain, as if in search of a passage through. 
 '■ « Thursday, November 1. M'-Leod^s Lake Fort, 
 This place is situated in 55** North Latitude, and 
 124** West Longitude. The country lying be- 
 tween this place and Finlay's k^ranch, is thickly 
 covered .with timber, on both sides of the riv- 
 er ; and, on the right, in coming up, the land is 
 low and level. Mountain , it is tri»e, are to be 
 seen ; but they appear at a considerable distance. 
 We have not seen a large animal, nor even the 
 
:m 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 193 
 
 track of one, since we left the Rocky Moun- 
 tain Portage. About twenty miles from this 
 place, we left Peace River, and have come up a 
 small river, of five or six rods in breadth, which, 
 a little below this, passes through a small lake. 
 Here, we leave our canoes, and take our goods 
 by land, to the establishment at Stuart's Lake, 
 which place is situated nearly one hundred miles 
 to the west from this. There fts a passage by 
 water to that lake ; but it is so circuitous, that 
 we could not make it in less than twelve or fifteen 
 
 ,J!v>.ir^'; 
 
 ^k',i- 
 
 aays. 
 
 McLeod's Lake may be sixty or seventy miles 
 in circumference. Small white fish and trout are 
 here taken ; but those who reside here subsist, 
 during the greater part of the year, on dried 
 salmon, which are brought in the \vinter, on 
 sledges, drawn by dogs, from Stuart's Lake. 
 
 The Indians who frequent this establishment, 
 are Sicaunies, and belong to the same tribe with 
 those, who take their furs to the B.)cky Mountain 
 Portage. Their dialect differs but little from that 
 of the Beaver Indians. They appear to be in 
 wretched circumstances, frequently suffering 
 much for want of food; and they are often 
 driven to i;he necessity of subsisting on roots. 
 There are but few large animals, in this part of 
 the country ; and when the snow is five or six (eel 
 26 
 
 1 •!• 
 
 
 
 ;.Hi 
 
 i ^ 
 
 f* - 
 
 ■■h 
 
194 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL* 
 
 
 
 
 mu 
 
 deep, as is frequently the case in the winter, few 
 beavers can be taken, nor can many fish be caught, 
 in this cold season of the year. Yet after all the 
 difficulties which these people encounter, in pro- 
 curing a subsistence, such is their attachment to 
 the country that gave them birth, that they 
 would not willingly exchange it, for any other part 
 of the world. .,M^o,1«i;a,':^>^k£li'**ii«i'i:«;*:^. '^mM,.-. ^^m:^ 
 \-i WedmsdiJJ^^rJn . Stuarfs Lake. This lake is 
 called by the Natives Nuck-aws-lay, and the es- 
 tablishment on it, where we now are, is situated 
 in 54° 30' North Lat ude, and in 125° West Longi- 
 tude. On the third instant, I left Mr. Stuart at 
 M^'Leod's Lake, where be designs to pass the 
 winter; and, accompanied by thirteen labouring 
 men, I arrived at this place, this afternoon. In 
 coming here, I passed over an uneven country, 
 which is in general thickly covered with timber. 
 We saw, on our way, several lakes or ponds, one 
 of which was about six miles long. ;^^,..ii,%, ^ 
 
 This fort sttnds in a very pleasant place, on a 
 rise of ground, at the east end of .StuaiNt's Lake, 
 which I am informed, is at least three hundred 
 miles in circumference. At the distance of about 
 two hundred rods from the fort, a considergible river 
 runs out of the lake, where the Natives, who call 
 themselves Tacullies, have a village or rather a 
 few small huts, built of wood. At these they re- 
 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 19.1 
 
 
 maio during the season for taking and drying sal- 
 mon, on which they subsist^ during the greater 
 part of the year. - - - - , - 
 
 Monday, 12. I have sent J. M. Quesnel, ac- 
 companied by ten labouring men, with a small as- 
 sortment of goods, to Frazer's Lake, to reestab- 
 lish the post there. That lake lies nearly fifty 
 miles due west from this. We understand that 
 the Indians, this fall, have taken and dried a con- 
 siderable quantity of salmon, in that vicinity. I 
 have also sent people to the other side of this 
 lake, hoping they will take a few white fish, al- 
 though the season, in which we usually take them, 
 is nearly past. ^'* ^— -^ 
 
 Wednesday, 14. The lake, opposite to 
 the fort, froze over the last night. To day 
 Mr. Stuart and company, arrived from M^Leod's 
 Lake. 
 
 Saturday, 17. We have now about eight- in- 
 ches of snow on the ground. 
 
 Sunday, 18. Mr. Stuart and company, have 
 gone to Frazer's Lake. I accompanied them to 
 the other side of this lake, where I saw all the 
 Indians belonging to the village in this vicinity. 
 They amount to about one hundred souls, are very 
 poorly clothed, and, to us, appear to bo in wretched 
 circumstances ; but they are, notwithstanding, con- 
 tented and cheerful. My interpreter informs me,, 
 
 
 mn 
 
 » WM.%^ 
 
 li 
 
 ,t l''¥^ 
 
 
 
 ■to U \ 
 
 Hi 
 
196 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 > i J 
 
 ! ,.U,l fi. 
 
 1* Jf,ll 
 
 that their language strongly resembles that spok- 
 en by the Sicaunles ; and no doubt they former- 
 ly constituted a part of the same tribe, though 
 they now ditfer from them, in their manners and 
 customs. The Sicaunies bury, while the Tacul- 
 lies, burn their dead. , , ^-- .^- 
 
 Monday, 26. The corpse of a woman of this 
 place, who died on the 20th instant, was burned this 
 afternoon. While the ceremony was performing, 
 the Natives made a terrible savage noise, by howl- 
 ing, crying, and a kind of singing. 
 
 Saturday, December 29. Frazer^s Lake. In 
 coming to this place, I passed through a country, 
 which is very rough, and thickly covered with tim- 
 ber, consisting of spruce, fir, poplar, aspin, birch, cy- 
 press, &c. We crossed one considerable moun- 
 tain, and several small lakes. ^ '^' 
 1 his establishment is at the east end of Fra- 
 zer's Lake, which received its name from that of 
 the gentleman, who first built here, in 1806. At 
 the distance of about a mile from this, there runs 
 out of this lake, a considerable river, where the 
 Natives have a large village, and where they 
 take and dry salmon. This lake may be eighty 
 or ninety miles in circumference, and is well 
 supplied with t,'hite fish, trout, &c. -s? ^n 
 Tuesday^ January 1, 1811. This being the 
 first day of another yea*, our people have passed 
 
 / 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 197 
 
 it, according to the custom of the Can^idians, in 
 drinking and fighting. Some of the principal In- 
 dians -of this place, desired us to allow them to re- 
 main at the fort, that they might see our people 
 drink. As soon as they began to be a little intox- 
 icated, and to quarrel among themselves, the Na- 
 tives began to be apprehensive, that something 
 unpleasant might befal them, also. They, there- 
 fore hid themselves under .beds, and elsewhere, 
 saying, that they thought the white people had 
 run mad, for they appeared not to know what 
 they were about. They perceived that those 
 who were the most beastly in the early part of 
 the day, became the most quiet in the latter part, 
 in view of which, they exclaimed, *' the senses of 
 the white people have returned to them again," 
 and they appeared not a little surprised at the 
 change ; for. it was the first time, that they had 
 ever seen a person intoxicated. 
 
 Sunday, 27. This day the Natives have burn- 
 ed the corpse of one of their chiefs, who died in 
 the early part of this month. Shortly after his 
 death, one of his nieces painted her face with Ver- 
 million; and, in other respects arrayed herself, in 
 the gayest manner possible. Her mother, observ- 
 ing this unbecoming conduct, reproved her in tho 
 following manner. " Are you not ashamed, my 
 daughtmV said she, '' to appear so gaily clad, so 
 
 i: 
 
 r% «■ 
 
 • :M 
 
 \ i 
 
 I ' I , 
 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 - 
 
 1\ 
 
 i 
 
 M h* 
 
 . iW'^!k ' 
 
198 
 
 Harmon s journal. 
 
 
 *llf * 
 
 f 
 
 
 IH 
 
 tl 
 
 
 soon after the deccare of your uncle ? You ought 
 rather to daub your face with black, and to cut 
 your hair short to your head." This reproach for 
 the apparent destitution of natural afifection, so af- 
 flicted the girl, that, soon after, she went into a 
 neighbouring wood, and hung herself, from the 
 limb of a tree. Happily for her, however, some 
 people passed that way, before she had long been 
 in this situation, and took her down. She was, at 
 first, senseless ; but soon after recovered. — Instan- 
 ces of suicide, by hanging, frequently occur, among 
 the women of all the tribes, with whom 1 have 
 been acquainted ; but the men are seldom known 
 to take away their own lives. 
 ' Wednesday, 30. Two nights since, an Indian 
 cut a hole in a window in my room, which is made 
 of parchment, at the distance of not more than 
 two (eet from the foot of my bed, where I lay 
 asleep, and took from a table, near it, several ar- 
 ticles of clothing. The next morning, two other 
 Indians brought back to me a part of the stolen 
 property, and informed me who the thief was, and 
 where he could be found. Soon after, accompa- 
 nied by my interpreter, I went, and found the 
 young villain, in a hut under ground, along with 
 about twelve others, who are as great thieves as 
 himself. I told him, that, as he was young, I hop- 
 ed this was the first time he had ever been 
 
 guilty of 
 turn all tl 
 would for 
 in future 
 might dc{ 
 returned 
 dians broi 
 which ha( 
 ammuniti( 
 Nearly al 
 them, are 
 are few a 
 ^ Fridax 
 we found 
 any other 
 
 Mondi 
 er, has tal 
 chiefs, as 
 tribe, evei 
 , ; Fridm 
 ing, I lef 
 Lake, and 
 
 Mondi 
 seems to 
 ducks of 1 
 with us ; 
 to make t 
 
i. 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 199 
 
 i'il 
 
 1 ought 
 
 to cut 
 
 ach for 
 
 1, so af- 
 
 into a 
 
 3111 the 
 
 , some 
 
 ig been 
 
 was, at 
 
 -Instan- 
 
 , among 
 
 1 have 
 
 known 
 
 Indian 
 
 } made 
 
 } than 
 
 e I lav 
 
 ral ar- 
 
 other 
 
 stolen 
 
 as, and 
 
 3ompa- 
 
 id the 
 
 with 
 
 ves as 
 
 I hop- 
 
 • been 
 
 guilty of theft ; and, provided he would re- 
 turn all the property which he had taken away, I 
 would forgive this offence ; but if he should ever 
 Id future be guilty of any misconduct toward us, he 
 might depend on being severely punished. I then 
 returned to our house ; and, shortly after, two In- 
 dians brought me the remainder of the property 
 which had been stolen, and I ^ave them a little 
 ammunition, for having made known the thief. — 
 Nearly all the Tacullies, or Carriers as we call 
 them, are much addicted to pilfering; but there 
 are few among them who dare steal from us. 
 
 Friday, February 15. Yesterday and to-day, 
 we found the cold to be more intense, than at 
 any other time this season. - -t 
 
 Monday, 18. Baptiste Bouche, my interpret- 
 er, has taken the daughter of one of the Carrier 
 chiefs, as a wife. She is the first woman of that 
 tribe, ever kept by any of the white people. 
 
 Friday, Jtpril 5. Stuarfs Lake, In the morn- 
 ing, I left and abandoned the post at Frazer's 
 Lake, and arrived here this evening. 
 
 Monday, 15. The weather is pleasant, and 
 seems to presage an early spring. — Swans and 
 ducks of several kinds, have passed the winter 
 with us ; but bustards and geese, now first begin 
 to make their appearance 
 
 •'{-'•• 
 
 
 ^■-^j 
 
 \m\im 
 
 ly-r-fl. 
 
 
200 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 
 fll .' 
 
 Sunday i 21. A ^ days since, I sent the 
 greater part of my pet^.e to M*^Leod's Lake, to 
 prepare for tKe voyaore from that place 4o the 
 Rainy Lake. Tomorrow, I shall leave this place 
 myself, in company with Mr. Quesnel and others, 
 for M*'Leod's Lake. I shall take with me my lit- 
 tle son George, who was three years old last De- 
 cember, for the purpose of sending him to my 
 friends in the United States, in order that he may 
 receive an English education. Mr. J. M. Quesnel 
 will have the care oi him, until he shall arrive at 
 Montreal. 
 
 Wednesday, 24. M^Leod'^s Lake* I find Mr. 
 Stuart and the men very busy, in preparing for 
 the voyage to the Rainy Lake.— The spring 
 here is less advanced, by fifteen days, than it 
 was at Stuart's Lake. This great difference of 
 climate, I conclude, is owing to the fact, that 
 this place lies nearer the mountains* 
 
 Wednesday, May 8. People have just ar- 
 rived from Stuart's Lake, who inform me that 
 the mother of ray son was delivered on the 
 25th ultimo, of a daughter, whom I name Polly 
 Harmon. 
 
 As the ice in Peace River begins to be bad, 
 it is expected that a few days hence the navi- 
 gation will be opened, when Messrs. Stuart, 
 Quesnel, and their company, will embark, with 
 
 > .\ 
 
 ^_.*y 
 
ri si . 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 201 
 
 the returns of this place, for the Rainy Lake. 
 Tomorrow, I design to return to Stuart's Lake, 
 where I expect to pass the ensuing summer. But 
 my attention is chiefly taken up with the separa- 
 tion, which is soon to take place between me and my 
 beloved son. A few months hence, he will be at 
 a great distance from his affectionate father ; and, 
 it may be, I shall never more see him, in this 
 world. No consideration could induce me to send 
 him down, especially while he is so young, except- 
 ing the thought, that he will soon be under the 
 fostering care of my kind relatives, who will be 
 able to educate him much better than it would be 
 possible for me to do, in this savage country. As 
 I do that which I apprehend will be for the ben- 
 efit of my little son, so I earnestly pray, that God 
 would graciously protect him, in his absence from 
 me. '^ ■-^*' ^.i^rn:r>;' i^: n :■•:.• r^ -t.* ■ 
 
 * Sunday, 12. Stuart^s Lake, Here, I arrived 
 this afternoon, after having passed four of the 
 most disagreeable days that I ever experienced. 
 My spirits were dejected, in view of the depart- 
 ure of my child ; the snow, which was three feet 
 in depth, had become softened by the late warm 
 weather, so that walking was attended with great 
 fatigue ; I broke my snow shoes, on the way, 
 which the Indian lad with me mended as well as 
 our circumstances would permit, though but poor* 
 
 26 
 
 4. 
 
202 
 
 HARMON B JOL'KNAL. 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 ' ki 
 
 \y ; and finally we had scarcely any thing to eat. 
 I am happy, therefore, to find myself at a place 
 where I can enjoy a little repose, after such an 
 unpleasant jaunt. 
 
 Tuesday^ 21. This afternoon, the ice in this 
 lake broke up. Musquetoes begin to come about ; 
 and troublesome companions they arc in the wil- 
 derness, ^'-i^mt- ]>^i^.P ':.^ -y^. 
 
 Wednaday, 22. As the frost is now out of 
 the ground, we have planted our potatoes, and 
 sowed barley, turnips, &c. which are the first that 
 we ever sowed, on this west side of the mountain. 
 — We now take trout in this lake, with set hooks 
 and lines, in considerable numbers ; but they are 
 not of a good kind. — It is, perhaps, a little remark- 
 able, that pike or pickerel have never been found 
 in any of the lakes and rivers, on the west side of 
 the Rocky Mountain. 
 
 Tuesday, June 11. Three Indians have arriv- 
 ed from Sy-cus, a village, lying about one hundred 
 and thirty miles down this river, who say, tliat it 
 is reported by others, from farther down, that 
 there is a very extraordinary and powerful being 
 on his way here, from the sea, who, when he ar- 
 rives, will transform me into a stone, as well as 
 perform many other miraculous deeds ; and the 
 simple and credulous Natives fully believe this re- 
 port. , **; 
 
'Tn -V- 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 203 
 
 Sunday^ 16. A nuoiber of Indians have arriv- 
 ed, in six large wooden canoes, from the other end 
 of this lake ; and among them are two, a father 
 and his son, who say, that they belong to a tribe, 
 who call themselves Nate-ote-tains. These are 
 the first of that nation, whom we have ever seen 
 here. They state, that their tribe is numerous, 
 and scattered, in villages, over a large extent of 
 country, lying directly west from this ; and that it 
 is not more than five or six days' march, to their 
 nearest village. They, also, inform us, that a 
 large river passes through their country, and at 
 no considerable distance from it, enters the Pacific 
 Ocean. They, likewise, say, that a number of 
 white people come up that river, in barges, every 
 autumn, in order to trade with the Indians^ who 
 reside along its shores. But I could not learn 
 from them, to what nation those white people be- 
 long. I imagine, however, that they are Ameri- 
 cans, who come round Cape Horn, to carry on, 
 what is called a coasting trade ; for, I cannot learn 
 that they ever attempted to make establishments, 
 along the sea coast. -. i . 
 
 Tuesday, July 2. Yesterday, five Sicaunieg 
 came here, from M^Leod's Lake, who form a 
 small war party. Their leader, or war chief de- 
 sired me to allow them to go where they might 
 think proper ; upon which, I inquired of them, 
 
 
 , h] 
 
'c' 
 
 204 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 |.-»;,Ji, 
 
 k ^"^ 
 
 whither they wished to direct their course, and 
 wh?t their business was. The speaker repHed, 
 that, when they left their lands, their intention 
 was to go and try to take a scalp or two fronri the 
 Indians of Frazer's Lfike, " who," he added," have 
 done us no injury. But we have lost a relation ; 
 and we must try to revenge his death, on sOiOae 
 one." — This is a custom common to a greater or 
 less extent to all the tribes. -"> 
 
 ' I asked him whether he supposed that v^e 
 supplied them with guns and ammunition, to ena- 
 ble them :o destroy their fellow creatures, or to 
 kill the beaver, &;c. I added^ that should they, 
 in the fall, bring in an hundred scalps, they could 
 not, with them all, procure a pint of rum, or a 
 pipe full of tobacco ; but, if they would bring bea- 
 rer skins, they would be able to purchase the ar- 
 ticles which they would need. After reflecting 
 for some time on what I had said, the speaker in- 
 formed me, that they would, in compliance with 
 my advice, return and hunt the beaver ; and they 
 performed their promise, by proceeding immedii' 
 ately to their own lands. 
 
 Monday^ 29. Several days since, one of our 
 men, who remains at M<=Leod's Lake, came here 
 with the information, that there were Indians 
 lurking around that fort, waiting, as was sup- 
 posed, for a favourable opportunity to attack 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL 
 
 205 
 
 '.-'*■:• 
 
 it. I, accordingly, went over, hoping that I should 
 be able to ascertain who thej were ; but 1 have 
 not been able to obtain the least information re- 
 specting them. Probably, they had not courage 
 to make the attack, and have returned to their 
 own lands* x-u^j^'' :'ii,«*f**»>ii.'^^(»iB' 
 
 ^. Shad berries begin to ripen, which is about 
 twenty days later than they ripen, in the same 
 Latitude, on the east side of the Rocky Moun- 
 tain. •- -'- -'' - • 
 
 Friday, August 2. Our whole stock of provis- 
 ions in the fort, for ten persons, consists of live sal- 
 mon, only. It is impossible, at this season, to take 
 fish out of this lake or river. Unless the salmon 
 from the sea, soon make their appearance, our 
 condition will be deplorable* iS ' 
 
 Saturday, 10. Sent all our people, consisting 
 of men, women, and children, to gather berries at 
 Pinchy, a village about twelve miles distant froitj 
 this, toward the other end of this lake. At no 
 great distance from that village, as I am informed, 
 there is a small lake, out of which the Nativei? 
 take small fish, which very much resemble a sal- 
 mon in shape and in flavour, which are not more 
 than six inches long. They are said to be very 
 palatable ; but, if they were not so, they would 
 be very acceptable to us, in our present circum- 
 stances. * 
 
 Vflft^' 
 
206 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ' Thursday^ 22. One of the Natives has caught 
 a salmon, wliich is joyful intelligence to us all ; for 
 we hope and expect, that, in a few days, we shall 
 have them in abundance. These fish visit, to a 
 greater or less extent, all the rivers in this region, 
 and form the principal dependence of the inhabi- 
 tants, as the means of subsistence. 
 
 Monday^ September 2. We now have the 
 common salmon in abundance. They weigh from 
 five to seven pounds. There are, also, a few^ of a 
 larger kind, which will weigh sixty or seventy 
 pounds. Both of them are very good, when just 
 taken out of the water. But, when dried, as they 
 are by the Indians here, by the heat of the sun, or 
 in the smoke of a fire, they are not very palatable. 
 When salted, they are excellent, t H«*a «r».»<h^'. 
 
 As soon as the salmon come into this lake, 
 they go in search of the rivers and brooks, that 
 fall into it ; and these streams they ascend so far 
 as there is water to enable them to swim ; and 
 when they can proceed no farther up, they re- 
 main there and die. None were ever seen to de- 
 scend these streams. They are found dead in such 
 numbers, in some places, as to infect the atmos- 
 phere, with a terrible stench, for a considerable 
 distance round. But, even when they are in a 
 putrified state, the Natives frequently gather 
 
 %.*-■<-!*- 
 
 ■Mt-v*: fi,;, ■ 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 207 
 
 theni up and eat them, apparently, with as great 
 a relish, as if they were fresh, •^•^i^ : 
 
 Tuesday, 17. Between nine and ten o'clock, 
 this forenoon, the sun was eclipsed, for nearly 
 half an hour, which event alarmed the Natives 
 greatly ; for they considered it as foreboding some 
 great calamity, about to fall upon them. They 
 therefore cried and howled, making a savage noise. 
 Their priests or magicians took their hands full of 
 swan's down, and blew it through their hands to- 
 ward the sun, imploring that great luminary to ac- 
 cept of the offering, thus made to him, to be put 
 on the head of his sons, when engaged in dancing, 
 and to spare the Indians. They suppose that the 
 8un has children, who, like those of the Carrie! j, 
 are fond of putting swan's down on their heads, 
 when they dance. — I explained to them the cause 
 of the darkness ; at which they appeared both 
 pleased and astonished, and acknowledged tha< 
 my account of the subject was rational, but won- 
 dered how I could obtain a knowledge of such 
 hidden and mysterious things. 
 
 Monday, 23. Bustards and geese begin to 
 come from the north. '** 
 
 In the early part of the day, I found it neces- 
 sary to chastise the chief of this village, with con- 
 siderable severity. He is the first Indian that I 
 
 I. 
 
 .* ^h; 
 
 i f 
 
 r-.h^') **■' i^^^'" 
 
 it 
 
208 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 t>' 
 
 have ever struck during a residence of eleven 
 years, in this savage country. j »„'ir* /s 
 
 ^ The following circumstances attended tiiis 
 transaction. The name of the Indian, who was 
 chastised, was Quas. He had a friend, who was 
 a v/o^thless fellow, to whom he wished me to ad- 
 vance goods on credit, which I declined doing for 
 two reasons. The first was, that I did not be- 
 lieve that the Indian would ever pay me for 
 them. The other was, that Quas wished to make 
 the Indians believe, that he had a great deal of 
 influence over us, which would be prejudicial to 
 our interest, if he should effect it. He tried every 
 method, which he could devise, to persuade me to 
 advance the goods, but to no purpose ; for I per- 
 ceived what was his object. He then told me, 
 that he saw no other difference between me and 
 himself, but this only : * you,' said he, ' know how 
 to read and write ; but I do not. Do not I man- 
 age my affairs as well, as you do yours ? You 
 keep your fort in order, and make your slaves,' 
 meaning my men, ' obey you. You send a great 
 way off for goods, and you are rich and want Cot 
 nothing. But do not I manage my affairs as well 
 as you do yours .'' When did you ever hear that 
 Qufts was in danger of starving ? When it is the 
 pro|>er season to hunt the beaver, I kill them ; 
 and of their flesh I make feasts for my relations. 
 
 ,....vi 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 209 
 
 I, often, feast all the Indians of my village ; and, 
 sometimes, invite people from afar off, to come 
 and partake of the fruits of my huntf I know 
 the season when fish spawn, and, then send my 
 women, with the nets which they have made, to 
 take them. I never want for any thing, and my 
 family is always well clothed/' — In this manner, 
 the fellow proceeded, for a considerable time. 
 
 I told him that what he had said, concerning 
 himself and his family, was true ; yet, I added, ' I 
 am master of my own property, and shall dispose 
 of it as I please. * Well,' said he, * have you ever 
 been to war ? ' No,' replied I, * nor do I desire to 
 take the life of any of my fellow creatures.' * I 
 have been to war,' continued he, ' and have 
 brought home many of the scalps of my enemies.' 
 I was now strongly tempted to beat him, as his 
 object manifestly was, to intimidate me. But I 
 wished to avoid a quarrel, which might be evil in 
 its consequences ; and especially to evince to the 
 Indians, who were spectators of what passed be- 
 tween us, that I was disposed to live in peace 
 with them. — Qvjias proceeded to try me another 
 way. He asked me if I would trust him with a 
 small piece of cloth, to make him a breech cloth ? 
 This I consented to do, and went into the store, 
 to measure it off. He followed me together with 
 «ny interpreter, and. ten or twelve other Indians. 
 27 
 
 h I 
 
 * S-ja -k i^jH-i 
 
210 
 
 flARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 I took up a piece of cloth, and asked him, if he 
 would have it from that ? He answered, no. I 
 then made a similar inquiry, respecting another 
 piece, to which he made a similar reply. This 
 persuaded me, that his only object was to provoke 
 me to quarrel with him. I, therefore, threw 
 down the cloth, and told him, if he would not 
 have that, he should have this, (meaning a square 
 yard stick which I had in my hand) with which 
 I gave him a smart blow over the head, which 
 cut it, considerably. I then sprang over the 
 counter, and pelted him, for about five minutes, 
 during which time, he continually called to his 
 companions, all of whom had knives in their 
 hands, to come and take me off. But, they re- 
 plied that they could not, because there were 
 two other white people in the room, who would 
 prevent them. It was happy for us that these 
 Indians stood in such fear of us ; for there were 
 only four white men, at this time in the fort, 
 and they could easily have murdered us. — As 
 Quas and his company left us, he told me that 
 he would see me again tomorrow, when the sun 
 should be nearly in the south, meaning between 
 ten and twelve o'clock. 
 
 Monday, October 7. The next day after I 
 chastised the Indian, as above described, he sent 
 one of his wives to request me, either to come 
 
 \ .. 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 211 
 
 and see him, or to send him some medicine. I. 
 therefore, sent him some salve, with which to 
 dress the wound in his head. — A few days after, 
 he became so well as to be able to hunt ; and 
 he killed and brought home a number of bea- 
 vers, with which he yesterday made a feast. 
 He sent an invitation to me to attend this feast ; 
 and I concluded that it would be necessary for 
 me to go, or he might think that I was afraid 
 of him. I, accordingly, put a brace "^ pistols 
 in my pocket, and hung a sword by my side, 
 and directed my interpreter to arm himself in a 
 similar manner, and to accompany me. We pro- 
 ceeded to the house of the chief, where we found 
 nearly an hundred Indians, assembled. As soon 
 as we arrived, he requested us to be seated. He 
 then rose, and stood in the middle of the circle, 
 formed by the guests, and with a distinct and 
 eleWted voice, made a long harangue, in which 
 he did not forget to make mention of the beat- 
 ing which he had lately received from me. He 
 said, if it had been given to him by any person 
 but the Big Knife (the name which they give to 
 me) he would have either lost his own life, or 
 have taken that of the person attacking him. 
 But now, he said, he considered himself as my 
 wife ; for that was the way, he said, that he 
 treated his women (of whom he has four) whein 
 
 N 
 
 
 m 
 
 i..»i 
 
212 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 'ill 
 
 ■fll 
 
 din 
 
 they behave ill. He said, that he thanked nae 
 for what I bad done, for it had given him sense. 
 — To this 1 replied, that, in a remote country, 
 I had left my friends and relations, who want- 
 ed for none of the good thir^ of this world, 
 and had come a great distance, with such arti- 
 cles as the Indians greatly needed, and which I 
 would exchange for their furs, with which I could 
 purchase more ; and in this way, I could always 
 supply their necessities ; that I considered the 
 Indians as my children, and that I must chastise 
 them when they behaved ill, because it was for 
 their good. * You all know,' said I, ' that I treat 
 good Indians well, and that I strive to live in 
 peace with you.' — Yss,' replied the father-in-law 
 to the chief, * Big Knife speaks the truth. My 
 son had no sense, and vexed him, and therefore 
 deserved the beating: which he has received.' — 
 Quas then told the Indians, that if he ever Mard 
 of any of them laughing at him for the beating 
 which he had received, he would make them 
 repent of their mirth. 
 
 After this the feast was served up in a man- 
 lier, which I shall describe in another place. — 
 It will be «een, by thic account, that the white 
 people have a great ascendency over the Indians ; 
 for, I believe that this chief is not destitute of 
 bravery. But it k very necessary, in order to 
 
HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 ^ 213 
 
 secure ourselves from aggression, that we mani- 
 fest that we are not afraid of them. 
 
 Saturday, 12. During the last three dajs, it 
 has snowed continually ; and it has fallen to the 
 depth of nearly two feet. ^^ 
 
 Monday, 21. We have now in our store, 
 twenty five thousand salmon. Four in a day are 
 allowed to each man. — I have sent some of our 
 peaple to take white fish. 
 
 Thursday, 31. Two men have arrived from 
 M*^Leod'9 Lake, and have delivered me several 
 letters, one of which, from Mr James M^^Dougall, 
 who accompanied our people from the Rainy 
 Lake, informs me, that the canoes were stopped 
 by the ice, on the 12th inst. about three days' 
 march below M'^Leod's Lake, where they still re- 
 main, together with the property which they bad 
 on board. 
 
 Saturday, JSTovemher 16. Our fishermen have 
 returned to the fort, and inform me that they 
 have taken seven thousand white fisb. These 
 fish, which, singly, will weigh from three to four 
 pounds, were taken in nine nets, of sixty fathoms 
 each. 
 
 i> Sunday, 17. Clear and cold. The last night, 
 the lake, opposite to the fort, froize over. — ^Tlie 
 greater part of the snow^ which fell in October, is 
 now disiolved. 1 
 
 m. 
 
 
214 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 Friday, December 13. On the 20th ult. I set 
 off, accompanied by twenty of my people, for the 
 goods which were stopped by the taking of the 
 ice in Peace River, the last October. We all re- 
 turned this evening accompanied by Mr. M^^^Dou- 
 gall, who has come to pass the holidays with us. 
 Our goods were drawn on sledges by dogs. Each 
 pair of dogs drew a load of from two hundred, to 
 two hundred and fifty pounds, besides provisions 
 for themselves and their driver, which would 
 make the whole load about three hundred pounds. 
 I have seen many dogs, two of which would draw 
 on a sledge, five hundred pounds, twenty miles, in 
 five hours. F^rashort distance, two of our stout- 
 est dogs will draw more than a thousand pounds 
 weight. In short, there is no animal, with which 
 I .m acquainted, that would be able to render 
 half the service that our dogs do, in this country, 
 where the snow is very deep in the winter season. 
 They sink but little into it, in following a person 
 on snow shoes. 
 
 Wednesday, January I, IS12. This being the 
 first day of the year, Mr. M^Dougall and I dined 
 with all our people, in the hall. After our re- 
 past was ended, I invited several of the Sicauny 
 and Carrier chiefs, and most respectable men, to 
 partake of the provisions which we had left ; and 
 I was surprised to see them behave with much de- 
 
HAR»ION'S JOURNAL. 
 
 215 
 
 •t 
 
 cency, and even propriety, while eating, and while 
 drinking a flagon or two of spirits. 
 
 After they had finished their repast, they 
 smoked their pipes, and conversed rationally, on 
 the great difference which there is, between the 
 manners and customs of civilized people, and those 
 of the savages. They readily conceded, that ours 
 are superior to theirs. 
 
 Tuesday^ 7. On the 4th inst. accompanied by 
 several af our people, I set off for Tachy, a vil- 
 lage, toward the other end of this lake. We 
 there saw a number of Indians, who appear to be 
 very indolent, and who are, of course, wretchedly 
 clad, and not better fed. From that place, wc 
 proceeded up a considerable river, about half a 
 days' march, to another village, inhabited chiefly 
 by Sicaunies, who appear to be more industrious 
 than the inhabitants of the former village ; and, 
 therefore, they are better clothed, and live more 
 comfortably. Their principal food consists of sal- 
 mon, white fish, and trout ; and they, at times,^ 
 kill a beaver, or a cariboo. The country around 
 the lake is hilly ; but, on both sides of this river, 
 it is level ; and from the appearance of the tim- 
 ber which grows on it, I should think that the 
 soil is not bad. 
 
 Monday^ 13. On the 9th inst. a Sicauny died 
 at this place ; and the following circumstances at- 
 
 
 r^' 
 
 m 
 
 
216 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 tended his Incineration, to day. — The corpse was 
 placed on a pile of dry wood, with the face up- 
 wards, which was painted and bare. The body 
 was covered with a robe, made of beaver skins, 
 and shoes were on the feet. In short, the deceas- 
 ed was clothed in the same manner as when alive, 
 only a little more gaily. His gun and powder 
 horn, together with every trinket which he had 
 possessed, were placed by his side. As they were 
 about to set fire to the wood, on which the de- 
 ceased lay, one of his brothers asked him if he 
 would ever come among them again ; for, they 
 suppose that the soul of a person, after the 
 death of the body, can revisit the earth, in 
 another body. They must, therefore, believe in 
 the immortality, though they connect with it 
 the transmigration, of the soul. 
 
 The deceased had two wives, who were 
 placed, the one at the head, and the other at 
 the foot of the corpse ; and there they lay un- 
 til the hair of their heads was nearly consum- 
 ed by the flames, and they were almost suffo- 
 cated by the smoke. When almost senseless, 
 they rolled on the ground, to a little distance 
 from the fire. As soon as they had recovered 
 a little strength, they stood up, and began to 
 strike the burning corpse with both their hands 
 alternately ; and this disgusting, savage cere mo- 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 217 
 
 
 ••: 'm 
 
 ny was continued, until the body was nearly 
 consumed. This operation was interrupted by 
 their frequent turns of fainting, arising from the 
 intensity of the heat. If they did not soon re- 
 cover from these turns, and commence the op- 
 eration of striking the corpse, the men would 
 seize them by the little remaining hair on their 
 heads, and push them into the flames, in order 
 (o compel them to do it. This violence was 
 especially used toward one of the wives of the 
 deceased, who had frequently run away ^rom 
 him, while he was living. 
 
 "V When the body was nearly burned to ashes, 
 the wives of the deceased gathered up these ash- 
 es, and the remaining pieces of bones, which they 
 put into bags. These bags they will be compell- 
 ed to carry upon their backs, and to lay by their 
 sides, when they lie down at night, for about two 
 years. The relations of the deceased will then 
 make a feast, and enclose these bones and ashes 
 in a box, and deposit them under a shed, erected 
 for that purpose, in the centre of the village. 
 Until this time, the widows are kept in a kind of 
 slavery, and are required to daub their faces over 
 with some black substance, and to appear clothed 
 with rags, and frequently to go without any cloth- 
 ing, excepting round their waists. But, at the 
 
 iw 
 
 m. 
 
 28 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
:2i8 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 .ft-f 't 
 
 
 llNcLvy 
 
 time of this feast, they are set at liberty from 
 these disagreeable restraints. 
 
 Thursday, 30. On the 17th inst. accompanied 
 by Mr. M'-Dougall, twelve of my men and two 
 Carriers, I set out on a journey to the territory of 
 the Nnte-ote-tains, a tribe of Indians, who have ne- 
 ver had any intercourse with white people, and few 
 of whom have ever seen them. After travelling, 
 with all possible expedition, during seven days, 
 generally on lakes, we arrived at their first village. 
 The inhab'tarts were not a little surprised and 
 alar'iTcLl to seo people come among them, whose 
 complexion was so different from their own. As 
 their village stands on a rise of ground, near to a 
 large lake, they saw us coming, when we were at 
 a considerable distance from them ; and the men, 
 women and children came out to meet us, all of 
 whom were armed, some with bows and arrows, 
 and others with axes and clubs. They offered no 
 offence ; but, by many savage gestures they mani-. 
 fested a determination to defend themselves, in 
 case they were attacked. We soon dissipated 
 their fears, by informing them, that we came not 
 to make war upon them, but to supply them with 
 articles which they needed, and to receive their 
 furs in exchange. They treated us with much 
 respect and with great hospitality. , , ,^ 
 
 %i;. 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL, 
 
 J' 
 
 219 
 
 -*^*-'tThe day following, we proceeded on our route, 
 and, during our progress, we saw four more of 
 their villages. At the second of these, we found 
 the two men who, the last summer, visited my 
 fort. , These people wer« not, therefore, surpris- 
 ed at seeing us among them ; for, I had promised 
 these two men, that, in the course of the winter, 
 I would visit their country. They gave us the 
 same account as they had before given at the fort, 
 of the white people, who come up a large river, 
 already mentioned. And to convince us of the 
 truth of the account, they showed us guns, cloth, 
 axes, blankets, iron pots, &c. which they obtained 
 from their neighbours, the Atenas, who purchase 
 them directly of the white people. > :i>«**ies #:^^ *k»W. 
 '**' The five villages which we visited, contain 
 about two thousand inhabitants, who are well 
 made and robust. They subsist principally on sal- 
 mon, and other small fish. The salmon here have 
 small scales, while those at Stuart's Lake, have 
 none. — The clothing of these people, is mudti Kke 
 that of the Carriers. I procured from them ves- 
 sels, curiously wrought, of the smaller roots of the 
 spruce fir, in different shapes. Some of them are 
 open, like a kettle, and will hold water They 
 also, let me have a blanket or rug, which was 
 manufactured by the Atenas, of the wool of a kind 
 of sheep or goat. These animals are said to be 
 
 
 •W1 
 
220 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 numerous, on the mountains, in their country. — 
 3 They told us that we had seen but a small part of 
 the Nate-ote-tains, who, they say, are a numerous 
 cribe. They speak a language peculiar to them- 
 selves, though the greater part of them under- 
 stand that, spoken by the Carriers. .^^ 
 4 J* The country, which we travelled over, in this 
 route, is generally level. Few mountains are to 
 be seen. A heavy growth of timber evinces, that 
 the soil is good. — We saw no large animals, ex- 
 cepting the cariboo; but we were informed, that 
 black bears, and other kinds of the larger animals, 
 exist in considerable numbers, in that region. 
 mr^ Sunday, February 23. I have just returned 
 from a jaunt of eight days, to Frazer's Lake and 
 Stills. The latter place lies about twenty miles 
 leyond the former. Wherever we went, the Na- 
 tives, as usual, appeared to be pleased to see us, 
 and treated us hospitably. ,, ,,**,,, . .^.j-r-f 
 Monday, April 6. Six Indians have arrived 
 fro&i Frazer's Lake, who delivered to me a let- 
 ter, written by Mr. David Thompson, which is 
 dated August 28th, 1811, at Ilk-koy-ope Falls, 
 on the Columbia River. It informs me, that 
 this gentleman, accompanied by seven Canadians, 
 descended the Columbia River, to the place 
 where it enters the Pacific Ocean, where they 
 arrived on the I6th of July. There they found 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 221 
 
 a number of people, employed in building a fort 
 for a company of Americans, who denominate 
 themselves the Pacific Fur Company. He also 
 writes, that Mr. Alexander M'^Kay and others, 
 have proceeded to the northward, in the vessel 
 that brought them there, on a coasting trade. — 
 Mr. Thompson, after having remained seven days 
 with the American people, set out on his return 
 to his establishments, which are near the source 
 of the Columbia River. From one of these posts, 
 he wrote the letter above mentioned, and deliver- 
 ed it to an Indian, to bring to the next tribe, with 
 the direction, that they should forward it to the 
 next, and so on, until it should reach this place. 
 This circumstance accounts for the great length of 
 time, that it has been on the way ; for t! e dis- 
 tance that it hes come, might be travelled over, 
 in twenty five or thirty days. 
 
 Monday f May 11. This morning I returned 
 from M^Leod's Lake, where I have been to send 
 off my people, who are to go to the Rainy Lake. 
 While there, one of my men, Pieere Lambert, 
 while crossing a small lake on a sledge, fell through 
 the ice ; and, before his companions who were 
 near could extricate him, he was drowned. The 
 day following, his corpse was brought to the fort 
 and interred. i m?? r^ifst-^i ? Kf ^r .■> 
 
 On my way home, the walking was exceeding- 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 *;■ ^ 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 .'Hi 
 
 ■! 
 
 
 S" 
 
 fi\ 
 
222 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 :f 
 
 ^M^ 
 
 \y bad. The snow was three feet deep, and the 
 weather was so mild, that it had become very 
 soft. About ten miles from this place, I left my 
 guide, and came on forward of him. I had not 
 proceeded far, before I wandered from my proper 
 course. I might have followed my tracks back; 
 but this I was unwilling to do, and I continued, 
 therefore to wander about during the remainder 
 of the day. The night came upon me, while I 
 was in a thick wood ; and, as I had nothing to eat, 
 I could only kindle up a fire, and endeavour to 
 solace myself, by smoking my pipe. — I passed the 
 greater part of the night in melancholy reflections 
 on the unpleasant condition, into which I had 
 brought myself, by leaving my guide. Very ear- 
 ly in the morning, I left my fire, and commenced 
 travelling, without knowing what direction to take. 
 The sun was concealed by clouds, and the rain 
 fell copiously. Before I had gone far, I perceiv- 
 ed, at no great distance from me, a pretty high 
 hill, which I at length ascended, with much diffi- 
 culty. Froto its summit, I was cheered by a pros- 
 pect of this lake, at a considerable distance from 
 me. Having ascertained the course which I must 
 take, I descended into the valley, and took the fol- 
 lowing method to keep in the direction to the fort. 
 I at first marked a tree ; and from that, singled 
 out one forward of me, to which 1 proceeded : 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 223 
 
 and by means of these two fixed upon another, in 
 a straight line ahead ; and continued the same 
 operation, for several hours, until, with great joy, 
 I reached the fort. And now, therefore, I desire 
 to return thanks to kind Providence, for having 
 once more directed my steps to my home and my 
 family. ._,, _., . ..^ * 
 
 Thursday^ 21. The last night, an east winu 
 drove the ice to the other end of this lake. 
 
 » ii Tuesday^ 23. This morning, the Natives caught 
 a sturgeon that would weigh aboui two hundred 
 and fifty pounds. We frequently see in this lake, 
 those .which are much larger, which we cannot 
 take, for the want of nets, sufficiently strong to 
 hold them. . ^«j5r 
 
 Saturday, August 15. Salmon begin to coma 
 up this river. As soon as one is caught, the Na- 
 tives always make a feast, to express their joy at 
 the arrival of these fish. The person, who first 
 sees a salmon in the river, exclaims, Ta-loe nas- 
 lay ! Ta-loe nas-lay ! in English, Salmon have ar- 
 rived ! Salmon have arrived ! and the exclamation 
 is caught with joy, and uttered with animation, by 
 every person in the village. '^ * - 
 
 Wednesday, September 2. Mr. M<^DougaIl and 
 company, who came here on the 2dth ult. set out 
 this morning, on their return home, to M^^Leod'i^ 
 Lake. This visit has afforded me much satisfac- 
 
 
224 
 
 HARMON S JOURiNAL. 
 
 •.-'' 
 
 tion. In this lonely part of the world, we enjoy 
 the pleasures of social intercourse, when we are 
 permitted to spend a little time with a friend, 
 with the highest relish. '^-^ '** • ^^'^ ^-um^ . .».. 
 
 Sunday^ October 25. Early this morning, my 
 people returned from the Rainy Lake. By them 
 I have received letters from home, which have 
 given me more satisfaction than I can express. 
 My friends are in good health, and my beloved 
 son George has arrived safely among them. For 
 these blessingt:>, I cannot be sufficiently thankful, 
 unless a merciful God is graciously pleased to 
 change my heart of stone into a heart of flesh. 
 iiu Friday, JYovember 6. We have now about six 
 inches of snow on the ground. — On the 27th ult. 
 I set out for M<=Leod's Lake, where I arrived on 
 the 29th. I there found Mr. John Stuart, who, 
 with his company, arrived the day before, from 
 Fort Chipewyan. His men are on their way to 
 the Columbia River, down which they will pro- 
 ceed under Mr. J. G. M<^Tavish. The coming 
 winter, they will pass near the source of that riv- 
 er. At the Pacific Ocean, it is expected that they 
 will meet Donald M^^Tavish, Esq. and company, 
 who were to sail from England, last October, and 
 proceed round Cape Horn to the mouth of Colum- 
 bia River. This afternoon Mr. Stuart and my- 
 self, with our company, arrived at this place, 
 
mm 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 225 
 
 (Stuart's Lake) where both of us, God willing, 
 shall pass the ensuing winter. With us, are twen- 
 ty one labouring men, one interpreter, and five wo- 
 men, besides children. ' ** ' 
 Saturday, January 23, 1813. On the 29th ult. 
 Mr. Stuart and myself, with the most of our peo- 
 ple, went to purchase furs and salmon, at Frazer's 
 Lake and Still&s. The last fall, but few salmon 
 came up this river. At the two places, above 
 mentioned, we were so successful as to be able to 
 procure a sufficient quantity. While at Frazer's 
 Lake, Mr. Stuart, our interpreter and myself, 
 came near being massacreed by the Indians of 
 that place, on account of the interpreter's wife, 
 who is a native of that village. Eighty or ninety 
 of the Indians armed themselves, some with guns, 
 some with bows and arrows, and others with axes 
 and clubs, for the purpose of attacking us. By 
 mild measures, however, which I have generally 
 found to be the best, in the management of the In- 
 dians, we succeeded in appeasing their anger, so 
 that we suffered no injury ; and we finally sepa- 
 rated, to appearance, as good friends, as if nothing 
 unpleasant had occurred. Those who are ac- 
 quainted with the disposition of the Indians, and 
 who are a little respected by them, may, by hu- 
 mouring their feelings, generally, controul them, 
 almost as they please. >^i^t.im0^Hiti^^-- 
 
 t 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 ?'fe 
 
 m 
 
226 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 Sunday, February 21. Rocky Mountain Port- 
 age Fort. Here I arrived this afternoon, accom- 
 panied bj five Canadians and one Carrier. We 
 left Stuart^s Lake on the 6th inst and are on our 
 way to Dunvegan, where I am going to transact- 
 * some business with Mr. John M<^Gillivray, who is 
 there. As the mountains, on both sides of the 
 river, for the distance of seventy or eighty miles, 
 are very lofty, there is generally a strong wind 
 passing, either up or down the stream, which, at 
 this season, renderrs it extremely cold and disagree- 
 able travelling. On the 18th, we were in the 
 heart of those mountains ; and we had to encoun- 
 ter such a strong hea^ wind, that my upper lip 
 became very much frozen, without my having 
 perceived it at the time. It is now much swolen, 
 and very painful. We all caught severe colds, in 
 consequence of a fall of snow upon us, to the depth 
 of eight inches, after we had encamped and re- 
 signed ourselves to sleep, the second night after 
 leaving Stuart's Lake ; and I have become unable 
 to speak, excepting in a whisper. It requires in- 
 deed, a strong constitution, to conflict with the 
 hardships, incident to our mode of life. 
 
 We here find no person, excepting two Cana- 
 dians. Mr. A. R. M^Leod, who has charge of 
 this place, is no'.y absent on a visit to his hunter's 
 tent, which is five days' march from this. From 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 227 
 
 such a distance, provisions are obtained for this 
 post, as there are very few large animals at this 
 season, in this vicinity, in consequence, I presume, 
 of the great depth of snow, which always falls in 
 places, so near the mountain, as this. The peo- 
 ple who are here say,, that the hunters had such 
 difficulty in finding animals of any kind, the last 
 
 fall, that they all passed five days, without any 
 kind of food. .. ^.m* hj^^;:*. .-. m ., 
 
 Monday, March 1. Dunvegan, I have, at 
 length, reached this place, where I passed the 
 years 1809 and 1810, and revisiting it, many a 
 pleasing scene is recalled by memory, and many 
 hours of agreeable conversation, which I passed, 
 with the gentlemen who were then here, rise 
 fresh to my recollection. — Mr^ M*=Gillivray is now 
 absent, on a visit to the Lesser Slave Lake ; and 
 Mr. Collin Campbell has charge of the fort. 
 
 Sunday, 14. Mr. M<^Gillivray returned, on the 
 lOth inst. He is an amiable and excellent man ; 
 and I have enjoyed his society, during my short 
 stay here, very highly. Having completed my 
 business here, I shall set out tomorrow, on my re- 
 turn to Stuart's Lake. I here received the intel- 
 ligence, that Niagara and Makana had su' render- 
 ed to the British forces ; but not before many val- 
 uable lives were lost, on both sides. 
 '^ Sanday, April 4. Stuart'' s Lake. Wo left 
 
 ft i'<l' 
 
 ^,1 s'* 
 
 - T ^i4: 
 

 228 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 
 Dunvegan on the 16th ult. and arrived here this 
 evening, without having experienced any disaster 
 by the way. 
 
 Saturday^ May 1. Present appearances justi- 
 fy the expectation, that the ice in the river wil^ 
 soon break up, so that our people will be able to 
 commence their journey to the Rainy Lake with 
 our returns, all of which we have sent to M^Leod's 
 Lake, together with letters to people in this coun- 
 try, and to our friends in the civilized part of the 
 world. ' ' ■" 
 
 Thursday, 13. The weather is fine. In the 
 early part of the day, Mr. J. Stuart, accompanied 
 by six Canadians and two of the Natives, embark- 
 ed on board of two canoes, taking with him a 
 small assortment of goods, as a kind of pocket 
 money, and provisions sufficient for a month and 
 an half They are going to join Mr. J. G. M^Ta- 
 vish and his company, at some place on the Co- 
 lumbia River ; and to proceed with them to the 
 ocean. Should Mr. Stuart be so successful as to 
 discover a water communication, between thiS and 
 the Columbia, we shall, for the future, obtain our 
 yearly supply of goods by that route, and send our 
 returns out that way, to be shipped directly for 
 China, in vessels which the company, in that case, 
 design to build on the North West coast. While 
 the execution of this comprehensive plan is com- 
 
■vi- 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 229 
 
 mitted to others, mj more humble employment, 
 in which, however, 1 am quite ' as sure of being 
 successful, is to be, the superintendence of the af- 
 
 fairs of New Caledonia. «•» ^•'^ iiimm-^ui ^t-.-^ iw.'-. 
 
 No other people, perhaps, who pursue busi- 
 ness to obtain a livelihood, have so much leisure, as 
 we do. Few of us are employed more, and aiany 
 of us much less, than one hfth of our time, in trans- 
 acting the business of the Company. The re- 
 maining four fifths are at our own disposal. If we 
 do not, with such an opportunity, improve our un- 
 derstandings, the fault must be our own ; for there 
 are few posts, which are not tolerably well suppli- 
 ed with books. These books are not, indeed, all 
 of the best kind ; but among them are many which 
 are valuable. If I were deprived of these silent 
 companions, many a gloomy hour would pass over 
 me. Even with them, my spirit at times sinks, 
 when I reflect on the great length of time which 
 has elapsed, since I left the land of my nativity, 
 and my relatives and friends, to dwell in this sav- 
 age country. These gloomy moments, thank God, 
 occur but seldom, and soon glide away. A little 
 reflection reconciles toe to the lot, which Provi- 
 dence has assigned me, in the world. 
 
 Saturday, June 12. A Sicauny has just arrived, 
 who states, that a little this side of M^^Leod's 
 Lake, where ho was encamped with his family, an 
 
 * 4 
 
 ■ii''J 
 
 
 
 4, 
 
 ^■^^^ 
 
230 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 Indian of the sairie tribe, rushed out of the wood, 
 and fired upon them, and killed his wife. Her 
 corpse he immediately burned upon the spot ; and 
 then, with his son and two daughters, he proceed- 
 ed directly to this [ ' ice. — All the savages, who 
 have had a near relation killed, are never quiet 
 until they have revenged the death, either by kill- 
 ing the murderer, or some person nearly related 
 to him. This spirit of revenge has occasioned the 
 death of the old woman, above mentioiied, and she 
 undoubtedly, deserved to die ; for, the last sum- 
 mer, she persuaded her husband to go and kill 
 the cousin of her murderer, and that, merely be- 
 cause her own son had been drowned. — The cus- 
 tom, which extensively prevails among the Indians, 
 of revenging the natural death of a relative, by 
 the commission of murder, seems to arise from a 
 superstitious notion entertained by them, that 
 death, even when it takes place in this manner, 
 has, in some mysterious way, been occasioned by 
 a fellow creature. * n-^niM* - *?ts« ^^Jt? w-n *.-! 
 
 ,\-< Sunday, 20. Yesterday, an Indian of this vil- 
 lage killed another, who was on a visit from the 
 other end of this lake, just as he was entering his 
 canoe to return. The former approached the 
 latter, and gave him five stabs with a lance, and 
 ripped open his bowels, in such a shocking man- 
 ner, that his entrails immediately fell upon 
 
 ^4i » 
 
 

 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 231 
 
 •^1 
 
 the ground ; and he, of course, instantly ex- " 
 pired. The murderer made his escape ; and the 
 chief of the village, wrapped the corpse in a 
 moose skin, and sent it to his relations. Notwith- 
 standing this conciliatory act, the people of this 
 place are apprehensive, that the relations of the 
 person murdered, will make war upon them ; and 
 they will, therefore, set out tomorrow, to go a 
 considerable distance down this river, where they 
 will pass a greater part of the summer, until har- , 
 mony is restored between the two villages. — This 
 murderer has a wife, who is known to be a worth- 
 less woman, with whom he supposed that the per- 
 son murdered had had imp jper intercourse ; and 
 it was to revenge this, that the act was committed. 
 — All the Carriers are extremely jealous of their 
 wives ; while, to their unmarried daughters, they 
 cheerfully allow every liberty ! 
 
 Thursday, August 12. Salmon begin to make 
 their appearance in this river, which is a joyful 
 event to us ; for the stock-of provisions which we 
 have in the fort, is sufficient, but for a (ew days, 
 and the Natives, for some time past, have suffered 
 greatly for the want of food. We ought to be 
 thankful to our merciful Preserver and Benefac- 
 tor, who continually watches over us, and supplies 
 our wants. Often has he appeared for our relief. 
 
 ",5. ♦* ' 
 
 ^ ",'' 4 1*1 
 
 
 *'''1 
 
 . >> 
 
 ,:.-*) r Vi'^l'^l^'r^.:' 
 
 . 
 
'W 
 
 r. '•*■ t. 
 
 ^ 
 
 232 
 
 ^ Harmon's journal. 
 
 .^; 
 
 %* 
 
 when we were in urgent need, and taught us, that 
 he is the proper object of our confidence. 
 
 Wednesday, September 1. A few days since, 
 Mr. M'^Dougall arrived here frjm M^Leod's Lake, 
 and took all he people, belonging to this fort, 
 with him to Pinchy, to gather berries. Having 
 been left entirely alone, I have had a favoura- 
 ble opportunity for serious reflection, and for 
 self examination; and I have been disposed to em- 
 
 ' ploy it fo this purpose. On reviewing the exercises 
 of my heart, and the course of my conduct, during 
 my past life, I hp've been filled with astonishment 
 and with grief, in view of my wide departures 
 from the path of duty. My sins have risen in 
 gloomy array before me, and I have been led 
 to feel, that I am, indeed, the chief of sinners ; 
 and that, on account of mj /ansgressions, I de- 
 serve to be banished forever from the gracious 
 presence of God, and to bo consigned to the 
 
 ' world of future misery. This view of my guilt 
 would have been overwhelming, had not God 
 been graciously pleased, as I trust, to reveal 
 the Saviour to me, in his glorious fullness, as 
 an all sufficient and an accepted Mediator be- 
 tween sinful men and the offended majesty ol 
 heaven. He has appeared to me amiable in 
 himself, and entirely suited to my necessities: 
 
'vs 
 
 
 t 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 23a 
 
 ai^ I humbly hope that I have committed my 
 soul to him, to be washed from the defilement of 
 sin in his blood, to be accepted of God through his 
 intercession, and to be sanctified by his Spirit. 
 The change in my views and feelings, is certainly 
 great ; and it is surprising to myself. What I 
 once considered as the foibles and follies of my 
 youth, now appear to be grievous sins, against a 
 righteous and a long suffering God ; and a religious 
 course of life, I regard as the path, not only of 
 wisdom, but of happiness ; and by the aid of Di- 
 vine grace, it is my resolution, for the time to 
 come, to labour after a compliance with every Di- 
 vme requirement. ^m^ wia^rmia ^f'S4l?irii^^^^ tii^jti, 
 
 Until this day, I have always doubted whether 
 such a Saviour as the scriptures describe, ever re- 
 ally existed, and appeared on earth ! So blind wad 
 I, that I could see no necessity for an atoning Me- 
 diator between God and men. Before I left the 
 civilized part of the world, I had frequently heard 
 the cavils of infidelity urged; and these cavils fol- 
 lowed me into the wilderness, frequently came 
 fresh to my recollection, and contributed to over- 
 shadow my mind with the gloomy doubts of infi- 
 delity. My intention, however, was, by no means 
 to cast oflf all religion ; but, I attempted to frame 
 to myself a religion, which would comport with 
 my teelings, and with my manner of life. — For 
 
 30 jt 
 
 -} 
 
 '^ 
 
 '%;. 
 i^' 
 
 
^- >w»^' 4 
 
 
 ■■/■ 
 
 *> 
 
 234 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 /* 
 
 several years past, however, my mind has not been 
 at rest. I was taught in early life, by parents 
 whom I respected and loved, the truths and du- 
 ties of Christianity ; and I had a wish to believe 
 in the same religion which they possessed, and 
 from which, I have frequently heard them say, 
 they derived the most substantial consolation. I, 
 therefore, some time since, commenced reading the 
 Bible, with more attention than 1 had before done ; 
 for, from my youtii up, I had been accustomed to 
 read it. I also read all other books that I could 
 find, which treated of the christian religion. Some 
 excellent notes, respecting the Saviour, in the Uni- 
 versal History, alfected my mind much ; as did, 
 also, the serious letters which I received, every 
 year, from my brother Stephen. I also prayed a 
 gracious God to enable me to believe on his Son, 
 the Lord Jesus Christ. As I was praying to-day, 
 on a sudden, the faith, respecting which I was so 
 solicitous, was, I trust, graciously granted to m?. 
 My views of the Saviour, underwent a total 
 change. I was enabled, not only to believe in his 
 existence, but to apprehend his superlative excel- 
 lency ; and now he appears to be, in truth, what 
 the scriptures describe him to be, the chiefest 
 among ten thousand, and one altogether lovely. 
 May the grace of God enable me to follow hi? 
 
 "IP *-—.,^l': 111 'i^lHiviJI \Fca £J,^«W ■iiilii ^ft*:^:•;!^•^ 
 
 vir 
 
 •f- 
 
 ♦ »•;: 
 
HARMON'S JOURNAL, 
 
 235 
 
 heavenly exampke through life, that I may dwell 
 with him in glory, forever ! -iiJ^i', 
 
 'B As I seem to myself to hare hitherto led a 
 more wicked life than the rest of my fellow crea- 
 tures, I deem it proper, for th« time to come, to 
 devote the first 'day of ever/ month to religious 
 fasting, employing it in reading the scriptures, in 
 devout meditation, and in piayer, that I may keep 
 in mind the great busings of life, which I now 
 consider to be, a preparation for eternity. My 
 prayer shall ever be, that a gracious God would 
 be pleased to blot out itj numberless and aggra- 
 vated transgressions, ^r the sake of the atone- 
 ment which Jesus hfx made ; and that he would 
 keep me, by his gr^ce, without which, I am con- 
 vinced I can do nothing acceptable to him, in the 
 pat'.i of !:'^lines«, until it shall terminate in heaven- 
 ly glory, ■■'■■ -;f—:"--^ -^"- --^ .-— '-"-' --i-t^-r 
 
 Tuesday^ 7. I have this day composed two 
 prayers, which I design lo use regularly and de- 
 voutly, morning and cveaing. It is not only a du- 
 ty, but a privilege, ;iius to approach the mercy 
 seat of the great Sovereign of the Universe, in 
 the natiij of a prevalent Intercessor, and to sup- 
 plicate the numerous blessings which we need, as 
 well as to give thanks for those which we are 
 continually receiving, »Vi ^v^ .iwi i» 
 
 
 •i1'l 
 1;^] 
 
 u 
 
 tw. 
 
 V* 
 
 j. ^ 
 
 *■ 
 
\ 
 
 236 
 
 UARMON's ^OURNAIj. 
 
 >ii>.« 
 
 ih, Saiurdayy25. An Indian has ar/ived, from « 
 considerable distance down this river, who has de- 
 livered to m^,, three letters from Mr. J. Stuart. 
 The last of thftm is dated at 0-ke-na-gun Lake, 
 which is situated at a short distance from the Co- 
 lumbia River. Mv. Stuart writes, tb^t he met 
 with every kindness ^nd assistance fro^^ the Na- 
 tives, on his way to that place ; that, after de- 
 scending this river, during eight days, he was un- 
 der the necessity of leaving his canoes, and of tak- 
 ing his property on hones, more than one hun- 
 dred and fifty miles, te the above mentioned 
 Lake. From that place, he states, that they 
 can go all the way by wattr, to the Ocean, by 
 making a few portages ; ana he hopes to reach 
 the Pacific Ocean, in twelve oi fifteen davs, at 
 farthest. They will be delayed, k for a time, 
 where they are, by the necessary construction 
 
 Friday, Qctoher 1. The fifst of my appoint- 
 ed days of religious fasting, has arrived; and I 
 have endeavoured to observe it, agreeably to 
 ■ay resolution. . ;• -"'.♦r-^?'^'^ tr^'-^^-'^ff^*'!" *'^^^ 
 |r, Sunday, November 7. This afternoon, Mr. Jo- 
 «eph La Roque and company arrived from the 
 Columbia River. This gentleman went, the last 
 summer, ./ith Mr. J. G. M^Taviah and his par* 
 ty, to the Pacific Ocean. On their return, they 
 
 \'i» 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 # 
 
 A ^ 
 
HARMOTTs JOURNALf 
 
 237 
 
 met Mr. Stuart and his company. Mr. La 
 Roque, accompanied bj two of Mr. Stuart's 
 men, set off thence, to come to this place, by 
 the circuitous way of Red Deer River, Lesser 
 Slave Lake, and Dunvegan, from which last 
 place, they were accompanied by my people, 
 who have been, this su$»mer, to the Rainy 
 Lake. By them I have received a number of 
 letters from people in this country, and from my 
 friends in the United States. 
 ..y.Tuesdayj December 14. On the 1st inst. I set 
 out for M»=Leod's Lake ; and I there received 
 several letters from my brothers below, which 
 announce the truly afflicting intelligence, that 
 my beloved son George is no longer to be num- 
 bered among the living ! He was in good health 
 on the second of March las^ and a corpse on 
 the eighteenth of the same month. — For some 
 time, I could scarcely credit this intelligence ; 
 though I had no reason to doubt its trMth. 
 This dispensation of divine providence is so un- 
 expected, and so afflictive, that at first, I could 
 scarcely bear up under it, with a becoming chris- 
 tian resignation. My tenderest affection was 
 placed upon this darling boy ^ and I fondly hop- 
 ed, that he would bo the solace of my declining 
 years. But how delusive was this expectation ( 
 How frail i^nd perishing are all o^arthly objects 
 
 |r ." 
 
 i.i' 
 
 - r, 1 ;** ; I .■ . If 
 
238 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 ii 
 
 and enjoyments. A few days since, in my imag- 
 ination, I was often wandering with delight, to the 
 remote land of my kindred, and parental love cen- 
 tered in this promising son, for whom, principally, 
 I wished to live, and for whom I would have been 
 willing to die. Perhaps this child occupied a 
 place in ray heart, which my God and Saviour on- 
 ly may of right occupy. I hope that this afflic- 
 tion may be the means of disengaging my affec- 
 tions from an inordinate attachment to earthly ob- 
 jects ; and that it may induce me to fix my confi- 
 dence and hope on things, which will never disap- 
 point my expe station. The Judge of all the 
 earth has done right ; and it becomes me to be 
 still and know, that he is God. I, too, must soon 
 die ; and this dispensation is, perhaps, a seasona- 
 ble warning to mc, to be prepared to meet my 
 own dissolution. I desire that the Holy Spirit 
 may sanctify this affliction to me, and make it sub- 
 servient to this important end. 't»/ 
 
 On my return from M<=Leod's Lake, I was ac- 
 companied by Mr. M<=Dougall and family, who 
 came to mourn with me, and the mother of my 
 departed son, the loss of this dear object of our 
 mutual affection. — Her distress, on receiving this 
 intelligence, was greater, if possible, than my own. 
 I endeavoured, by some introductory remarks, on 
 the uncertainty of earthly things, to prepare her 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 239 
 
 mind for the disclosure, which I was about to 
 make. Her fears were alarmed, by these re- 
 marks ; and, probably, she discovered in my coun- 
 tenance, something to confirm them. When I in- 
 formed her that our beloved son Gcorffe was 
 dead, she looked at me, with a wild stare of ago- 
 ny, and immediately threw herself upon the bed, 
 where she continued, in a state of delirium, during 
 the succeeding night. 
 
 Saturday, January 22, 1814. On the 4th inst. 
 Mr. M<=Dougall and family, left this place, to re- 
 turn home. They were accompanied by two 
 men, who have gone to Peace River, with letters. 
 — The same day, Mr. La, Roque and myself, ac- 
 companied by fourteen of my people, went to 
 Frazer's Lake. On the 9th I sent him, accom- 
 panies^ with two Canadians and two Indians, with 
 letters to the people, who are on the Columbia 
 River. After having purchased what fui-s I could, 
 and a sufficient quantity of salmon, I set out on my 
 return home, where I arrived this evening. 
 
 Friday, February 4. This evening, Mr. Don- 
 ald M^^Leunen and company, arrived here from 
 the Columbia Department, with a packet of let- 
 ters. One of these is from Mr. John Stuart, in- 
 forming me that the last autumn, the North West 
 Company purchased of the Pacific Fur Company, 
 all the furs which they had bought of the Natives, 
 
 ■v 
 
 nil 
 
 
 ..,» 
 
240 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 and all the goods which they had on hand. The 
 people who were engaged in the service of that 
 company, are to have a passage, the next summer, 
 to Montreal, in the canoes of the North West 
 Company, unless they choose to enter into our 
 service. - »* 
 
 Sunday, j^pril 17. As the ice appears to be 
 out of this river, I have sent Mr. Leunen, accom- 
 panied by two Canadians, in a small canoe, with 
 letters to the gentlemen on Columbia River. I 
 am, therefore, deprived of an agreeable compan- 
 ion, who, I expected until lately, would pass the 
 summer with me. — Happy are those, who have 
 an amiable and intelligent friend, with whom they 
 can, at pleasure, converse. 
 
 Friday, 22. Sent off my people to M^Leod's 
 Lake, in order that they may be in readiness 
 to embark for the Rainy Lake, as soon as the 
 navigation opens. By them I have, as usual, for- 
 warded my letters, and accounts of the place. If 
 God permit, I shall pass another summer at this 
 place, having with me ten persons. 
 
 As this is the only season of the year when 
 we can leave this country, now it is, that we have 
 the most ardent desire of visiting the land of our 
 nativity. At other seasons, t\\e impossibility of a 
 departure, suppresses the risiiig wish to go, stern 
 necessity binds us to our situation, and we rest m 
 
Harmon's journal.^ 
 
 241 
 
 quietude until the return of another spring. Then 
 all the finer feelings of affection take possession of 
 our souls ; and their strength seems to be increas- 
 ed, by the previous restraint, which had been laid 
 dpon them* • 
 
 Saturday, May 7. The weather is fine, and 
 vegetation is far advanced, for the season. This 
 lake is clear of ice ; and the frost is chiefly out of 
 the ground. Swans, bustards, and ducks, are nu- 
 merous in the rivers and lakes ; and, during the 
 last ten days, an incredible number of cranes have 
 passed this, on their way to the north ; but none 
 of them stopped here. 
 
 Three Indians have come to this place from 
 Frazer's Lake, to obtain the piece of a garment, 
 belonging to an Indian of that place, which they 
 say, was cut off by an Indian of this village. They 
 are so superstitious as firmly to believe, that, by 
 virtue of this piece of garment, the Indian, who 
 has it in his possession, is able to destroy the life 
 of its owner, at pleasure. 
 
 Friday, jiugust 5. Salmon begin to come up 
 this river. They are generally to be taken, in 
 considerable numbers, until the latter part of Sep^ 
 tember. During about a month, they come up in 
 multitudes ; and we can take any number of them 
 that we please. ^,. 
 
 31 ,Ai,. 
 
 <*, 
 
 -.w.aw-- 
 
 4,,A= 
 
242 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 ^- Tuesday f September 20. Wo have had but fevr 
 salmon here, this year. It is omy in every second 
 season, that they are very numerous ; the reason 
 of which, I am unable to assign. 
 
 I have sent an Ihdian, with letters, to . Dunve- 
 gan, on Peace River, which is distant from this 
 place, at least, five hundred miles. * 
 
 Friday, 30. We have had but a few salmon 
 in this river, during the past season. We hope, 
 however, that a kind Providence has sent them to 
 some of our neighbouring villages, where we shall 
 be able to purchase what will be necessary, in ad- 
 dition to the white fish, which we expect to take, 
 for our consumption, during the ensuing; winter. 
 But let my condition be ever so deplorable, I am 
 resolved to place all my dependence on that Be- 
 ing, who depends on no one. •»*/...! 
 
 Thesday, October 18. This afternoon, I was 
 agreeably surprised by the arrival of Mr. J. La 
 Roque and company, in two canoes, laden with 
 goods, from Fort George, at the mouth of the Co- 
 lumbia River, which place they left, the latter 
 part of last August. Our vessels arrived there, in 
 the months of March and April ; and, soon after, 
 one of them set sail again, loaded with furs, for 
 Canton in China. — Mr. La Roque brings the mel- 
 ancholy intelligence, that Messrs. D. M<^Ta ^h, 
 Alexander Henry, and five sailors were drown^^d^ 
 
HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 243 
 
 on the 22(1 oi' Maj last, in going out in a boat, 
 from fort George, to the vessel called the Isaac 
 Tod, which lay at anchor without the bar, in go- 
 ing over which, this disaster befei them. With 
 the former gentleman, I passed two winters at 
 Dunvegan, on Peace River. He stood high in my 
 esteem, and I considered him as one of my best 
 friends ; and I shall ever lament the sad catas- 
 trophe, which has thus suddenly removed him from 
 my society, and from all earthly scenes. I hope 
 that I may not be regardless of the admonition, 
 addressed to me by this providence, to be also 
 ready for my departure, to the world of spirits. 
 
 Monday, 24. Sent Mr. La Roque, and the 
 people who came up with him, to reestablish the 
 post at Frazer's Lake. 
 
 Saturday, 29. My people have returned from 
 the Rainy Lake, and delivered me lettere froip 
 my relatives below. They afford me renewed 
 proof of the uncertainty of earthly objects and en- 
 joyments, in the intelligence, that a brother's wife 
 has been cut down by death, in the midst of her 
 days, leaving a disconsolate husband, and two 
 young children, to mourn over her early depar- 
 ture. I ought, however, to be thankful, that the 
 rest of my numerous relatives, are blessed with 
 health, and a reasonable portion of earthly com- 
 forts. I have also received a letter from Mr. 
 
 / 
 
 ■s 
 
244 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 John Stuart, who hag arrived at M^^Leod's Lake, 
 desiring me to go and superintend the affairs at 
 Frazer's Lake, and to send Mr. La Roque, with 
 several of the people who are there, ta this place, 
 that they may return to the Columbia department, 
 where it is presumed they will be more wanted, 
 than in this quarter. Tomorrow, therefore, I 
 shall depart for Frazer's Lake. ^ 
 
 " Thursday, JVovember 3. Frazer's Lake. Here 
 we arrived this afternoon, and found Mr. La 
 Roque and his people, busily employed, in barter- 
 ing with the Natives, for furs and salmon, and in 
 constructing houses. With this gentleman, I have 
 spent a pleasant evening ; and I am happy to find 
 that, from having been thoughtless and dissolute, 
 he now appears to be the reverse of this. It is 
 manifest, that he has recently reflected much, on 
 the vanity of this world, and dh the importance of 
 the concerns of eternity; and he now appears deter- 
 mined, by the aids of God's Holy Spirit, on a tho- 
 jrough reformation. May he be enabled to perse- 
 vere in this important undertaking. 
 
 Tuesday, December 20. Messrs. Stuart and 
 M*^Dougall, with a number of men, have arrived 
 from Stuart's Lake, for the purpose of proceeding 
 with me to Stilla, in order to purchase salmon. 
 The Indians of this village have not a sufficiency 
 for themselves and for us, owing to the scarcity of 
 
•\ 4 
 
 Harmon's journal^ 
 
 245 
 
 salmon at several neighbouring viljages, whose in- 
 habitants flock to this place, in hopes of obtaining 
 a subsistence, during the winter. 
 
 Saturday, January 7, 1815. On the 29th ult. 
 I accompanied my two friends to Stuart's Lake, 
 where we passed the holidays together, in the in- 
 tercourse of an intimate and endearing friendship. 
 Each related how he had passed his youthful days, 
 and even in what manner he had lived to the pre- 
 sent hour ; and we all readily acknowledged, that 
 our lives had been very different from what we 
 then wished they had been. I hope and believe, 
 that we all parted, fully determined on a thorough 
 reformation of conduct. May none of us fail to 
 carry this resolution into effect. 
 
 Friday, February 3. During the whole of the 
 last month, it has been the coldest weather, by 
 far, that I have ever experienced, in New Cale- 
 donia. ' ?r 
 
 On the 11th ult. accompanied by six of my 
 people and two of the Natives, I set out to visit 
 the lands of the Nas-koo-tains, which lie along 
 Frazer's River. This river Mr. Stuart followed 
 some distance, when he left this place to pro- 
 ceed to the Columbia River. The above men- 
 tioned Indians never had any intercourse with the 
 white people, until I went among them. We 
 reached their first village, on the 19th ; but as 
 
 /ill , 
 
 - IT 
 
 •*■ 
 
 '1^ 
 
246 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 they were nearjy destitute of provisions, and we 
 had expended those which we took with us from 
 this place, we passed only one night with them. 
 The next morning, we continued our route down 
 the river, every day passing one or two small vil- 
 lages, until the 22d, when we met people from the 
 Columbia River, with letters, &c. 
 
 Frazcr's River is about fiftv rods wide, and 
 has a pretty strong current. On the north side, 
 the bank is generally high ; but, on the other, it 
 is low, and the country is level. In going from 
 this, to the place where we fell upon the river, 
 we occupied nine days ; and the country which 
 we passed over, is very uneven. We, however, 
 crossed several ponds and small lakes, which were 
 from one to fifteen miles in length. At these wa- 
 ters, the Natives pass the greater part of the 
 summer, and subsist on excellent white fish, trout 
 and carp ; but, towards the latter part of' August, 
 they return to the banks of the river, in order to 
 take and dry salmon, for their subsistence during 
 the succeeding winter. 
 
 Sunday, 12. As sjilmon are becoming rather 
 scarce among the Indians of this village, they are 
 preparing to visit the neighbouring lakes, in order 
 to obtain a subsistence, from the fish that they 
 hope to be able to take out of them. 
 
 -i.iftjfiK ■ 
 
 !# '**' 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 247 
 
 Monday, 27. The weather is serene and cold ; 
 and thus far, this h"as been much the coldest win- 
 ter that I have experienced in this part of the 
 country. — The winters are, generally milder here, 
 than in most parts of the North West. Mr. Stu- 
 art has just left me, on his return home. The 
 few days which he has spent here, were passed 
 much to our mutual satisfaction ; and I hope that 
 we shall reap some benefit from this visit. Re- 
 ligion was the principal topic, on which we con- 
 versed, because, to both of us, it was more inter- 
 esting than any other. Indeed, what ought to in- 
 terest us so much, as that which concerns our 
 eternal welfare ? I, at times, almost envy the sat- 
 isfaction of those, who live among christian peo- 
 ple, with whom they can converse, at pleasure, 
 on the great things of religion, as it must by a 
 source of much satisfaction, and of great advan- 
 tage, to a pious mind. 
 
 Thursday, April 6. About ten days since, an 
 Indian of this place lost bis wife, after a lingering 
 illness of several months ; and, shortly after, the 
 disconsolate husband hung himself from the limb 
 of a tree. For several days previous to the fatal 
 act, he appeared to be much cast down, which 
 being observed by his companions, they cndoav- 
 ourcjd to cheer his spirit, by the consideration, 
 that what had befallen him, had been snilcred by 
 
 K 
 
 fe.1 
 
 h^ 
 
 ■ym 
 
 J.. 
 
 I";' 
 
 5 
 
« 
 
 248 
 
 Harmon's journaL. 
 
 multitudes of others, and was the common lot. 
 He replied that he should cdnduct as his own 
 feelings dictated ; and that he had not fo»'gotten 
 the request of his dying companion, which was, 
 that he would accompany her. Not long after, 
 he was missing ; and, search being madje for him, 
 he was found in the situation above mentioned. 
 The strength of conjugal attachment is not an un- 
 frequent cause of suicide, in every part of the In- 
 dian country. 
 
 Monday^ 24. The snow is fast leaving us, and 
 fowls begin to come from the south. 
 
 Wednesday^ 26. I have sent letters to my 
 friends below, to Stuart's Lake, which place they 
 will leave, on their way, the first of next month. 
 I expect to pass the ensuing summer here, having 
 but a few people with me. But, by dividing my 
 time between reading, meditation and exercise, I 
 hope liat it will pass not unpleasantly, away. 
 
 Wednesday, May 10. We have surrounded a 
 piece of ground with palisades, for a garden, in 
 which we have planted a few potatoes, and sow- 
 ed onion, carrot, beet and parsnip seeds, nd a 
 little barley. I have, also, planted a very little 
 Inuian corn, without the expectation that it will 
 come to maturity. The nights in this region 
 are too cool, and the summers are too short, to 
 admit of its ripening. There is not a month in 
 
4i Harmon's joornal. 
 
 249 
 
 the whole year, in which water does not con- 
 geal ; though the air in the day time, in the 
 summer, is warm, and we even have a few days 
 of sultry weather. — ^The soil, in many places in 
 New Caledonia, is tolerably good. 
 
 Tuesday, May 30. I have just returned from 
 a visit to Mr. Stuart, who passes the summer 
 at Stuart's Lake. On the mountain, which I 
 crossed in going there, I found snow, two feet, 
 at least, in depth. 
 
 Friday, June 16. Soon after the Natives left 
 their village, last February, to go to the small 
 lakes, for the purpose of taking fish, four of 
 their number deceased. Their corpses were 
 kept, by their relations, to the present time, 
 when they are bringing them to the village in 
 order to burn them. Little else but the skele- 
 tons, now remain. — In the winter season, the Car- 
 riers often keep their dead in their huts during 
 five or six months, before they will allow them 
 to be burned. At this season, the coldness of 
 the weather enables them to keep the bodies, 
 without their becoming offensive; and they are 
 unwilling that the lifeless remains of the objects 
 of their affection, should be removed forever 
 from their sight, until it becomes a matter of 
 necessity. ^ ^ • *"-^-'^'"' 
 
 Sunday, 18. This afternoon eight of the j!^ite^ 
 32 , 
 
 
 
 
250 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 ote-tains came to pay a visit to the Indians of 
 this village, by whom they were, at first, treated 
 in a friendly manner. Soon after their arrival, 
 they began to play, as is the custom of the Indians, 
 whenever the people of dilFerent villages meet. 
 Things proceeded smoothly, until the strangers be- 
 gan to be winners, when disputes arose. An 
 open contest was prevented, by the restoration of 
 the property won ; but a coolness between the 
 parties, was visible. The strangers sron set out, 
 to return home ; but as they were embarking in 
 their canoes, a worthless fellow fired upon them, 
 and killed one of them. This disaster caused them 
 to hasten their departure, uttering at the same 
 tikHe the threat, that they would soon return, with 
 a large band of their relations, to revenge the 
 death of their companion. — Human life is often 
 sacrificed for a trifle, among the savages ; and he 
 only may feel secure, who is prepared to oppose 
 strength to aggression. 
 
 Mouday, July 24. Fruits, of various kind?, 
 now begin to ripen. Of this delicious food, the 
 present prospect is, that we shall soon have an 
 abundance ; and for this favour, it becomes us to 
 be grateful to the Bestower. The person who is 
 surrounded with the comforts of civilized life, 
 knows not how we prize these delicacies of the 
 wilderness. Our circumstancGs, also, teach us to 
 
 me, ren( 
 
m 
 
 HARMON^S JOURNAL. 
 
 251 
 
 enjoy and to value the intercourse of friendship. 
 To be connected, and to have intercourse, with a 
 warm and disinterested friend, who is able, and 
 will be faithful, to point out our faults, and to di- 
 rect us by his good counsel, is surely a great bles- 
 sing. Such a friend, I have, in my nearest neigh- 
 bour, Mr. Stuart. For some time past, he has 
 frequently written to me long, entertaining and in- 
 structive letters, which are a cordial to my spir- 
 its, too often dejected, by the loneliness of my 
 situation, and more frequently, by reflections on 
 my past life of folly and of sin. Mr. James M*^ 
 Dougall, also, another gentleman in this depart- 
 ment, is equally dear to me. His distance from 
 me, renders intercourse less practicable ; but 
 when we meet, we endeavour to make up in 
 conversation, for our long separation. 
 ^. Friday, August 4. The holy scriptures con- 
 tain the most abundant instruction, in regard to 
 the duties which we owe to God, and to our 
 fellow creatures. To aid me in keeping these 
 instructions, habitually and distinctly in view, that 
 my life may thereby be more exemplary, I think 
 proper to form the following resolutions, which 
 I hope, by the aid of the Holy Spirit, to be 
 enabled to observe, during my life. , ^ 
 
 Resolved, that the scofls of the wicked, di- 
 rected against serious religion, shall never have 
 
 
 f'?r| 
 
 hM^ 
 
 , t, 'f :-, f 
 
o 
 
 252 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 any other effect uporv me, than to make me 
 strive, the more earnestly, to lead the life of a 
 sincere christian. 
 
 Resolved, to be in the company of the wick- 
 ed, as little as possible ; and when among such 
 people, to endeavour to persuade them in such 
 a way as may be consistent with propriety, to 
 forsake their evil courses.^" 
 
 Resolved, to assist the poor and needy, so 
 far as may be consistent with my means ; hop- 
 ing that avarice may never prevent me from 
 judging correctly, in regard to this subject. 
 
 Resolved, never to let a day pass, when at 
 home, or when convenient, abroad, without read- 
 ing a portion of the holy scriptures, and spending 
 half an hour or more, in meditating on what I 
 have read ; and that the whole of the sabbath, 
 when it is not in my power to attend publick 
 worship, shall be spent in prayer, reading the bi- 
 ble, or sermons, or some other religious book, in 
 self examination, and in meditating on the eternal 
 world. 
 
 Resolved, to offer up daily prayers to the 
 throne of grace, for a right temper of mind, that 
 I may be constant and diligent, in strictly observ- 
 ing the above resolutions. And I pray that ray 
 humble endeavours may, by the blessing of God, 
 keep me in the path of holiness, so that I may, 
 
■^ 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 253 
 
 frpoi day fo day, become better prepared to en- 
 ter the world of bliss, whenever my Maker and 
 Redeemer shall see fit to terminate my mortal 
 course. Amen. 
 
 Monday, 7. At half past seven, A. M. we 
 had an earthquake, which lasted about twenty 
 seconds. At that time I was sitting in a chair, in 
 the house ; and the agitation put me, and the 
 whole house, in a motion like that of a canoe when 
 rolled about by con ?iderable swells. The Natives 
 say, that a similar shaking of the earth occur^, al-, 
 most yearly, at this place. «-ii,-rx^ ; r. 
 
 Sunday, 13. Salmon begin to come up this 
 river, which lights up joy in the countenances, 
 both of ourselves and of the Natives ; for we had 
 all become nearly destitute of provisions, of any 
 kind. A kind Providence will not allow us to suf- 
 fer want, though we so little deserve favours. ■• 
 
 Monday, October 2. Within a few days past,"' 
 we have caught, in nets made for the purpose, of 
 strong twine, three sturgeon, one of which meas- 
 ured ten feet and three inches in length, and four 
 feet and one inch round his middle, which might 
 weigh about four hundred pounds. All that we 
 have taken, were uncommonly fat, and of the best 
 flavour of any that 1 have ever eaten. 
 
 Friday, 13. This afternoon, the Natives sent 
 for me to come and see one of their young wo- 
 
 'i ;i 
 
 ... M 
 
 i.Ml 
 
# 
 
 254 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 men, who lay at the point of death, at their vil- 
 lage ; and, merely to please them, I went, without 
 expecting to render her any service, especially 
 with the medicines which we have here. I found 
 her so far gone that I thought it would not be 
 proper to give her any thing. I told the Indians, 
 moreovr- thai if she should die, shortly - ftcr 
 taking ot ne in 'ines, they would say, as they ever 
 do in such cases, i t I was the cause of her death. 
 They assured me however, to the contrary ; and 
 I gave her a simple medicine, which I supposed 
 could do her neither good nor harm, with which 
 they were satisfied. rs 
 
 I understood that her relations had said, that 
 a certain Indian, by his magic, had caused her ill- 
 ness, and that he would finally take her life. I, 
 therefore, took this opportunity of repeating again, 
 what I had often told them before, that God, the 
 infinitely powerful being, who made every thing, 
 had alone the power of causing their dissolution, 
 whenever he thought proper. Upon this, one of 
 the chiefs, who thought himself more knowing 
 than the others, observed, that it was the God of 
 the salmon, who remained at the sea, who was 
 taking the girl's life. I replied, that God is in 
 heaven above ; but that, so searching are his eyes, 
 he can easily see what takes place on the face of 
 the \7hcle earth. They said, it might be so ; but 
 

 .u 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 255 
 
 they could not conceive, by what means I came 
 to have a knowledge of these things. This, I en- 
 deavom'ed to explain to them.f-.ru t . 
 
 Wednesday, JYovember 1. This afternoon, 
 three of our men arrived from the Rainy Lake, 
 who say that they left the remainder of their com- 
 pany at M<=Leod's and Stuart's Lakes. They de- 
 livered me letters from people in this country ; 
 but none from home. By the men in the other 
 canoes, I hope to receive letters from my friends 
 below. We are happy to be informed, that peace 
 has taken place between Great Britain and the 
 United States. My earnest desire is, that they 
 may long continue to enjoy this blessing. — v 
 
 Thursday y 16. We have now about three 
 inches of snow on the ground. ^^. 
 
 Sunday, March 17, 1816. In consequence of 
 the late arrival, at fort Chippewyan, of the men 
 who went to the Rainy Lake, two canoes, which 
 were expected last fall, could not then proceed here, 
 which is the reason why I have but just received 
 the letters that I then expected, from my friends 
 below. They bring me the distressing intelli- 
 gence, that two of my brothers are brought, by a 
 consumption, to the borders of the grave. Happy 
 should I consider myself, could I once more see 
 them in this world. But, if this may not be, the 
 will of the Lord be doqe. By this affliction I 
 
 i'. 
 
 
 'w 
 
 Vi. 
 
 FT ■"•*!& i 
 
 V 
 
256 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 have renewed proof, that this world cannot be my 
 rest ; and I pray God to prepare me, and my dy- 
 ing brothers, for that happy abode, where a sepa- 
 ration of friends never causes the heart to bleed. 
 
 Monday, April 15. My desire to, return 
 to my native country has never been so intense, 
 since I took up my abode in the wilderness, as it 
 is now, in consequence of the peculiar situation of 
 my friends ; yet, I cannot think of doing it this 
 season, as it is absolutely necessary that I should 
 pass the ensuing summer at this place. 
 
 I shall write to my friends below, a few days 
 hence ; and as we live in a world of disappoint- 
 ment and death, I am resolved to forward to them 
 by Mr. John Stuart, a copy of my Journal, in or- 
 der that they may know something of the manner 
 in which I have been employed, both as it res- 
 pects my temporal and spiritual concerns, while in 
 the wilderness, if I should never enjoy the inex- 
 pressible pleasure of a personal intercourse with 
 them. 
 
 r- Wednesday, 24. I have just returned from 
 Stuart's Lake. While there, I agreed with Mr. 
 George M<^Dougall to remain in this country two 
 years or more, as clerk to the North West com- 
 pany. He came out the last summer from Cana- 
 da, with Lord Selkirk's party, without having ob- 
 ligated himself to continue with them, for an^ 
 
> ' 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 257 
 
 definite time. After they arrived at Fort Ver- 
 milion on Peace River, he was treated by his su- 
 periour, Mr. John CJarke, in so unbecoming a 
 manner, that he left them, and had come into this 
 quarter to visit his brother, Mr. James McDougall, 
 before he should return to Canada, which he de- 
 signed to do the ensuing summer. 
 
 Saturday^ July 20. Strawberries begin to rip- 
 en, and we have the prospect of an abundance of* 
 them, as well as of other kinds of fruit. 
 
 1 now pp.ss a short time every day, very pleas- 
 antly, in teaching my little daughter Polly to read 
 and spell words in the English language, in which 
 she makes good progress, though she knows not 
 the meaning of one of them. In conversing with . 
 my children, I use entirely the Cree, Indian lan- 
 guage ; with their mother I more frequently em- 
 ploy the French. Her native tongue, however, is 
 more familiar to her, which is the reason why our 
 children have been taught to speak that, in pref- 
 erence to the French language. 
 
 Tuesday, September 9. Salmon begin to come 
 up this river. ^* 
 
 Thursday, October 3. We have taken our 
 vegetables out of the ground. We have forty- 
 one bushels of potatoes, the produce of one bushel 
 planted the last spring. Our turnips, barley, &c. 
 have produced well. 
 
 m 
 
 II 
 
 !':i 
 
 PI 
 
 pal 
 
 ::M \ 
 
 
*>r» 
 
 58 
 
 Harmon's journal. 
 
 Saturday, JYovember 23. By our people who 
 returned this afternoon from the Rainy Lake, I 
 have received letters, which announce the afflic- 
 tive intelligence, that two of my brothers, of 
 whose decline I had before been informed, are 
 gone into eternity. The happy days that I had 
 fondly hoped that I should pass in their society on 
 earth, I shall never enjoy. Such is the uncertain- 
 ty of all earthly expectations. But the Judge of 
 all the earth has done right. — My departed bro- 
 thers gave evidence, to those around them, that 
 they died in the faith and hope and peace of the 
 gospel. They are gone, I trust, to a world where 
 ain and suffering cannot follow them. -h**- 
 
 When the cold hand of death shall have been 
 laid upon a few more of my relatives, there will be 
 nothing remaining on the earth to console me for 
 their loss. Nothing revives my drooping spirits in 
 view of the departure of my friends, one after anoth- 
 er, from year to year, into eternity, like the hope 
 that, through rich grace, I may be at length per- 
 mitted to join their society, in a world of perfect 
 purity and of uninterrupted and everlasting joy. 
 
 We rarely prize our blessings in a suitable 
 manner, until we learn their value by being de- 
 prived of them. 1 feel the force of this truth, in 
 regard to my deceased brothers. To one of them 
 in a particular jnanner, I am deeply indebted ; and 
 

 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 259 
 
 1 have never been fully sensible of his worth, un- 
 til now. During the whole period jf my resi- 
 dence in this country, ! e has written to me annu- 
 ally, long, affectionate, and instructive letters. 
 For a number of years past, religion was the great 
 subject of them. He was tenderly concerned for 
 my spiritual welfare ; and doubtless learned from 
 my letters, that I was lingering on the gloomy 
 confineri of infidelity, and little disposed to heed, 
 as I ought to have done, his friendly admonition. 
 So far from being discouraged by this circum- 
 stance, it only rendered him more vigorous and 
 persevering in his efforts ; and his letters stand 
 chief among the means, iwhich have been blessed, 
 as I would hope, to my conversion from the love 
 and practice of sin, to the fear and service of God. 
 These letters have also been of use to the few 
 friends, to whom I have shown them. It would 
 have given me great pleasure to have acknowledg- 
 ed, in person, the obligation which I am under, to 
 him ; but it becomes not me to dictate to infinite 
 wisdom. * * 
 
 I have, also, received letters from gentlemen 
 in different parts of this country, which inform mc 
 of the many * 'sasters that befel the people whom 
 Lord Selkirk sent thfe year before, from Scotland, 
 the Orkney Islands, and Canada, some of whom 
 were destined to form a colony on the Red Riv- 
 
 
260 
 
 BARMON S JOURIVAL. 
 
 er, and others to traffic with the Natives, in dif- 
 ferent parts of the Indian cou.itrj. Tliey consist- 
 ed at first, as I am informed, of two or three hun- 
 dred men, together >,vit.h a few \i/omen and child- 
 ren. Those, who went to establish themselves on 
 the Red River, at a short distance from its en- 
 trance into the great Vl/innipick Lake, began, soon 
 after their arrival,, to behave in n hostile manner 
 tov^ard the people of the North West Company, 
 who have establiishmcnts io that quarter Of 
 some of our forts, they actually took possepsion, 
 and carri(3d away the property which they found 
 in them ; and, in some instances, thej'^ set fire to 
 tlie forts, and reduced them to ashes. They also 
 took Duncan Cameron Esq. a partner of the 
 , North West Company, and another gentleman, 
 who is a clerk, whom they carried, m the spring, 
 to Hudson's Bay, with the intention, asi they fiital- 
 ed. of taking them to England. — In the course of 
 the wilnter, as the Express of the North West 
 Company was passing that weij, destioed to the 
 Soult St. INfaries, they took possession of that dyo, 
 perused the hjtters and other paf)ers which had 
 been sealed up, atid finally carried them to York 
 Faclory, at Hiidsoini's Bay. 
 
 AH ithis unmerited treatment,, at length so 
 provoked the people of the North West Coniipa- 
 ny, timt they proceedetl, to retake their own forts, 
 
 W 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 261 
 
 which had not been burned, as well cs some prop- 
 nrty belonging to those disturbers of the peace. 
 
 fn June, ei number of the Brulcs, that is, peo- 
 ple whose fathecs were white men, and whose 
 mothers were Indian women, proceeded from the 
 upper part of Red River, toward the place of 
 its entrance into the Lake, in order to guard some 
 property there belonging to the N. W. CoL^ia- 
 ny. On their way, they were obliged to pass,' 
 for about two miles, over an open plain, directly 
 behind Lord Selkirk's establishment. As soon as 
 they were observed, his people came out in a 
 body, and fired upon them, twice. This was un- 
 expected by the Brules ; neither were they pre- 
 paiod for such an encounter, as many of them 
 had neither gun nor ammunition. Perceiving how- 
 eyer, that they must defend themselves or b© 
 cut oi\] those who had arms returned the fire ; 
 and the contest continued, until twenty two of 
 the noble Earl's people fell, and some others 
 were wounded. The Brules had only onn man 
 killed, and one wounded.— -This unhappy affair 
 broke up the colony, Some of the people went 
 to Hudson's Bay ; but the greater number return- 
 ed to Canada. 
 
 Those of Lord Selkirk's people who came to 
 the English River and Athabasca, sulFcred great- 
 ly for the want of provisious. Out of nearly one 
 
 m 
 
 
.'S^ ^ 
 
 262 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 I 
 
 hundred who came to Athabasca, twelve actu- 
 ally lost their lives by starvation ; and all the 
 others must have shared the same unhappy fate, 
 had not the people of the North West Compa- 
 ny supplied them with provisions. In short, 
 Lord Selkirk lost the last year, in fight and by 
 starvation, sixty eight of his men ! and still, with 
 the phrcnzy of a madman, he is resolved oA 
 pursuing his wild projects. 
 
 Wednesday, December 4. There is now about 
 a foot and an half of snow on the ground. 
 
 I have sent fifteen men, with each a sledge 
 drawn by two dogs and loaded with salmon, to 
 M^Lcod's Lake, for the subsistence of the peo- 
 ple who are to pass the winter there, and for 
 the additional number who will be there in the 
 spring, to make up the furs into packs. Salm- 
 on are our chief subsistence here ; and they arc 
 taken only in the waters which are discharged 
 into the Pacific Ocean. The outlet of M*=Leod*s 
 Lake enters Peace River, whose waters, are 
 finally discharged into the North Sea. 
 
 Thursday, January 2, 1817. I have just re- 
 turned from a neighbouring village, where my 
 interpreter gave one of the natives a decent 
 drubbing, for having stolen from us. Soon after, 
 the Indian who had been beaten, with a number 
 of his relations, flew to arms, aad surrounded out 
 
 camp; but 
 to gesticuh 
 permitted i 
 ordered mj 
 determined 
 came a ma 
 tives that ^ 
 and, if they 
 otherwise, 1 
 which if tht 
 thera. Th< 
 ter came bj 
 trade, as if i 
 Monday^ 
 er of my ch 
 whom I nar 
 Wednesd 
 years of age 
 my past lif 
 many instan 
 from tjbe ve 
 doubtedly \ 
 destruction, 
 of the ingrj 
 si'xh infinite 
 to me to hi 
 committed £ 
 tQ»' and ijed 
 
V. 
 
 harbIon's journal. 
 
 263 
 
 
 camp ; but they proceeded at first no farther than 
 to gesticulate in a threatening manner. Tlais I 
 permitted them, for a short time, to do, when I 
 ordered my men to load their guns; though I was 
 determined that they should not fire, unless it be- 
 came a matter of necessity. I then told the Na- 
 tives that we were prepared to defend ourselves, 
 and, if they mtended to fire upon us, to begin ; or 
 otherwise, to walk off, and lay aside their arms, 
 which if they would not do, we should fire upon 
 thera. They concluded to retire, and shortly af- 
 ter came back without their arms, and began to 
 trade, as if nothing had happened. 
 
 Monday^ February 10. This evening the moth- 
 er of my children, was delivered of a daughter, 
 whom J name Sally Harmon. 
 
 Wednesday, 19. I am this day thirty nine 
 years of age. When I reflect on the events of 
 my past life, and recollect, especially, in how 
 many instances a merciful God has snatched me 
 from tjie very jaws of death, when it would un- 
 doubtedly lave delivered me over to everlasting 
 destruction, I am grieved and ashamed, in view 
 of the ingratitude with which I have rcqriitcd 
 si'.ch infinite kindness. My past life now appears 
 to me to have been a continual course of sins, 
 committed against a merciful Creator, Benefac- 
 tor and B»edecmer. I have even denied the Lord 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
264 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 thai bought mc, and that because I couid see no 
 need of that atonement for sin, which is the only 
 thing that has stood between me and hopeless 
 
 * perdition ! If I have indeed been rescued from 
 
 v^ such a wretched condition, if I have been effectu- 
 ally convinced of my sinfulness, and have been 
 led, in the exercise of faith, to apply unto the 
 Lord Jesus Christ for .pardon and for sanctifica- 
 tion, surely, it can be attributed to nothing but the 
 grace of God. Much of my life has been spent 
 in the service of sin j the little that remains, ought 
 to be sacredly devoted to God and the Redeemer. 
 May the Holy Spirit enable me to live in the 
 time to come, as a disciple of the blessed Sa- 
 viour. » 
 
 Monday, September 1. Stuart'' s Lake. On the 
 8th of May last, I left New Caledonia, and went 
 as far as Fort Chipewyan, on the Athabasca Lake. 
 This afternoon, I return'^rl to this place. While 
 I was at that lake, tht ^ dians who were en- 
 
 . camped about the fort, to the number of about 
 one hundred, rose up in arms against us, on account 
 of a quarrel between one of their people and one 
 of our men. We did not, however, come to blows 5 
 and, after a parley, the Indians were persuaded to 
 l^y down their arms. — Those Chipeways an; a 
 savage people ; and they have as i believe, k'iled 
 
 ^ mure white men, than any other tribe in the North 
 
# 
 
 ^ 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 son 
 
 West country. A few years alnce, they burned 
 one of our forts, and killed every person belonging 
 
 to it. .;.,^.r 
 
 On the 2 Is I of June, I left Athabasca Lake, 
 at which period, there was still ice floating about 
 in it. in coming up j?eace River, we saw many 
 of the buifaloe and red deer, and killed as many 
 of them as we wanted for our own consumption. 
 Black bears, also, were in plenty ; and of them, 
 we killed eleven. One day as I was walking along 
 the beach alone without my gun, a black bear, 
 that had cubs, pursued me for nearly a mile. 
 Happily for me, 1 could outrun her ; and I there- 
 fore escaped from her terrible paws. 
 
 A little below the Rocky Mountain Portage, 
 along the side of the river, there is a kind of 
 marsh where earth, of a beautiful yellow colour 
 is found, which when burned, becomes a pretty 
 lively red. The natives use it as paint, for which 
 it answers tolerably well. We, also, use it to 
 paint our forts and houses. / 
 
 Saturday, October 4. This evening, an Indian 
 arrived froia Frazer's Lake, bringing the disagree- 
 able intelligence, that yesterday in the afternoon, 
 our fort there was consunied by fire. Wo hftve 
 reason to be thankful, however, that most of the 
 property whicli was in it, was saved 
 
 Thursday^ 16. Wo have taken our vegeta-, 
 34 
 
 y^- 
 
 W' 
 
 r 
 
 lit 
 
 -rii 
 
 8, % 
 
 
 
 ^;-y-«^a{: 
 
HAllMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 Hes out of the ground, In consequence of tht 
 very dry summer, they yielded but poorly. There 
 were months, during which not a drop of rain 
 feii. — Fruit of all kinds has been uncomoK^nly 
 abundant this season. 
 
 -^*- Wednesday^ February 18, 1818. I have just 
 returned fronri a jaunt of twenty three days, to a 
 place down Frazer's River. While there, the 
 Natives had concerted a plan to massacre us all ; 
 but I discovered it, and kept ray people on their 
 guard. The Indians, perceiving this, dared not 
 attempt to execute their bloody and unprovoked 
 purpose. 
 
 Saturday^ May 2. Expecting that the ice in 
 Peace River will soon break up, I have sent off 
 the last of our people who are going to the Rainy 
 hke ; and by them ! have forwarded, as usual, 
 my accounts of the place, and letters to my friends 
 below« 1 look forward, with pleasing anticipation, 
 to the return of cnolher spring, when I hope, 
 if my life is spared, I shall myself leave this coun- 
 try on ii visit to the civilized world. 
 
 Thursday, September 3. Last nigh^ there fell 
 libimt fvir inches of snow, which is earlier than I 
 have evfjr before seen it fall, in ihis part of the 
 country. On the 6th ult. salmon began to come 
 up thi^ river; but they are not very numerous. 
 
 hi the month of June, we took out of this 
 
ft 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 267 
 
 lake twenty one sturgeon, that were from eight to 
 twelve feet in length. One of them measured 
 twelve feet two inches, from its extreme points, 
 four feet eleven inches round the middle ; and 
 would weigh from five hundred and fifty, to six 
 hundred pounds. All the sturgeon that we have 
 caught, on this side of the mountain, are far su- 
 perior in flavour, to any I ever saw in any oth- 
 er part of the world. * 
 
 A few days since, we cut down and threshed 
 our barley. The five quarts, which I sowed on 
 the first of May, have yielded as many bushels. 
 One acre of ground, producing in the same pro- 
 portion that this has done, would yield eighty 
 four bushels. This is sufficient proof that the 
 soil, in many p<laces in this quarter, is favourable 
 to agriculture. It will probably be long, howev- 
 ^r, before it will exhibit the fruits of cultivation. 
 The Indians, though they often suffer for the 
 want of food, are too lazy to cultivate the ground. 
 I have frequently tried to prevail on some of 
 them to hoe and prepare a piece of ground, prom- 
 ising them that I would give them potatoes and 
 turnips, with which to plant it ; but I have not 
 succeeded. Having been from their infancy train- 
 ed up to privation, the fear of want is a much 
 less powerful stimulus to excite them to industry. 
 
 
 Iff t 
 
 . ,l, 
 
 Li''> 
 
 :v i;; 
 
 f "0' 
 
 HI 
 
 % 
 
 h 
 
 i i 
 
 . } 
 
# 
 
 268 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 
 than it is to those who have always been accus- 
 tomed to the comforts of civilized life. 
 
 Tuesday, October 13. We have several inches 
 of snow on the ground. 
 
 For several years past, Iroquois from Canada, 
 have been in the habit of coming into different 
 parts of the North West country, to hunt the 
 beaver, &;c. The Natives of the country, consider 
 them as intruders. As they are mere rovers, they 
 do not feel the same interest, as those who per- 
 manently reside here, in keeping the stock of ani- 
 mals good, and therefore they make great havock 
 among the game, destroying alike the animals 
 which are young and old. A number of Iroquois 
 have passed several summers on this side of the 
 mountain, which circumstance they knew to be 
 displeasing to the Indians here, who have often 
 threatened to kill them, if they persisted in de- 
 stroying the animals on their lands. These men- 
 aces were disregarded. A month since, an Iro- 
 quois, with his wife and two children, were all 
 killed, while asleep, by two Carriers of this vil- 
 lage, which melancholy event, I hope, will pre- 
 vent any of the Iroquois from coming into this re- 
 gion again. ^ 
 ' Saturday, JVovember 7. We have now about 
 a foot of snow on the ground. — 'To-day our peo- 
 ple returned from the Rainy Lake, and say that, 
 
# 
 
 Harmon's journal* 
 
 269 
 
 on account of the large quantities of ice that was 
 drifting in Peace River, they were obhged to 
 leave the greater part of the goods, which they 
 had on board of the canoes, but a short distance 
 this side of the Rocky Mountain Portage. We 
 shall be obliged, therefore, to bring these goods 
 on sledges, drawn by dogs from that place, which 
 is distant from this, about two hundred and eighty 
 miles. ^ 
 
 Sunday, February 28, 1819. Mr. George M^ 
 Dougall has arrived here from Frazer's Lake, to 
 remain, as I am going to M^'Leod's Lake, to pre- 
 pare for a departure for Head Quarters ; and my 
 intention is, during the next summer, to visit my 
 native land. I design, also, to take my family 
 with me, and leave them there, that they may bo 
 educated in a civilized and christian manner. The 
 mother of my children will accompany ^e; and, 
 if she shall be satisfied to remain in that part of 
 the world, I design to make her regularly my wife 
 by a formal marriage. It will be seen by this re- 
 mark, that my intentions have materially changed, 
 since the time that I at first took her to live with 
 me ; and as ray conduct in this respect is differ- 
 ent from that which has generally been pursued 
 by the gentlemen of the North West Company, it 
 will be propor to state some of the reasons which 
 have governed ray decision, in regard to this 
 
 5!l 
 
 Jii i 
 
 
 IW-^ 
 
 
 i^-iii^ 
 
270 
 
 HARMON'S JOURNAL. 
 
 weighty affair. It has been made with the most 
 serious deliberation ; and, I hope, under a solemn 
 sense of my accountability to God. 
 
 Having lived with this woman as my wife, 
 though we were never formally contracted to 
 each other, during life, and having children by 
 her, I consider that I am under a moral obliga- 
 tion not to dissolve the connexion, if she is 
 willing to continue it. The union which has 
 been formed bet wet a us, in the providence of 
 God, has not only been cemented by a long and 
 mutual performance of kind offices, but, also, by a 
 more sacred consideration. Ever since my own 
 mind was turned effectually to the subject of re- 
 ligion, I have taken pains to instruct her in the 
 great doctrines and duties of Christianity. My ex- 
 ertions have not been in vain. Through the mer- 
 ciful agency of the, Holy Spirit, I trust that she 
 has become a partaker with me, in the consola- 
 tions and hopes of the gospel. I consider it to be 
 my duty to take her to a christian land, where she 
 may enjoy Divine ordinances, grow in grace, and 
 ripen for ^lory. — We have wept together over 
 the early departure of several children, and espe- 
 cially, over the death of a beloved son. We have 
 children still living, who are equally dear to us 
 both. How could I spend my days in the civiliz- 
 ed world, and leave my beloved children in the 
 

 HARMON 8 JOURNAI* 
 
 271 
 
 wilderness ? The thought has in it the bitterness 
 of death. How could I tear them from a moth- 
 er's love, and leave her to mourn over ther ab- 
 sence, to the day of her death ? Possessing only 
 the common feelings of humanity, how could I. 
 think of her, in such circumstances, without an- 
 guish ? On the whole, I consider the course 
 which I design to pursue, as the only one which 
 religion and humanity would justify. 
 
 Mr. M^^Dougall informs me, that, not long 
 since, an Indian died at Frazer's Lake, and left 
 behind him a widow, who had been in similar cir- 
 cumstances before, by the loss of a former hus- 
 band. A day or two before the corpse was to be 
 burned, she told the relations of her late husband,' . 
 that she was resolved not to undergo a second 
 slavery. She therefore left the tent, secretly, in 
 the evening, and hung herself from a tree. 
 
 Among the Carriers, vv idows are slaves to the 
 relations of their dec« ased husbands, for the term 
 of two or three years from the commencement of 
 their widowhood, during which, they are general- 
 ly treated in a cruel manner. Their heads are 
 shaved, and it belongs to them to do all the drudg- 
 ery, about the tent. They are fre uently beaten 
 with a club or an axe, or some such weapon. 
 
 Saturday, May 8. M'^Leod^s Lake. I arriv- 
 ed here about two months since. Ycsl^erday, the 
 
 ¥ 
 
 
 H .^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 m 
 
 :n 
 
 vj-'t- ■■{§ : i] 
 
"iu 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^^^ 4Ci. 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 y 
 
 A 
 
 {•/ 
 
 
 4? 'm^ 
 
 :/. 
 
 f/. 
 
 &'^ 
 ^ 
 
 10 ■- 
 
 \.\J |50 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 Jim 
 
 I!: |4£ 
 
 14 IIIIII.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 672-4503 
 
 Sb 
 
 1 
 
 rv^^ 
 
 iV 
 
 \\ 
 
 
 
 
 '^' 
 
 ■\^ 
 
%5o 'WSl^. 
 
 /^ 
 
 h^ 
 
272 
 
 HARMON S JOURNAL. 
 
 pi? 
 
 It?:, 
 
 
 MmW'' 
 
 h ^ 
 
 '^-\ ' 
 
 5: 
 
 most of our people embarked with the returns of 
 this place, in three canoes ; and a few hours 
 hence, I shall, with my family, proceed in another, 
 which will be pushed on by six Canadians. 
 
 It is now eight years and an half, since I came 
 to the west side of the Rocky Mountain. My life, 
 which has often been in jeopardy, is still preserv- 
 ed ; my family have generally enjoyed, in a high 
 degree, the comforts, which this part of the world 
 affords ; and, especially, they have been exten- 
 sively blessed with health of body, and content- 
 ment of mind. Our worldly affairs have prosper- 
 ed, to as great an extent as we could reasonably 
 expect. For all these blessings, it becomes us to 
 return unfeigned thanks, to the great Giver of ev- 
 ery good gift. 
 
 Friday, 14. Rocky Mountain Portage. All 
 the way to this place, we have drifted down, 
 amidst great quantities of ice, by which, at five 
 different places, the river was completely blocked 
 up, so that we were obliged to tarry, until the 
 water rose so high, as to remove these barriers. 
 This is the reason why we have been so long in 
 coming to this place. Had the river been high, 
 and yet clear from ice, the current is so strong, 
 that we might have reached here in two days. 
 
 Wednesday, August 18. Fort William. \ have 
 at length arrived at head quarters. In coming 
 
 IN; 
 
 ft-; 
 
Harmon's journal. 
 
 273 
 
 from New Caledonia to this place, which is a dis- 
 tance of at least three, thousand miles, nothing un- 
 common has occurred. A few days hence, I shall 
 leave this place, to proceed to Canada. As I 
 have already described the country between 
 this, and Montreal, I shall here conclude mv 
 Journal. 
 
 
 35 
 
 <'#t 
 
 mk 
 
 
 - 3 
 
 
 
 i= ' 
 
 
 '' kMi 
 

 
 -■, Iff . T i-f ■ ? Fi 
 
 . • j f • . ^ i 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
■'*»" 
 
 ■,li 
 
 CHARACTER 
 
 ^^ l-^ 
 
 OF THE CANADIAN VOYAGERS. 
 
 Like their ancestors the French, the Cana* 
 dian Voyagers possess lively and fickle disposi- 
 tions ; and they are rarely subject to depres- 
 sion of spirits, of long continuance, even when 
 in circumstances the most adverse. Although 
 what they consider good eating and drinking 
 constitutes their chief good, yet, when necessi- 
 ty compels them to it, they submit to great 
 privation ai.d hardship, not only without com- 
 plaining, but even with cheerfulness and gai- 
 ety. They are very talkative, and extreme- 
 ly thoughtless, and make many resolutions, 
 which are almost as soon broken as iorraed. 
 They never think of providing for future wants ; 
 and seldom lay up any part of their earnings, 
 to serve them in a day of sickness, or in the 
 
 n 
 
276 
 
 CHARACTER OF THK 
 
 i: 
 
 , < 
 
 ^11 
 
 TTTT 
 ! 
 
 » '1 
 
 ¥ 
 
 iMM: 
 
 
 '.? 
 
 Hi 
 
 ff 
 
 in 
 
 If' 
 
 m 
 
 1- 
 
 it' 
 
 iU-.i- 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 ', ■■ ' i„ .. 1 < 
 
 i'ft- 
 
 
 _-4 — i- 
 
 I'X- 
 
 
 decline of life. Trifling provocations will often 
 throw them into a rage ; but they are easily 
 appeased when in anger, and they never har- 
 bour a revengeful purpose against those, by 
 whom they conceive that they have been injur- 
 ed. They are not brave ; but when they aj)- 
 prehend little danger, they will often, as they 
 say, play the man. They are very deceitful, 
 are exceedingly smooth and polite, and are even 
 gross flatterers to the face of a person, whom 
 they will basely slander, behind his back. They 
 pay little regard to veracity or to honesty. 
 Their word is not to be trusted ; and they 
 are much addicted to pilfering, and will even 
 steal articles of considerable value, when a fa- 
 vourable opportunity offers. A secret they can- 
 not keep. They rarely feel gratitude, though 
 they are often generous. They are obedient, 
 but not faithful servants. By flattering their 
 vanity, of which they have n ot a little, they 
 may be persuaded to undertake the most diffi- 
 cult enterprises, provided their lives are not 
 endangered. Although they are generally una- 
 ble to read, yet they acquire considerable knowl- 
 edge of human nature, and some general infor- 
 mation, in regard to the state of this country. 
 As they leave Canada while they are young, 
 they have but little knowledge of the principles 
 
 
CANADIAN VOYAGERS. 
 
 277 
 
 of the religion, which their Priests profess to fol- 
 low, and before they have been long in the In- 
 dian country, they pay little more attention to 
 the sabbath, or the worsliip of God, or any 
 other Divine institution, than the savages them- 
 selves. 
 
 >? 
 
 • <t 
 
 *" 
 
 ili 
 
 H,4 
 

 XJi. 
 
 C 
 
 ^ 
 
■■»T^;»»* 
 
 
 C^. 
 
 «.•!: fc 
 
 * 
 
 1« • i 
 
 AN 
 
 ii;r'i t 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS 
 
 ^ \^^:' 
 
 
 
 '.f*.' 
 
 LIVING WEST or THE #; 
 
 ROCKY MOUNTAIN. 
 
 
 .•'■■'^«i- ? 
 
 -;fi rli' 
 
 *''l? ' 
 
 4* 
 
 .W%i.:;.S'*. 
 
 il"-^* 
 
4 
 
 it 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^■1 
 
 
 -; 
 
 jk: 
 
 »>*»'i.' 
 
ACCOUNT, &c. 
 
 As the Indians living on the west side of the 
 Rocky Mountain, differ greatly in their language, 
 manners, customs, religion, &;c. from those on the 
 east side, it may be proper to give concisely a 
 separate account of them, and of the country 
 which they inhabit. In doing this, I shall dwell 
 more particularly on those things which are pecu- 
 liar to these people, as I design, in another place, 
 to give a general description of the Indians, which 
 shall have a principal reference, however, to the 
 more numerous tribes on the east side of the 
 Mountain. I shall, I hope, be pardoned, if some 
 repetition shall be found, of things contained in my 
 journal, as it cannot easily be avoided. 
 
 That part of the country, west of the Rocky 
 Mountain, with which I am acquainted, has, ever 
 since the North West Company first made an es- 
 36 
 
 t:v 
 
 H i 
 
282 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 'mM 
 
 
 4 1h:i.h 
 
 r *, 
 
 ;i!LJ: 
 
 Iri 
 
 m 
 t- ft;-. 
 
 
 
 
 If 
 
 r 
 
 tablishment there, which was In 1806, gone by 
 the name of New Caledonia; and may extend 
 from north to south, about five hundred miles, and 
 from east to west, three hundred and fifty or four 
 hundred. The post at Stuart's Lake, is nearly in 
 the centre of it, and lies, as already mentioned in 
 my Journal, in 54° 30' North Latitude, and in 125° 
 West Longitude from Greenwich. In this lar^e 
 extent of country, there are not more than five 
 thousand ludiaub, including men, women and chil- 
 dren. 
 
 New Caledonia is considerably mountainous. 
 Between its elevated parts, however, there arc 
 pretty extensive valleys, along which pass innume- 
 rable small rivers and brooks. It contains a great 
 number of small lakes, two of which are conside- 
 rably large. These are Stuart's Lake, which is 
 about four hundred miles in circumference, and 
 Nate-ote-tain Lake, which is nearly twice as large. 
 I am of the opinion that about one sixth part of 
 New Caledonia, is covered with water. There 
 are but two large rivers. One of these I denom- 
 kiate Fraser'p River, which may be sixty or 
 seventy rods wide. It rises in the Rocky Moun- 
 tain, within a short distance of the source of 
 Peace River ; and is the river which Sir Alex- 
 ander M<=Kenzie followed a considerable distance, 
 when he went to the Pacific Ocean, in 1793, and 
 
 whici 
 
 is no 
 
 ble s! 
 
 edoni 
 
 passii 
 
 ters t 
 
 of Fr 
 
 T 
 
 cleval 
 
 which 
 
 Peace 
 
 Mouni 
 
 are so 
 
 on the 
 
 from 15 
 
 of the 
 
 ' Tl] 
 
 few d{ 
 
 times 
 
 momet 
 
 milder 
 
 in the 
 
 warm, 
 
 cool. 
 
 Snow 
 
 ber, ar 
 
 May. 
 
 ialls U 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS; 
 
 283 
 
 which he took to be the Columbia River ; but it 
 is now known to be several miles north of that no- 
 ble stream. The other large river of New Cal- 
 edonia, rises near Great Bear's Lake ; and after 
 passing through several considerable lakes, it en- 
 ters the Pacific Ocean, several hundred miles north 
 of Fraser's River. 
 
 The mountains of New Caledonia, in point of 
 elevation, are not to be compared with those 
 which we pass through in coming up that part of 
 Peace River, which lies between the Rocky 
 Mountain portage ana Finlay's Branch. There 
 are some, however, which are pretty lofty ; and 
 on the summits of one in particular, which we see 
 from Stuart's Lake, the snow lies during the whole 
 of the year. 
 
 The weather is not severely cold, except for a 
 few days in the winter, when the mercury is some- 
 times as low as 32° below zero, in Faranheit's ther- 
 mometer, ^'he remainder of the season, is much 
 milder than it is on the other side of the mountain, 
 in the same Latitude. The summer is never very 
 warm, in the day time ; and the nights are generally 
 cool. In every month in the year, there are frosts. 
 Snow generally falls about the fifteenth of Novem- 
 ber, and is all dissolved by about the fifteenth of 
 May. About M^Lf jd's Lake the snow sometimes 
 falls to the depth of five feet; and I imagine that 
 
 ■V; 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 ■* 
 
 D !■ 
 
284 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 it is to be attributed to the great depth of the 
 snow, that no large animals of anj kind, except- 
 ing a few solitary ones, are to be met with. 
 
 There are a few Moose ; and the Natives oc- 
 casionally, kill a black bear. Cariboo are also 
 found, at some seasons. Some smaller animals 
 are found, though they are not numerous. They 
 consist of beavers, otters, lynxes or cats, fishers, 
 martins, minks, wolverines, foxes of diflerent kinds, 
 badgers, polecats, hares and a few wolves. The 
 fowls are swans, bustards, geese, cranes, ducks of 
 several kinds, partridges, &c. All the lakes and 
 rivers are well furnished with excellent fish. 
 They are the sturgeon, white-fish, trout, sucker 
 and many of a smaller kind. Salmon, also, visit 
 the streams, in very considerable numbers, in Au- 
 tumn. A small share of industry, therefore, would 
 enable the Natives, at all times, to provide for 
 themselves a sufficient supply of agreeable, whole- 
 some and nutritious food. 
 
 The Natives of New Caledonia, we denomi- 
 nate Carriers ; but they call themselves Ta-cul- 
 lies, which signifies people who go upon water. 
 This name originated from the fact that they 
 generally go from one village to another, in ca- 
 noes. They are of the middle stature, and the 
 men are well proportioned ; but the women are 
 generally short and thick, and their lower limbs 
 
^1 ...^ 
 
 i'..;^;i 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 285 
 
 are disproportionately large. Both sexes are re- 
 markablj negligent and slovenly, in regard to 
 their persons ; and ' ey are filthy in their cooke- 
 ry. Their dispositions are lively and quiet ; and 
 they appear to be happy, or at least contented, in 
 their wretched situation- They are indolent ; but 
 apparently more from habit than by nature ; and 
 probably this trait in their character, originates 
 from the circumstance, that they procure a liveli- 
 hood, with but little labour. Whenever we em- 
 ploy any of them, either to work about the fort 
 or in voyaging, they are sufficiently laborious and 
 active ; and they appear to be pleased, when we 
 thus furnish them with employment. They are 
 not in the habit of stealing articles of great val- 
 ue ; but they are the sliest pilferers, perhaps, 
 upon the face of the earth. They will not only 
 pilfer from us, but, when favourable opportunities 
 offer, they are guilty of the same low vice among 
 their friends and relations. They are remarka- 
 bly fond of the white people. They seldom be- 
 gin a quarrel with any of us, though they are nat- 
 urally brave. When any of our people, however, 
 treat them ill, they defend themselves with cour- 
 age, and with considerable dexterity ; and some of 
 them will fight a tolerable Canadian battle. 
 
 Their language is very similar to that of the 
 Chipewyans, and has a great affinity to the tonofues, 
 
 W* '■■■ ^ 
 
 f'iiti', 
 
 '■ I 
 
 "Sf ' 
 
 
X 
 
 h^ 
 
 286 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 spoken by the Beaver Indians and the Sicaunies. 
 Between all the different villages of the Carriers, 
 there prevails a difference of dialect, to such an 
 extent, that they often give different names to the 
 most common utensils. Every village has its par- 
 ticular name, and its inhabitants are called after 
 the name of the village, in the same manner as 
 people in the civilized world receive a name, from 
 the city or country which they inhabit. 
 
 Their clothing consists of a covering made of 
 the skins of the beaver, badger, muskrat, cat or 
 hare. The last they cut mto strips, about one 
 inch broad, and then weave or lace them togeth- 
 er, until they become of a sufficient size to cover 
 their bodies, and to reach to their knees. This 
 garment they put over their shoulders, and 
 tie about their waists. Instead of the above 
 named skins, when the^ can obtain them from 
 us, they greatly prefer, and make use of blank- 
 ets, capots, or Canadian coats, cloth or moose 
 and red deer skin. They seldom use either 
 leggins or shoes, in the summer. At this sea- 
 son the men often go naked, without any thing 
 to cover even that part of the body which 
 civilized, and the most, even of savage people, think 
 it necessary *o conceal. Indeed they manifest as 
 little sense of shame in regard to this subject, as 
 the very brute creation. The women, however, 
 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 287 
 
 in addition to the robe of beaver or dressed moose 
 skins, wear an apron, twelve or eighteen inches 
 broad, which reaches nearly down to their knees. 
 These aprons are made of a piece of deer skin, or 
 of salmon skins, sewed together. Of the skin of 
 this fish, they sometimes make leggins, shoes, 
 bags, &;c. but they are not durable ; and therefore 
 they prefer deer skins and cloth, which are more 
 pliable and soft. The roughness of salmon skins, 
 renders them particularly unpleasant for aprons. 
 
 A few of the male Carriers recently make use 
 of the breech-cloth, made of cloth which they pro- 
 cure from us ; but as evidence that no great sense 
 of delicacy has induced them to wear it, you will 
 see it one day at its proper place, the next, prob- 
 ably, about their heads, and the third around their 
 necks ; and so on, repeatedly shifted from one 
 place to another. 
 
 Both sexes perforata their noses ; and from 
 them, the men often suspend an ornament, consist- 
 ing of a piece of an oyster shell, or a small piece 
 K)^ brass or copper. The women, particularly 
 those who are young, run a wooden pin through 
 their noses, upon each end of which they fix a 
 kind of shell bead, which is about an inch and ao 
 half long, and nearly the size of the stem of a 
 common clay pipe. These beadr^, they obtain 
 from their neighbours, the At-e-n&s, who purchase 
 
 k" ■ 
 
 'i -II 
 
288 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 |ii'^^.:|i,i";^i 
 
 them from another tribe, that is said to take them 
 on the sea shore, where they are reported to be 
 found in plenty. 
 
 All the Indians in this part of the country, are 
 remarkably fond of these beads ; and in their 
 dealings with each other, they constitute a kind of 
 circulating medium, like the money of civilized 
 countries. Twenty of these beads, they consider 
 as equal in value to a beaver's skin. The elderly 
 people neglect to ornament their heads, in thf 
 same manner as they do the rcBt of their persons, 
 and g-enerally wear their hair short. But the 
 younger people of both sexes, who feel more so- 
 licitous to make themselves agreeable to each oth- 
 er, wash and paint their faces, and let their hair 
 grow long. The paint which they make use of, 
 consists of vermilion, which they occasionally ob- 
 tain from us ; or more commonly, of a red stone, 
 pounded fine, of which there are two kinds. The 
 powder of one kind of these stones, mixed with 
 grease, and rubbed upon their faces, gives them 
 a glittering appearance. «lnt ♦ 
 
 The young women and girls wear a parcel of 
 European beads, strung together, and tied to a 
 lock of hair, directly behind each ear. The men 
 have a sort of collar of the shell beads already 
 mentioned, which thoy wind about their heads, or 
 throw around their necks. In the summer season, 
 
 Lj 
 
ACCOUNt OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 289 
 
 ,f ■ I 
 
 hoih sexes bathe often ; and this is the only time, 
 when the married people wash themselves. One 
 of their customs is sufficient to evince their ex- 
 treme filthiness, and that is, whenever they blow 
 their noses^ they rub the mucus between both 
 hands, until they become dry. 
 
 Among the Carriers, it is customary for the 
 girls, from the age of eight to eleven years, to 
 wear a kind of veil or fringe over their eyes, made 
 either of strung beads, or of narrow strips of deer 
 skin, garnished with porcupine quills. While of 
 this age, they are not allowed to eat any thing, 
 excepting the driest food ; and especially they 
 may not eat the head of any animal. If they 
 should, their relations, as they imagine, would 
 soon languish and die. The women, also, during 
 their pregnancy, and for some time after they are 
 delivered, are restricted to the same kind of food. 
 
 The lads, as soon as they come to the age of 
 puberty, tie cords, wound with swan's down^ 
 around each leg, a little below the knee, which 
 they wear during one year, and then, they arc 
 considered as men. 
 
 The Carriers are unusually talkative ; and 
 when fifteen or twenty of them get into a house, 
 they make an intolerable noise. Men, women and 
 children, keep their tongues constantly in motion; 
 and in controversy, he who has the strongest, and 
 37 
 
 ¥ m 
 
 i . 
 
290 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 m 
 
 clearest voice, is of course heard the most easily, 
 and, consequently, succeed? best in his argument. 
 They take great delight, also, in singing, or hum- 
 ming, or whistling a dull air. In short, whether 
 at home or abroad, they can hardly be contented 
 with their mouths shut. It was a long time be- 
 fore we could keep them still, when they came to 
 our Ibrts. And even yet, when they visit us, 
 which is almost every day, during the whole year, 
 Miey will often, inadvertently, break out into a 
 song. But as soon as we check them, or they re- 
 collect of themselves what they arc about, they 
 stop short ; for they are desirous of pleasing. 
 The above trait in their character, certainly evin- 
 ces much contentment with their condition, and 
 cheerfulness of spirit. 
 
 Both sexes, of almost every age, are much ad- 
 dicted to play, or rather gambling. They pass 
 the greater part of their iirae, especially in the 
 winter season, and both days and nights, in some 
 kind of game ; and the men will often loose the 
 last rag of clothes, which they have about them. 
 But so far from being dejected by such ill fortune, 
 they often appear to be proud of having lost their 
 all ; and will even boastingly say, that they are as 
 L^ked as a dog, having not a rag with which to 
 cover themselves. Should they, in such circum- 
 stances, meet with a friend, who shoiild lend them 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 291 
 
 something to wrap around thei/ bodies, it is highly 
 probable, that thej would immediately go and 
 play away the borrowed garment. Or, if the bor- 
 rower belonged to another village, he would be 
 likely to run off with it, and the owner would ne- 
 ver hear of him afterward; for I never knew a 
 Carrier to be grateful for a favour bestowed upon 
 him. At play, they often loose a part of a gar- 
 ment, as the sleeves of a coat, which some of 
 them now purchase from us, a whole, or the half 
 of a leggin, which they will tear off, and deliver 
 to the winner. They have been known to cut off 
 a foot or more of their guns, when lost at play ; 
 for, like more gentlemanly gamblers, they consider 
 such debts, as debts of honour. 
 
 The Carriers are not so ingenious as their 
 neighbours, the Nate-ote-tains and At-e-nas. The 
 men, however, make canoes, which are clumsily 
 wrought, of the aspin tree, as well as of the bark 
 of the spruce fir. The former, will carry from 
 half a ton to a ton and an half burthen, while the 
 latter, will carry from one to four grown persons. 
 The women make excellent nets, of the inner 
 bark of the willow tree, ajid of nettles, which an- 
 swer better for taking small fish, than any which 
 we obtain from Canada, made of twine or thread. 
 
 The Carriers, in common witli the other In- 
 dian tribes, before their country was visited by 
 
 •4 ' \ . 
 
 I' I 
 
292 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 If 'I I] 
 
 >4 
 
 Sill 
 
 
 lljf 'iM 
 
 white people, made use of stones, instead of axes, 
 and of bones, for knives ; and with these, they 
 constructed wooden dishes, and other vessels of 
 the rind of the birch and pine trees, &c. Some 
 of these vessels were used to cook their victuals 
 in, and many of these people still make use of them ; 
 for they are too poor to purchase brass or copper 
 kettles from us. They have, also, other vessels, 
 which are manufactured of the small roots or 
 fibers of the cedar or pine tree, closely laced to- 
 gether, which serve them as buckets to put water 
 in. 1 have seen one at Fraser's Lake, made of 
 the same materials, that would hold sixty or seven- 
 ty gallons, which they make use of when a feast is 
 given to all the people of the village. All the 
 vessels fabricated of roots, as well as the most of 
 their bows and arrows, they obtain from their 
 neighbours, above mentioned. 
 
 The Carriers are remarkably fond of their 
 wives, and a few of them have three or four; but 
 polygamy is not general among them. The men 
 do the most of the drudgery about the house, 
 sjich as cutting and drawing fire wood, and 
 bringing water. In the winter months, they drink 
 but little water ; but to quench their thirst, they 
 eat half melted snow, which they generally keep 
 on the top of a stick, stuck into the ground, before 
 the fire. > 
 
ACCOimT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 293 
 
 As the Carriers are fond of their wives, they 
 are, as naturally might be supposed, very jealous of 
 them ; but to their daughters, they allow every 
 liberty, for the purpose, as they say, of keeping 
 the young men from intercourse with the married 
 women. As the young women may thus bestow 
 their favours on whom, and as often as they 
 please, without the least censure from their pa- 
 rents, or reproach to their character, it might 
 naturally be expected that they would be, as 
 I am informed they actually are, very free with 
 their persons. — In the following particular, the 
 Carriers differ from all the other Indian tribes, 
 with whom I have been acquainted. Among oth- 
 er tribes, the father or mother in law, will never, 
 excepting when drunk, speak to a son or daughter 
 in law ; but the Carriers make no distinction, in 
 this respect. 
 
 The Carriers reside a part of the year in vil- 
 lages, built at convenient places for taking and 
 "drying salmon, as they come up the rivers. These 
 fish they take in abundance, with little labour; 
 and they constitute their principal food, during 
 the whole year. They are not very unpalatab'o 
 when eaten alone ; but with vegetables, they ^re- 
 pleasant food. The Natives, however, are too 
 slothful to raise vegetables, and use none, except- 
 ing a few whJch they obtain from us. 
 
 I 
 
294 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INJJIANS. 
 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 I, 
 
 Toward the middle of April, and sometimes 
 sooner '»ey leave their villages, to go and pass 
 about t\ cionths at the small lakes, from which, 
 at that season, they take white fish, trout, carp, 
 &c. in considerable numbers. But when these be- 
 gin to fail, they return to their villages, and sub- 
 sist on the small fish, which they dried when at 
 the lakes, or on salmon, should they have been so 
 provident as to have kept any until that late sea- 
 son ; or they eat herbs, the inner bark or sap of 
 the cypress tree, berries. &;c. At this season, few 
 fish of any kind, are to be taken out of the lakes 
 or rivers of New Caledonia. In this manner the 
 Natives barely subsist, until about the middle 
 of August, when salmon again begin to make 
 their appearance, in all the rivers of any consid- 
 erable magnitude ; and they have them at most 
 of their villages in plenty, until the latter end 
 of September, or the beginning of October. For 
 about a month, they come up in crowds ; and 
 the noses of some of them are either worn or 
 rotten off, and the eyes of others have perished 
 in their heads ; and yet, in this maimed condition, 
 they are surprisingly alert, in coming up the rap- 
 ids. These maimed fishes are generally at the 
 head of large bands, on account of which, the 
 Natives call them Mi-u-ties, or Chiefs. The In- 
 dians say that they have suffered these disaf*- 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 295 
 
 tors, by falling back among the stones, when 
 coming up difficult places in the rapids which 
 they pass. 
 
 The Carriers take salmon in the following 
 manner. All the Indians of the village assist in 
 making a dam across the river, in which they oc- 
 casionally leave places, to insert their baskets or 
 nets of wicker work. These baskets are gene- 
 rally from fifteen to eighteen feet in length, and 
 from twelve to fifteen feet in circumference. The 
 end at which the salmon enter, is made with 
 twigs, in the form of the entrance of a wire mouse 
 trap. When four or five hundred salmon have 
 entered this basket,- they either take it to the 
 shore to empty out the iish; or they take them 
 out at a door in the top, and transport them to 
 the shore in their large wooden canoes, which are 
 convenient for this purpose. When the salmon 
 are thrown upon the beach, the women take out 
 their entrails, and hang them by their tails on 
 poles, in the open air. After remaining in this 
 situation for a day or two, they take them down 
 and cut them thinner, and then leave them to 
 hang for about a month in the open air, when 
 they will have become entirely dry. They are 
 then put into their store houses, which are built 
 on four posts, about ten (eet from the ground, 
 to prevent animals from destroying them j and 
 
 J ' 
 
 
 '± 
 
 /■ Ml 
 
296 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 .. ^' ,. 
 
 
 provided they are preserved dry, they will re- 
 main good for several years. 
 
 The Carriers take beavers in nets, made ot 
 thongs of cariboo skins, or in baskets made of 
 young cypress stadles ; and sometimes they shoot 
 them with bows and arrows, or guns, or take 
 them in steel traps, which we sell to thero-, and 
 of which they begin to understand the value. 
 Cats, martins, fishers, foxes, minks, &c. they take 
 in a kind of spring trap, which consists of a large 
 piece of wood, which these animals, by nibbling 
 at the bait, cause to fall upon and crush them. 
 Bears,, swans and hares they generally take in 
 snares ; and the cat, also, they sometimes take 
 in this manner. They litint the beaver and bear, 
 more for the sake of their flesh, than to obtain the 
 skins ; for it is with the meat of these animals 
 that they make their feasts, in remembrance of 
 their deceased relatives. 
 
 At such festivals, they cut up as many dressed 
 moose and red deer skins as they can well procure, 
 into slips, about eighteen inches long, and twelve 
 inches broad, and distribute them among their 
 friends and relatives. And they firmly believe, 
 that these ceremonies must be performed, before 
 their departed relative can be at rest, in the 
 place whither he has gone, which they think to 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 297 
 
 be the interiour of the earth, where they expect 
 that they shall all at length be happy. 
 
 The Carriers have little that can be denom- 
 inated civil government, in the regulation of their 
 concerns. There are some persons among them, 
 who are called Mi-u-ties or Chiefs, and for whom 
 they appear to have a little more respect than 
 for the others ; but these chiefs have not much 
 authority or influence over the rest of the com- 
 munity. Any one is dubbed a Mi-u-ty, who is 
 able and willing, occasionally, to provide a feast, 
 for the people of his village. An Indian, howev- 
 er, who has killed another, or been guilty of 
 some other bad action, finds the house or tent of 
 the chief a safe retreat, so long as he is allowed 
 to remain there. But as soon as he leaves it, 
 the Chief can afford the criminal no more protec- 
 tion, than any other person of ihe village can, un- 
 less he lets him have one of his garments. This 
 garment of the Chief, will protect a malefactor 
 from harm, while he wears it ; for no person 
 would attack him, while clothed with this safe 
 guard, sooner than he would attack the chief 
 himself; and if he should, the chief would re- 
 venge the insult, in the same manner as if it 
 were offered directly to himself. The revenge 
 which the Chief, in this case, would take, would 
 be to destroy the life of the offending person, or 
 38 
 
 
 
 %mM 
 
■ \ \-' 
 
 298 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIAN^. 
 
 it' 
 
 * ''''^ I'll, 
 
 that of some of his near relations, or the life of 
 one of the same tribe, if he should happen to 
 he a stranger. 
 
 When two or more persons disagree at play, 
 as IS frequently the case, or contend on any 
 other account, the chief, or oome respectable 
 and elderly man, will step in between the two 
 wranglers, and settle the dispute, generally with- 
 out their coming to blows. 
 
 The people of every village have a cert .in 
 extent of country, which they consider iheii own, 
 and in which they may hunt and fish ; but they 
 may not transcend these bounds, without pur- 
 chasing the privilege of those who claim the 
 land. Mountains and rivers serve them as boun- 
 daries, and they are not often broken over. 
 
 The people of one village do not often visit 
 those of another, as there are generally misun- 
 derstandings existing between them, which are 
 occasioned by murders, and at times by the hunt- 
 ing of the people of one village, in a clandestine 
 manner, on the territories of their neighbours. 
 By one cause or another, they are kept in a per- 
 petual broil. They say however, that murders 
 do not occur so frequently among them as they 
 did before they wer** visited by the white people. 
 *• The Carriers arc the most ignorant people 
 among whom I have ever been. They appear to 
 
 ■ ;■{» 
 

 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 299 
 
 have only a very confused and limited idea of the 
 existence of a Supremo Being, the maker and 
 governour of the world, or of the devil or any 
 evil spirit ; and they, therefore, neither worship 
 the former nor fear the latter. But they believe, 
 as it has been already observed, in the immortal- 
 ity of the soul, and think when it leaves its pres- 
 ent body, it goes into the bowels of the earth, 
 where, they suppose it will be more happy 
 than when an inhabitant of its surface. But 
 they seem to have no idea of future rewards or 
 punishments, in consequence of any thing which 
 they may have done, while resident on earth. 
 And whether the soul will be furnished with 
 another body, when it leaves that which it ani- 
 mated on earth, they say they cannot tell, it being, 
 as they add, beyond their comprehension. They 
 firmly believe, however, that a departed soul can, 
 if it pleases, come back to the earth, in a hu- 
 man shape or body, in order to see his friends, 
 who are still alive. Therefore, as they are about 
 to set fire to the pile of wood, on which a corpse 
 is laid, a relation of the deceased person stands 
 at his feet, and asks him if he will ever come 
 back among them. Then the priest or magician, 
 with a grave countenance, stands at the head of 
 the corpse, and locks through both his hands on 
 its naked breast, and then raises them toward 
 
 ii I 
 
 t-Mli 
 
 
300 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 II li 
 
 heaven, and blows through them, as they say, the 
 soul of the deceased, that it may go and find, and 
 enter into a relative. Or, if any relative, is pres- 
 ent, the priest will hold his hands on the head 
 of this person, and blow through them, that the 
 spirit of the deceased may enter into him or 
 her ; and then, as they affirm, the first child 
 which this person has, will possess the soul of 
 the deceased person. 
 
 . When the Carriers are severely sick, they 
 often think that they shall not recover, unless 
 they divulge to a priest or magician, every crime 
 which they may have committed, which has 
 hitherto been kept secret. In such a case, they 
 will make a full confession, and then they ex- 
 pect that their lives will be spared, for a time 
 longer. But should they keep back a single 
 crime, they as fully believe that they shall suf- 
 fer almost instant death. The crimes which 
 they most frequently confess, discover something 
 of their moral character, and therefore deserve 
 to be mentioned. A man will often acknowl- 
 edge that he has had a criminal and incestuous 
 connexion with his own daughter or sister, or a 
 criminal intercourse with a bitch ! and a woman 
 will confess, that she has had the same infamous 
 connexion with her own relations, or with a dog ! 
 Murder is not considered by the Carriers as a 
 
 ymx 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 301 
 
 ners as a 
 
 crime of great magnitude ; and, therefore, it 
 makes no part of their acknowledgements, in 
 their confessions to the priests or magicians. If 
 a murder be committed on a person belonging to 
 a tribe with whom they are at enmity, they re- 
 gard it as a brave and noble action. Should one 
 Indian kill another, belonging to the same village 
 w^ith himself, the murderer is considered as a per- 
 son void of sense ; and he must quit his village 
 and remain away, until he can pay the relations 
 of the deceased for the murder ; and even after 
 this has been done, it often occasions quarrels, be- 
 tween the parties. 
 
 The Carriers are so very credulous, and have 
 so exalted an opinion of us, thai they firmly believe, 
 though I have often assured them of the contra- 
 ry, that any of the Traders or Chiefs, as they call 
 us, can, at pleasure, make it fair or foul weather. 
 And even yet when they are preparing to set out 
 on an excursion, they will come and oiTer to pay 
 us, provided we will make or allow it to be fair 
 weather, during their absence from their homes. 
 They often inquire of us whether salmon, that 
 year, will be in plenty in their rivers. They also 
 think, that by merely looking into our books, wf 
 can cause a sick person to recover, let the distance 
 which he may be from us be ever so great. In 
 short, they look upon those who can read and write, 
 
 
 ^1 
 
302 
 
 ACCOUiNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 as a kind of supernatural beings, who know all tlia( 
 is past, and who can see into futurity. 
 
 For a considerable time after we had been 
 among them, they were fully of the opinion, that 
 the white people had neither fathers nor moth- 
 ers ; but came into the world in a supernatural 
 way, or were placed on ihe earth by the sun or 
 moon. 
 
 As a further specimen of their limited concep- 
 tions, they now firmly believe that a watch is the 
 heart of the sun, because it is ever in motion, as 
 they say, like that great body of light. They add 
 further, that unless a watch and the sun were 
 nearly related, it would be impossible for the 
 watch, considering the distance which there is be- 
 tween them, to point out so precisely the minute 
 when the sun is to make its appearance and to 
 leave us. In short, they say that the one must 
 know perfectly well what the other is about, and 
 that there must be some connexion between them. 
 as between the members of the human body. 
 
 The Carriers give the following account of the 
 tradition, which they believe, respecting the form- 
 ation of the earth, and the general destruction of 
 mankind, in an early period of the world. Water 
 at first overspread the face of the world, which is 
 a plain surface. At the top of the water, a musk- 
 rat was swimming about, in different directions.. 
 
 
 w 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 303 
 
 At length he concluded to dive to the bottom, to 
 see what he could jfind, on which to subsist ; but 
 he found nothing but mud, a little of which he 
 brought in his mouth, and placed it on the surface 
 of the water, where it remained. He then went 
 for more mud, and placed it with that already 
 brought up ; and thus he continued his o-perations, 
 until he had formed a considerable hillock. This 
 land increased by degrees, until it overspread a 
 large part of the world, which assumed at length 
 its present form. The earth, in process of time, 
 became peopled in every part, and remained in 
 this condition for many years. Afterwards a fire 
 run over it all, and destroyed every human being, 
 excepting one man and one woman. They saved 
 themselves by going into a deep cave, in a large 
 mountain, where they remained for several days, 
 until the fire was extinguished. They then came 
 forth from their hiding place ; and from these 
 two persons, the whole earth has been peopled. 
 Besides the feasts, made for their dead, which 
 have been described in my Journal, the Carriers 
 give others, merely to entertain their guests, who 
 are frequently all the people of a village, as well as 
 a few who belong to a neighbouring village. The 
 following ceremonies attend such festivals. The 
 person who makes the entertainment, who is al- 
 ways a Chief, boils or roasts several whole beav- 
 
 ' i 
 
 % . 1 
 
 1 
 
304 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDlANb. 
 
 ers : and as soon as his quests are seated around 
 
 t5 
 
 »«l 
 
 
 
 [^"tm. 
 
 
 a tire, which is in the centre of his house, he takes 
 up a whole beaver, and with a raised voice, re- 
 lates how and vviiere he killed it, that all present 
 may know that it came from his own land. At- 
 ter that necessary explanation is over, he steps 
 forward, and presents the tail end to the most re- 
 spectable person of the house, and stands holding 
 the animal with both hands until this person has 
 eaten what he chooses. The chief then passes 
 on with his beaver to the second person, who eats 
 as the first had done ; and then to a third ; and 
 so on, until he has presented it to the whole circle, 
 should any part now remain, it is laid down near 
 the centre of the house ; and another whole bea- 
 ver is taken up, which is served round in the 
 same manner as the first. And thus the chief 
 continues to do, until his guests have tasted of 
 every beaver, which he had prepared for the feast. 
 The remaining fragments of the beavers, are now 
 cut up into smaller pieces, and distributed among 
 the women and children, or put into dishes, which 
 the men have before them, and which they al- 
 ways bring with them, when they attend upon a 
 feast. The women then come in with large dish- 
 es full of berries, and each puts a ladle full into 
 every dish of the men. When they have eaten 
 what they choose of the berries, (for the Indians 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 305 
 
 neve- urge their guests to eat more than they 
 please) both men and women join, in singing sev- 
 eral songs. The airs of many of these songs, 
 which have been composed and set to musick, by 
 their poets, expressly for the occasion, greatly 
 resemble those which I have heard sung, in Ro*- 
 man Catholic churches. After singing is conclud- 
 ed, each guest rises, with his dish and whatever 
 it contains, and returns to his own dwelling, and 
 thus the festival ends. At these feasts, there are 
 frequently Indians, who will drink at least a 
 quart of melted bear's oil, merely to show how 
 much they can drink. 
 
 At some of their festivals, the men and women 
 join in a dance. Their musick on these occasions, 
 consists of the singing of one person or more, ac- 
 companied by the shaking of the she-she-qui, 
 which is, ordinarily, a covered dish, with a han- 
 dle ; but sometimes it is curiously made in the 
 form of a bird, and withjn it, are either gravel 
 stones or shot. Others beat on a drum, with but 
 one head ; and these are all the musical instru- 
 ments, if they can with propriety be so denominat- 
 ed, which I have ever seen among them. When 
 they dance, they paint their faces, and put swan's 
 down on their heads, and while they are dancing, 
 others are almost continually blowing more through 
 both their hands, on the dancers. They have not 
 39 
 
 •. I' 
 
 1 
 
306 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 }^ 
 
 1 f ' , 
 
 J 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 many different kinds of dancing ; but they have 
 a great variety of songs, the airs of which are 
 pleasant to the ear when heard at some distance 
 from the singers, who generally have strong voic- 
 es. All Indians have accurate ears ; and, there- 
 fore, they keep exact *^me when they dance or 
 
 sing. 
 
 The Carriers are almost entirely ignorant of 
 medicine, not having any knowledge of the virtue 
 which is found in roots and herbs, when adminis- 
 tered to the sick. When one of them is sick, they 
 call in the priest or doctor, for the same person 
 discharges the functions of both ; and he is joined 
 by several other persons in singing a very mel- 
 ancholy air, over the sick person, which they 
 think serves greatly to mitigate his pain, and often 
 restores him to perfect health. Before the doc- 
 tor will afford his assistance, in doing which he 
 makes many jestures, and goes through much cer- 
 emony, he must receive a present. But should 
 his patient die under his care, he must restore to 
 the relations of the deceased, the present which 
 he had received. The Carriers are the only Indi- 
 ans with whom I have been acquainted, who 
 make no use of roots and herbs, and the bark of 
 certain trees, with the sick. They, however, 
 place great confidence in our medicines. 
 
 During the winter months many of the Car- 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 307 
 
 riers make their dwellings in the earth, in the 
 following manner. They dig a hole in the ground 
 to the depth of about two feet, from the oppo- 
 site sides of which, they erect two considera- 
 ble sticks, to support a ridge-pole. They then 
 lay poles from the margin of the hole to the 
 ridge-pole, until they have completely enclosed 
 the dwelling, excepting a hole which is left near 
 the top, which serves the double purpose of a 
 door by which they enter, and leave the hut, 
 upon an upright post, in which, notches arc cut ; 
 and an opening for the smoke to pass off. The 
 poles are made tight, by stopping the intersti- 
 ces with hay, or by covering them with bark ; 
 and dirt is then thrown over them, to a consid- 
 erable thickness. These huts are far from be- 
 ing healthy; but they are commodious for peo- 
 ple who are clad as poorly, as arc most of the 
 Carriers. 
 
 The Indians on the west side of the Rocky 
 Mountain, erect buildings, in which they depobit 
 the ashes and bones of their dead. The side 
 posts of these structures, are about six feet high, 
 a roof, covered with bark, is erected upon these 
 posts, in the form of the roofs of houses in the civi- 
 lized part of the world ; and around theirsides, are 
 broad boards, made by splitting trees, which they 
 hew. and then smooth over with a crooked krife. 
 
 "^WM 
 
308 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 I 
 
 
 -». t »j* i 
 
 On these boards, which are about an inch thick, 
 they paint images to represent the sun, moon, 
 stars and dilTerent kinds of animals. Within these 
 buildings, the remains of the dead are contained 
 
 y in boxes, of different dimensions, which in some in- 
 stances, stand on the top of one upright post, and 
 in other cases, are supported by four. The paints 
 which they use, in describing the figures on these 
 buildings, consist of black and red stones, which 
 they grind fine, and of a yellow and a red earth. 
 These substances, they mix with glue, which they 
 obtain by boiling the feet of the buffaloc, or from 
 the inside of sturgeon, where these fish are in 
 plenty. They put on their paints with a brush, 
 m:.de of the hair which they take from the leg 
 of the moose. 
 
 Among the Carriers, there are some conjurors, 
 who whenever they please, will vomit blood, or 
 swallow a small toad, alive. By doing the latter, 
 however, they are made sick, for three or four 
 days; and yet they are ever ready to do it, for a 
 mere trifling recompense. , 
 
 Among the Indians who inhabit New Caledo- 
 
 ' nia, the Sicaunies deserve to be mentioned. They 
 are a small part of a tribe who, but a few years 
 since, came from the east side of the Rocky Moun- 
 tain. They now bring the produce of their hunts 
 to McLeod's Lake. The winter months, however, 
 
 
'*> 
 
 . I- 
 
 "'Ay 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 309 
 
 a greater part of them pass among their relations, 
 on the east side of the Mountain, where they sub- 
 sist on buffaloe, moose and red deer. Notwith- 
 standing they are tolerable hunters, they would 
 not be able to kill a sufficiency of beavers to serve 
 themselves and families, during the winter, where 
 the snow is so deep, as it generally is in New Cal- 
 edonia. 
 
 The people who are now called Si-cau-nies, I 
 suspect, at no distant period, belonged to the tribe, 
 called Beaver Indians, who inhabit the lower part 
 of Peace River ; for they differ but little from 
 them in dialect, manners, customs, &;c. Some 
 misunderstanding between the Sicaunies and the 
 rest of the tribe to which they formerly belong- 
 ed, probably drove them from place to place, up 
 Peace River, until they were, at length, obliged 
 to cross the Rocky Mountain. The Sicaunies, are 
 more brave, and better armed than the Carriers, 
 who have, as yet, but few fire arms; and it is 
 probable that the former will make encroach- 
 ments upon the latter. The Sicaunies, however, 
 are a wretched people ; for they suffer greatly 
 for the want of food, during nearly one fourth 
 part of the year, when they barely support life, 
 by means of a few unpalatable roots. Yet they 
 are remarkably fond of the country, where they 
 now are; and frequently intermarry with the Car- 
 
 ■ ^ h : i 
 
 
 Sfe 
 
 :?* . i 
 
 y.^, \\ 
 
 ■'ii 
 
 ' '«-^Lil 
 
310 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 riers, and pass a part of their time with them, at 
 their villages. They have, also, adopted many of 
 the customs of the Carriers, one of which is, to 
 burn their dead ; whereas, while they resided 
 on the other side of the Mountain, they were ac- 
 customed to bury them in the earth. The 
 Sicaunies are not an ingenious people ; and I 
 know of nothing which they manufacture, ex- 
 cepting a few ill wrought bows and arrows, wood- 
 en dishes, &c. 
 
 There is a tribe of Indians not far from the 
 Columbia River, who are called Flat-Heads. By 
 fixing boards upon the heads of their children, they 
 compress them in such a mariner as to cause them 
 to assume the form of a wedge. Another tribe 
 in New Caledonia, denominated Nate-ote-tains, 
 pierce a hole through the under lips of their 
 daughters, into which they insert a piece of wootl, 
 in the shape of the wheel of a pulley ; and as the 
 girls grow up, this wheel is enlarged, so that a 
 woman of thirty years of age, will have one near- 
 ly as large as a dollar. This they consider, adds 
 much to their beauty ; but these wheels are cer- 
 tainly very inconvenient, and to us, they appear 
 very uncouth and disagreeable. 
 
M 
 
 X 
 
 A CnSNERAL 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS 
 
 ON THE EAST SIDE OP TB& 
 
 
 ROCKY MOUNTAIN. 
 
 #- 
 
 ~^J^il:£de^ 
 
:^ M 
 
 « i ti 
 
 ill 
 
 hi 
 
 I! ' '# . 
 
 It 
 
> *■■' *''"*n ■' 
 
 •.;4'' 
 
 / »■ 
 
 ACCOUNT, &c. 
 
 I i^- 
 
 I have been acquainted with fifteen different 
 tribes of Indians, which are the Sauteux, Crees, 
 Assiniboins, Rapid Indians, Black feet Indians, 
 Blood Indians, Sursees,Cautonies,Mu9kagoes,Chip- 
 eways, Beaver Indians, Sicaunies, Tel-cullies, Ate* 
 n^s and Nate-ote-tains. The parts of the country, 
 which they severally inhabit, have already been no- 
 ticed, in my Journal. 
 
 The tribes that are the most enlightened, and 
 that have advanced the farthest toward a state 
 of civilization, are the Sauteux or Chipeways, the 
 Muskagoes and the Crec", or Knisteneux, as they 
 have been sometimes denominated. These tribes 
 have a greater knowledge than the other Indians^ 
 of the medicinal qualitiee of the bark of trees, and 
 
Ml 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 *i^ 
 
 I J V it \ij Si« » 
 
 % ' r. 
 
 I' ) 
 
 r, tff" 
 
 
 of herbs, roots, &c. and their medical skill, eiiEibics 
 them heavily to tax the other tribes. Indeed, 
 their medicines, with their skill iti regard to their 
 application, form considerable articles of com- 
 merce with their neighbours. Sometimes, for a 
 handsome compensation, they will instruct a per- 
 son where to procure ingredients, and how to pre- 
 pare them as medicines, to be used in particular 
 cases. It is very probable, however, that the In- 
 dian doctors, like some apothecaries in the civiliz- 
 ed world, sell some medicines, of little or no value. 
 It is also well known to those acquainted with 
 the Indians, that their physicians frequently effect 
 cures with their roots, herbs, &lc. in cases, which 
 would baffle the skill and the drugs, of a scientifick 
 physician. ;; it < . ,-, 
 
 The white people have been among the above 
 mentioned tribes, for about one hundred and fifty 
 years. To this circumstance it is probably to be 
 attributed, that the knowledge of these Indians is 
 more extensive, than that of the other tribes. 
 But I very much question whether they have im- 
 proved in their character or condition, by their 
 acquaintance with civilized people. In their sav- 
 age state, they were contented with the mere 
 necessaries of life, which they could procure, with 
 considerable ease ; but now they have many 
 artificial wants, created by the luxuries which we 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 :h5 
 
 have introduced among them ; and as they find it 
 difficult to obtain these luxuries, they have be- 
 come, to a degree, discontented with their condi- 
 tion, and practise fraud in their dealings. A half 
 civihzed Indian is more savage, than one in his orig- 
 inal state. The latter has some sense of honour, 
 while the former has none. I have always expe- 
 rienced the greatest hospitality and kindness 
 among those Indians, who have had the least in- 
 tercourse with white people. They readily dis- 
 cover and adopt our evil practices ; but they are 
 not as quick to discern, and as ready to follow 
 the few good examples, which we set before 
 them. 
 
 The Indians in general, are subject to few dis- 
 eases. The venereal complaint is common to all 
 the tribes of the north ; many persons among them, 
 die. of a consumption ; fevers, also, frequently at- 
 tack them ; and they are likewise troubled with 
 pains in their heads, breasts and joints. Many of 
 them, and especially the women, are subject to 
 fits. For a relief, in nearly all of their diseases, 
 they resort to their grand remedy, sweating. 
 
 There is no material difference in the size, 
 features and complexion of the different tribes, 
 with whom I have been acquainted. The Sau- 
 teux, Crees and Assiniboins, together with the 
 other Indians who inhabii the prairies, arc, how- 
 
 y/1 
 
 '■'iJ 
 
 : J 
 
 ■ ! 
 
 • 
 
 t 
 
 * 
 
 I;-. 
 
316 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 ^« 
 
 ''• 
 
 ( I 
 
 ;'■•; 
 
 ■ i'll'-' 
 
 ,1 ^ 
 
 
 ever, the fairest and most cleanly. The Sau- 
 teux women differ from all others, by turning 
 their toes very much inwards, in walking. The 
 Assiniboins, of both sexes, are the best made, and 
 walk the most erect, of any tribe that I have 
 ever seen. Fools and disfigured persons, are sel- 
 dom to be met with among the Indians ; the rea- 
 son of which, I believe to be, that their mothers 
 put them to death as soon as they discover their 
 unhnppy condition. 
 
 All Indian children, when young, are laced in 
 a kind of bag. This bag is made of a piece of 
 leather, about two feet square, by drawing a string, 
 inserted in the lower end, and lacing the two 
 sides together. Some moss is placed in the bot- 
 tom of this bag ; the child is then laid into it, and moss 
 is inserted between its legs. The bag is then laced 
 the fore side of the child as high as its neck* This 
 bag is laid upon a board, to which it is fastened by 
 means of a strip of leather, passing several times 
 round both the board and the bag. At the top of 
 this board, a bow passes round from one side to the 
 other, perpendicular to its surface, on which the In- 
 dians fasten small bells, which they obtain from us, 
 or the claws of animals, by way of ornament, and 
 which rattle, when the child is carried by its 
 mother, suspended from her shoulders, by 
 means of a cord or belt fastened to the boardr 
 
 mu 
 
w 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 317 
 
 From two points in this bow, equally distant 
 from the board, two strips of leather, worked 
 with poFCupine quills, are suspended, at the end- 
 of which, tassels, composed of moose hair, are fix- 
 ed. This bag is commonly ornamented, in differ- 
 ent parts, with porcupine quills. The wom'en who 
 are particular in keeping their children clean, 
 shift the moss which is putint^ these bags, several 
 times in a day ; but others do it not more than 
 twice. They often fix conductors so that their 
 male children never wet the moss. The Carrier 
 women will nurse their children, when thus sus- 
 pended at their backs, either by throwing their 
 breasts over their shoulders, or under their arms. 
 Their breasts are larger and longer than those of 
 the other tribes ; but I am unable to assign any 
 cause for this peculiarity. 
 
 The dress of the Indians is simple and con- 
 venient. They wear tight leggins, each of which 
 is composed of a single piece of leather or cloth, 
 sewed up with a single seam, about an inch from 
 the edge, which projects upon the outside. These 
 garments reach from the ancle nearly to the hip. 
 They have a strip of cloth or leather, called assi- 
 an, about a foot wide, and five feet long, which 
 passes between the legs, and over a thong tied 
 round the waist, so that the ends hang down, be- 
 hind and before. The body is covered with a 
 
 y. 
 
 I', V 
 
 ■'I 
 
''•W 
 
 318 
 
 ACCOUJN'T 01' THE IKDIANS. 
 
 
 ■ji ' 
 
 t;».:Y^'? 
 
 shirt, reaching down to the thighs, which is belted 
 with a broad piece of parchment, fastened togeth- 
 er behind. They wear a cap upon the head, com- 
 posed of a single piece of fur sewed up, or of the 
 skin of a small animal of a suitable size, which is 
 cut off at both ends, and sewed up at the top ; and 
 at SOL times it is only cut of at the end towards 
 the head, while the tail is left at the top, to hang 
 down behind, by way of ornament. They have, 
 also, at the proper season, the tail of a buffaloe, 
 fi stened to one of their wrists, which they use in 
 keeping off flies. A sort of robe or blanket is oc- 
 casionally worn over the rest of their dress. 
 They also wear shoes and mittens. The articles 
 of their clothing by day, constitute their covering 
 when they lie down at night. The materials of 
 which their clothing is composed vary with the 
 season, consisting of dressed moose skins, beaver 
 prepared with the fur, or European woollens. 
 The leather, they freqoently paint or work with 
 porcupine quills, with no small degree of taste. 
 The skirts of their shirts, and the seams of their 
 leggins, are often ornamented with frini^e and 
 tassels, composed of the hair of the moose, which 
 is naturally white, but which they die yellow and 
 red* Their shoes and mittens have, likewise, an 
 appropriate decoration. At a feast or dance, they 
 wear the feathers of the swan, eagle and other 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 319 
 
 birds ; and they occasionally wind a string of the 
 teeth, horns and claws of different animals, around 
 their head or neck. They all rub greese upon 
 their hair, which gives it a smooth and glossy 
 appearance. 
 
 It belongs to the women to make up the arti- 
 cles of clothing. In sewing leather, instead oi 
 thread, they make use of the sinews of animals. 
 When this substance is some moistened, they se|> 
 arate a fibre, and by running their finger along 
 between it and the main sinew, they part it to a 
 sufficient length. The sinews of the cariboo may 
 be made as fine and even, as fine thread. These 
 fibres, when thus separated, they twist at one 
 end between their fingers, which gives them a 
 sharp stiff point, when they are dry. Tliey 
 use awls, which they obtain from us, or an instru- 
 ment of bone which they construct themselves, 
 in sewing. The men paint their faces and orna- 
 ment their persons, with no less care than the wo- 
 men; and the married women, while they neglect 
 not their own persons, are still more attentive to 
 the appearance of their husbands. The young- 
 women often make some ornamental articles, 
 particularly garters, neatly worked with porcu- 
 pine quills and present them to their favourites ; 
 and the standing of a young male Carrier among 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 
320 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 '1 
 
 the young females may often be determined by 
 the number of garters which he wears. 
 
 The femile dress is made of the same materi- 
 als as that of the men, but differently constructed 
 and arranged. Their shoes are without ornament ; 
 their leggins are gartered beneath the knee ; the 
 shirt or coat, which is so long as to reach the mid- 
 dle of the leg, is tied at the neck, is fringed around 
 the bottom, and fancifully painted, as high as the 
 knee. Being very loose, it is girded around the 
 waist with a stiff belt, ornamented with tassels, 
 and fastened behind. The arms are covered as 
 low as the wrists with sleeves, which are not con- 
 nected with the body garment. These sleeves 
 are sewed up, as far as the bend of the arm, hav- 
 ing the seam the under side ; and extend to the 
 shoulders, becoming broader toward the upper end, 
 so that the corners hang down as low as the waist. 
 They are connected together, and kept on, by a 
 cord, extending from one to the other, across the 
 shoulders. The cap, when they have one, con- 
 sists of a piece of cloth, about two feet square, 
 doubled, and sewed up at one end, which forms an 
 enclosure for the head ; and it is tied under the 
 chin. The bottom of it falls down the back, like 
 a cape, and in the centre, is tied to the belt. This 
 cap is fancifully garnished with ribbon, beads or 
 porcupine quills. The upper garment, is a robe 
 
* I 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 321 
 
 or garment, similar to that worn by the men. 
 Their hair is parted on the top of the head, and 
 tied behind ; or, at some times, it is fastened in 
 large knots over the ears, and covered with beads 
 of various colours. They prefer European 
 clothes, when they can obtain them, to the skins, 
 furnished by their own country. For ornaments 
 they use bracelets, composed of brass, bone or 
 horn ; and rings, and similar trinkets. Some of 
 the women tattoo a line, which is sometimes dou- 
 ble, from the middle of the under lip, to the cen- 
 ter of the chin ; and two other lines, extending 
 from the corners of the mouth, somewhat diverg- 
 ing from the other line, down the sides of the 
 chin. 
 
 The greater part of the Indians, who make 
 use of European cloths for their dress, frequently 
 cleanse them, by washing them in cold water, 
 without soap. They do not understand the art 
 of making soap ; and if they did, the process is so 
 laborious, that they would readily forego the use 
 of this article, which they consider of very little 
 value. When their clothing consists of leather, 
 they occasionally cleanse it, by rubbing it over 
 with a ball of white earth. This earth, which is 
 the same which we use for white washing, they 
 moisten, and mould into balls, and thus preserve it 
 for use. 
 
 41 
 
 »,: ]\ 
 
 :''ii 
 
322 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 I--';- 11 ;r 
 •.f:i f!" 
 
 i 'i 1 i 
 
 Mil. 
 
 The Indians who subsist principally on fish, 
 and who kill but few large animals, cover their 
 habitations with some kind of bark, or with mats 
 made of rushes. But those who subsist on the 
 buffaloe, moose and red deer, dress their skins, 
 and cover their tents with them, as described in 
 my Journal. When they are in their tents they 
 sit or lie down on buffaloe or bear skins, which 
 constitute, also, their beds ; and when in bed, 
 they cover themselves with a buffaloe skin, dress- 
 ed with the hair on, or with a blanket. But 
 many of the Carriers, have nothing to lie on, ex- 
 cepting the branches of the spruce fir tree, with 
 little or nothing with which to cover themselves ; 
 and their huts constitute but a poor shelter. To 
 keep themselves from freezing, in cold winter 
 nights, therefore, they are under the necessity of 
 keeping up a constant fire, to which they are com- 
 pelled to turn their sides, alternately ; and they 
 are, at such times, able to procure but little sleep. 
 Indeed, almost any other people, in the same con- 
 dition, would freeze to death. But as they have 
 always been accustomed to such a mode of 
 living, they seem not at all aware of the misery 
 of their condition. 
 
 The Sauteux, Muscagoes, many of the Chipe- 
 wyans and some of the Crees, in short all the In- 
 dians who live about large lakes, subsist principal- 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 323 
 
 \y on fish, which they take with hooks and hnes, 
 or in nets. Their hooks they frequently obtain 
 from us ; and when this is impracticable, they make 
 them, by inserting a piece of bone obliquely into 
 a piece of wood, and reducing the upper 
 end of the bone to a point. Their lines 
 are either single thongs of leather, tied to- 
 gether, or they are braided of the bark of the 
 willow. The Assiniboins, Rapid Indians, Black 
 feet Indians and those Crees who remain in the 
 strong thick woods, or on the large plains, live 
 upon the flesh of the buffaloe, moose, red deer, 
 antelope, bear, &c. which they either boil or 
 roast. Those of them who can obtain brass or 
 copper or tin kettles from us, use them for boil- 
 ing their food ; and hang them over the fire. 
 Those who cannot obtain such kettles, use those 
 which are made of bark. Although water might 
 be made to boil in these bark kettles over the 
 fire, yet they would not be durable ; and there- 
 fore, this operation is more commonly performed, 
 by throwing into them, heated stones. Those 
 Indians, however, who have only bark kettles, 
 generally roast their meat. This they do, by 
 fixing one end of a stick, that is sharpened at both 
 ends, into the ground, at a little distance from the 
 fire, with its top, on which the meat is fixed, m- 
 clining towards the firo. On this stick, the meat 
 
 
324 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 jH'^ 
 
 'f/ rm 
 
 is occasionally turned, when one part beconiea 
 sufficiently roasted. 
 
 The Indians, in general, like to have their food, 
 whether boiled or roasted, thoroughly done ; but 
 those ho inhabit the plains, frequently make 
 their meals without the aid of fire, of particular 
 parts of the entrails of the bulFaloe, which I have, 
 also, eaten raw, and have found to be very palata- 
 ble. When there is no water to be found, they 
 at times kill a buffaloe, and drink his blood, or 
 the water which they find in his paunch. The 
 paunch of a male buffaloe, when well cooked, is 
 very delicious food. The Natives scarcely ever 
 wash it ; but boil it with much of its dung, ad- 
 hering to it ; and even then, the broth has an 
 excellent taste, to those who can forget, or from 
 habit pay no regard to the filth, which settles, to 
 the thickness of two fingers, at the bottom of the 
 kettle. Many consider a broth, made by means 
 of the dung of the cariboo and the hare to be a 
 dainty dish. 
 
 The Chipewyans can never patiently see a 
 fish without gouging out its eyes, and eating 
 them in a raw state ; and they say, that they 
 are delicious. Thev, also, often make their meals 
 upon raw fish or meat, that is frozen ; and ap- 
 pear to relish it fully as well, as when cooked*^ — 
 The Carriers, when they take fish that have 
 
s* 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 325 
 
 roes in them, squeeze them, with tlicir thdinb 
 and finger, through their natural outlet, into 
 into their mouths, and swallow them down, with 
 avidity. They also bury in the earth ' s^. 
 boxes, filled with the roes of salmon, . :8 
 they are suffered to remain, until they are a lit- 
 tle putrified, when they take them out, and eat 
 them, either cooked or raw ; and they appear 
 to relish them well, though they fill the air with 
 a terrible stench, for a considerable distance 
 round. A person who eats this food, and rubs 
 salmon oil on his hands, can be smelt in warm 
 weather, to the distance of nearly a quarter ofia 
 mile. 
 
 The natives in a part of the country called 
 JYipigon, as well as in some other parts of the 
 country, are frequently obliged, by necessity, to 
 subsist on a kind of moss, which they find adher- 
 ing to the rocks, and which they denominate As- 
 se-ne Wa-quon-uck, that is, eggs of the rock. 
 This moss when boiled with pimican, &;c. dissolves 
 into a glutinous substance, and is very palatable ; 
 but when cooked in water only, it is far other- 
 wise, as it then has an unpleasant, bitter taste. 
 There is some nourishment in it ; and it has sav- 
 ed the life of many of the Indians, as well as of 
 s^me of our voyagers. 
 
 On the Columbia River, there is a people 
 
 4 
 
326 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 ■'it J| 
 
 
 i< 
 
 
 who subsist, during the greater part of the snni- 
 mer, on nothing burroots, and a kind of bread, 
 if it may be so called, made of the mossy stuflf, 
 which grows on the spruce fir tree, and which 
 resembles the cobwebs, spun by spiders. This 
 substance contains, a little nourishment. They 
 gather it from the tre'^s, and lay it in a heap, on 
 which they sprinkle a little water, and then leave 
 it, for some time, to ferment. After that, they 
 roll it up into balls, as large as a man's head, and 
 bake them in ovens, well heated, which are con- 
 structed in the earth. After having been baked 
 tjbout an hour, they are taken out for use. This 
 substance is not very palatable ; and it contains 
 but little nourishment. It will, however, barely 
 support life, for a considerable time. 
 
 The Indians " .quently eat the flesh of the 
 dog ; and our Canadian voyagers are as fond of it, 
 as of any other meat. I have frequently eaten of 
 them myself; and have found them as palatable 
 as a young pig, and much of the same flavour. 
 These dogs are small ; and in shape, very much 
 resemble the wolf. The large dogs are of a dif- 
 ferent breed, and their flesh always has a rank 
 taste ; but this is never the case with the small 
 kind. 
 
 Perhaps I cannot more properly, than in this 
 connexion, state, that all the Indians, when they 
 
\i . '■■I'-'"*' 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 327 
 
 M 
 
 look in each others heads, and find Hce, of which 
 they have a plenty, both there and on their bod- 
 ies, crush them between their teeth, and frequent- 
 ly swallow them. The reason which they give 
 for this nauseous custom is, that, as the lice have 
 first bitten them, they are only retaliating the in- 
 jury upon them. 
 
 As the Indians use no salt in the preservation 
 of their meat, the lean part is cut into thin slices, 
 and hung up in their tents, and dried in the smoke, 
 and the fat is melted down ; and in this situation, 
 it will keep for years. They make marrow fat, 
 by cutting the joints of the bones, which they 
 boil for a considerable time, and then skim off the 
 top, which is excellent to eat with their dried 
 meat. They find a root in the plains, that is near- 
 ly a foot long, and two or three inches in circum- 
 ference, which is shaped like a carrot, and tastes 
 like a turnip, which they pound fine, and then dry 
 it in the sun. This, when boiled in fat broth, is 
 one oi their most dainty dishes, at their feasts. 
 The ordinary drink of the Indians is the broth of 
 flesh or fish, or only water. 
 
 The Indians on the east side of the Rocky 
 Mountain, pound choke cherries fine, and dry 
 them in the sun, which are palatable, either eaten 
 alone, or boiled in broth. They have also a small 
 berry, about the size of a common currant, shaped 
 
 a 
 
 
 ■'t * 
 
 t^'-* 
 
328 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 like an egg, which I have called, in my Journal, 
 shad berries, as I have heard them so denomina- 
 ted in New England, which they dry in the sun. 
 and either boil them in broth, or mix them with 
 pounded meat and fat, in making pimican. But 
 the Carriers prepare these berries in a different 
 manner, in order to preserve them. They make 
 a kind of tub, which will contain twenty or thir- 
 ty gallons, of the bark of the spruce fir tree. 
 Into the bottom of this tub they put about a peck 
 of these berries, and upon the top of them stones, 
 that are nearly red hot ; they then put another 
 layer of berries, and upon these, a layer of stones, 
 and so on until the tub is full. They then cov- 
 er it up, and let it remain in that situation for 
 about five or six hours, when they will have be- 
 come perfectly cooked. They arc then taken 
 out, and crushed between the hands, and sprr.ad 
 on splinters of wood, tied together for the pur- 
 pose, over a slow fire ; and, while they are drying, 
 the juice which ran out while they w.ti cooking 
 in the tub, is rubbed over them. After two or 
 three days drying, they will be in a condition to 
 be kept for several years. They are very pala- 
 table, especially when a few whortleberries are 
 mixed with them. The above described method 
 of cooking berries, is far better than doing them 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 329 
 
 in brass or copper kettles, as I have proved by 
 repeated experiment. 
 
 The Carriers cut off the heads of salmon, and 
 throw them into the lake, where they permit 
 them to remain a month, or at least until they 
 become putrified. They then take them out, and 
 put them into a trough, made of bark, filled 
 with water, into "this trough they put a suffi- 
 ciency of heated stones, to make the water boil 
 for a time, which will cause the oil to come out 
 of the heads of the salmon, and rise to the top 
 of the water. This they skim off, and put into 
 bottles made of salmon skins ; and they eat it 
 with their berries. Its smell however is very 
 disagreeable ; and no people would think of eat- 
 ing it excepting the Carriers. 
 
 The Indians are not regular in their meals ; 
 and they will eat a little, half a dozen times in a 
 day, if they have food at hand. But they are 
 not great eaters ; and they often subsist for a 
 great length of time, upon a very little 1o4.d. 
 When they choose, however, and in a particular 
 manner, sometimes at feasts, they will gorge down 
 an incredible quantity. They do not drink large- 
 ly, excepting the Carriers, who live upon dry fish. 
 They will sometimes swallow, at one draught, 
 three pints, or two quarts. When they can pro- 
 cure food that is palatable, they will eat in the 
 42 
 
 
 
 Mfl 
 
 ■'. ''-"^ 
 
 t 
 
330 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 same proportion. No favour which can be be- 
 stowed upon them is so gratefully received, as 
 the means of making a good meal. 
 
 From the month of June, until the latter end 
 of September, all animals have but little fur ; and 
 therefore, at this season, the Indians do not hunt 
 them much. The greate - part of the Indians, on 
 the east side of the Rocky Mountain, now take 
 the beaver in steel traps, which we sell them ; 
 frequently they shoot them, with fire arms ; and 
 sometimes they make holes through their lodges 
 or huts, and then spear them. Otters ihey take 
 in the same manner as beavers. The lynx or 
 cat, they take in snares. Foxes, fishers, martins, 
 minks, &;c. they take in a spring trap. — The large 
 animals are hunted ^.hiefly for their flesh ; 
 and are therefore killed, principally when they 
 are the fattest, which most of them are in the 
 fall, and some of them in the winter. Buffaloes, 
 moose, red deers, bears, &,c. are generally killed 
 with fire arms. The Indians, however, in the 
 plains, have other methods of killing the buffa- 
 loe. . 
 
 Sometimes the young men mount their hors- 
 es, and pursue them and bring them down with 
 their bows and arrows, which they find more 
 convenient for this purpose than fire arms, as 
 they can more easily take an arrow from the 
 

 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 331 
 
 quiver, than load a musket, in such a situa- 
 tion. The following, is another method ot' tak- 
 ing the bufFaloe. The Natives look out for a 
 small grove of trees, surrounded by a plain. In 
 this grove they make a yard, by falling small trees, 
 and interweaving them with brush; and they 
 leave an opening into it about twenty feet broad. 
 They select, for this purpose, a rising piece of 
 ground, that the yard may not be seen at a dis- 
 tance. From each side of this opening, they fix 
 two ranges of stakes, at about an angle of ninety 
 degrees from each other, extending about two 
 miles into the plains. These stakes rise about four 
 feet above the ground, and are about forty (eet 
 apart. On the top of each stake, they put buf- 
 faloe dung, or tie a wisp of hay. After this pre- 
 paration, when a herd of buffaloes is seen at no 
 great distance off, thirty or forty or more young 
 men mount their racers, which are well trained 
 to this business, and surround them ; and little 
 difficulty is found in bringing them, within the 
 range of the stakes. Indians are stationed by 
 the side of some of these stakes, to keep them 
 in motion, so that the buffaloes suppose tiiem 
 all to be human beings. The horsemen press for- 
 ward by the sides of the herd and behind them, 
 until, at length, with their tongues lolling from 
 their mouths, they are brought to the entrance of 
 
 ,ii -r 
 
 '*■ 
 
 •tS.!,! 
 
332 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 \ '4 
 
 the yard ; and through it they rush without per- 
 ceiving their danger, until they are shut in, to the 
 number, oftentimes, of two or three hundred. 
 When they find themselves enclosed, the Indians 
 say, and I have frequently seen myself, that they 
 begin to walk around the outside of the yard, in 
 the direction of the apparent revolution of the 
 sun, from east to west. Before any of them are 
 killed, the Indians go into the tent of the chief to 
 smoke, which they denominate making the buffa- 
 loe smoke. Tliey then go out to the yard, and 
 kill the buffaloes with bows and arrows ; and there 
 are . Indians, who will send an arrow, entirely 
 through one buffaloe, and kill, at the same time, a 
 second. When the buffaloes are all killed and 
 cut up, the tongues of all of them a ^ taken to the 
 tent of the chief ; and with a part of them he 
 makes a feast, and the remainder he allows his 
 neighbours to keep. The meat and skins are 
 then distributed among the people of the whole 
 camp ; and whether equally or not, no one will 
 complain. Should any be displeased with their 
 share, they will decamp, and go and join another 
 party. 
 
 The Natives generally cut up the body of an 
 animal into eleven pieces, to prepare it for trans- 
 portation to their tents, or to our forts. These 
 pieces are the four limbs, the two sides of ribs, 
 
 f» 
 
^^:m- 
 
 M' 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 333 
 
 the two sinews on each side of the back bone, the 
 brisket, the croup, and the back bone. Besides 
 these, they save and use the tongue, heart, liver, 
 paunch, and some part of the entrails. The head, 
 they carry home, the meat which is on it they 
 eat ; and the brains they rub over the skin, in 
 dressing it. — After they have taken all the meat 
 off from the skin, they stretch it on a frame, and 
 suffer it to dry. They next scrape off all the 
 hair, and rub the brains of the animal over the 
 skin, and then smoke it ; after which they soak it 
 in water, for about a day. They then take it out 
 and wring it as dry as possible ; and a woman takes 
 hold of each end, and they hold it over a fire, 
 frequently pulling it and changing its sides, until it 
 is perfectly dry. After this it is smoked with 
 rotten wood, and it becomes fit for use. This 
 last part of the process, is to prevent it from 
 becoming hard after it has been wet. 
 
 The Sauteux, who remain about the Lake of 
 the Woods, now begin to plant Indian corn and 
 potatoes, which grow well. The Mandans, also, 
 along the Missouri River, cultivate the soil, and 
 produce Indian corn, beans, pumpkins, tobacco, &c. 
 As they do not understand curing their tobacco, 
 it i» of little use to them. The Sauteux, who 
 live back from Mackana, raise large quantities of 
 Indian corn, beans, &c. And also make much 
 
 
 
334 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 " ' ) i 'i 
 
 Hm 
 
 sugar, from the maple tree, which they dispose of 
 to the North West Company, for cloth and other 
 articles. As soon as the animals become scarce, 
 that are hunted for their furs, the ISatives must 
 till the ground for subsistence, or live upon fish. 
 This state of things already exists, in many places; 
 and must, in all probability, be extended. 
 
 The Indians sometimes take the largest fish, 
 such as sturgeon, trout, and some white fish, with 
 spears. At other times, they take their fish in 
 drag-nets or scoop-nets. But the more general 
 way of taking them is the following. They have 
 nets, of from twenty to sixty fathoms, in length, 
 which contain from twelve to forty meshes, of 
 from two to seven inches in depth. Upon lines, 
 which are fixed upon each side of the net, for 
 the purpose of strengthening it, they fasten, oppo- 
 site to each other, a small stone and a wooden 
 buoy, once in about the distance of two fathoms. 
 The net is carefully thrown into the water, and 
 by means of the stones on the one side, and the 
 buoys on the other, it becomes extended, to its 
 full breadth. The ends of the net, which forms a 
 semicircle, are secured by stones ; and it is visited 
 every day, and taken out of the water ever second 
 day, to be cleaned and dried. This is a i^ery 
 easy operation, when the water is not frozen. 
 But the ice which, at some places, acquires the 
 
ACCOUNT CP THE INDIANS. 
 
 335 
 
 vV,' 
 
 thickness of five (eet, renders the setting and tak- 
 ing out of the nets, a work of greater difficulty. 
 They then cut holes, at the distance of thirty feet 
 from each other, to the whole length of the net, 
 one of which, is larger than the rest, being gener- 
 ally about four feet square, and is called the basin. 
 Through these holes, by means of poles of a suit- 
 able length, the net is placed in and drawn out of 
 the water. 
 
 The Indians, throughout the whole country 
 that I have visited, have no other animals domes- 
 ticated, excepting the horse and the dog. Of the 
 latter, they have several different species. Some 
 of them are very large and strong, and are em- 
 ployed in carrying burdens ; while others, which 
 are small, assist their masters in the chace. — All 
 Indians are very fond of their hunting dogs. The 
 people on the west side of the RocLy Mountain, 
 appear to have the same affection for them, that 
 they have for their children ; and they will dis- 
 course with them, as if they were rational beings. 
 They frequently call them their sons or daughters ; 
 and when describing an Indian, they will speak of 
 him as father of a particular dog which belongs 
 to him. When these dogs die, it is not unusual 
 to see their masters or mistresses place them on 
 a pile of wood, and burn them in the same man- 
 ner as they do the dead bodies of their relations; 
 
 
 
 
336 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 L t- - ■^' f : ■ i»^ 
 
 i ' 
 
 < 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 and they appeii. i<^ lament their deaths, by crying 
 and howling, fulK >is much as if they were their 
 kindred. Nothwithstanding this affection, how- 
 ever, when they have nothing else with which to 
 purchase articles which they want, they will sell 
 their dogs. 
 
 Those Indians, who live in a woody country, 
 make no use of horses, but employ their large dogs, 
 to assist In carrying their baggage from place to 
 place. The load is placed near their shoulders, 
 and some of these dogs, which are accustomed 
 to it, will carry sixty or seventy pounds weight, 
 the distance of twenty five or thirty miles in a 
 day. 
 
 The Assiniboins, Rap d Indians, Black feet 
 
 and Mandans, together w.th all the other Indians 
 
 who inhabit a plain coui/ry, always perform 
 
 their journles on horse back. Indeed they seldom 
 
 go even a short distance from their tents, in any 
 
 other manner. They have some excellent horses, 
 
 which will carry them a great distance in a day. 
 
 They sometimes go seventy miles, in twelve 
 
 hours ; but forty or forty five miles is a common 
 
 day's ride. They do not often use bridles, but 
 
 guide their horses with halters, made of ropes, 
 
 which are manufactured from the hair of the buf- 
 
 faloe, which are very strong and durable. On 
 
 the back of the horse, they put a dressed buffaloe 
 
17 
 'A. 
 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 337 
 
 skin, on the top of which, they place a pad, from 
 which are suspended stirrups, made of wood, and 
 covered with the skin of the testicles of the buf- 
 faloe. 
 
 Some of these Indians have forty or fifty 
 horses ; and they attach a great value to those, 
 that are distinguished for their speed. Whenev- 
 er an Assiniboin sells a racer, he separates from 
 him, in a most affectionate manner. Immediately 
 before delivering him to the purchaser, he steps 
 up to the favourite animal, and whispers in his 
 ear, telling him not to be cast down or angry 
 with his master for disposing of him to another, 
 for, he adds, " you shall not remain long where 
 you are. I sold you to obtain certain articles, 
 that I stood in great need of ; but before many 
 nights have passed, I will come and steal you 
 away." And, unless great vigilance on the part 
 of the purchaser prevent, he generally fulfils his 
 promise ; for they are the greatest horse thieves, 
 perhaps upon the face of the earth. As there 
 never falls much snow on the large plains, 
 the horses have not much difficulty in find- 
 ing a sufficiency of grass, on which to subsist, 
 during the whole year ; and they are generally in 
 good order. 
 
 The Indians who reside about large lakes and 
 rivers, voyage about in the summer season, in ca- 
 
 43 
 
 11 
 
 1^. 
 
 m^ 
 
 wp'l 
 
 •ki 
 
 ■«^ 
 
338 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 noes, made of the bark of the birch or spruce fir 
 tree ; and two persons in one of them, will easily 
 go fihy miles in a day. The paddles, with which 
 the canoe is moved, are about five feet long, 
 half of wliich length, is a blade, four inches wide. 
 
 The Indians are good walkers ; and will at 
 sometimes, travel forty miles in a day, with a pret- 
 ty heavy load upon their backs. 
 
 In the winter season, the Indians use snow 
 shoes ; and it would be impossible to travel with- 
 out them. They are constructed in several differ- 
 ent shapes ; but the following is the most common 
 form. They take a piece of wood, and with a 
 crooked knife, work it down, until it is about two 
 inches wide, and an inch thick. These sticks are 
 fastened together at one end, which constitutes 
 the hind part ; they are then bent so as to be 
 about a foot asunder in the middle, and to come 
 nearly together forward. The space between 
 these sticks, they fill up with a lace work of thongs 
 of deer skin. Other snow shces come quite to a 
 point before, where they are turned up ; the side 
 pieces arc from eighteen to twenty four inches 
 apart, and, in the fall of the year, when the snow 
 is light, they are seven feet in length. The inner 
 side piece is nearly straight, and the outside is 
 arching, and the extremities behind, come togeth- 
 er in a point. The space between them, is work- 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 339 
 
 ed as above mentioned. It is a little surprising 
 that the Indians, Avho are accustomed to them, 
 will walk farther in a day on good snow shoes, 
 than they could do on bare ground. But it is 
 very fatiguing for those to walk on them, who arc 
 not accustomed to do it. The Indians are train- 
 ed to this exercise from the age of four years. 
 Even at that early age, they will go five or six 
 miles in a day upon them, through the whole win- 
 ter, as often as the Indians decamp, which, at some- 
 times, is every day, and at other times, once in 
 eight or ten days. Indians, who live upon the 
 chace, in a country where animals are scarce, 
 cannot remain long in a place; and those v/ho 
 hunt the beaver and some other animals, must 
 continually shift their residence. 
 
 . Few of the Indians live in a state of celibacy. 
 They generally marry when they are between 
 eighteen and twenty five years of age. Polygamy 
 is allowed among all the tribes ; but only a few 
 persons among them, have more than one wife, 
 each. I knew, however, a chief, among the 
 Beaver Indians, who had eleven wives, and more 
 than forty children. 
 
 Their courtship and marriage are conducted 
 in the following manner. A young man who is 
 desirous of taking a wife, looks around among the 
 young women of his acquaintance, to find one that 
 
 1 '^': 
 
 ft 
 
 iU 
 
340 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 i I 
 
 i ' , ; I 
 
 pleases his fancy. Having thus singled out one, 
 to her he makes Jinown his intentions ; and if his 
 addresses are favourably received, he visits her, in 
 the night season, by crawling softly into the tent 
 where she lodges, and where she is expecting him, 
 after the other inhabitants of the lodge are asleep. 
 Here they pass the night, by conversing in a 
 whisper, lest they should be heard by the rest of 
 the family, who all occupy the same apartment. 
 As the morning light approaches, he withdraws 
 in the same silent manner, in which he came. 
 These noctural visits are kept up for several 
 months ; or, until the young couple think that they 
 should be happy, in passing their days together. 
 The girl then proposes the subject to her moth- 
 er, and she converses with the father in regard 
 to the intended match. If he give his consent, 
 and the mother agree with him in opinion, she 
 will direct her daughter to invite her suitor to 
 come and remain with them. It is now only, 
 that thoy cohabit ; and whatever the young man 
 kills, he brings home and presents it to the father 
 of his wife. In this way he lives, during a year 
 or more, without having any property that he 
 can call his own. After his wife has a child, she 
 calls her husband by no other name but the father 
 of her son or daughter. And now he is at liber- 
 ty to leav5^ the tent of his wife's father, if h** 
 
 
 
 V (III 1 ■ . t: 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 341 
 
 t: :* <t> 
 
 pleases. All the Indians on the east side of the 
 rocky mountain, think it very indecent for a 
 father or mother in law, to speak to, or look in 
 the face of a son or daughter in law ; and they 
 never do either unless they are very much in- 
 toxicated. The reason which they give for this 
 custom, when questioned on the subject is, the 
 peculiar intercourse which this person has had 
 with their child. 
 
 When two young persons of different sexes, 
 have an affection for each other, and wish to be 
 connected in marriage, to which the parents of 
 the girl will not consent, they frequently leave 
 the tents of their parents, and go and join some 
 distant band of Indians. They are, however, of- 
 ten pursued, by the parents of the young woman ; 
 and should he overtake them, he will bring his 
 daughter back, and keep a strict watch over her 
 conduct, to prevent all intercourse between her 
 and her suitor. All neighbouring tribes frequently 
 intermarrv. 
 
 Chastity in young women, is considered as a 
 virtue, by the Indians, generally, on the east side 
 of the Rocky Mountain ; and many mothers, 
 among some tribes are so particular, that they 
 never allow their daughters, who have arrived at 
 a certain age, to go from home alone, but always 
 send some person with them, as a protector. 
 
 
 \ r,..i'' 
 
 ■■"■■ ^ 
 
 tt' 
 
 ',' ^ 
 
 k. .jfe 
 
 y' ■ t 
 
 b|£r - 
 
 tn^-. 
 
 Hr,->. 
 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 ■ill 
 
 
 o 
 
 Ri; 
 
 :h 
 
 \ p' 
 
 ^ 
 
342 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 Chastity in married persons is universally regard- 
 ed as a virtue ; and the want of it in a woman, is 
 frequently the cause of her being rejected by her 
 husband. A separation, also, at some times, takes 
 place, on account of the slothfulness of the wo- 
 man. When such an event does occur, all the 
 children, if small, remain with their mother, but 
 should they have sons, advanced beyond the pe- 
 riod of childhood, they remain with their father. 
 Their separations, however, are seldom lasting ; 
 and after a few days absence, the parties general- 
 ly have an inclination to return to each other. 
 These separations commonly take place in obedi- 
 ence to the will of the husband, only because, pos- 
 sessing greater physical strength, he has more 
 power to drive his wife from him, or to retain her 
 with him, against her choice, than she has to treat 
 him in a similar manner. 
 
 The Indian women sit down in a decent at- 
 titude, placing their knees close to each other. 
 They are very particular^ also, in regard to their 
 behaviour, during their periodic?' illness. They 
 then leave the tents where the.i* families reside, 
 and go and put up temporary ones, at a little 
 distance from them, where they remain during 
 the continuance of their illness. While they are 
 there, the men will mt deign to hold any con- 
 versation with them ; nor will they suffer them 
 
 cu'cums 
 
 
 » 
 

 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 343 
 
 ■f 
 
 i 
 
 to make use of any article, which they expect 
 to want the use of afterwards. This custom 
 prevails among all the tribes, with whom I have 
 been acquainted. The first tim€ that the young 
 women, among the Sauteux, Crees and some 
 other tribes, experience this illness, they run in- 
 to the woods, and remain there for several days. 
 They then return to their tents, and immediately 
 proceed to cut and pile up a cord of wood, as 
 high as their heads ; after which all the women 
 of the camp come and scramble for it, and carry 
 it away, saying, that the person who cut the 
 wood, is now a woman like themselves, and that 
 they hope she will prove to be industrious. 
 
 The men among the Indians, are very sub- 
 ject to be jealous of their wives. In their fits of 
 jealousy, they often cut off all the hair from the 
 heads of their wives, and, not unfrequently, cut off 
 their noses, also ; and should they ml in the mo- 
 ment of passion have a knife at hand, they will snap 
 it off atone bite, with their teeth. But such a 
 circumstance does not ordinarily produce a sep- 
 aration between them. The man is satisfi- 
 ed in thus revenging a supposed injury ; and 
 having destroyed the beauty of his wife, he 
 concludes that he has secured her against all fu- 
 ture solicitations to offend. 
 
 
 I 
 
 *■ «k ^*s- 
 
 ^ * 
 
344 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 , r ^ ) , 
 
 i'i 
 
 
 All the Indians consider women as far inferi- 
 our in every respect, to men ; and, an.ong 
 many tribes, they treat their wives much, as they 
 do their dogs. The men chastise their wives, 
 frequently, with an axe, or with a large club ; and 
 in the presence of their husbands, the women 
 dare not look a person in the face. When they 
 decamp, the women transport the baggage ; and 
 when they stop, while the men are quietly smok- 
 ing their pipes, the women are required to pitch 
 the tents, and to set the encampment in order. 
 Among the Sauteux, Crees, Muscagoes and As- 
 siniboins, however, the women are treated with 
 more gentleness and respect. The husband shares 
 the labour with his wife ; and the women govern 
 every thing in their tents, so that the husband pre- 
 sumes not to dispose of the most trifling article, 
 without the consent of his v/ife. Among them 
 the husbandr* kills animals and generally brings 
 the meat to his tent, where his wife prepares it 
 for drying, and melts down the fat. She, also 
 generally does the cooking ; not, however, with- 
 out the occasional assistance of her husband. 
 He assists her, likewise, in taking care of the 
 children^ and, if his wife is too much loaded, 
 in marching from one place of encampment to 
 another, he will take one of the small children 
 in addition to the load already on his own back. 
 
 9 ' 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 345 
 
 :4 
 
 But the Indians, who inhabit the plains, never car- 
 ry any thing on their backs, as they are well sup- 
 plied with horses. 
 
 The following ceremonies attend the birth of 
 children. When the time of a woman approach- 
 es, she erects a small hut, at a little distance from 
 the tent in which she usually lives; and at the 
 time of labour, she sends ^ an invitation to several 
 neighbouring women, to come to her assistance. 
 As soon as the child is born, it is washed in wa- 
 ter, that had been previously prepared, by boiling 
 in it a sweet scented root. The mother then or- 
 ders a feast to be prepared. As soon as it is 
 ready, the most aged woman of the company, 
 takes a little out of the dish, and throws it into the 
 fire, and then helps the whole company ; not pas- 
 sing by the mother of the child, who. is generally 
 able to join them in the repast. The old lady of 
 ceremonies, now offers up a short prayer to the 
 Creator, or the Master of life, as they denominate 
 him, in behalf of the new born babe, the substance 
 of which is, that its life may be spared, and that 
 it may grow ; and if a son, become a handsome 
 
 young lad. 
 
 A woman after child birth, remains in the sep- 
 arate dwelling which she had erected, for the 
 space of about thirty days, during which time, no 
 man would, on any account, enter the place of 
 
 44 
 
 .1 ." f 
 
 \ t 
 
 1^ - 
 
 ¥ 
 
 M 
 
346 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 '« 
 
 ill 
 
 
 her residence. At the close of this period, she 
 returns to her tent, and the father of the child 
 prepares a feast to which all their neighbours are 
 invited, the object of which as they say, is, to 
 welconoe the arrival of the little stranger, from a 
 far country. * ' i ; ^ 
 
 Should a male child live, the parents dry the 
 meat of the lirst animal J hat he kills, and careful- 
 ly keep it, until they can collect a sufficiency of 
 something to make a feast. They then invite 
 their friends, of both sexes, to come and partake 
 of the fruits of the hunt of their son ; for, they so 
 call it, because the animal which he killed, they 
 mix with what his parents have procured. Be- 
 fore any taste of tlie feast, one of the most re- 
 spectable men present, takes a little out of the 
 dish, and throws it into the fire ; and then be- 
 seeches the Great Spirit, to be kind to the lad. 
 and to allow him to grow up, and to become a 
 skilt'ul hunter ; and to cause that when he goes to 
 war, he may not behave like an old woman, but 
 may return with the scalps of hie enemies. ♦ • 
 • Indian women appear to suffer less pain in 
 child birth, than women in civilized countries. 
 They rarely ever take any medicine, at the time 
 of delivery, though they do, at times, drink water, 
 in which the rattle of a rattle-snake has been 
 boiled. In the season of labour, they place their 
 
 -#■•• 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 347 
 
 knees upon the floor or ground, and lean forward 
 over something, raised about two feet high. It is 
 seldom more than a quarter or a half an hour, 
 before the child is born; and, in a few days the 
 mother is as active and vigorous as ever. The 
 Indian women rarely ever die, at this critical pe- 
 riod. 
 
 Among the natives, those persons who are in 
 any way deformed, or have any blemish about 
 them, receive their name from this circumstance ; 
 whiie the others are named, ^.fter some beast or 
 bird. No Indian will inform another, even if 
 requested, what his own name is ; though he 
 will, if asked, give the name of other Indians. 
 Of the reason of this reserve I am ignorant. 
 
 It is not often that an Indian chastises his 
 children ; and, indeed, it is not necessary, for they 
 appear, in general, to have much affection and 
 respect for their parents, and are therefore ready 
 to obey them. A father never interferes in the 
 bringing up of his daughter; but leaves her 
 wholly to the care of her mother. When a 
 son becomes of a suitable age, his father takes 
 him with him in hunting, and learns him the dif- 
 ferent modes of taking animals. A son until he 
 is married, considers himself as under his father's 
 controul ; and even after that, he will generally 
 listen to any advice, which his father may give 
 
 
 (i ■: 
 
 .?f 
 
 ■i^ 
 
 ■*.'» 
 
 
 ' ^Sstk 
 
348 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 flrlil 
 
 to him. The aged are conimonly treated with 
 much respect, which they consider themselves 
 as entitled to claim. Slibuld a young man behave 
 disrespectfully toward an old man, the aged will 
 refer him to his hoary head, and demand of him, 
 if he be not ashamed to insult his grey hairs. 
 In short, the aged of both sexes are generally 
 ti ted with kindness; and are not suffered to 
 Vfanr : ny thing which they need, and which it is 
 in the power of their relations to procure for 
 them. 
 
 The superior influence of tho white people, 
 where they have, for a considerable time, resided 
 among the Indians, has very much diminished 
 their respect for their own chiefs; though there 
 are some among them, who bear this title. The 
 feasts are commonly made by the chiefs ; and they, 
 also, generally make the harangues, in behalf of 
 their bands, when they visit our forts. Their war 
 chiefs have considerable influence over the young 
 men, who accompany them, in their war parties. 
 
 Murder and theft are considered as crimes; 
 and the former is always punished with death, un- 
 less the murderer makes his escape, which is gen- 
 erally the case Theft, also, is frequently pun- 
 ished in a similar manner. Sometimes, the party 
 offended will be appeased, by the restoration of 
 the stolen property, or of an equivalent. 
 
 uwW^ 
 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 349 
 
 Generosity is among the Indian virtues. They 
 are more ready, in proportion to their means, to 
 assist a neighbour who may be in want, than the 
 inhabitants, generally, of civilized countries. An 
 Indian rarely kills an animal, without sending a 
 part of it to a neighbour, if he has one near 
 him. 
 
 The private property of the Indians, con- 
 sists of horses, dogs, tents, guns and the uten-, 
 fills that belong to their tents. Some of these 
 things, a little before their death, t ley bequeath 
 to some of their friends ; but all of their clothing, 
 guns, powder horn'j, &c. are brried with them. 
 Indeed, the Indians suffer nothing to remain in or 
 about the tent of a person who has died, which 
 he was accustomed to make use of while he was 
 alive. They consider it a kind of sacrilege to 
 mention the name of a person after he is dead ; 
 and they never speak of him as dead, but as mis- 
 erable, because, they say, he has taken a long 
 journey alone, to the country, to which bis deceas- 
 ed relations had gone before him. 
 
 Whenever any one is very sick, the whole of 
 his family, and frequently all of his relations, will 
 give some part of their clothing in sacrifice to the 
 devil or evil spirit, who, they suppose, is the 
 cause of his illness. They, however, pray to the 
 Good Spirit, or Master of life, for his recovery, as 
 
 r'' :i 
 
 * ':i 
 
 iff '" 
 
 m 
 
 ^iifcaw**^-'"-/ 
 
'I'i 
 
 3r)0 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 !* . 
 
 HI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 they believe that he has the power, if he choose 
 to exercise it, of restoring him to health, notwith- 
 standing the design which the evil spirit has, of 
 taking his hfe from him. ^ >H.^. : «-t 
 
 All the Indians on the east side of the Rocky 
 Mountain, bury their dead. After a person is 
 dead, some of his deceased relatives cut off a 
 lock of his hair, which they carefully lay up ; and 
 they sometimes preserve such relicks, for a great 
 number of years. Preparatory to its interment, 
 they dress the corpse in as gay a manner as possi- 
 ble ; and then wrap a blanket, over the whole. 
 But they never sew or pin this blanket together, 
 lest he should be unable to shake it off with 
 ease, when he arrives in the other world. If 
 it were fastened, they say, he might lie in it 
 for several days, after his arrival in the land of 
 his departed relations, before any one would meet 
 with, and release him. The bottom and sides of 
 the grave, which is two or three feet deep, are 
 lined with the branches of trees. The corpse is 
 then deposited in it ; and along with it, a pipe and 
 tobacco, a dish or small kettle, an awl and sinews 
 to repair his shoes, and a sufficiency of provisions, 
 to support him for a few days, until he shall ar- 
 rive in the land of plenty. They then cover the 
 body with branches, and fill up the grave with 
 earth ; and on the top of it, they place bark, to 
 
 
 'i« 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 351 
 
 protect it from the rain or snow. They then 
 clear off the bushes and grass, for eight or ten 
 feet around the grave ; and every spring, the 
 ground is thus renewedly cleared, for several years 
 after. About the grave, they set up a few stakes 
 on which they hang strips of cloth, tobacco, &;c. 
 While the ceremonies of interment are perform- 
 ing, the relatives and friends of the deceased, make 
 the most dismal moans and cries ; and, to convince 
 others of their grief, and, as they say, to ease their 
 wounded hearts, some of them cut the hair of 
 their heads short, or make incisions in their faces 
 and arms, while others, to whom the deceased 
 was more dear, will seize an arrow, in an agony of 
 grief, and run it through the fleshy part of their 
 thighs. • ' i •-■ i . ; r i. 
 
 The Indians generally appear to be more af- 
 flicted with the loss of an infant, helpless child, 
 than of a person that has arrived to mature age ; 
 for the latter, they say, can provide for himself, 
 in the country whither he has gone," while the 
 former, is too young to depend upon himself. 
 
 The men appear to be ashamed to manifest 
 their grief at the loss of any one, however dear 
 he might have been to them; but the women 
 give full vent to the feelings of nature. The fond 
 mother, when she looses a young child, will pull 
 out all the hair of her head ; cut her face, arms, 
 
 X "^^N 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 *« 
 
 
 ■P 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 .■^■. 
 
 
 
 
 II f 
 
 1 ■ 
 
35^ 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 and legs, in a shocking manner ; burn all her 
 clothes, excepting a iew rags, which she has upon 
 her; and, to •'ender herself as wretched, as she 
 expresses it, as her child, when the weather is 
 storm), she will stand, for hours at a time, in the 
 open air, and pitifully moan, in such language as 
 this. " How wretched are you, my child, to be 
 torn from your friends while so young and help- 
 less; and to be sent alone, into a strange country ! 
 Who will now give you bread when you are hun- 
 gry, and water, when you are thirsty, and make a 
 covering for you to lie under when it rains or 
 snows ! O that I could once more press you, my 
 dear child, to my troubled breast ! Of what use 
 to me are all my medicines, since they could not 
 save your life, and keep you a little longer with 
 us !" Then, in a rage of passion and of grief, she 
 will rush into h^ tent, and seize her medicine 
 bag, and throw it into the fire. ,,- 
 
 All the Indian tribes are frequently at war 
 with each other ; and at some times, two tribes 
 will league together, against one tribe or more. 
 Those who reside in a woody country, do not as 
 frequently wage war against their neighbours, as 
 those who live in the large plains. The latter, 
 generally engage in war, either ofTensiye or defen- 
 sive, at the opening of every spring. The sum- 
 mer is the only season of military operations!. 
 
 .:fe. 
 
p- n, 
 
 ^ 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 353 
 
 =! 
 
 amonj^ the Indians ; though they Irequentlj em- 
 ploy much time in the winter, in providing bows, 
 irrows, guns nnd ammunition, with reference to 
 a campaign, the ensuing season. Preparatory to 
 hostihtics, the chiefs, toward the close of win- 
 ter, send young men with presents of tobacco, 
 to the whole tribe, who are scattered over 
 their territory, in'iting them to meet, at a spe- 
 cified place, early in the spring, in general 
 council. At this meeting, chiefs are appointed to 
 conduct the war. The war pipe is then lighted 
 up, and those who are willing to become soldiers 
 in the campaign, smoke the pipe. None are com- 
 pelled to enlist ; but, to excite in the young men 
 a martial spirit, and to stimulate them to become 
 his followers, the war chief makes a long ha- 
 rangue, in which he relates the injuries, that they 
 have received from their enemies. By a strong 
 appeal to their savage feelings, he labours to con- 
 vince them, that it will be sweet and manly, to re- 
 venge these insults; and to return trom the war, 
 with the scalps of their enemies, and with their 
 wives, and children, and horses, kc. 4 
 
 A feast is then made, of which all partake, 
 after which, the young men dance, and sing war 
 songs. After these ceremonies are ended, the 
 chief or chiefs set out on the war expedition, with 
 as many as choose to follow them ; and as they 
 
 45 
 
 ' i\ 
 
 v f\ 
 
 mmv*''- 
 
354 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 leave the camp, the war party join in a war song. 
 After their departure, the old men and women 
 and children pursue their usual occupations, to ob- 
 tain a subsistence. Frequently, after the war 
 party has been gone several days, some of the 
 young men return, to join their relations or lovers. 
 All the punishment to which they subject them- 
 selves is, to be called old women, by which is 
 meant, cowards; a charge which touches an In- 
 dian to the quick. 
 
 War parties frequently travel four or five 
 hurwlred mile.?, before they reach the territory of 
 their enemies. On their way, they subsist upon 
 animals which they kill, and fish which they take, 
 from the lakes and rivers. These supplies are 
 often very inadequate, ahd they suffer greatly by 
 hunger. 
 
 Having arrived near tha place whore they ex- 
 pect to find their enemies, (he chiefs send out 
 scouting parties, in order to ascertain their posi- 
 tion, numbers and any other circumstances which 
 it may be necessary for them to knov/, in order to 
 form a plan for taking ithem by surprise.. The 
 Indians nevei' attack their enemies in the open 
 day ; but fall upon them when asleep, near tlie 
 approach of the light of the morning. 
 
 11 they succeed in conquering their enemies, 
 as is jijenerally the case, since those who ituake the 
 
ifi»j 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 355 
 
 aftack have greatly the advantage, thy make ter- 
 rible havo". among the men ; but they labour to 
 take as many of their women and children alive, 
 as the) possihly can, in order to carry them home 
 as slaves. They never torture these captives; 
 but keep them to perform the menial service 
 about their tents, or dispose of them to others. 
 Sometimes they are adopted into the families «^' 
 their enemies, in the place of children that they 
 have lost ; and then they are treated with all the 
 tenderness and affection, which would be exercis- 
 ed toward a near relation. 
 
 On their return from the expedition, the war 
 party approach the tents of their band, with their 
 faces blackened, and singing the war song. Their 
 relations immediately moke a feast, at which the 
 warriours dance, with the scalps of their enemies 
 which they hove taken, in their hands ; and re- 
 count the history of the expedition, particularly 
 relating the manner in which they fell upon their 
 enemies, the number of men that they killed, and 
 of slaves, horses, &c. which they have taken. 
 They then distribute a part of the booty, among 
 the aged chiefs, and most respectable mt.i of the 
 tribe, who remained at home. The young men, 
 who deserted tlie party, are treated with con- 
 tempt ; and the young vvomeo, whose charms may 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 :% 
 
 
 f 
 
 i U.it 
 
 '*»=»* 
 
356 
 
 ACCOUNT or THt INDIANS. 
 
 have attracted them back, frequently couiposd 
 songs of derision, in regard to their behaviour. 
 
 The occasions of war among the Indians arc 
 various. Sometimes a person in one tribe has 
 been murdered by a person belonging to another 
 tribe ; sometimes the members of one tiibe have 
 hunted on the lands of another; and sometimes 
 horses have been stolen. The Indians, who in- 
 habit the large plains, who always go to war on 
 horseback, frequently attack their neighbours, 
 merely to obtain, by this means, horses and slaves. 
 It is not uncommon.; also, for the Natives, when 
 they lose a respecied chief, or any other person 
 generally beloved, either by an ordinary or a vio- 
 lent death, to form a war party, for the purpose 
 of killing one person or more, of a neighboring 
 tribe ; and the case is the same, whether this 
 tribe be at peace with them, or not. This slaugh- 
 ter, they say, enables them to calm their grief, 
 and sets their hearts at rest, as blood has thus 
 been offered to the manes of their departed 
 friend. 
 
 A person appointed to head a war party, is 
 called a chief, or O-ke-maw. He must have given 
 distinguished proof of his bravery, prudence and 
 cunning, in former war expeditions, in order thai 
 he should be cofisidered as qualified to fill this 
 post. Great skilh in coming upon an enemy by 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 357 
 
 riiirprlsc, as on this circumstance the success of an 
 attach depends, is considered as the first requisite 
 in a military leader. It is considered necessary, 
 also, that he should he well acquainted with the 
 situation of the territories of the eiieray, and with 
 the course leading to them, in which provisions 
 can most easily be obtained. A war party some- 
 times consists of several hundreds ; but frequently 
 it does not amount to more than twentv. The 
 war chief has no authority over his followers, 
 but his advice is generally respected and follow- 
 ed. 
 
 It is not often that two tribes, which have been 
 in the habit of carrying on war agairjst each oth- 
 er, formally enter into terms of peace. When 
 such an event docs take place, the following cir- 
 cumstances attend it. One chief or more, and 
 several young men of his tribe, go with their pipe 
 of peace, to find their enemies ; and on their ar- 
 rival among them, thoy express a desire to hold a 
 council with them. Upon this, all the elders of 
 the tribe visited, are called together ; and the 
 chief, who is an ambassadour for peace, makes 
 known his busiMess, and strives to convince his en- 
 emies, that it will be for their advantage to live 
 on amicable t^srms with his tribe. 
 
 Should the terms of peace be agreed on, the 
 parties smoke in each othin's pipes, after whicli a 
 
,^^-rj»iv- -^W- 
 
 358 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INi»iAN?, 
 
 
 'i > ; 
 
 feast is prepared ; and when tbac ih runcluded, 
 the remainder of the night is spent ia singing and 
 dancing. — But should the embassy be unsuccessful, 
 the chief, with his attendants, will return, and 
 make report of his proceedings to his own tribe ; 
 and those of them who are able and willing to 
 bear arms, will immediately, though as secretly as 
 possible, commence making preparations for a 
 campaign, the ensuing spring. The points of the 
 arrows, which the Indians use in attacking their 
 enemies, are sometimes dipped in a poisonous liquid 
 which they extract from certain roots. 
 
 All the Indians spend much of their ame in 
 some kind of amusement. The inhabitants of the 
 plains, generally, and of New Caledonia, live in 
 large hands ; and Jire much more addicted to 
 amusements, than the inhabitaiiis of woody coun- 
 tries who are more scattered. Every tribe has 
 amusements ^nji;uliar to itself; but some plays are 
 common lo uii, who reside on the east side of the 
 Rocky Mountain. The Assiniboins, as well as all 
 the other Indians in the plains, spend much of 
 their time about their horses, and are fond of 
 trying their speed. Their youth, from the age 
 of four or five to that of ejghteeo or twenty years, 
 pas } nearly half of their time in shooting aiiovvs 
 at a mark ; and to render this employment more 
 interesting, they always have something at stake, 
 
^ 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 359 
 
 which is generally nothing more than nn irrow, 
 or something of small value. From so early and 
 constant a practice, they become, at length, the 
 best marksmen, perhaps, in the world. Many of 
 them, at the distance of eight or ten rods, will 
 throw an arrow with such precision, as twice out 
 of three times, to hit a mark of the size of a dol- 
 lar. The young men often amuse themselves, in 
 the summer season, by a game of ball. 
 
 What is denominated bv the Indians, the dish 
 game, is played with peculiar interest, by all 
 the tribes with which I have been acquainted. 
 Eight or ten little pioces of bones, or so many but- 
 tons, or some similar things, have a certain num- 
 ber of marks upon their different sides, so that 
 they bear some resemblance to dice. These are 
 put into a dish, which two persons shake alter- 
 nately, and turn itb contents on the ground. The 
 marks on the sides of the bones, &c. which are 
 uppermost, are then counted ; and, in a givv :* 
 number of throws, he who can count the greatest 
 number of marks, wins whatever is at stake 5 for 
 they never play, without something. 
 
 The Sauteux and Crees are very fond of play- 
 ing at draughts ; and they are considerably skil- 
 ful, at this game. They have, also, many other 
 plays and diversions, which enable tliom to pass 
 away the greater part, of their leisure time, gaily. 
 
 
 f 
 
 it :'. 
 
360 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 r M 
 
 
 E^'-r^r 
 
 f i 111 
 
 The Indians^ generally, appr^ar cheerful and con- 
 tenied, when oppressed by no present difliculty or 
 danger j for they take little thought for the things 
 of the nnorrovF. 
 
 The Indians do not often Jance, -in the day 
 time ; but they frequetntly spend their long win- 
 ter evenings, in this amusement,, accompanied by 
 singing ; and they appear to enjoy themselves 
 fully as well, on such occasions, as civilized peo- 
 ple do, at their more refined assemblies. 
 
 All the Natives are accustomed to make 
 feasts, on various occasions, and particularly when 
 any uncommon or important business is to be 
 transacted. When a band of from thirty to fif- 
 ty tents is collected, scarcely a day passes with- 
 out an entertainment, made by some one oiT the 
 number. 
 
 When a ciiief proposes to make a feast, he 
 invites such guests as he pleases, by sending to 
 them (]ullk, or small pieces of wood. Every 
 person, who attends, brings with him a disband a 
 knife. The chief generally receives his guests, 
 standing, but oftentimes, sitting ; and a person 
 who assists him, seats them, accordirjg to their 
 iges or respectability, the most honourable place 
 being next to the chief. After having made u di- 
 vision of what had been provided, into a num- 
 ber oi parts, eqtvd to the number of persons 
 
4'f I 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 361 
 
 present, the chief lights his pij^e, and smokes 
 a (ew whiffs himself; and he then presents the 
 stem toward the sun, as if offering it to that lumin- 
 ary, and to the earth, and then to his deceased 
 relations, pointing it toward the fire. These cer- 
 emonies being over, he presents it successively to 
 each person present, who smokes a few whiHs m 
 his turn. A small quantity of meat or drink is 
 thon sacrificed, by throwing it into the fire, or on 
 the earth, and the provisions are served round. 
 While the company are partaking of them, the 
 chief sings, and accompanies his song, by the che- 
 che-quy or tambourin. The person who devours 
 Km portion the soonest, is considered as deserving 
 applause. If any cannot cat all that is set before 
 him, as custom does not allow him to leave any 
 thing, he endeavours, by the promise of a reward 
 of tobacco or ammunition, to prevail upon his 
 friends to assist him. These substitutes, it is fre- 
 quently difficult to procure, as the food provided 
 on these occasions, is generally much more than 
 is necessary to satisfy the calls of nature. At 
 some of their feasts, a more rational custom pre- 
 vails, of permitting the guests to carry away what 
 they do not wi*h to eat, of their portions. Th« 
 meat which is generally eaten on these occasions, 
 is that of the beaver ; and the bones of this ani- 
 mal, which are extremely hard, that ramain 
 
 46 
 
 Ih v,l 
 
:j62 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 
 ■^l:-'' 
 
 after the feast, arc burned, lest the dogs by at- 
 tempting to break them, should injure their teeth. 
 
 The pubhc feasts are conducted in the same 
 manner, but with additional ceremony. Several 
 chiefs unite in preparing a suitable place, and in 
 collecting sufficient provisions, for tlie accom- 
 modation of a numerous assemblage. To pro- 
 vide a place, poles are fixed obliquely into the 
 ground, enclosing a sufficient space to hold several 
 hundred, and at times, nearly a thousand people. 
 On these poles, skins arc laid, at the height of 
 twelve or fifteen feet, thus forming a spacious 
 court, or tent. The provisions consist both of 
 dried and of fresh meat, as it would not be prac- 
 ticable to prepare a sufficient quantity of fresh 
 meat, for such a multitude, which, however, con- 
 sists only of men. At these feasts, the guests con- 
 verse only on elevated topics, such as the public 
 interests of the tribe, and the noble exploits of 
 their- progenitors, that they may infuse a publick 
 and an heroic spirit, into their young men. Danc- 
 ing always forms the concluding ceremony, at 
 these festivals ; and the women, who are not per- 
 mitted to enter the place where they are cele- 
 brated, dance and sing around them, often keep 
 ing time with the music within. 
 
 All the different tribes of Indians, on the east 
 side of the Rocky Mountain, believe in the ex- 
 
A. ^^*' 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 363 
 
 istence of one Supreme Being, the creator and 
 governour of the world, whom they call Kitch-e- 
 mon-e-too, or the Great Spirit ; and to him they 
 ascribe every perfection. They consider him as 
 the authourof all good, and as too benevolent to 
 inflict any evil upon his creatures. They render 
 him little worship ; but occasionally suppli- 
 cate of him success in their important undertak- 
 ings, and very rarely, render him some sacrific- 
 es, consisting of some part of their property. ;:l 
 
 They, also, believe in the existence of a bad 
 spirit, whom they call Much-e-mon-e-too, to whom 
 they ascribe great power, and who, they believe, 
 is the authour of all the evils, by which mankind 
 are afflicted. To him, therefore, in order to ob- 
 tain deliverance from evils which they either ex- 
 perience or fear, they offer many, and sometimes 
 expensive, sacrifices. They consider him as ever 
 employed, in plotting against their peace and safe- 
 ty ; and they hope, by luch means, to appease 
 his anger. 
 
 They, also, believe that there arc good and 
 bad spirits, of an inferiour order, who are superi- 
 our to men in the scale of existence, and who 
 have allotted spheres of action, in which they 
 are contributing to the happiness or misery of 
 mankind. These beings they suppose preside 
 over all the extraordinary productions of na- 
 
 
 ■I' 
 
 ;:i 
 
 I 
 
 
364 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 tt 
 
 I'M'; 
 
 ture, such as large lakes, rivers and mountains, 
 and spacjous caverns, &c. and likewise over the 
 beasts, birds, fishes, vegetables, and stones, that 
 exceed the rest of their species in size, or in 
 any other remarkable quality. On this account, 
 they pay to all these objects, some ku.d of 
 adoration. <? . - ' >^^*«i ^ 
 
 They, also, believe in a' future state of ex- 
 istence. Those who, while in the present world, 
 have, according to their ideas of right and wrong, 
 led a good life, will, at death, immediately enter 
 on another and a better state of existence, where 
 they will meet their departed relatives and friends, 
 who will welcome them in the most affection- 
 ate manner, to their happy abode. In the fu- 
 ture world, thoy believe that they shall pos- 
 sess bodies more beautiful and healthy and vig- 
 ourous, than those which they animated on earth ; 
 and that they shall be much more happy, than 
 they were in the present life, since the country 
 in which they will reside, abounds with all kinds 
 of game, which they will be able to take, with 
 little or no trouble, and supplies every gratifi- 
 cgition, in which they now delight, in perfection 
 and without end. 
 
 But those who lead wicked lives on earth, 
 they suppose will, at death, be conveyed into 
 the middle of an extensive swamp or marsh« 
 
 'm..m. 
 
' -4 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 .'360 
 
 where they will, for a considerable length of 
 time, be doomed to wander about alone, in 
 search of their deceased friends. After havinc: 
 siiiTered greatly, from hunger and cold, they 
 suppose that they will, at length, arrive at the 
 pleasant habitation of their departed relatives, 
 and participate with them, in all its delights 
 foreve;, ' ' ' 
 
 The religious observances of the Indians, con- 
 sist of prayers, of feasts, and of a sacrifice of some 
 part of their property. — Their prayers, which 
 are offered only on special occasions, are always 
 addressed to the Supreme Being, or Master of 
 Life. Their religious festivals are attended with 
 much serious ceremony. They commence with 
 opening the medicine bag, and displaying its con- 
 tents, and with smoking out of the sacred stem. 
 Almost very male Indian has a medicine bag, 
 which is commonly made of leather, and is about 
 two (eet long, and a foot broad. The following 
 articles are generally contained in this bag. The 
 principal in importance is a small image, carved 
 to resemble a bird, beast or human being, which 
 they seem to consider as the peculiar residence 
 of their tutelary spirit. This image, they care- 
 fully wrap in down, around which a piece of birch 
 bark is tied, and the whole is enclosed in several 
 folds of red and blue cloth. Every Indian ap- 
 
 k 
 
 r.)\ 
 
 r^> 
 
 Mm 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 If liM IIM 
 
 •^ l» 1112.2 
 !!: lis |||||20 
 
 1.8 
 
 
 1-25 1.4 1.6 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 6" 
 
 ► 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 /a 
 
 ^/,. 
 
 'cS 
 
 VI 
 
 ■^^ %' S' 
 
 V .»' 
 
 »«> -;> 
 
 >■ '* 
 
 ■^ 
 > 
 
 *vr/ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 7 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
366 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE iNDlANS. 
 
 t''fl 
 
 t i ■ i' 
 
 ■^i, 
 
 ■ '- '■ t > i 
 
 :i V 
 
 1 ; 
 
 
 ; 
 
 pears to have a reverence iuv the Image, in his 
 own medicine bag ; but will often speak disre- 
 spectfully of one, belonging to another person. 
 The next article in the bag, is the war cap of its 
 owner, which is decorated with the plumes of 
 scarce birds, and with the claws of the beaver, 
 eagle, &c. It has also a quill or feather, suspend- 
 ed from it, for every enemy, whom its owner has 
 slain in battle. The other contents of the bag 
 are a piece of tobacco, and some roots and other 
 substances, which are supposed to possess valua- 
 ble medicinal qualities. To the outside of the 
 bag, the sacred stem is tied, which is generally 
 about six feet long. This stem is used only for 
 smoking on sacred occasions. This medicine bag 
 is generally hung, in fair weather, on a limb of a 
 tree, or on a stake, at a little distance from the 
 tent ; and an Indian would severely beat his wife, 
 if she should presume to touch it. This is the 
 only article which the men invariably Ct.rry them- 
 selves, when they are decamping. Many oi 
 them pretend, that by examining it, they can 
 foretel future events. — The women, also, have 
 their own medicine bags ; but they are not con- 
 sidered as of a sacred character, and merely con- 
 tain their own articles of medicine. — Smoking out 
 of the sacred stem, is performed with numerous 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 367 
 
 ceremonies, many of which are probably unmean- 
 ing. •:•• ^ 
 
 Some Indians make a promise to the Master 
 of Life, that they will make a feast every spring 
 during a certain number of successive years, 
 if their lives are spared ; and they religiously 
 fulfil such vows. 
 
 Some of their feasts are designed to propitiate 
 the evil spirit, as are nearly all the sacrifices 
 which they make of their property. Sometimes 
 in an open enclosure, on the bank of a river or 
 lake, they make large sacrifices of their property. 
 They choose a conspicuous situation, that those 
 who pass by, may be induced to make their oifcr- 
 ings. If any of the tribe that makes these offer- 
 ings, or even a stranger who is passing these pla- 
 ces, should be in urgent want of any thing which 
 has been deposited as an offering, he is allowed to 
 take it, by replacing it with another article which 
 he can spare, though of inferiour value ; but l;o 
 take wantonly any of those devoted articles, is 
 considered as sacrilege. ; " ^ • '• 
 
 ' There are also certain large rocks and caves, 
 which they never pass without leaving at them 
 some trifling articles ; for they suppose that they 
 are the habitations of some good or evil spirits. 
 Indeed they think that almost every lake, river 
 
 lUllUll;', I 
 
 •',' i I 
 
 (S 
 
 ^t 
 
 
-4-— 
 
 36«J 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 .ih 
 
 1 ky\ 
 
 I 
 
 "■ I Hi 
 
 and mountain has its tutelary spirit, whom 
 they attempt to propitiate, by some ollering. 
 
 All the Natives suppose the earth to be an 
 extensive plain, and that it is always at rest ; and 
 that the sun and moon and piany of the stars con- 
 tinually revolve around it. The sun, they believe 
 to be a large body of fire. To many of the stars 
 they have given names, such as the morning star, 
 the evening star, and the seven stars ; and by 
 their position in the heavens, they are able to de- 
 termine the time of night. They, also, direct 
 their course by them in travelling, in the night sea- 
 son. The stars which they have named, they 
 perceive change their pos'tion continually in the 
 heavens ; and they believe that, like the sun and 
 the moon, they revolve around the earth. Of 
 the motion of the other stars, they take no notice 
 and consider them as stationary. The following 
 is the manner in which they divide a day and 
 night, or twenty four hours : from the first appear- 
 ance of day light to sunrise, from this time till 
 noon, from noon to sunset, from this to midnight, 
 and from midnight to day break. They fire igno- 
 rant of the number of days, which there uire in 
 a year ; but reckon thirteen moons, to compl-Qte 
 the four seasons. 
 
 The following are the names of the four 
 seasons, in the Cree tongue. Winter, A-pe-pook 
 
: '•;? 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 369 
 
 or Pepoon ; Spring, Me-is-ka-mick or Se-gum- 
 uck ; Summer, Nic-pin ; Autumn, Tuck-wa-gin. 
 
 The names, which they give to the moons that 
 compose the year, are descriptive of the several 
 seasons, and in Cree, are the following: 
 
 May, I-ich e Pes-im, Frog Moon. 
 
 June, O-pin-a-wa we Pes-im, the Moon in 
 which birds begin to lay their eggs. 
 
 July, O-pus-ko we Peb-iui, Tlit; Moon when 
 birds cast their feathers. 
 
 August, 0-pa-ko we Pes-im, The Moon when 
 the young birds begin to fly. 
 
 September, Wa-was-kis o Pes-im, The moon 
 when the moose cast their horns; or A-pin-nas-ko o 
 Pes-im, The Moon when the leaves fall off from 
 the trees. 
 
 October, 0-no-chi-hit-to-wa o Pes-im, The 
 rutting Moon; or 0-ke-wa-ow o Pes-im, The Moon 
 when the fowls go to the south. 
 
 November, Ay-e-coop-ay o Pes-im, Hoar frost 
 Moon. Kus-kut-te-io o Pes-im, Ice Moon. 
 
 December, Pa-vvatch-e-can-a-nas o Pes-im, 
 Whirlwind Moon. 
 
 January, Kush-a-pa-was-ti-ca-num o Pes-im, Ex- 
 treme cold Moon. 
 
 February, Kee-chay o Pes-im, The Moon when 
 small birds begin to chirp or sing; or Kich-ee o 
 Pes-im, Big, or old Moon. 
 
 47 
 
 <.!» 
 
 
 ; 1 
 
 
 ii' 
 
 III I 
 
 •i! 
 
 
 m 
 
 Mii.fi! 
 
 a^- lw iii iiir W 
 
370 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 w 
 
 '^^''l(* 
 
 n.:tii 
 
 1 . ■ I 
 • ' ' ', 
 
 -w. 
 
 I' n •' !:•; 
 
 ; ^^1 
 
 
 '■ ,. ■■■ ! , 
 
 I ■; 
 
 '.*• ^i.'UH 
 
 March, Me-ke-su o Pes-im, Eagle Moon. 
 
 April, Nis-ka o Pes-im, Goose Moon, as at this 
 season, these animals return from the south. 
 
 The Indians compute the distance from one 
 place to another, by the number of nights which 
 they have passed, in performing a journey from 
 one to the other. 
 
 All the Natives employ hieroglyphicks, for 
 the purpose of conveying information to those 
 who are distant from them ; and this mode of com- 
 munication, is often of great service to them, as 
 the following circumstances will evince. Portions 
 of each tribe, generally assemble at certain pla- 
 ces, every year. When they separate, they pro- 
 ceed in different directions ; and at every place 
 where they severally encamp, they fix a number 
 of sticks in the ground, leaning towards the 
 place where they next intend to pitch their tents. 
 If they have been successful in the chace, they 
 paint or draw on a piece of bark, the number 
 and kinds of animals which they may have killed, 
 and hang the bark upon a stake. When Indians 
 who have been unsuccessful in regard to killing 
 animals, fail upon these notices, they derive im- 
 portant advantages from them, as they are thus 
 guided to the place, where they may probably 
 obtain a supply of food. Indeed, without some 
 such regulation, the Natives would often be in 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 371 
 
 ■4^ 
 
 1 
 
 ;■?•; 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 i^reat danger of perishing with hunger. On the 
 piece of bark, containing information respecting 
 their past success, and their future course, they 
 leave, also, the date of their encampment, by 
 painting the animal, or whatever else it is that 
 gives name to the then present Moon, or month, 
 and by describing the figure of the Moon at that 
 particular time. And so correct is this mode of 
 conveying intelligence, that a person accustomed 
 to it, will generally ascertain, within from twelve 
 to twenty four hours, the time designed to be 
 specified. 
 
 The Indians possess a quick perception, and 
 strong curiosity, and a very retentive memory; 
 and every circumstance which occurs, and the va- 
 rious objects which present themselves to their 
 view, are noticed and recollected. And, there- 
 fore, at the expiration of twenty years after they 
 have passed only once through a country, to the 
 distance of several hundred miles, they will re- 
 turn by the same way in which they came. 
 Mountains, hills, prairies^ lakes, valleys, remarka- 
 ble rocks, &c. are the objects which they espe- 
 cially notice, and the situation of which, they trea- 
 sure up in their memories ; and by these they are 
 enabled to follow a former track. Almost any 
 Indian, who has passed once through a country, is 
 able to draw so correct a chart of it, with a piece 
 
 ?i,vr 
 
 'I ' H 
 
 •i, >; 
 
 
 ., 
 
 mk 
 
372 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 i^i 
 
 
 ^i^it 
 
 
 of charcoal, on bark, that an entire stranger, by 
 its assistance, would be able to direct his course 
 to a particular place, several hundred miles dis- 
 tant, without varying a league from his object. — • 
 The Natives are never at a loss in regard to the dif- 
 ferent points of the compass, particularly in a woody 
 country, as they well know, that on the north side 
 of the trees, more moss is found, than on the oth- 
 er sides. 
 
 The priest among the Indians, is also a physi- 
 cian and a conjurer or magician. — When he acts 
 as priest, he presides at feasts and funerals. — In 
 the capacity of j)hysician, when sent for, he visits 
 the sick and wounded, and prescribes medicines 
 for their healing, and directs in their application, 
 in doing which he goes through with many cere- 
 monies, with great gravity. If the patient is very 
 ill, he attends him at least every morning, and 
 sings and shakes his che-che-quy, for an hour or 
 two, over his head, making an unpleasant noise, 
 which, it would seem, must do injury to the sick 
 person. These Indian physicians do at times, 
 however, perform distingu'-^hed cures. Their 
 medicines consist of the bark of particular trees, 
 of roots and of herbs, used at some times in their 
 simple state, and at others in a compounded form. 
 For wounds and sores, they use, chiefly, decoctions 
 of roots. The doctor is always well paid for his 
 

 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 373 
 
 iervices, and his profession is the most lucrative 
 of any among the Indians. — When he acts as con- 
 jurer, he shuts himself up in a small cabin, where 
 he is completely concealed from the view, and 
 ■where he reniains silent, during ten or fifteen min- 
 utes. He then begins to sing, and to beat his 
 drum, and continues to do so, for about half an 
 hour. And then, if any one has a question to pro- 
 pose respecting futurity, he is ready to answer it, 
 which, however, he will not do, without a triflino; 
 recompense. It is not uncommon for events to 
 take place, much as these conjurers predict ; but 
 whether this is to be attributed to their natural 
 sagacity, or to accident, or to -^ther circumstances, 
 I pretend not to determine. 
 
 A person who is desirous of becoming a phy- 
 sician or conjurer, is publickly initiated, with much 
 mysterious ceremony. Among these ceremonies 
 are the following. The old physicians prepare 
 an entertainment for a certain number of people ; 
 and for the young candidate, they have a peculiar 
 mess, which consists of a bitch, boiled with her 
 young in her. A part of this animal, he must eat; 
 and they suppose that it possesses the magical 
 power, of inspiring him with a knowledge of the 
 medicinal qualities of all kinds of barks, herbs, 
 roots, &c. — A woman, who wishes to become a 
 midwife, must not only eat a part of the bitch, 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 I'M 
 
374 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THK INDlAiNS. 
 
 -'i' 
 
 m> \ ■ ■ , 
 
 ■,■» 
 
 Iv: jf^- 
 
 I 
 
 m.:. 
 
 'rlvVs 
 
 but must, also, partake of her puppies, and drink 
 of the broth in which they were boiled ; and by 
 this means, she gains, as is supposed, all the knowl- 
 edge requisite to the practice of this difficult art. 
 
 The Indian physicians never fail of leaving in 
 the place where they collect the roots, herbs, &c. 
 which they use as medicines, some trifling article, 
 as a recompense to the guardian spirits, that pre- 
 side over these substances, for what they have 
 taken. An omission of this would, in their appre- 
 hension, destroy most, if not all the efficacy of 
 their medicines. 
 
 The Natives, in general, are very credulous 
 and superstitious. They believe that many of 
 their own medicines, when properly applied, will 
 effijct almost any thing. They think, however, 
 that we possess some, which, for certain purposes, 
 are much more efficacious than their own. All 
 Indians are very desirous of having a numerous 
 offspring ; and, therefore, those, whose wives are 
 barren, will frequently apply to us for such a med- 
 icine as will cause them to become the mothers of 
 children. — The young women, also, make use of a 
 certain powder, of their own composition, for the 
 purpose of engaging or increasing the affections of 
 their favourites, for them. By throwing this even 
 upon a stranger, who is passing, they believe, it 
 will cause him to be in love with them. In a 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 375 
 
 word, they ascribe a power to this medicine, like 
 that, which more refined imaginations have attrib- 
 uted to the arrows of Cupid. The young women, 
 also, employ many other magical arts, to accom- 
 plish the same object. — A woman who is fond of 
 her husband, and who supposes that he has little 
 affection for her, will rub a certain medicine in the 
 palm of her hand, as she is going to bed ; and af- 
 ter he falls asleep, she will lay her hand on his 
 heart ; and the medicine, she thinks, possesses the 
 power of uniting their hearts together, and ol* 
 causing their affection, ever afterward, to be re- 
 ciprocal. 
 
 The Indians have no professional mechanicks 
 among them. Every man is his own artificer, 
 and is able to construct the few domestick man- 
 ufactured articles, which he uses. Some persons 
 among them, more ingenious than the rest, are 
 frequently applied to, to execute some things 
 which require considerable skill, such as putting 
 a stock to a gun ; but they take no compensa- 
 tion, for such a service. Their bows and arrows 
 are neatly constructed. In order to make their 
 arrows round and straight and smooth, after they 
 have been reduced nearly to their proper size 
 with a knife, they use the following method. 
 Th«y take two pieces of wood, of suitable thick- 
 ness, which are several inches long, and cut in 
 
 
 :l|*i 
 
 1 
 
 ,1, 
 
 lii 
 
 mi 
 
 , 'h ■ i 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
376 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 
 lU • 
 
 
 inVf'-i 
 
 f !. 
 
 
 ^4h^ 
 
 each of them a straiorht channel, ot the same 
 size, and of such a shape, that, when both are 
 placed together, they form a circular hole. Over 
 this channel, they spread glue, and upon that 
 they sprinkle sand ; and they repeat the opera- 
 tion, until a complete file is formed. The arrow 
 is then placed in the channel, between the two 
 pieces of wood, and is briskly passed backward 
 and forward, until it is reduced to its proper 
 size. Their pipes are made of a soft stone. 
 The bowl, into which the tobacco is put, is cir- 
 cular, and at the bottom it is flat, and much broad- 
 er. These pipes are frequently carved, in a curi- 
 ous manner. The pipe is connected with its 
 stem by a chain, generally made of brass wire, 
 which the Indians obtain from us, and which 
 hangs loosely from one to the other. The stem 
 is of wood, such as has a small pith ; and as their 
 sacred stems are about six feet in length, the 
 manner in which they extract this pith, deserves 
 to be mentioned. They use, for this purpose, a 
 piece of seasoned hard wood. It is sharpened to 
 a point, at one end ; and at a little distance from 
 this, 't is reduced to a smaller size, by a perpen- 
 dicular cut around it, by which a kind of head or 
 barb is formed. By pushing th'V: in and drawing 
 it out, the pith is gradually extracted. The wood 
 which forms the handle to this barb, is reduced to 
 
ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 377 
 
 same 
 Ih are 
 Over 
 that 
 >pera- 
 I arrow 
 \e two 
 Jkward 
 Di'oper 
 stone, 
 is cir- 
 broad- 
 a curi- 
 ith its 
 wire, 
 which 
 B stem 
 iS their 
 h, the 
 jserves 
 Dose, a 
 ned to 
 6 from 
 lerpe fi- 
 le ad or 
 rawing 
 ! wood 
 ced to 
 
 Ji very small size, as fast only as is required by 
 the length of the hole. Wooden dishes, they con- 
 struct, with crooked knives. The women manifest 
 much ingenuity and taste, in the work which they 
 execute, with porcupine quills. The colour of 
 these quills is various, beautiful and durable ; and 
 the art of dying them, is practised only by females. 
 To colour black, they make use of a chocolate 
 coloured stone, which they burn, and pound fine, 
 and put into a vessel, with the bark of the hazel- 
 nut tree. The vessel is then filled with water, 
 and into it the quills are put, and the vessel is 
 placed over a small fire, where *he liquor in it is 
 permitted to simmer, for two or three hours. 
 The quills are then taken out. ^ni put on a board, 
 to dry, before a gentle fire. After they have 
 been dried and rubbed over with bear's oil, they 
 become of a beautiful shining black, and are fit 
 for use. To dye red or yellow, they make use of 
 certain roots, and the moss which they find, on a 
 species of the fir tree. These are put, together 
 with the quills, into a vessel, filled with water, 
 made acid, by boiling currants or gooseberries, 
 &c. in it. The vessel is then covered tight, and 
 the liquid is made to simmer over the fire, for 
 three or four hours, after which the quills are 
 taken out and dried, and are fit for use. Feath- 
 
 48 
 
 
 ^'W- 
 
 f:(| 
 
 
 I il:''-^/ 
 
 •"■,•1 
 I 1,1 
 
 |> til 111' 
 
■"■■"/- 
 
 378 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANA. 
 
 , : M 
 
 ers, they also dye in a similar manner, and these 
 colours never fade. 
 
 Many of the Indians, particularly those on the 
 west side of the Rocky Mountain, who have not 
 procured steels from us, for the purpose of strik- 
 ing fire, produce it, by placing one end of a 
 small dry stick against another piece of dry 
 wood ; and by rolling it briskly between their 
 two hands, the friction, in a short time commu- 
 nicates fire to dry hay or touchwood, placed 
 around it. 
 
 Among the Indians, there are poets, who 
 are ulso musicians. The person who composes 
 a song, does it by singing it over alone, in the 
 air which he designs shall accompany it ; and 
 he repeats this exercise, until he has committed 
 both sufficiently to memory. After that, he fre- 
 quently teaches it to. others. Songs are fre- 
 quently composed for particular occasions, such 
 as feasts, &c. Among the Carriers, the'*) are 
 often several competitors for this honour; and 
 he who composes the best song, is rewarded, 
 while the unsuccessful poets are treated with 
 derision. The subjects of their songs are gene- 
 rally love and war, though they have some whinh 
 are ludicrous and obscene. They have a great 
 variety of songs ; and I have known an Indian 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 379 
 
 1 
 
 if 
 
 !'• 
 
 
 who could sing at least two hundred, and each 
 song had its peculiar air. Female poets are not 
 common among them. Some of the women, how- 
 ever, are excellent singers. 
 
 No two, of the fifteen tribes of Indians, with 
 whom I have been acquainted, speak precisely 
 the same language ; but the languages of nine of 
 them only, seem to be radically different. There 
 is only a variation of dialect among the Crees, 
 Sauteux and Muscagoes. The same is true of 
 the Chipewyans, Beaver Indians, Sicaunies, Ta- 
 cullies and Nateotetains. The language spoken 
 by the Sauteux, Crees and Muscagoes is by far 
 the most copious and manly, but that used by 
 the Assiniboins, is the most harmonious and ele- 
 gant. • V 1 
 
 Every tribe has its particular tract of coun- 
 try ; and this is divided again, among the several 
 families, which compose the tribe. Rivers, lakes 
 and mountains, serve them as boundaries ; and 
 the limits of the territory which belongs to each 
 family are as well known by the tribe, as the 
 lines which separate farms are, by the farmers, in 
 the civilized world. The Indians who reside in 
 the large plains, make no subdivisions of their ter- 
 ritory; for the wealth of their country consists of 
 buffaloes and wolves, which exist in plenty, every 
 
 
 if J. ' 
 
 m 
 
 'ilLi '^' 
 
 !' t( 
 
380 
 
 ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS. 
 
 Ik'r 
 
 
 i; / ^ 
 
 h. 
 
 
 
 .m K 
 
 where among them. But the case is otherwise, 
 with the inhabitants of the woody countries. 
 These people have nothing with which to pur- 
 chase their necessaries, excepting the skins of ani- 
 mals, which are valuable for their fur ; and should 
 they destroy all those animals in one season, they 
 would cut off their means of subsistence. A pru- 
 dent Indian, whose lands are not well stocked with 
 animals, kills only what are absolutely necessary 
 to procure such articles as he cannot well dispense 
 with. . ' 
 
 -v The foregoing account of the Natives, having 
 a principal reference to the tribes on the east side 
 of the Rocky Mountain, it may be proper, in con- 
 cluding it, to make a few general remarks on 
 the country which they inhabit. 
 
 •I That part of it which lies between the 44th 
 and the 52d degrees of north latitude, is a plain 
 or prairie country, almost wholly destitute of tim- 
 ber, of any kind. It is, in general, sufficiently dry 
 for any kind of cultivation ; and is covered with 
 grass, which commonly grows to the height of 
 from six inches to a foot, though in some marshy 
 places it is much higher. This grass furnishes 
 food for innumerable herds of buffaloes, which are 
 constantly roving about, from ,tlace to place, fol- 
 lowed by thousands of wolves, and many grey and 
 
 h 
 tl 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 381 
 
 black bears, that are always on the watch, for fa- 
 vourable opportunities to fall upon and devour 
 them. The frrey bear, on account of his strength 
 and ferocity, may well be denominated the mon- 
 arch of the forest ; and should he at any time find 
 an hundred wolves or more, feeding on the car- 
 case of the buffaloe, the sight of him would cause 
 them all to retire, with all the humility and sub- 
 mission of conscious weakness, and he would be 
 permitted to make his meal, at his- leisure and in 
 quietness. 
 
 The country lying between the 52d and the 
 70th degree o/" north latitude, may be denominat- 
 ed mountainous. Between its elevated parts, how- 
 ever, there are valleys and plains, of considerable 
 extent, and which are covered with timber, of a 
 small growth, more than one fourth part of which 
 is the spruce fir. The other kinds of timber are 
 aspin, poplar, birch, hemlock, spruce, cedar, willow, 
 and a little pine. Much of this country, in its less 
 elevated parts, is covered with large rocks and 
 stones, with so thin a coat oC earth upon them, 
 that it could not be cultivated. I am of opinion, 
 however, that one fourth, if not one third part, of 
 the whole of this great extent of country, might 
 be cultivated to advantage. The soil, in general, 
 is tolerably good ; and, in many places, is not ex- 
 
 I 
 
 
382 
 
 ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 
 ceeded in richness, by any part of North America. 
 I think it probable, that as much as one sixth part 
 of the whole of this country, is covered with wa- 
 ter. The great number of large lakes, which are 
 scattered over it, and of noble streams, which pass 
 through it, afford a water communication, in al- 
 most every direction. • ^ ' 
 
 ' As this country is so extensive, it is natural to 
 suppose, that the climate is various. In all parts 
 it is considerably cold. In latitude 54° or 55° the 
 mercury, for several successive days, in the month 
 of January, is as low as '^0 or 32 degrees below 
 zero. There are not, however, more than ten or 
 twelve days, during a winter, that are so severely 
 cold. The summers are sufficiently warm and 
 long, to bring most kinds of grain and vegetables 
 to perfection. Indian corn will never ripen far- 
 ther north, than about latitude 53°. 
 
 The following fact may be interesting to some 
 persons, as perhaps no similar discovery has been 
 made, equally far north. In the summer of 1816 
 there was found, on the margin of a small stream 
 that falls into Peace River, in about the 56th de- 
 gree of north latitude, and the 118th of west lon- 
 gitude, a part of the thigh bone of a Mammoth, 
 which was about eighteen inches in length, and 
 
 which weighed twenty eight pounds. During that 
 
 •*■ 
 
ACCOUNT OP THE INDIANS. 
 
 383 
 
 summer, the waters rose very high, in all the 
 streams in that region ; and when they subsided, 
 the banks, in many places, fell in. It was in such 
 a place, that this bone was found. It was sent to 
 Canada, and I believe, thence to England. 
 
 
 ^■'1 
 
 W: 
 
 t ^ ■ , 
 
 m 
 
 i ■ t 
 
 ill' 
 
 ns 
 
i ! h 
 
 
 . .? 
 
 
 ' 1 
 
 ;.,.1 
 
 ''' f 
 
 A\A 
 
 , i 
 
 ,1'^ 
 
 ' 'li 
 
 '-:! m 
 
 ;l 1 
 
 il ,iii 
 
 
 ^■r 
 
-- .»■ 
 
 A SPECIMEN 
 
 s 
 
 1 ■!' !■ 'l 
 
 
 /->.>J^- 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CREE OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE, 
 
 WHIQH IS SPOKEN, BY AT LEAST THREE FOURTHS OF THE INDIANS OF 
 THE NORTH WEST COUNTRY, ON THE EAST SIDE OF THE 
 
 ROCKY MOUNTAIN. 
 
 
 ■' ^ i 
 
 Good Spirit 
 
 Evil Spirit 
 
 Man 
 
 Woman 
 
 Young man 
 
 Young womaft 
 
 Infant 
 
 Head 
 
 Forehead 
 
 Cheek 
 
 Chin 
 
 Hair 
 
 Eye 
 
 Nose 
 
 49 
 
 Kitch-e mon-e-too 
 Mutch e-mon-e-loo 
 A-ye nu 
 Es-qui 
 
 Os-kin-e-gew ' 
 Os-kin-e-gis-qui 
 A wa-si^ 
 Is-te gwen 
 Mis kaw-tick 
 Mon-o-wy 
 Ta-lis.kun 
 Mis-te-ky-ah 
 Mis kee-sick 
 Mis-kee-won 
 
 ■:>l 
 
 IH ■'■ i 
 
 
 > 
 
 II n 
 
386 
 
 SPECIMEN OF THE CREC 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 lU'f 
 
 
 In' 
 
 SI 
 
 
 
 Nostril 
 
 O-tay-e-cum 
 
 Mouth 
 
 Mee-toon 
 
 Tooth 
 
 Mee-pit 
 
 Tongue 
 
 0-tay-e-nee 
 
 Beard 
 
 May-ist won 
 
 Brains 
 
 We-it-tip 
 
 Ear 
 
 Me-ta-wa-ki 
 
 Neck 
 
 Me-qui-yow 
 
 Throat 
 
 Me kco-ta-gun 
 
 Arms 
 
 Mis-pe-tot. n 
 
 Hands or fingers 
 
 Me-chee-chee 
 
 Thumb 
 
 JVIe-se-chee-chon 
 
 Nail 
 
 Mis-cus-see 
 
 Side 
 
 Ose pe-ki 
 
 Back 
 
 Mis-pis-quon 
 
 Belly 
 
 Mot-ti 
 
 Thigh 
 
 Me-pwam 
 
 Body 
 
 Me-yow 
 
 Knee 
 
 Mitch-e-quon 
 
 Leg 
 
 Mis-kate 
 
 Foot 
 
 Me- sit 
 
 Heart 
 
 Me-tay 
 
 Spirit or soul 
 
 Me-cha-chake 
 
 Father 
 
 ta-we 
 
 Mother 
 
 E-ka-we 
 
 Son 
 
 E-qus-sis 
 
 Daughter 
 
 E-ta-nis 
 
 Brother (elder) 
 
 E-stays 
 
 Sister (elder) 
 
 E-miss 
 
 Brother (younger) ) 
 Sister (younger) 5 
 
 JSshim 
 

 OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 387 
 
 Grand Father 
 
 Grand Mother 
 
 Uncle 
 
 Aunt 
 
 Nephew 
 
 Niece 
 
 Father in law 
 
 Mother in law 
 
 Brother in law 
 
 Sister in law 
 
 Friend 
 
 Husband 
 
 Wife 
 
 Old man 
 
 Old woman 
 
 Chief 
 
 Thief 
 
 Coat 
 
 Shirt 
 
 Breech cloth 
 
 Leggin 
 
 Garter 
 
 Shoe 
 
 Hat or cap 
 
 Handkerchief 
 
 Mittens (a pair) 
 
 Petticoat 
 
 Bracelet 
 
 Ring 
 
 Ear knobs 
 
 Comb 
 
 E -rao-shome 
 
 0-korne 
 
 0-ko-mis 
 
 E to-sis 
 
 E-to-sim 
 
 E-to-sim-es-qui 
 
 E-sis 
 
 E-se-goose 
 
 Ish-taw 
 
 Ltim 
 
 E'wich-i-wa-gun 
 
 Ne-na-bem 
 
 E-che-magun 
 
 Kis-a ye-new 
 
 No-to-ca-ow 
 
 O-ke-mow 
 
 Ke-mo-tisk 
 
 Pis-is-cow-e-gun 
 
 Pe-puck-e-wy-un 
 
 As-si-an 
 
 Me-tass 
 
 Sis-ca-pis-soon 
 
 Mos-ca-sin 
 
 As-to-tin 
 
 Ta-bis-ka«gun 
 
 Us-tis-uck 
 
 Kis-ke-sa-ki 
 
 Us-ton 
 
 Us-ton-is 
 
 Ta-be-ta-soon 
 
 Se-ca-hoon 
 
 , 111, 
 
 ■ 
 
 II .1 
 
 
 p .*' 
 
 ' h 
 
388 
 
 SPECIMEN OF THE CREE 
 
 
 Needle 
 
 Pin (headed needle) 
 
 Scissors 
 
 Blanket 
 
 Gown 
 
 Horse 
 
 Buffaloe 
 
 Ferret 
 
 Skunk 
 
 Elk 
 
 Moose 
 
 Carriboo 
 
 Beaver 
 
 Wolverine 
 
 Squirrel 
 
 Mink 
 
 Otter 
 
 Wolf 
 
 Hare 
 
 Martin 
 
 Bear 
 
 Fisher 
 
 Lynx 
 
 Hog 
 
 Porcupine 
 
 Fox 
 
 Musk rat 
 
 Cat 
 
 Mouse 
 
 Meat 
 
 Dog 
 
 Sa bo-ne-gun 
 
 Is te-goine Sa-bo-ne-gun 
 
 '^usco-ma-to-in 
 
 ./a-bo e-un 
 
 Pa-to-nis 
 
 Mish-ta-tini 
 
 Moos-toosh 
 
 Se-goose 
 
 Se-hawk 
 
 A-was-kis 
 
 Moose-wa 
 
 At-tick 
 
 A-misk 
 
 Ke-qua a-kisk 
 
 An-nick-O'chass 
 
 At-cha-kass 
 
 Ne-kick 
 
 My-e-gun 
 
 Wa-poos 
 
 Wa-pis-ton 
 
 Musk.quaw 
 
 0-chake 
 
 Pe-su 
 
 Ko-koosli 
 
 Ka-quaw 
 
 Muck-ca-sis 
 
 Wa-chesk 
 
 Ka-sha-kess 
 
 A~pe-co-sis 
 
 Wee-as 
 
 At-tim 
 
 . .i-.!;^*LJ t-.i)^:.A..A.«L:i.'',.- 
 
OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 389 
 
 Bitch 
 
 Kis kc-sis 
 
 Eagle 
 
 Me-ke-su 
 
 Duck 
 
 Sfe-sip 
 
 Crow 
 
 Kaka ku 
 
 Swan 
 
 Wa-pis-see 
 
 Pheasant 
 
 O-kis-kew 
 
 Bird 
 
 Pe-a-sis 
 
 Outard 
 
 Nis-ka 
 
 White goose 
 
 Why-why 
 
 Grey goose 
 
 Kilch-a-ca-pi-sis 
 
 Partridge 
 
 Pe-yew ^^'- 
 
 Water hen 
 
 Se.kip 
 
 Pigeon 
 
 O-ma-mee 
 
 Egg 
 
 wa.wa 
 
 Pike 
 
 I-e-ne ke-no-see 
 
 Carp 
 
 Na-ma-be 
 
 White fish 
 
 At-tick cum-mick 
 
 Pickerel 
 
 O-cow 
 
 Fish (in general) 
 
 Ke-no'see 
 
 Fish roes 
 
 Wa.quock -^ 
 
 Fish scales 
 
 Wa-vva-ki 
 
 Trout 
 
 Na-ma-goose 
 
 Frog 
 
 Lick 
 
 Wasp i 
 
 A-mo 
 
 Turtle 
 
 Mis-ca-nack "^ 
 
 Snake 
 
 Ke-na-bick 
 
 Ratde snake 
 
 Si-si-qua ke-na-bicl 
 
 Toad 
 
 , Pe-pe-quot-ta-tu 
 
 Lizzard 
 
 O-sick-ke-ask 
 
 Owl 
 
 Oh-ho 
 
 Fire steel 
 
 Pe-v/a-bisk Ap-pi£ 
 
 I 
 
 .0 . 
 
 
 • t:4, 
 
 ■!:.■ 
 
 'ir ' S 
 
 
 "i, 'ti- 
 ll I' 
 
 K 1 , 
 
 ifS! 
 
 I 
 
 
390 
 
 SPECIMEN OF THE CREE 
 
 I ,'» 
 
 ii.'r 
 
 'i*i 
 
 
 Fire wood 
 
 Mis-tick 
 
 Cradle 
 
 Wa-wa bis-soon 
 
 Dagger 
 
 Ta cuch-e-gun 
 
 Lance 
 
 Se-ma gun 
 
 Bow 
 
 A cha-pee 
 
 Arrow 
 
 At toos 
 
 Fish hook . . 
 
 Quas-qui-pitch-e-gun 
 
 Axe 
 
 Chee-ki-e-gun 
 
 Hoe 
 
 Pe-mich-e chee-ki-e-gun 
 
 Net 
 
 I-ap-pee 
 
 Tree (wood standing \ 
 upright; I 
 
 Mis-tick A-che-mus-so 
 
 Paddle 
 
 1 
 
 A-buy 
 
 Canoe 
 
 0-see 
 
 Birch bark 
 
 Was-qui 
 
 Bark 
 
 Wy-a-kisk 
 
 Touch wood 
 
 Poos-sa-gun 
 
 Gun flint 
 
 Chak-is-say-e-gun 
 
 Grass 
 
 Mos-ko-se-ah 
 
 Leaf (of a tree) 
 
 Ne-pee-ah 
 
 Raspberries 
 
 I-os-cun-nuck 
 
 Strawberries 
 
 0-ta-me-nah 
 
 Whortleberries 
 
 I-e-ne-me-nah 
 
 Choke berries 
 
 Tuck-quy-me-ne-na-nah 
 
 Gooseberries 
 
 Sa-sa-bo-min-uck 
 
 Grapes 
 
 Sho-rain-is-uck 
 
 Ashes 
 
 Pe-co 
 
 Fire 
 
 Es-quit-tu 
 
 Current 
 
 Kis-se-che-win 
 
 Rapid 
 
 Pow-is-tick 
 
 Winter 
 
 Pe-poon 
 
H 
 
 OR KNI9TENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 391 
 
 Spring 
 
 Summer 
 
 Autumn 
 
 Island 
 
 Lake 
 
 River 
 
 Sun 
 
 Moon (night sun) 
 
 Stars ^w..,'....™ ^ 
 
 Sky » ; 'W ." 
 
 Clouds i 
 
 Thunder 
 
 Lightning ' ^^ 
 
 Rain 
 
 Snow 
 
 Hail 
 
 Calm 
 
 Day light 
 
 Morning 
 
 Day 
 
 Night 
 
 Noon (half the day) 
 
 Sun setting 
 
 Midnight 
 
 Snow 
 
 Drift 
 
 Ice 
 
 Frost 
 
 Dew 
 
 Water 
 
 World 
 
 Me-os-kum-ick 
 
 Ne-pin 
 
 Tuck-wa-gin 
 
 Me-nis-tick 
 
 Sa-ki-e-gun 
 
 Se-pee 
 
 Pe-sim 
 
 Tip-is-co pe-sim 
 
 At-tack 
 
 Kee-sick 
 
 Ma-ma-musk-wow 
 
 Pe-is-su 
 
 Wa-was-sis-quit-a-pi-u 
 
 Ke-mo-won 
 
 Mis-poon 
 
 Sa-sa-gun 
 
 I-was-tin 
 
 Wa-bun 
 
 Ke-kc-jape 
 
 Ke-se-cow 
 
 Tip-is-cow 
 
 A-be-tow Ke-se-cow 
 
 Pung-kis-se-mo 
 
 A-be-tow Tip-is-cow 
 
 Ko-nah 
 
 Pe-won 
 
 Mis-co-mi 
 
 Ya-ya-co-tin 
 
 A-co-sa-pa-ow 
 
 Ne-pee 
 
 Mis-si-wa-as-kee 
 
 Mir I 
 
 i, ! 
 
 ; 1, h 
 
 ■; ill 
 I i ! . 
 
 .MJi 
 
 "^"JTWiiitwfif 
 
392 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE CREE 
 
 * ,' ' t • 
 
 W 
 
 Mountain 
 
 Wa-chce 
 
 Sea ; ■ : 
 
 Kitch-e-g§-ming ^ • 
 
 Portage ## . 
 
 0-ne-gape - 
 
 Rivulet - . * 
 
 Se-pe-sis *i««M 
 
 Sand . ;-g^ 
 
 . Ya-cow ^^*«*nI.' 
 
 Earth | r^^^--'_ 
 
 As-kee ^-^ 
 
 Heat r 
 
 ^ Ke-sG-ta-ow, or # 
 
 ,■•.•;'■ fi^'^r - . 
 
 Ke-jas-ia-QW 
 
 Tomorrow fe - ' 
 
 Wa-bunk *.^**^ 
 
 Yesterday 
 
 O-la-ca-sin ' ^ 
 
 Today - s> u?r 
 
 A-nouch ke-se-cow 
 
 Bone , "vi^,-^.v£;-.-. ■<- 
 
 Ose-kun ;.-t:^t 
 
 Broth * V > 
 
 Mich-r-ma-boi t 
 
 Provision *, * 
 
 Mc-chim 
 
 Feast ■ f^ ... - ; V 
 
 We-ko-ka-ow * ♦vi^S 
 
 Grease or oil 
 
 •Pe-me ^-^ - a*i«»H 
 
 Marrow fat • > 
 
 Ose-kun-e-pe-iiK!? 
 
 Marrow ,,,^,. 
 
 We-ne ■■^- ■'■ ^^-^i^ 
 
 Sinew - i^'; 
 
 As-tis 
 
 Lodge or tent 4 
 
 . Me-ke-wapc . «^ Cb 
 
 Bed ■:^. T.i?^ 
 
 Ne-pa-win #*- 
 
 Door 
 
 . Es-qua-tem i***^ 
 
 Dish 
 
 We-a-gun * *, 
 
 Spoon or ladle .. 
 
 ' A-me queii 
 
 Plate ^^^^ «^ 
 
 Na-puck-e-a-gun 
 
 Knife . '-lij^" 
 
 Mo-cum-mon ^ 
 
 Fork '■ , ;- t^K 
 
 Chis-ti-e-gun 
 
 Kettle 
 
 As-kick 
 
 Teakettle > 
 
 Se-sip as-kick 
 
 Sack or bag 
 
 Mus-ca-moote 
 
 Trunk 
 
 Mis-tick-o-wis 
 
OR KNISTENEUX TO^'GUE.. 
 
 393 
 
 Table 
 
 Chair 
 
 Fort or house 
 
 Floor 
 
 Window 
 
 Chimney 
 
 Cupboard 
 
 Keg 
 
 Sledge 
 
 Cincture or belt 
 
 Socks 
 
 '"',th 
 
 iOl 
 
 Thread 
 Smoking bag 
 Portage sling 
 Powder 
 Balls 
 Shot 
 
 Powder horn 
 Shot bag 
 Gun 
 Ramrod 
 
 Gun c?sc 
 Pistol 
 Steel trap 
 Grave 
 Grave yard 
 Spirits 
 Wine 
 Milk 
 
 Mi t-te-sou-w i n-Si-tic 
 
 Ta-e-tup-pe-win 
 
 Was-ky-e-gun 
 
 A-nas-cun 
 
 Was-sa-ne-mon 
 
 Cou-ta-na-bisk 
 
 A-cou-cha-gun 
 
 Muck-kuck 
 
 Ta-bin-ask 
 
 Pa-qua-ta-hoon 
 
 As-se-gun ;j, 
 
 Mon-ne-too-wa-gen 
 
 As-se-bape 
 
 Ap-pit 
 
 Ap-pe-can 
 
 Kus-ke-ta 
 
 Mo-sus-se-nu 
 
 Nis-cus-se-ne-uck 
 
 Pa-che-pa-quon 
 
 Pa-tus-se-non 
 
 Paw-skis-se-gun 
 
 Se-se-quit-is-ca-we-al-gun- 
 
 a-tick 
 As-pick-e-na-gun 
 Paw-skis-se-gun-is 
 Pe- w a-bisk- won-a-e-gu ri 
 Ni-e-now 
 A-qua-os-cun 
 Squit-te-wa-bo 
 Sho-min-a-bo 
 To-toos-a-bo . 
 
 #■ 
 
 It 
 
 
 Hi'i:: 
 
 mmf' 
 
 m 
 
 111 It i 
 
 • .::?n 
 
 50 
 
1 
 
 394 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE CREE 
 
 , . r 
 
 ft *. 
 
 
 
 
 Breasts 
 
 Butter 
 
 Flour or bread 
 
 Indian corn 
 
 Potatoe 
 
 Turnip 
 
 Onion 
 
 Carrot 
 
 Tea or medicine water 
 
 Sugar 
 
 Wild rice 
 
 Glass or mirror 
 
 General or great chief 
 
 Soldier 
 
 Home 
 
 Iron 
 
 Money 
 
 Book or letter 
 
 Medicine 
 
 Lover 
 
 Pipe 
 
 Tobacco 
 
 Weed for smoking 
 
 Part (of a thing) 
 
 Slave 
 
 Orphan 
 
 Peninsula 
 
 Relation 
 
 Ship 
 
 Sword 
 
 Stone 
 
 To-toos 
 
 To-toos-a-bo pe-me 
 
 Pa-qui-se-gun 
 
 Mun-da-nin-uck 
 
 Aske-pwow-wa 
 
 0-te-se-kan 
 
 We-cha-kus-ka-se 
 
 Os-kate-ask 
 
 Mus-ca-kee-w&-bo 
 
 Se-se-bas-quit 
 
 Mus-co-se-me-nah 
 
 Wa-bim-oon 
 
 Kitch-e-o-ki-mow 
 
 Se-m§,-gun-is 
 
 E-ke-n^ke 
 
 Pe-w8l-bisk 
 
 So-ne-ah 
 
 Mish-e-my-e-gun 
 
 Mus-ca-kee 
 
 Jim-is-sim 
 
 Os-poa-gun 
 
 Chis-ta-mow 
 
 A-cha-c&-che-puck-wow 
 
 Puck-ee 
 
 A-wa-kun 
 
 Ke-watch-e-w^-sis 
 
 Kis-is-tig-guy-ow 
 
 E-to-tame 
 
 Na-pe-quon 
 
 She-maw-gun 
 
 As-se-ne 
 
 iu2j 
 
■ 
 
 OR KNI8TENEUX TONGUE. 395 
 
 1 
 
 Store 
 
 Tut-tow-o-way-gum-mick ; \0 
 
 'J 
 
 White earth 
 
 Wa-but-toon-isk ^■ 
 
 
 Tatler 
 
 0-zom-e-toon-ew 
 
 
 Liar 
 
 Ka-ke-as-ku 
 
 
 Bad man 
 
 Much-e-pe-raa !,is-su i. 
 
 1 
 
 Good man 
 
 Me-u-pe-ma-tis-su f 
 
 Earthquake 
 Track (of the feet) 
 
 An-ne-mus-kum-ke-py-you j . 
 I-a-sa-se-ta-you j 
 Mays-ke-now .f 
 
 
 Road or path 
 
 
 Whirlwind 
 
 Cus-tin '\ 
 
 ■> 
 
 Good weather 
 
 Me-u-ke-si-cow i j 
 
 i 
 
 Bad weather 
 
 Mut-cha-ke-si-cow ii; 
 
 
 Male 
 
 Na-bew 
 
 i 
 
 ' 
 
 Female 
 
 O-ne-cha-nee '. 
 
 :■ 
 
 Cloudy 
 
 A-quos-quon 
 
 / 
 
 Windy 
 
 E-o-tin 
 
 
 North 
 
 Ke-wa-tin 
 
 
 South 
 
 Sa-win-oke 
 
 
 East 
 
 Cos-kow-kos-take 
 
 
 West 
 
 Ke-wa-noke 
 
 Straight 
 
 Qui-esk 
 
 
 Crooked 
 
 Wa-kow 
 
 ' 
 
 Red 
 
 Me-quow ,, . 
 
 ■A 
 
 Blue 
 
 Che-ba-tock-wow \ 1 
 
 
 Yellow 
 
 1 1 
 O-saw-wow i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Green 
 
 As-ke-tuck-wow 
 
 f 
 
 Black 
 
 Kus-ke-ta-wow ' L 
 
 ^'.^ 
 
 Ugly 
 
 My-a-te-su I 
 
 11 
 
 Handsome 
 
 Cut-e-wa-se-su 
 
 
 Beautiful 
 
 Me-u-nog-won 
 
 
 Deaf 
 
 Na-mo-ta-w&-cow i|: 
 
 ' .,', 
 
 • 
 
 • '1 
 
 i 
 
396 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE CREE 
 
 it * 
 
 
 
 Good natured 
 
 Pregnant 
 
 Fat or fleshy 
 
 Large 
 
 Small 
 
 Short 
 
 Tall 
 
 Merry 
 
 Melancholy 
 
 Long 
 
 Strong 
 
 Weak 
 
 Cowardly 
 
 Brave 
 
 Lean 
 
 Foolish 
 
 Sensible 
 
 Stiff 
 
 Sick 
 
 Dead 
 
 Alive 
 
 Miserable 
 
 Upper 
 
 Lower 
 
 All 
 
 Half 
 
 Drunken 
 
 English 
 
 French 
 
 Equal or alike 
 
 Far off 
 
 Me-wa-tick-e-su 
 
 4 
 
 Pwow-wew -w 
 
 We-in-no 
 
 Me-chus-ca-wa-ke-su 
 
 Up-pe-se-se-su 
 
 Che-mis-se-su 
 
 Me-sick-e-tu 
 
 Me-wa-tick-won 
 
 Pe-kis-ca-tum 
 
 Keen-wow 
 
 Mus-ca-wow 
 
 Na-m^ mus«ca-wow 
 
 Sa-koo-ta-ov/ 
 
 So-ca-te-ow 
 
 Se-kut chu 
 
 Ke-squiow 
 
 I-e-ne-su 
 
 Se-ta-wow 
 
 A-quis-su 
 
 Ne-poo 
 
 Pe-ma-tis-su * 
 
 Kit-te-ma-ga-su 
 
 Is-pe-mink 
 
 Tup-pa-sis 
 
 Kuck-e-ow ^ 
 
 A-be-tow 
 
 Ke-squi-ba-ow 
 
 A-qui-as-se-wock 
 
 Wa-mis-to-go-she-wock 
 
 Ta-bis-kootch 
 
 Wy-yow 
 
OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 397 
 
 Nigh fl 
 
 Kis-se-wake 
 
 Few or little 
 
 U|)-pa-sis 
 
 Fatigued - 
 
 Ty-is-co-sin 
 
 Good 
 
 Me-wa-shin 
 
 Bad 
 
 My-a-ton 
 
 Avaricious 
 
 Sa-sa-kis-su 
 
 Generous 
 
 May-ye-kis-ku 
 
 Greedy 
 
 Ka-shock-ca-ow 
 
 Hidden 
 
 Ilas-so 
 
 Lazy 
 
 Kit-te-mew 
 
 Lame 
 
 Mils kip.pi-you 
 
 Much 
 
 Me-chet 
 
 Flat 
 
 Nah-puck-ow 
 
 Round 
 
 Wa-way-ye-you 
 
 Quick 
 
 Ka-ke-e-pe 
 
 That 
 
 A-o-co 
 
 This 
 
 Muck-o-mao 
 
 Too little 
 
 0-som-up-pe-sis 
 
 Too much 
 
 0-som-me-chet 
 
 Deep 
 
 Tee-mew 
 
 Shallow 
 
 Pake- wow 
 
 Frightful 
 
 Sa-sis-ke-nsl-guon 
 
 Wicked 
 
 - My-a-che-ta-ow 
 
 Difficult 
 
 I-ye-moii 
 
 First 
 
 Ne-kan 
 
 Behind 
 
 O-take 
 
 Last 
 
 Squi-atch 
 
 More 
 
 Me-nali 
 
 Better 
 
 Ka-me-wa-shin 
 
 Good scented 
 
 We-cum-a-gun 
 
 Each 
 
 Pa-pa-uck 
 
 
 I 
 
 if'. 
 
 m 
 
 
 illl 
 
 il 
 
 
 i;:.i 
 
 «!^' 
 
 
 h'l' 
 
 i^ ^ 
 
398 
 
 SPECIMEN OF THE CREE 
 
 .(I I 
 
 
 l^ 
 
 
 ,'lif* 
 
 I f^ 
 
 
 ^■^■<* 
 
 
 Other 
 My own 
 Your own 
 His or her own 
 Their own 
 Our own 
 We? 
 Who? 
 What? 
 1 am angry 
 I fear 
 To rejoice 
 To hear 
 To see 
 To smell 
 To taste 
 To feel 
 To come in 
 To sirtg 
 To halloo 
 To whistle 
 To weep 
 To laugh 
 To sigh 
 To arrive 
 To depart 
 Assist me 
 To beat 
 To believe 
 To rattle 
 To suck 
 
 Pa-toosh 
 
 Nene-ty-un 
 
 Kene4y-un 
 
 We-ah-one-ty-un 
 
 We-ah-wow-one-ty-un 
 
 Nene-ty-un«e-non 
 
 Ne-on 
 
 A-way-nah 
 
 Ka-qui 
 
 Ne-kis-se-wa-sin 
 
 Ne-koos-ta-chin 
 
 Me-wa-tum 
 
 Pa-tura 
 
 Wa-ba-tum 
 
 Me-a-tum 
 
 Goo-chis-tuin 
 
 Goo-te-num 
 
 Pe-to-ca 
 
 Ne-cum-moon 
 
 Ta-boi 
 
 Ques-qui-su * 
 
 Ma-too 
 
 Pa-pee 
 
 Ma-ca-ta-tum 
 
 Tuck-a-shin 
 
 Che«boi-ta-ow 
 
 Ne-sho-cum-a-win 
 
 O -torn -me- wow 
 
 Ta-boi-tum 
 
 Se-se-quin 
 
 No-nu 
 
 
OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 399 
 
 To puke 
 
 To carry 
 
 I ain cold 
 
 To take courage 
 
 To dance 
 
 To jump 
 
 To slide 
 
 To run 
 
 To walk 
 
 To ride (on horse back) 
 
 To finish 
 
 To starve 
 
 To fall 
 
 To strike fire 
 
 To find 
 
 To loose 
 
 To paddle 
 
 To give 
 
 To take 
 
 To hate 
 
 To keep 
 
 To know 
 
 To leave 
 
 To love 
 
 To go to bed 
 
 To arise from bed 
 
 To sit down 
 
 To get up 
 
 To marry 
 
 To play 
 
 To make peace 
 
 Pa-cum-moon 
 
 Ni-och-e-ga-ow 
 
 Ne-cow-a-chin 
 
 Ye-ag-wa-me-se 
 
 Ne-me-too 
 
 Quas-quit-ta 
 
 So-squotch-e-wew 
 
 Pe-me-pa-tow 
 
 Pe-mo-ta-ow 
 
 Tay-tup-pew 
 
 Po-ne-ton 
 
 Ka-wa-cut-tis-so-wock 
 
 Punk-a-sin 
 
 Se-ka-ta-ow 
 
 Mis-cuni 
 
 Won-e-ton 
 
 Pim-is-cow 
 
 Me-yow 
 
 0-te-nah 
 
 Much-a-ye-mow 
 
 Kun-ne-wa-e-ten 
 
 Kis-kae-ta-gwun 
 
 Nuck-a-tum 
 
 Sa-ke-how 
 
 Ka-wish-e-mo 
 
 0-nis-caw 
 
 Ap-pee 
 
 Pus-se-co 
 
 Wee-ke-mow 
 
 Ma-te-way 
 
 We-tus-ke-to-wuck 
 
 I-' i' 
 
 >_.^U( ^ 
 
400 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE CREE 
 
 f- 
 
 "■•Si 
 ['ilk '•>?' 
 
 ; ! 
 
 .-j!1 
 
 To make war 
 To pray 
 To take notice 
 To respect 
 To sail 
 To steal 
 To sleep 
 To talk , 
 To lie 
 Togo 
 To lend 
 To groan 
 To beat 
 To cut 
 To cover 
 To dispute 
 To give 
 To do 
 To tie 
 To unite 
 To sew 
 To sit down 
 To fall 
 To work 
 To till 
 To sell 
 To come 
 Always 
 Because 
 By and bye 
 Doubtless 
 
 Na-to-py-e-wuck 
 
 I-ye-nie-how 
 
 Cun-ne-w&-bum 
 
 Ke-tay-e-mow 
 
 A-cus-iiui-moon 
 
 Ke-mo-tu 
 
 Ne-pow 
 
 A-c he-moon , 
 
 Ke-as-ku 
 
 Ke-to-fain 
 
 Ow-we-hin 
 
 Ma-ma-pin-ow 
 
 0-tom-me-wew 
 
 Kis-ke-sah 
 
 A-quoon e-hah 
 
 Ke-ka-to-wuck 
 
 May-gu 
 
 Go-she-hah 
 
 Tuck-oop-e-tah 
 
 Ap-pu-co-nah 
 
 Kus-ke-qua-so 
 
 Up-pu 
 
 Pun-ga'sin 
 
 0-se-che-ga-ow 
 
 Ne-pahow 
 
 Ut-ta-wa-ow 
 
 Us-tom-e-tay 
 
 Ka >ke-ca 
 
 A-o-co-chee 
 
 Pitch-isqua 
 
 Mos-kootch 
 
 I -iftt 
 
OR KNISTENEUX TONGUE. 
 
 401 
 
 t; 
 
 Formerly 
 
 Gy-ass 
 
 Here 
 
 Otaw 
 
 How 
 
 Ta-ne-say 
 
 How many 
 
 Ta-ne-tut-to 
 
 Immediately 
 
 Ka-qui-ah-ho 
 
 Lately 
 
 Gy-ass«an-e-watch 
 
 Never 
 
 Na-mow-we-katch 
 
 No 
 
 Na-maw 
 
 Yes 
 
 Ah-hah 
 
 Not yet 
 
 Na-mas-qua 
 
 Not at all 
 
 Na-maw-waw-wSltch 
 
 Good for nothing 
 
 Na-maw-ca-qui-me-wa-sin 
 
 There 
 
 A-quo-tah 
 
 Truly 
 
 Ta-boi 
 
 Together 
 
 Ta-bis-cootch 
 
 Where 
 
 Ta-ne-tay 
 
 Yet 
 
 Kaa-bitch 
 
 Oh 
 
 Ah! 
 
 Now and then ) 
 
 
 Sometimes > 
 
 I-os-cow 
 
 Seldom ) 
 
 
 Thank you 
 
 We-na-cum:m2l 
 
 What is that ? 
 
 . Ka-qui-o-ko 
 
 What now ? 
 
 Ta-ne-me-ne-kick 
 
 Who is there ? 
 
 A-way-na-nah 
 
 Get out of the way 
 
 A-wis-se-tay 
 
 What is your name ? 
 
 Ta-ne-tick-o-way-on 
 
 Where are you going ? 
 
 Ta-ne-la ke-weto-tain 
 
 I wish to depart 
 
 Ne-we-ke-won , 
 
 What do I hear ? 
 
 Ka-qui-ka-pa-tum-mon 
 
 Will you trade ? 
 
 Ke-we-ut-la-woo-chee '-i 
 
 SI 
 
 I 
 
 
 "... _ y.' ';i^' 
 
 ,(■.., 
 
 '>'■' n] 
 
NUMERICAL TERMS 
 
 OF THE CREES OR KNISTENEUX, 
 
 I .'Mi 
 
 
 One 
 Two 
 
 Thre€ 
 
 Four 
 
 Five 
 
 Six 
 
 Seven 
 
 Eight 
 
 Nine 
 
 Ten 
 
 Eleven (and one mofe) 
 
 Twelve 
 
 Thirteen 
 
 Fourteen 
 
 Fifteen 
 
 Sixteen 
 
 Seventeen 
 
 Eighteen 
 
 Nineteen 
 
 Twenty 
 
 Twenty one 
 
 Pa-uck 
 
 Ne-sho 
 
 Nish-to 
 
 Nay-o 
 
 Nay-ah-nun 
 
 Ni-co-twa-sick 
 
 Ta-boo-coop 
 
 T-a-na-na-on 
 
 Ka-gate me-ta-tut 
 
 Me-la-tut 
 
 Me-ta-tut pa-uck o sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut ne-sho sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut nish-to sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut nay-o sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut nay-ah-nun o sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut ne-co-twa-sick o sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut ta-boo-coop tah-to sawp 
 
 Me-ta-tut i-a-nai-na-ow tah-to sawp 
 
 Ka-gate me-ta-tut tah-to sawp 
 
 Ne-sit-te-no 
 
 Ne-sit-te-no pu-uck o sawp 
 
m 
 
 'I 
 
 NUMERICAL TERM& 
 
 403 
 
 Twenty two &c. 
 
 Thirty 
 
 Forty 
 
 Fifty 
 
 Sixty 
 
 Seventy 
 
 Eighty 
 
 Ninety 
 
 Hundred 
 
 One thousand 
 
 Nc-sit-te-no ne-sho sawp 
 Nish-to mit-te-no 
 Nay-o mit-te-no ^ ■ 
 
 Nay-ah-nun o mit-te-no 
 Ne-co-twa-sick o tut-to mit-te-no 
 Ta-boo-coop o tut-to mit-te-no 
 I-a-na-na-ow o tut-to mit-te-no 
 Ka-gate me-ta-tut o mit-te-no 
 Me-ta-tut-to mit-te-no 
 Me-ta-tut tut-to mit-te-no 
 
 ,^' t 
 
 I u". 
 
 A SPECIMEN OF 
 
 THE TACULLY OR CARRIER TONGUE. 
 
 Man 
 
 Ten-nee 
 
 Woman 
 
 Cha-ca 
 
 Young maa 
 
 Chilk 
 
 Infant 
 
 Chu-tun 
 
 Head 
 
 Pit-sa 
 
 Eyes 
 
 O-now 
 
 Hair 
 
 Ote-zega 
 
 Nose 
 
 Pa-nin-chis 
 
 Teeth 
 
 Oh-goo 
 
 Tongue 
 
 Tsoo-ll 
 
 ■:_v.-i; 
 
 n., 
 
 I^V' 
 
 ii. ''• 
 
 
 ■11 
 
404 
 
 SPECIMEN OF THE TACULLY 
 
 .f ■'■^' 
 
 ' ' -I 
 
 Ears 
 
 0-cho 
 
 Hands 
 
 o-ia 
 
 Belly 
 
 0-put 
 
 Legs 
 
 0-ca-chin 
 
 Knees 
 
 kale 
 
 Feet 
 
 Oca 
 
 Nails 
 
 E-Ia-ki 
 
 Grand father 
 
 Ut-che-yan 
 
 Grand mother 
 
 Ut-soo 
 
 Father 
 
 Appa 
 
 Mother 
 
 Un-nung-coo 
 
 Son 
 
 E-yaze 
 
 Daughter 
 
 E-a-cha 
 
 Brother 
 
 EchiU 
 
 Sister 
 
 E-taze 
 
 Nephew- 
 
 Quaze 
 
 Grand child 
 
 E-chi 
 
 Husband 
 
 E-ki 
 
 Wife 
 
 Ay-eye ^ 
 
 Aunt 
 
 A-ki 
 
 Old man 
 
 O-yun 
 
 Blood 
 
 Sko 
 
 Path or road 
 
 Tee 
 
 Chief 
 
 Me-u-tee 
 
 Excrement 
 
 Chou 
 
 Urine 
 
 Al-luze 
 
 Coat 
 
 Chute 
 
 Breech cloth 
 
 Chon 
 
 Leggins 
 
 Ca-chy 
 
 Shoes 
 
 Kis-coot 
 
 Hat or cap 
 
 Tcha 
 
 .^4ik 
 
s 
 
 OR CARRIER TONGUE. 
 
 405 
 
 Handkerchief 
 
 Za-zo 
 
 Mittens 
 
 Pat 
 
 Petticoat 
 
 Cha-ca-chute 
 
 Bracelet 
 
 Nal-ton 
 
 Comb 
 
 Chil-cho 
 
 Ring 
 
 Ne-ia-ta-ah 
 
 Needle 
 
 A-a-bate-so 
 
 Scissors 
 
 Clay-yee 
 
 Blanket 
 
 A-a-pi 
 
 Frock or robe 
 
 Nal-tay 
 
 Goat or sheep 
 
 Spye 
 
 Ferret 
 
 Nah-pye 
 
 Moose 
 
 Ten-nee 
 
 Cariboo 
 
 0-chee 
 
 Beaver 
 
 Cha 
 
 Otter 
 
 A-bay 
 
 Hare 
 
 Kah 
 
 Martin 
 
 Chin-nee 
 
 Bear 
 
 Suss ' 
 
 Lynx 
 
 Was-say 
 
 Porcupine 
 
 Cho 
 
 Musk rat 
 
 Cha-kate 
 
 Fisher 
 
 Chin-ne-cho 
 
 Mouse 
 
 Ten-ne-tay 
 
 Meat or flesh 
 
 Ut-son 
 
 Dog 
 
 Cling 
 
 Bitch 
 
 Clee-chay 
 
 Crow 
 
 Tate-sun 
 
 Swan 
 
 Chin-cho 
 
 Outard 
 
 Hok 
 
 Partridge 
 
 Teel 
 
 
 ' ! 
 
 ! ,r 
 
406 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE TACULLT 
 
 1^: 
 
 i:: 
 
 U \ 
 
 ■M: 
 
 Water hen 
 
 .* 
 
 Chel 
 
 Eggs 
 
 O-ga^e 
 
 Loon 
 
 Tad-joy 
 
 Sturgeon 
 
 Clay-cho 
 
 White fish 
 
 Clo 
 
 Fish (in general) 
 
 C loo -lay . 
 
 Fish roes 
 
 0-koon 
 
 Trout 
 
 Pilt 
 
 Salmon 
 
 Tai-loo 
 
 Fire* steel 
 
 Kone 
 
 Wood or tree 
 
 Tuch-in 
 
 Dagger 
 
 Fa-she-al 
 
 Bow 
 
 Al-tung 
 
 Arrow- 
 
 Ka 
 
 Axe 
 
 Cha-chill 
 
 Net 
 
 Clim-pelt 
 
 Paddle 
 
 Chell 
 
 Canoe (bark) 
 
 Al-la-chee , 
 
 Canoe (wooden) 
 
 Tuch-in'chee 
 
 Touch wood 
 
 Ke!-cha 
 
 Gun flint 
 
 Sa-zo-en 
 
 Grass or hay 
 
 Clo 
 
 Whortloberriejj 
 
 Chil-cho 
 
 Ashes 
 
 Clees 
 
 Fire 
 
 Kone 
 
 Winter 
 
 Yas-ca 
 
 Autumn 
 
 Ta-ca-ta 
 
 Summer > 
 
 Ole-ol-ta 
 
 Sun 
 
 sa 
 
 Moon (night sun) 
 
 Cha-ol-cus sll 
 
 Stars 
 
 Clum 
 
OR CARRIETl TQIVGUE. 
 
 407 
 
 Thunder 
 
 Date-nee 
 
 Day 
 
 Ja-ness 
 
 Rain 
 
 Na-ol-ton 
 
 Snow 
 
 Na-chaz» 
 
 Night . 
 
 Al-cheese ! { 
 
 Morning 
 
 Pun-e-la 
 
 Sun setting 
 
 Na-ah 
 
 Fee 
 
 Clum or Ton 
 
 Water 
 
 Too 
 
 World 
 
 Ton-ate-suck 
 
 Mountain 
 
 Chell 
 
 Sea 
 
 E-a-pack ' 
 
 Earth 
 
 Ote-luss 
 
 Heat 
 
 0-zell 
 
 Tomorrow 
 
 Pun-tay 
 
 Yesterday 
 
 . Hul-ta 
 
 Today 
 
 • Un-tit 
 
 Broth 
 
 Ta-zell 
 
 Grease 
 
 Kane-loo 
 
 Sinews 
 
 Tsay 
 
 Tent or lodge 
 
 Yah 
 
 Bed 
 
 Kus-tee 
 
 Door 
 
 Ta-tee 
 
 t- 
 
 Dish 
 
 Tsi 
 
 Kettle 
 
 O-sa 
 
 Spoon or ladle 
 
 Chin-ne-sko 
 
 Knife 
 
 Cles-tay 
 
 Sack or bag 
 
 Aze-la 
 
 Trunk or box 
 
 Chin-kale 
 
 Chimney 
 
 Pa-kone-tas-kone 
 
 Fort or house 
 
 Yock 
 
 li^^ 
 
 f:^' 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ::>: ■' 
 
 1- 1 1 
 
 
 
 ,;i' 
 
408 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE TACULLY 
 
 i 
 
 U • 
 
 1^. 
 
 
 i ' ■ 
 
 m If 
 
 4 ■ 
 
 V ■^ ' 
 
 Sledge 
 
 Sclu-sa 
 
 Cincture or belt 
 
 Say 
 
 Socks 
 
 Ca-tell ' 
 
 Cloth 
 
 Tell-kuz-za 
 
 Thread 
 
 A-a-bate-say 
 
 Garters 
 
 Chal-chase 
 
 Medicine 
 
 You 
 
 Portage sling 
 
 Ka-nal-ta 
 
 Powder 
 
 Al-la-cha 
 
 Balls 
 
 Ca-tee 
 
 Shot 
 
 No-do-tone 
 
 Powder horn 
 
 Da-ka 
 
 Shot bag 
 
 No-do-to-bost-la 
 
 Gun 
 
 Al-tee 
 
 Gun case 
 
 Al-tee-zus 
 
 Steel trap 
 
 Cha-co 
 
 Stench 
 
 lU-chun 
 
 Skin 
 
 0-zuss 
 
 Melancholy 
 
 Cho-let-nee 
 
 Spirits 
 
 Kone-too 
 
 Breasts 
 
 Tsoo 
 
 Flour or bread 
 
 Clays 
 
 Vegetables 
 
 Hon-elt-ya 
 
 Heart 
 
 0-gee 
 
 Entrails 
 
 At-zee 
 
 Home 
 
 E-yok 
 
 Iron 
 
 Cles-tay 
 
 Letter or book 
 
 Dush-lush 
 
 Lover 
 
 Na-lio-hul-ya 
 
 Pipe 
 
 Da-kate-say 
 
 Tobacco 
 
 Da-ka 
 
OR CARRIER TONGUE. 
 
 409 
 
 Orphan 
 
 Till-in-yaze 
 
 Ship 
 
 Chee-cho 
 
 Stone 
 
 Tsay 
 
 Gooseberries 
 
 Ton-gueese 
 
 Strawberries 
 
 In-gee 
 
 White earth 
 
 Clis-paw 
 
 Windy 
 
 Days-chee 
 
 White 
 
 Yell 
 
 Red 
 
 Ten-il-cun 
 
 Black 
 
 Tel-kuz-zay 
 
 Yellow 
 
 Dat-leese 
 
 Ugly 
 
 Ne-chay 
 
 Handsome 
 
 Ne-zo 
 
 Deaf 
 
 Ot-so-hoo-lah 
 
 Pregnant 
 
 El-chon 
 
 Short 
 
 En-took 
 
 Long 
 
 En-yea ■'.e 
 
 Strong 
 
 Na-chet 
 
 Weak 
 
 At-too-na-chet 
 
 Heavy 
 
 Na-kull 
 
 Foolish 
 
 Wos-se-nay 
 
 Sensible 
 
 Ho-na 
 
 Sick 
 
 . Tut-tay 
 
 Dead 
 
 Tas-si 
 
 Alive 
 
 An-na 
 
 Miserable 
 
 TiMen 
 
 All 
 
 Tche-ow 
 
 Drunken 
 
 Too-nis-to 
 
 French 
 
 Ned-do 
 
 Distant 
 
 Nee-zolt 
 
 Nigh 
 
 Nill-took 
 
 '^l 
 
 if' 
 
 
 
 52 
 
 1 W' 
 
410 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE TACULLY 
 
 
 I ' >. 
 
 
 t'^-'l." 
 
 I? 
 
 
 Few or little 
 
 Shameful 
 
 Fnli 
 
 Good 
 
 Bad 
 
 Avaricious 
 
 Much 
 
 Quick 
 
 Deep 
 
 Shallow 
 
 I am angry 
 To hear 
 To see 
 To smell 
 To feel . 
 To eat 
 To drink 
 To sing 
 To halloo 
 To whistle 
 To weep 
 To laugh 
 To arrive 
 To depart 
 Assist me 
 To beat 
 To suck 
 To be cold 
 To dance 
 To walk 
 It is done 
 
 En-soole 
 
 Clou-cha 
 
 Dees-pun 
 
 Oo-choh 
 
 Ni-ka-tel 
 
 Kane-chee 
 
 Clyne 
 
 Ut-oho-in-tin 
 
 Ta-kull 
 
 Toohoos-ka 
 
 Son-e-chee 
 
 At-tade-zuck 
 
 Nee-tlen 
 
 In-chis 
 
 Oan-ton 
 
 A-al 
 
 Ate-ni 
 
 Ut-chiii 
 
 Ca-an-ni 
 
 Yool 
 
 A-chuck 
 
 At-lo 
 
 Natell 
 
 Ni-ne-tell 
 
 Sly-en e lay 
 
 Chil-tul-ta 
 
 El-took 
 
 Na-zes-lay 
 
 Nate-tah 
 Ni-yah 
 
 A-chel-isl-la 
 
OR CARRIER TONGUE. 
 
 411 
 
 To starve 
 To fall 
 I will go 
 Come with me 
 To give 
 To take 
 To hate 
 I do not know- 
 To keep 
 To know 
 To love 
 To lie down 
 To arise from bed 
 To sit down 
 To be merry 
 To paddle 
 To steal 
 
 To sleep ^: 
 
 Go away 
 To talk 
 To lie 
 That 
 My own 
 Your own 
 Our own 
 I or me 
 Thou or thee 
 We 
 Above 
 Because 
 Bye and bye 
 
 Ne-cho-al-hoo-lah 
 
 Nal-chet 
 
 O-che-to-se-ah 
 
 An-nee 
 
 Won-nel-lay 
 
 Ill-shute 
 
 O-cha-dus-se-ne 
 
 Tuch-a-hoo-ny 
 
 Hone-lay 
 
 At-dy e-tay 
 
 Qui -see or Kar,e-chee 
 
 Sin-tee 
 
 Ta-dern-yal ' 
 
 Sin :avv 
 
 Ous-ta 
 
 Atto 
 
 Way-to 
 
 Na-mis-tee 
 
 Us-se 
 
 Yal-tuck 
 
 On-chit 
 
 Intee 
 
 Se-ilt-sun 
 
 Ne-ne-ilt sun 
 
 Wa-ne-jlt-sun 
 
 Se 
 
 Ne or Ye 
 
 Wa ne K 
 
 Ya-took 
 
 A-doo-aw 
 
 Kud-dah 
 
 (I- f -'-I 
 
 I 
 
 mi 
 
 IV ' 
 
 ifi 
 
412 
 
 SPECIMEN OP THE CARRIER TONGUE. 
 
 ''ir^.. 
 
 
 
 Enough 
 
 Formerly 
 
 Here 
 
 How 
 
 How many 
 
 Immediately 
 
 No 
 
 Yes , .' '^ 
 
 Not yet 
 
 There 
 
 Truly , 
 
 Too little 
 
 Too much 
 
 Where 
 
 Yet 
 
 1 thank you 
 
 What is that ? 
 
 What is the matter ? 
 
 Who is there ? 
 
 What is your name ? 
 
 Where are you going? 
 
 Let us depart 
 
 Will you trade ? 
 
 Whence are you 
 
 Coo-la or Ate-sel 
 
 ui-ia 
 
 Ne-chan 
 
 Tuch-ah 
 
 Ta-nil-suck 
 
 An-tit 
 
 Own-too 
 
 Ah-ah or A-ma 
 
 K«tch'ah-own-too 
 
 En-chan 
 
 Al-late-ne 
 
 Slan-SDol 
 
 Stan-clyne 
 
 En-chay 
 
 Ka-cba 
 
 Se-na-chai-le-ah 
 
 Tee 
 
 Ta-how-chS. 
 
 Te-ween-tal 
 
 Ba-zee 
 
 Ne-cha-en-e-gal 
 
 Na-zo-tell 
 
 Ba-che-o-kate 
 
 Ne-cha-si-il-tal 
 
 I'd"' 
 
i>t ' 
 
 TH£ 
 
 NUMERICAL TERMS 
 
 OF THE TACULLIES. 
 
 '\ \M 
 
 One 
 
 Clot-tay 
 
 
 Two 
 
 Nong-ki 
 
 1 ■■ iifc <■« 
 
 Three 
 
 Toy - ' 
 
 Four 
 
 Ting-kay 
 
 
 Five 
 
 Skoon-e-ly 
 
 1 
 
 Six 
 
 Al-ke-tate 
 
 1 ■ . 
 
 Seven 
 
 Te-kal-ti * 
 
 
 Eight 
 
 Al-ke-tin-ga 
 
 11- 
 
 Nine 
 
 Cio-hoo-Iy 
 
 
 Ten 
 
 Lan-ne-zy 
 
 
 Eleven 
 
 0-un-na Clot-tay 
 
 
 Twelve 
 
 0-un-na Nong-ki 
 
 ■ 
 
 &c. to ^ ' 
 
 
 , 
 
 Twenty 
 
 Not-won-ne-zy 
 
 t' ; 
 
 Twenty one 
 
 Nol-won-ne-zy 0-at Clo 
 
 !i|f 
 
 Twenty two 
 
 Not-won-ne-zy '0-at Nong-ki 
 
 &:c. to 
 
 
 '•- '''il 
 
 Thirty 
 
 Tat-won-ne-zy-ah 
 
 ■ I 
 
 Forty 
 
 Tit-won-ne-zy-ah 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 Fifty ^ 
 
 Skoo-nee-lot-wr i-ne-zy 
 
 Sijtty 
 
 Al-ke-tate- won-ne-zy 
 
 
 Seventy 
 
 Tee-kal-ty-o tate-won-nc-zy 
 
 
 Eighty 
 
 Al-ke-ting-o-lale- won-ne-zy 
 
 "r 
 
 Ninety 
 
 Clo-hoo-ly-o tate-v\'on-ne-zy 
 
 / 1 
 
 Hundred 
 
 Na-ne-zy-o-ne-zc-ah 
 
 
 Thousand 
 
 Lan-ne-zy-o-lan-ne-zy-O'lan-ezy 
 
 1 t 
 
A CONCISE ACCOUNT OF 
 
 THE PRINCIPAL ANIMALS 
 
 WHICH ARE FOUND IN THE NORTH WESTERN PART OP 
 
 NORTH AMERICA. 
 
 Buffaloes are found in great numbers, in all 
 the plain or prairie countries, on both sides of 
 the Rocky Mountain, as far north as about lati- 
 tude fifty six or seven. The bull is larger than 
 an ox, has short black horns, and a beard under 
 his chin ; and his head is filled with a long, fine 
 hair, which falls over his eyes, and gives him a 
 frightful aspect. On his back is a bunch or excres- 
 cence, commencing a little forward of his haunch- 
 es, the highest part of which, is over his shoul- 
 ders, and which terminates at the neck. His 
 ivhole body is covered with a long hair or wool, 
 of a dark brown colour, the whole of which, 
 and particularly that which is on the fore 
 part of the body, would answer well for man- 
 ufacturing coarse cloths and blankets. The 
 head of the buffaloe is larger than that of a 
 bull, his neck is short, his breast is broad ; and 
 his body decreases towards the buttocks. He 
 will generally flee, at the approach of a man, ex- 
 
 tA 
 
 m 
 
 11 
 
 T«Hm 
 
 « 
 
■ * 
 
 416 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 11 ^ 
 
 i.^ 
 
 
 
 ^Hl 
 
 cepting the male, at the rutting season, when he 
 becomes ferocious. 
 
 The flesh of the buffaloe is excellent food; 
 the hide is applied to many important uses ; and 
 the long soft hair, the natives put into their shoes, 
 about their feet, which supplies the -place of 
 sociis ; and it is fully as warm. The speed of the 
 buffaloe, is much the same as that of an ox ; -and 
 vhen he runs he inclines his fore feet considera- 
 bly on one side of his body, for a short distance, 
 and then shifts them upon the other, and contin- 
 ues thus, alternately to change them. - 
 
 Those that remain in the country between 
 the Sisiscatchvvin and Peace rivers, are called the 
 wood buffaloes, because they inhabit a woody 
 country ; and they are considerably smaller than 
 those, which inhabit the plains. They are, also, 
 more wild and difficult to approach. 
 
 The horses, which the Indians possess, came 
 originally from Mexico, and arc of the Spanish 
 breed. They are in general stout, and well built ; 
 and many of them are of great speed. They are 
 very serviceable to the Natives in the plain coun- 
 tries, are used to transport their property from 
 place to place ; and on them they run down and 
 kill their game. These animals will subsist, dur- 
 ing the winter months, on the grass which they 
 find under the snow, which is seldom more than 
 six inches deep, on the plains. There are but 
 
 ■\* -*."^*.i 
 
ACCOUNT OF A.flMALS. 
 
 417 
 
 few horses to be found, farther north than latitude 
 fifty four or five. 
 
 There arc three kinds of bears, the grey, the 
 brown or chocolate coloured, and those which 
 are perfectly black. The grey bears, which are 
 by far the largest, are about the size of a common 
 cow ; and are remarkably strong built, and very 
 ferocious. They at-tack human beings, ab well 
 as all kinds of beasts, that fall in their way ; and 
 in their terrible paws, the resistance, even of the 
 male buffaloe, weighing fourteen or fifteen hun- 
 dred pounds, is utterly vain. Three or four of 
 the Natives join together whenever they attempt 
 to hunt them, and each man is well armed, with 
 u musket and a long spear. 
 
 The grey bears differ but little in shape, from 
 those of a smaller kind and of a different colour. 
 Their heads are rather shorter, in proportion to 
 their bodies, their noses are less pointed ; and 
 they are more stoutly built. Their colour is a 
 beautiful lively silver grey. Their flesh has not 
 60 good a flavour as that of the black bear, it 
 being more rank. The natives, formerly, mado 
 use of their skins for beds ; but now, they always 
 exchange them with us, for blankets, &c. 
 
 The grey, in common with the other kinds of 
 bears, pass the winter months, without taking any 
 kind of nourishment. Their retreats are by the 
 sides of the roots of large trees,, that h9 ^e fallen 
 
 53 
 
 ii 
 
 M 
 
 ■»«■*■(■ 
 
418 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 U 
 
 \ -ilS. I 
 
 
 .i«< 
 
 k 
 
 t 
 
 i I 
 
 
 
 down, or in the caverns of rocks ; and in some in- 
 stances they dig holes, in the sides of hills. These 
 habitations arc enclosed on every side, with the 
 branches of trees, filled in with moss, &lc. so as 
 completely to surround the animal, excepting his 
 nose, where a small hole is le"', to enable him to 
 breathe fresh air. They leave these retreats, as 
 soon as the warm weather comes on in the spring, 
 when they are apparently as fat, as they were 
 when they entered them, in the preceding autumn. 
 This flesh has less substance, probably, as 
 they loose most of it, soon after their egress ; 
 though they then devour, with an appetite ren- 
 dered strong by a winter's abstinence, whatever 
 comes in their way. Their food, however, at this 
 season, is not so abundant as it is afterwards, as 
 they generally live upon roots, and the diiferent 
 kinds of fruit. They eat, likewise, ants and honey, 
 whenever they meet with that which is made by 
 bees and wasps. They rarely eat animal food. 
 
 The brown and black bear diiFer little, except- 
 ing in their colour. The hair of the former, is 
 much finer than that of the latter. They usually 
 flee from a human being. One, however, that 
 has been wounded, or a female that has cubs, will 
 attack a pursuer. The brown and the black bear, 
 climb trees, which the grey, never does. Their 
 flesh is not considered so pleasant food as that of 
 the moose, baffaloe or deer ; but their oil is high- 
 
 
ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 419 
 
 ly valued by the Natives, as it constitutes an arti- 
 cle at their feasts, and serves, also, to oil their 
 bodies, and other things. Occasionally, a bear is 
 found, the colour of which is like that of a white 
 
 sh 
 
 eep. 
 
 and the hai 
 
 ;h I 
 
 le nair is mucn longer than that of 
 the other kinds which have been mentioned ; 
 though, in other respects, it differs not at all from 
 the black bears. 
 
 There are two kinds of wolves, one of which 
 is rather larger than a stout dog, and the other is 
 not more than half as large. Their legs are long, 
 in proportion to thf^ir slander bodies. Their 
 heads, also, are long ; and their noses are sharply 
 pointed. Their tails are long and bushy. The 
 colour of the larger kind, is generally a light grey ; 
 but some of them, are nearly white. The small- 
 er kind are commonly a silver grey ; but some of 
 them are nearly black. They are all very vora- 
 cious ; but they never attack a human being; un- 
 less when suffering greatly from hunger. They 
 display great ingenuity and cunning ; generally, 
 herd together, especially in the winter season ; 
 and make a hideous noise, particularly when thir- 
 ty or forty of them are employed in surrounding a 
 herd of the buffaloe or deer, in order to drive 
 them down a precipice. They frequently take 
 this method to make these animals their prey ; 
 and, in order to carry a project of this kind into 
 execution, they form lines, by separating to a cer- 
 
 
 lit- 
 
 I 
 
 ni 
 
 iJk 
 
420 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 
 tain distance from each other, and frequently 
 make noises, resembling the human voice ; and 
 they appear to act in concert, as regularly as the 
 Indians themselves do, when they drive the buffa- 
 loes into their yards. 
 
 The wolves know the effects of a discharge 
 of a musket ; and when a hunter fires his ^un, at 
 a buffaloe or deer, in a few minutes, from ten io 
 tweniy of them will rush to the spot whence the 
 report proceeded ; and, at some times, they are 
 so pinched with hunger, that while standing be- 
 side his game, it is with difficulty that the hunter 
 preserves it from being devoured by them. 
 
 There are three sorts of foxes, which, howev- 
 er, differ only in their colour. The most common 
 are of a yellowish red, some are of a beautiful sil-^ 
 vergrey, and some in the more northern latitudes, 
 are almost black. The last, are by far tho most 
 valuable. 
 
 The Indians have several kinds of dogs. Those 
 which they make use of in hunting, are small, their 
 ears stand erect: and thev are remarkable for 
 their fidelity to their masters. — They now have a 
 large breed among them, which were brought in- 
 to their country from Newfoundland, by the En- 
 glish, when they first established themselves on 
 Hudson's Bay ; and from that place they have been 
 spread into every part of the country, east of the 
 Rocky Mountain. They are used only as beasts 
 
 ■A . ^t' 
 
 i'M 
 
 K 
 
ACCOUNT OP ANIMALS. 
 
 421 
 
 at 
 
 of burthen. In the summer season, they carry 
 loads upon their backs; and in the winter Srvhen 
 there is snow, they draw them upon sledges. 
 These sledges are made of two thin boards, turn- 
 ed up at the fore end, and joined closely together, 
 so that this vehicle is twelve or fourteen inches 
 broad, and seven or eight (eet in length. The 
 collar, by which the dog& draw, is much like that 
 with which a horse is usually harnessed, in the 
 civilized parts of the country. Their weight is, 
 generally, from sixty, to one hundred pounds. 
 
 The cat or lynx, in its shape and nature re- 
 sembles the domestic cat ; but it is much larger, 
 it has long legs, and a long body ; but a very 
 short tail. Its hair is exceedingly fine, considera- 
 bly long, and of a lively and beautiful, silver grey 
 colour. When full grown, the cat will weigh thir- 
 ty five or forty pounds ; and when fat they are 
 excellent food. They generally live on mice, the 
 dead fish which they find along the rivers and 
 lakes, and partridges and hares. In taking their 
 prey, they manifest all the adroitness and activity 
 of the domestic cat. In some years, these ani- 
 mals are very numerous; and, frequently, the fol- 
 lowing year, very few can be found. 
 
 There are two species of the deer. One of 
 these, denominated the jumping deer, is like those 
 which are found in the northern parts of the Unit- 
 ed States; and none of them are found farther 
 
 "W^ 
 
 V' 
 
422 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 ii 
 
 I!' If 
 
 north than about latitude 48° or 50°. The other 
 kind is sometimes called the red deer or the elk. 
 They are about the size of a horse ; and their 
 bodies, are shaped like those of the jumping deer. 
 Their tails are remarkably short, being not more 
 than three inches long. Their hair, which is 
 three inches in length, is of a light grey colour, 
 and is as coarse as that of the horse. The horns 
 of these animals grow to a prodigious size, (heir 
 extreme points are about six (eet asunder; and 
 they branch out before and behind, like those of 
 the common deer. Their bodies are well pro- 
 portioned, their air is noble ; and, on the whole, 
 they are the most majcstick animal, that I have 
 ever seen. They shed their horns, in the month 
 of February or March ; and by August, the new 
 ones are nearly at their full growth. Notwith- 
 standing the size and strength of these animals, 
 and the means of defence with which they are 
 furnished, they are as timorous as a hare. Their 
 skins are very useful, and will dress as well as 
 that of a buck. They feed on grass and buds, 
 and the twigs of trees. Their ilesh is tender, and 
 of a fine flavour. 
 
 The moose is, in size, next to the buffaloe, 
 among the animals of the North West. The 
 body is in shape, somewhat like that of an ox, 
 raw boned, with high haunches ; but its neck and 
 head resemble those of a horse. The ears are 
 
ACCOUNT or ANIMALS. 
 
 423 
 
 large, like those of an ass. The horns are flat, 
 and branch out onl) behind ; and are shed every 
 year. The feet resemble those of the deer, ex- 
 cepting as they are much longer and broader ; 
 and when it puts them on the ground, the hoofs 
 separate, two or three inches. The head is about 
 two feet long. The upper is much longer than 
 the under lip of this animal ; and the nostrils are 
 so wide, that a man might thrust his hand into 
 them, to a considerable distance. The colour of 
 the moose is a light grey, mixed with a deep red, 
 and the hair is so elastic, that its shape cannot be 
 altered by beating. The flesh of this animal is 
 exceedingly good food, it being easy of digestion, 
 and very nourishing, as Avell as very palatable. 
 The nose and the upper lip, which is large, and 
 loose from the gums, are esteemed a great delica- 
 cy ; it is of a consi&ttijce between marrow and 
 gristle, and when properly dressed, it is a rich and 
 lK«Kurious dish. The hide of this animal makes 
 excellent leather, as it is Uiick and strong ; and 
 when dressed it is soft ana pliable. The pace of 
 of the moose, is a walk or trot ; and it is exceed- 
 ed in swiftn^^ss, by few of its fellow tenants of the 
 forest. It will, with ease, trot over a fallen tree, 
 of five feet in diameter. This animal is common- 
 ly found in low grounds, where it feeds on moss, 
 and the buds of trees. The moose, generally, I'e- 
 Hiains alone : though at sometimes five or six of 
 
 ^P-.^ 
 
 
 I 'a 
 
 
 
 M 
 
424 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 them are found together. Their senses of hearing 
 and srnellin<^ are uncommonly acute; and, there- 
 fore the least noise made by a hunter, such as the 
 rustlin2^ of dry leaves, or the breaking of a small 
 branch, will be heard by this animal, at a great 
 distance, and will alarm its fears. When put to 
 flight, the moose does not like the deer and most 
 o,ther animals, run a little distance, and then stop, 
 until a new appearance of danger ; but, oftentimes, 
 he vill not make the least halt, until he has run 
 te ^ or fifteen miles. No other animal that runs 
 in the wojods, is so difficult of approach. 
 
 There arc two kinds of the cariboo. The only 
 difference between them is, that the one is about 
 twice as large as the other, and the hair of the 
 smaller, is of a much lighter colour. The larger, 
 will weigh nearly as much as the elk ; but, in 
 shape and the colour of the hair, it more nearly 
 resembles the moose ; and like this animal it feeds 
 only on moss, and the buds of trees. The horns 
 are round, like those of the elk ; but they approach 
 nearer to each other, at the extremities, and bend 
 more over the face, than those of either the 
 moose or the elk. The gait of this animal is 
 much the same as that of the moose, and it is 
 almost as difficult of approach. 
 
 The flesh is equally ijood for food ; and the 
 tongue, particularly, the Natives consider as one 
 of the greatest dainties, which their country £^f- 
 
 ^ . *!:.- 
 
ACCOUNT OF ANI-MALS. 
 
 425 
 
 fords. The skin, being smooth and free from 
 veins, makes the finest of leather ; and of it, ex- 
 cellent leggins and shirts are made. The Indians 
 attach great value also to the dung of the cari- 
 boo, of which they make, what they consider, a de- 
 licious broth. They make use of the lower bone 
 of the leg of this animal, in the place of a tanner's 
 scraping knife, to separate the hair from skins. 
 
 There are two kinds of the antelope, which dif- 
 fer only in size, and in the colour of their tails, which 
 are about two inches long. The colour of these an- 
 imals is a light grey or mouse colour, with here and 
 there a spot of white. The tail of the larger, is of 
 the same colour as the body, while that of the small- 
 er, is white. The larger, is about the size of the 
 jumping deer, which animal it, also, very much re- 
 sembles, in shape. The smaller, will weigh about as 
 much as a sheep ; and the flesh resembles mutton, 
 in its taste. These animals herd together, like the 
 deer, and always remain in an open country ; and 
 their speed is little inferiour to that of the. horse. 
 They are very timorous, and as soon as they perceive 
 a human being, they run off to a considerable dis- 
 tance, but soon make a halt ; and, if the person 
 hides himself, they will soon return, near to the 
 spot where they had seen the object which alarm- 
 ed them. It is thus that the Natives manage, in 
 hunting them. Their skin is thin, and will dress 
 equally well with that of the chamois ; and the 
 
 54 
 
 ll 
 
 I I immm -' 
 
426 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 ti 
 
 K € 
 
 ;^1 
 
 \'t 
 
 n 
 
 
 leather is very suitable for leggins and shirts for 
 the Natives, during the summer months. The 
 males have horns, resembling those of the deer,- 
 excepting that they are smaller. 
 
 The carcajou or wolverine, in shape and the 
 colour of the hair, greatly resembles the skunk : 
 but it is nearly twice as large. The hair of the 
 carcajou is about the same length as that of a 
 bear : and its colour is black, excepting a nar- 
 row strip of white, on the rump. The tail is 
 about six inches long, and is very bushy. This 
 animal is remarkably strong built, for its size : 
 and IS extremely voracious. He feeds on dead 
 fish, which he finds along the shores of the riv- 
 ers and lakes : and on mice, hares, &c. He is 
 often found about the places where human be- 
 ings have been interred ; and, if they have not 
 been buried deep in the earth, he will take them 
 up, and feed on their carcases. On this account, 
 the Natives never feed on the flesh of this ani- 
 mrfl, though it has an excellent flavour. When 
 he falls upon a large animal, that has been kill- 
 ed and cut up and left by a hunter, he will, 
 within a very short time, remove the whole of 
 it to a considerable distance, and strive to hide 
 it under grass, or the branches of trees. 
 
 The skunk differs not at all from the same ani- 
 mal, as it is found in most parts.of the United States ^ 
 and it is too well known to need a description. 
 
ACCOUNT OP ANIMALS. 
 
 427 
 
 The porcupine, in shape, and size, differs 
 but httle from the skunk. Its tail is much short- 
 er, and has little hair on it. The body is cover- 
 ed with hair of a dark brown colour, about four 
 inches in length. This hair is interspersed with 
 quills, about the size of a straw, that are white, 
 with black ends, sharply pointed : and for about 
 half an inch from the end, they are covered with 
 a kind of beard, which renders it very difficult 
 to extract them from any soft substance which 
 they have entered. These quills are merely de- 
 fensive wreapons : for it is not true, though it has 
 by some been asserted, that they can, at pleas- 
 ure, eject them from their bodies. They are an 
 inoffensive animal, move but slowly ; and when 
 overtaken by man or beast, they place their 
 head and their legs under their bodies, and place 
 all their reliance on their quills, for protection. 
 The Indian women highly value these quills, 
 which they die of different colours, and use for 
 garnishing their shoes, leggins, &,c. They *also 
 hold their flesh in high estimation, as an arti- 
 cle of food. 
 
 There is a small animal, found only on the 
 Rocky Mountain, denominated, by the Natives, 
 Quis-qui-su, or whistlers, from the noise which 
 they frequently make, and always when surpris- 
 ed, strongly resembling the noise made by a per- 
 
 i 
 
 i^ 
 
 WW W -f IIP H 
 
 ••^■«Kl» 
 
 ST 
 
428 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 #fM 
 
 mii 
 
 k i 
 
 son in whistling. They are about the size of a 
 badger, are covered with a beautiful long silver 
 grey hair, and have long bushy tails. They bur- 
 row in the sides of the mountain, and feed on 
 roots and herbs. Their flesh is yery delicious 
 food. They generally produce two young at a 
 time ; and sit upon their hind (eet when they 
 give them suck. The skins of these animals are 
 very useful to the Natives, for clothing. They 
 dress them, with the hair on; and sew a sufli- 
 cient number of them together, to make a gar- 
 ment, as large as a blanket, which they wrap 
 around their bodies. 
 
 The racoon is an animal never found farther 
 north, than about latitude forty eight. It is con- 
 siderably smaller than a beaver, with legs and 
 feet resembling this animal. The legs are short 
 in proportion to the body, which is like that of a 
 badger. It has a head like that of a fox ; but 
 with ears shorter, rounder, and more naked. The 
 hair is thick, long, soft and black at the ends, like 
 that of a fox. On the face there is a broad stripe, 
 that runs across it, which includes the eyes, which 
 are large. The tail is long and round, with annu- 
 lar stripes upon it, like those of a cat. The feet 
 have five slender toes, armed with sharp claws, 
 by which it is enabled to climb trees. It feeds 
 itself with its fore feet, as with hands. The flesh 
 
 i '^A 
 
ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 429 
 
 of this animal is very good, in the months of Sep- 
 tember and October, when fruit and nuts, on which 
 it likes to feed, are found in plenty. 
 
 The martin is some larger than a squirrel, 
 which it resembles in shape, excepting that its 
 legs and claws are considerably shorter. In the 
 darkness of the night, the eyes have a shining 
 appearance, like those of a cat. It has short 
 ears, which are of a roundish shape. The whole 
 body is covered with a thick fur, which in a 
 mild climate, is of a yellowish colour ; but in 
 the colder regions of the north, it becomes of 
 a dark brown, and, in some instances, is nearly 
 black. The skins, which have this dark colour- 
 ed fur, are much more valuable than the oth- 
 ers. The tail is covered with long hair ; and 
 under the neck, even of those of the darkest 
 colour, there is a small spot, of a yellowish cast. 
 The flesh of this animal has a rank, disagreea- 
 ble taste ; and is, therefore seldom eaten. 
 
 The niuskrat, which receives its name from 
 the musk that it affords, resembles the beaver, 
 in every respect excepting its size, which is lit- 
 tle larger than the badger. It builds for itself 
 a cabin in marshy places, at no great distance 
 from some water : and feeds on roots, herbs, 
 mice and fish, which it finds dead, on the mar- 
 gin of lakes and streams. In the spring, these 
 animals leave their huts, as they arc built in 
 
430 
 
 ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 ' ' <5 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 
 places so low, that they are generally, at that 
 season, overflowed by water. During tlie sum- 
 mer months, they have no fixed residenco : but 
 are found in different places, among the grass. 
 As the winter approaches, they erect new huts, 
 in which they pass the winter. Carver is surely 
 mistaken when he states, that they winter in hol- 
 low trees, without any sustenance, and that, in 
 the summer, they feed on raspberries, strawber- 
 ries and other kinds of fruit. 
 
 In the North West country, there are only three 
 kinds of squirrels, which are the red, the striped 
 and the flying. The black and grey squirrel, sel- 
 dom go farther north, than latitude forty five 
 or six. 
 
 The beaver has been so frequently and so mi- 
 nutely described, and his sagacity, ingenuity and in- 
 dustry are so well known, that a very particular ac- 
 count of this animal, in this place, would be super- 
 fluous. As some other animals, in the foregoing 
 description, have been compared with the beaver, 
 it may be necessary to state, that his weight is 
 usually about sixty pounds : that his body is about 
 four feet in length, and that his legs are short, 
 particularly his fore-legs, which are not more than 
 four or five inches in length. His fore feet are 
 armed vnth ciaws, and his hind (eet are furnish- 
 ed with a web or membrane between the toes, 
 for the convenience of swimming, as he is an amphi- 
 
ACCOUNT OF ANIMALS. 
 
 431 
 
 that 
 sum- 
 : but 
 
 .JU 
 
 bious animal. His fore-teeth stand obliquely, 
 projecting forward out of his mouth, and> are 
 broad, crooked and sharp. His incisors, or side 
 teeth, are firmly set and sharp, and his grinders 
 are very strong. By means of these teeth, he is 
 able to cut down considerable trees, and to 
 break the hardest substances. The ordinary 
 colour of the beaver is brownj which becomes 
 darker in the northern, and lighter in the more 
 southern latitudes. The number of beavers in 
 the North West country, is continually diminish- 
 ing. The skins of this animal constitute, with the 
 Natives, the principal article of trade j and the 
 price of other things is computed, by comparing 
 them with a beaver skin. ' 
 
 The otter is an amphibious animal, bearing 
 some resemblance to the beaver, and yet in many 
 respects, differing from it. His body is, in every 
 part, less than that of the beaver, though it is 
 nearly as long. His teeth are different, being in 
 shape like those of a dog or wolf. The hair 
 of the otter is not more than half the leng^th of 
 the beaver ; and in some parts particularly un- 
 der the neck, stomach and belly, is more greyish. 
 This animal, when closely pursued, will not only 
 defend himself; but he will attack dogs and even 
 men. His food consists of roots and fish ; and 
 his flesh tastes and smells of the latter, and is not 
 very palatable food. 
 
 '^iitliiiiWi' 
 
 m-^'^m!' 
 
432 
 
 ACCOUNT OP ANIMALS. 
 
 . The mink is of the otter kind, and subsists 
 on sinriilar food, and resembles this animal in its 
 colour. In shape and size, it bears a strong re- 
 semblance to the martin *, but its hair is much 
 shorter. A musky scent proceeds from this ani- 
 mal. It is generally found along small rivers. 
 
 The following catalogue of animals, will ex- 
 hibit the comparative value of the furs, which 
 are annually purchased and exported to the civ- 
 ilized parts of the world, by the North West Com- 
 pany, The animal is first mentioned, the skins of 
 which will amount to the greatest sum ; and so on, 
 in order, to the last, the skins of which, will 
 amount to the smallest sum. — Beaver, otter, musk- 
 rat, martin, bear, fox, lynx, fisher, mink, wolf, buf- 
 faloe. 
 
 The following catalogue will exhibit the com- 
 parative weight of the skins, of the different an- 
 imals, which are annually purchased and export- 
 ed, as above mentioned. — Beaver, martin, musk- 
 rat, bear, otter, wolf, buffaloe, lynx, &c. 
 
 END. 
 
 ft 
 
ni 
 
 •** 
 
 ^•^•■• 
 
 ■<>» 
 
 ■JfitH^' 
 
 L 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 :m'^» '''" J?*^' 
 
 ^'. 
 
 •# 
 
 • .■4'----. 
 
 •'■•?■ 
 
 %.■'*?■ 
 
 an- 
 )ort- 
 usk- 
 
 \ 
 
 - '. v\ 
 
 r ^4,